Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Resolution - 2005-R0488 - Contract - Minnix Commercial Partners LTD - New Fire Station Construction - 10_13_2005 (2)
Resolution No. 2005-RO488 October 13, 2005 Item No. 4.33 RESOLUTION BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock, a Contract for the construction of new fire station #8, Bid #05-114-MA, by and between the City of Lubbock and Minnix Commercial Partners, Ltd. of Lubbock, Texas, related documents. Said Contract is attached hereto and incorporated in this resolution as if fully set forth herein and shall be included in the minutes of the City Council. Passed by the City Council this 13th day of Oc;iber - , , 2005. AL, MAYOR ATTEST: Q A 9�A� Reb cca Garza, City Secretary APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: x r,< Harlan Stauffer, acilities anager APPROVED AS TO FORM: M. Knight, As ' ant Attorney as/ccdoes/Contract-MinnixCommercialPartners,Ltd.#2 September 30, 2005 No Text Prol ect Mant al Cltv of Lubbock v Fire Station No. 8 August 2005 PSC Proj,-ct #: 03878505 as: au aC -a,-khill, Smith & Cooper, Inc, Engineers z Architects a Planners City of Lubbock PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ROOM 204, MUNICIPAL BUILDING 1625 13T" STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH: (806) 775-2167 FAX: (806) 775-2164 http://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us DATE ISSUED: ITB # 05-114-MA, Addendum #1 ADDENDUM # 1 05-114-MA Construction of New Fire Station #8 September 20, 2005 OLD CLOSE DATE: September 20, 2005 @ 3:00 P.M. CST NEW CLOSE DATE: September 27, 2005 @ 3:00 P.M. CST The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. Bid Due Date has CHANGED from September 20, 2005 @ 3:00 PM to September 27, 2005 @ 3:00 PM. THANK YOU, Marta Alvarez CITY OF LUBBOCK Marta Alvarez Senior Buyer It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permits competitive bids. It shall be the bidder's responsibility to advise the City of Lubbock Purchasing Manager if any language, requirements, etc., or any combinations f thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this ITB to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the Purchasing Manager no later than five (5) business days prior to the bid - close date. A review of such notifications will be made. ITB#05-114-MAAd 1 1 CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF NEW FIRE STATION #8 ITB #05-114-MA Plans & Specifications may be obtained, at the bidder's expense, from THE REPRODUCTION COMPANY http://pr.thereproductioncompany-coin/ Phone: (806) 763-7770 "A City Of Planned Progress" CITY OF LUBBOCK Lubbock, Texas CITY OF LUBBOCK DWITATION-1 TO BED FOR TITLE: CONSTRUCTION OF NEW FIRE STATION #8 ADDRESS: LUBBOCK, TEXAS rM NUMBER: 05-114-MA PROJECT NUMBER: 90372.8304.20000 CONTRACT PREPARED BY: PURCHASING & CONTRACT MANAGEMENT DEPART.NMINIT INDEX NOTICE TO BIDDERS GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS BE) SUBMITTAL - BED FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS PAYMENT BOND PERFORMANCE BOND CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE CONTRACT GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS SPECIFICATIONS I IJI 1 NOTICE TO BIDDERS ITB #05-114-MA Sealed bids addressed to Victor Kilman, Purchasing & Contract Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be eceived in the office of the Purchasing & Contract Manager, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room 204, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 3:00 o'clock p.m. on 20th September, 2005, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all [1planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project: "CONSTRUCTION OF NEW FIRE STATION #81' After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened in the office of the urchasing & Contract Manager and publicly read aloud. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to ensure that his bid is actually in the office of the Purchasing & Contract Manager for the City of Lubbock, before the expiration of the date above first written. Bids are due at 3:00 o'clock p.m. on 20th September, 2005, and the City of Lubbock City Council will consider the bids on the 13'h day of October, 2005. at the Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon Hthereafter as may be reasonably convenient subject to the right to reject any or all bids and waive any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of ,100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. Said statutory bonds should be [issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of B or superior. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified FIcheck issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within ten [1(10) business days after notice of award of the contract to him. FAILURE OF THE BIDDER TO INCLUDE BID .'SECURITY WITH THE BID SUBMITTAL SHALL CONSTITUTE A NONRESPONSWE BID AND RESULT IN DISQUALIFICATION OF THE BID SUBMITTAL. It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local F,�conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted. There will be a non -mandatory pre -bid conference on the 7th day of September, 2005 at 10:00 o'clock a.m., in 1625 13th Street, Room 204, Lubbock, Texas. Bidders may view the plans and specifications without charge at The Reproduction Company, 2102 Avenue Q, Lubbock, Texas 79405. PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS MAYBE OBTAINED, AT THE BIDDER'S EXPENSE, -J FROM THE REPRODUCTION COMPANY, htta://pr.thereproductioncompany.com/, Phone: (806) 763-7770. Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing & Contract Manager of the City of Lubbock, .� which document is specifically referred to in this notice bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to provision p y e to bid E b of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale. The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises %rill be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in consideration for an award. The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre -bid meetings and bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you would like bid information made available in a more accessible format or if you require assistance, please contact the City of Lubbock ADA Coordinator at (806) 775- 2018 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting. CITY OF LUBBOCK VICTOR MAN PURCHASING & CONTRACT MANAGER GENERAL WSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS s.,I BID DELIVERY, TE\4E & DATE LJ 1.1 The City of Lubbock is seeking written and sealed competitive bids to furnish CONSTRUCTION OF NEW FIRE STATION #8 per the attached specifications and contract documents. Sealed bids Rill be received no later than 3:00 p.m. CST, on the 20a' day of September, 2005 at the office listed below. Any bid received after the date and hour specified will be rejected and returned unopened to the bidder. Each bid and supporting documentation must be in a sealed envelope or container plainly labeled in the lower left-hand corner: "ITB #05-114-MA, CONSTRUCTION OF NEW FIRE STATION #8" and the bid opening date and time. Bidders must also include their company name and address on the outside of the envelope or container. Bids must be addressed to: Victor Kilman, Purchasing & Contract Manager City of Lubbock 1625 13th Street, Room 204 Lubbock, Texas 79401 1.2 Bidders are responsible for making certain bids are delivered to the Purchasing & Contract Management Department. Mailing of a bid does not ensure that the bid will be delivered on time or delivered at all. If bidder does not hand deliver bid, we suggest that he/she use some sort of delivery service that provides a receipt. 1.3 Bids will be accepted in person, by United States Mail, by United Parcel Service, or by private courier service. No bids will be accepted by oral communication, telephone, electronic mail, telegraphic transmission, or telefacsimile transmission. THE CITY WILL NOT ACCEPT FAX BIDS. 1.4 The City of Lubbock reserves the right to postpone the date and time for opening bids through an addendum s PRE -BID MEETING 2.1 For the purpose of familiarizing bidders with the requirements, answering questions, and issuing addenda as needed for the clarification of the Invitation to Bid (ITB) documents, a non-mandatM nre-bid meeting ,will be held at 10:00 a.m.. September 7th, 2005 in 1625 13th Street, Room 204, Lubbock, Texas., Lubbock Texas. All persons attending the meeting will be asked to identify themselves and the prospective bidder they represent. IJ 2.2 It is the bidder's responsibility to attend the pre -bid meeting though the meeting is not mandatory. The City will not be responsible for providing information discussed at the pre -bid meeting to bidders who do not attend the pre -bid meeting. 1-3`ADDENDA & MODIFICATIONS 3.1 Any changes, additions, or clarifications to the ITB are made by ADDENDA information available over the Internet at b=://www.RF?depot.com. We strongly suggest that you check for any addenda a minimum of forty-eight hours in advance of the response deadline. BUSINESSES WITHOUT INTER.NET ACCESS may use computers available at most public libraries. 3.2 Any bidder in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the specifications or other documents may request an interpretation thereof from the Purchasing & Contract Management Department. At the request of the bidder, or in the event the Purchasing & Contract Management Department deems the interpretation to be substantive, the interpretation will be made by written addendum issued by the Purchasing & Contract Management Department. Such addenda issued by the Purchasing & Contract Management Department will be available over the Internet at http://wR-u-.RFPdepot.com and will become part of the proposal package having the same binding effect as provisions of the original ITB. NO VERBAL EXPLANATIONS OR INTERPRETATIONS WILL BE BINDING. In order to have a request for interpretation considered, the request must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City of Lubbock Purchasing & Contract Management Department no later than five (5) days before the bid closing date. 3.3 All addenda, amendments, and interpretations of this solicitation shall be in writing. The City of Lubbock shall not be legally bound by any amendment or interpretation that is not in writing. Only information supplied by the City of Lubbock Purchasing & Contract Management Department in writing or in this ITB should be used in preparing bid responses. All contacts that a bidder may have had before or after receipt of this ITB with any individuals, employees, or representatives of the City and any information that may have been read in any news media or seen or heard in any communication facility regarding this bid should be disregarded in preparing responses. 3.4 The City does not assume responsibility for the receipt of any addendum sent to bidders. EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND REOUIREMENTS 4.1 Each bidder shall carefully examine all ITB documents and thoroughly familiarize itself Arith all requirements before submitting a bid to ensure that their bid meets the intent of these specifications. 4.2 Before submitting a bid, each bidder shall be responsible for making all investigations and examinations that are necessary to ascertain conditions and requirements affecting the requirements of this Invitation to Bid. Failure to make such investigations and examinations shall not relieve the bidder from obligation to comply, in every detail, with all provisions and requirements of the Invitation to Bid. 4.3 Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Purchasing & Contract Manager and a clarification obtained before the bids are received, and if no such notice is received by the Purchasing & Contract Manager prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be deemed that the bidder fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If bidder does not notify Purchasing & Contract Manager before bidding of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of bids. 5 BID PREPARATION COSTS 5.1 Issuance of this IM does not commit the City of Lubbock, in any way, to pay any costs incurred in the preparation and submission of a bid. 5.2 The issuance of this ITB does not obligate the City of Lubbock to enter into contract for any senrices or equipment. 5.3 All costs related to the preparation and submission of a bid shall be paid by the bidder. 6 TRADE SECRETS CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION AND THE TEXAS PUBLIC INFORMATION ACT 6.1 If you consider any portion of your bid to be privileged or confidential by statute or judicial decision, including trade secrets and commercial or financial information, clearly identify those portions. 6.2 The City of Lubbock will honor your notations of trade secrets and confidential information and decline to release such information initially, but please note that the final determination of whether a particular portion of your bid is in fact a trade secret or commercial or financial information that may be withheld from public inspection will be made by the Texas Attorney General or a court of competent jurisdiction. In the event a public information request is received for a portion of your bid that you have marked as being confidential information, you will be notified of such request and you will be required to justify your legal position in writing to the Texas Attorney General pursuant to Section 552.305 of the Government Code. In the event that it is determined by opinion or order of the Texas Attorney General or a court of competent jurisdiction that such information is in fact not privileged and confidential under 2 Section 552.110 of the Government Code and Section 252.049 of the Local Government Code, then such information will be made available to the requester. 6.3 Marking your entire bid CONFIDENTIADPROPRIETARY is not in conformance with the Texas Open Records Act. LICENSES PERMITS. TAXES The price or prices for the work shall include full compensation for all taxes, permits, etc. that the bidder is or may be required to pay. UTILIZATIONT OF LOCAL BUSINESS RESOURCES Prospective bidders are strongly encouraged to explore and implement methods for the utilization of local resources, and to outline in their bid submittal how they would utilize local resources. 9 CONFLICT OF INTEREST 9.1 The bidder shall not offer or accept gifts or anything of value nor enter into any business arrangement with any employee, official or agent of the City of Lubbock. 9.2 By signing and executing this bid, the bidder certifies and represents to the City the bidder has not offered, conferred or agreed to confer any pecuniary benefit or other thing of value for the receipt of special treatment, advantage, information, recipient's decision, opinion, recommendation, vote or any other exercise of discretion concerning this bid. 10 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 10.1 All work covered by the contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General Conditions. 10.2 All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents. 11 PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without -J charge or forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Bidders. 1,=12 BIDDER INOUIRIES AND CLARIFICATION OF REQUIREMENTS 12.1 It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permit competitive bids. It shall be the bidder's responsibility to advise the Purchasing & Contract Manager if any language, requirements, etc.. or any combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this ITB to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City of Lubbock Purchasing & Contract Management Office no later than five (5) calendar days before the bid closing date. A review of such notifications will be made. MA.RTA ALVAREZ, SENIOR BUYER City of Lubbock 1625 13°i Street Lubbock, Texas 79401 Fax: (806) 775-2164 Email: MAlvarez@mylubbock.us RFPDepot: http://u-Av�r.RFPdgpot.com 3 MIE AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION' 13.1 The construction covered by the contract documents shall be substantially completed within TVVO- HUNDRED FORTY (240) CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder. 1 13.2 The Contractor wrill be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to ensure completion of the projectwithin the timespecified. � P P J 14 PAYMENT All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the contract documents. 15 AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the Contractor has been notified. The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade Brill be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately �. until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality, which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. 17 GUARANTEES 17.1 All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall fim ish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). 17.2 Notwithstanding any provisions contained in the contractual agreement, the Contractor represents and warrants fault -free performance and fault -free result in the processing date and date -related data (including, but not limited to calculating, comparing and sequencing) of all hardware, software and firmware products delivered and services provided under this Contract, individually or in combination, as the case may be from the effective date of this Contract. Also, the Contractor warrants calculations will be recognized and accommodated and will not, in any way, result in hardware, software or firmware failure. The City of Lubbock, at its sole option, may require the Contractor, at any time, to demonstrate the procedures it intends to follow in order to comply with all the obligations contained herein. 17.3 The obligations contained herein apply to products and services provided by the Contractor, its sub- i contractor or any third party involved in the creation or development of the products and services to be 4 delivered to the City of Lubbock under this Contract. Failure to comply with any of the obligations contained herein, may result in the City of Lubbock availing itself of any of its rights under the law and under this Contract including, but not limited to, its right pertaining to termination or default. 17.4 The. warranties contained herein are separate and discrete from any other warranties specified in this Contract, and are not subject to any disclaimer of warranty, implied or expressed, or limitation to the Contractor's liability which may be specified in this Contract, its appendices, its schedules, its annexes or any document incorporated in this Contract by reference. PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR The contractor will be furnished one set of plans and specifications, and related contract documents for his use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor. PROTECTION OF THE WORK The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information: (a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the intended contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed. (b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder. (c) Equipment schedule. TEXAS STATE SALES TAX 20.1 This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. 20.2 The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it mill furnish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense. 22 BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be necessary. The Contractor v rill be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project. !3 EXPLOSIVES 23.1 The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damage, which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blasting. In addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity. 23.2 Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor. 23.3 In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations. '.4 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE 1 The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress. 5 INSURANCE 25.1 The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted before contract execution. 25.2 PROOF OF COVERAGE SHALL BE FURNISHED TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK IN THE FORM OF A CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE. THE INSURANCE CERTIFICATES FURNISHED SHALL NAME THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS A PRIMARY ADDITIONAL INSURED AND PROVIDE A WAIVER OF SUBROGATION IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS REQUIRED BELOW, OR IN THE ALTERNATIVE, SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY A STATEMENT FROM THE CONTRACTOR TO THE EFFECT THAT NO WORK ON THIS PARTICULAR PROJECT SHALL BE SUBCONTRACTED. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TO THE OWNER ALL PROOF OF COVERAGE INSURANCE DOCUMENTS INCLUDING WORKERS COMPENSATION COVERAGE FOR EACH SUBCONTRACTOR. 26 LABOR AND WORKING HOURS 26.1 Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. The wage rate that must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The bidders' attention is further directed to the requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil j t_ 6 Statutes providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract documents does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construction work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays unless the following conditions exist: 26.1.1 The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its citizens. 26.1.2 Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time. 26.2 Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative. 26.3 In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life. _127 PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the. project under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site of the work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's Representative, or Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each employee, his classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates or deductions (except as shown) have been made, or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents. The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract -documents. _' 28 PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATION CLAUSES Bids submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or Y decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the bidder without being considered. 29 PREPARATION FOR BID 29.1 The bidder shall submit his bid on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled in and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he intends to do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures, the price written in words shall govern. .a 29.2 If the bid is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a bid is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the. name and address of each member must be '' given and the bid signed by a member of the firm association or partnership, or person duly authorized. M 3I If the bid is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the bid signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign bids must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the bid. The bid shall be executed in ink. 29.3 Each bid shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner: 28.3.1 Bidder's name 28.3.2 Bid for (description of the project). 29.4 Bid submittals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time before the time set for opening of the bids, but no bid may be ,%rithdrav m or altered thereafter. 29.5 Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(a), a competitive sealed bid that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE BID PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE BID SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO BID OPENING. BOUND COPY OF CONURACT DOCUMENTS Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the following: (a) Notice to Bidders. (b) General Instructions to Bidders. (c) Bidder's Submittal. (d) Statutory Bond (if required). (e) Contract Agreement. (f) General Conditions. (g) Special Conditions (if any). (h) Specifications. (i) Insurance Certificates for Contractor and all Sub -Contractors. (j) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents. QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS The bidder may be required before the award of any contract to show to the complete satisfaction of the City of Lubbock that it has the necessary facilities, ability, and financial resources to provide the service specified therein in a satisfactory manner. The bidder may also be required to give a past history and references in order to satisfy the City of Lubbock about the bidder's qualifications. The City of Lubbock may make reasonable investigations deemed necessary and proper to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and the bidder shall furnish to the City of Lubbock all information for this purpose that may be requested. The bidder's bid may be deemed not to meet specifications or the bid may be rejected if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, the bidder fails to satisfy the City of Lubbock that the bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to complete the work described therein, Evaluation of the bidder's qualifications shall include: (a) The ability, capacity, skill, and financial resources to perform the work or provide the service required. (b) The ability of the bidder to perform the work or provide the sen ice promptly or within the time specified, without delay or interference. (c) The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience, and efficiency of the bidder. s �� (d) The quality of performance of previous contracts or services. (e) The safety record of the Contractor and proposed Sub -Contractors Before contract award, the recommended contractor for this project may be required to show that he has experience with similar proj ects that require the Contractor to plan his work efforts and equipment needs Adth City of Lubbock specifications in mind. Demonstration of experience shall include a complete list of ALL similar municipal and similar non -municipal current and completed projects for the past three (3) years for review. This list shall include the names of supervisors and type of equipment used to perform work on these projects. In addition, the Contractor may be required to provide the name(s) of supervisor(s) that will be used to perform work on this project in compliance with City of Lubbock specifications herein. 2 BID AVGTARD 32.1 The City of Lubbock reserves the right to reject any or all bids, reject any particular item on a bid, and to waive immaterial formalities and to accept the offer most advantageous to the City of Lubbock in its sole discretion. Unless otherwise specified herein, the City shall award the bid based on the Total Bid Amount. 32.2 All bids are evaluated for compliance with specifications before the bid price is considered. Response to specifications is primary in determining the best low bid. Failure to comply with the specifications may result in disqualification of the bid. 32.3 In case of tie bids, preference will be given to local bidders. Consistent and continued tie bidding may be cause for rejection of bids by the City of Lubbock and/or investigation by the Attorney General to determine possible Anti -Trust violations. 32.4 Before the City may award a bid to a nonresident bidder, the nonresident bidder's bid must be lower than lowest bid submitted by a responsible Texas bidder by the same margin or amount that a Texas bidder would be required to underbid the nonresident bidder in the nonresident bidders' home state. 32.5 Any contract made, or purchase order issued, as a result of this Invitation to Bid, shall be entered into the State of Texas and under the laws of the State of Texas. In connection with the performance of work, the Bidder agrees to comply with the Fair Labor Standard Act, Equal Opportunity Employment Act, and all other applicable Federal, State, and Local laws, regulations, and executive orders to the extent that the same may be applicable. 32.6 NO INDIVIDUAL OF ANY USING DEPARTMENT HAS THE AUTHORITY TO LEGALLY AND/OR FINANCIALLY COMMIT THE CITY TO ANY CONTRACT, AGREEMENT OR PURCHASE ORDER FOR GOODS OR SERVICES, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY SANCTIONED BY THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS Il\TN'ITATION TO BID. C 1� C 1 r �_ BID SUBMITTAL LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT DATE: September 20, 2005 PROJECT NUMBER: #05-114-MA - CONSTRUCTION OF NEW FIRE STATION #8 Bid of Mi nni x Commercial Partners Ltd. (hereinafter called Bidder) To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with your Invitation to Bid for CONSTRUCTION OF NEW FIRE STATION #8, having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents. MATERIALS:F&yp th,Dee < 00 ($ ` SERVICES:Sk ) 4f &9&22 0 Z�" S'/r(' Rboo*p OUe - �lido� �o� ($ �D J �D, 4qo • o6 ) TOTAL BID: AU 01u,I®Al dl't-- 4%1,,0,e6P ®° 77pu ate hypo @f&s1jNV I i 4 q 0 - M ) (Amount shall be shown in both words and numerals. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.) Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to substantially complete the project within 240 (TWO -HUNDRED FORTY) consecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $350.00 (THREE -HUNDRED FIFTY) for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth herein above for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents. Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 28 of the General Instructions to Bidders. Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the bidding. The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents. 1 Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract, obtain all required insurance policies, and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within ten (10) days after notice of award of the contract to him. Enclosed with this bid is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for Dollars ($ ) or a Bid Bond in the sum of 5% of bid Dollars ($ ), which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the bid is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents, insurance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within ten (10) business days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(a), a competitive sealed bid that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE BID PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE BID SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO BID OPENING. (Sea] if Bidder is a Corporation) ATTEST: Secretary Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: Addenda No. Addenda No. Addenda No. Addenda No. Date R tv o3 Date Date Date Date: September 20, 2005 /uthh�;zed Signature Jerry Smith (Printed or Typed Name) Minnix Commercial Partners. Ltd. Company 12302 Slide Road P. 0. Box 64895 Address Lubbock Lubbock City, TX State Telephone: 806 Fax: 806 . County 79464-4895 Zip Code - 798-7335 722-3087 M/WBE Firm: Woman I k American Native American Hispanic American I I Asian Pacific American Other (Specify) 2 f I, the undersigned Bidder, certify that the insurance requirements contained in this bid document have been reviewed by me with the below identified Insurance Agent/Broker. If I am awarded this contract by the City of Lubbock, I will be able to, within ten (10) business days after being notified of such award by the City of LubbocI,furnish a valid insurance certificate to the City meeting all of the requirements defined in this bid/proposal. C eac r (Signature) Jerry Smithy Managing Partner Contractor (Print) CONTRACTOR'S FIRM NAME: Mi nni x Commercial Partners, Ltd. (Print or Type) CONTRACTOR'S FIRM ADDRESS: 12302 S1 i de Road, P. 0. Box 64895 Name of AgentBroker: Address of Agent/Broker: City/State/Zip: Lubbock, TX 79464-4895 David Tate Insurance Agency 5233 79th Street Lubbock, TX 79424 Agent/Broker Telephone Number: ( 806 IDate: 9/20/05 1 1 794-1177 NOTE TO CONTRACTOR If the time requirement specified above is not met, the City has the right to reject this bid/proposal and award the contract to another contractor. If you have any questions concerning these requirements, please contact the Purchasing & Contract Manager for the City of Lubbock at (806) 775-2165. BID #05-114-MA - CONSTRUCTION OF NEW FIRE STATION #8 4 SAFETY RECORD QUESTIONNAIRE. (Must Be Submitted With Bid Submittal) The City of Lubbock City Council desires to avail itself of the benefits of Section 252.0435 of the Local Government Code, and consider the safety records of potential contractors prior to awarding bids on City contracts. Pursuant to Section 252.0435 of the Local Government Code, City of Lubbock has adopted the following written definition and criteria for accurately determining the safety record of a bidder prior to awarding bids on City contracts. The definition and criteria for determining the safety record of a bidder for this consideration shall be: The City of Lubbock shall consider the safety record of the bidders in determining the responsibility thereof. The City may consider any incidence involving worker safety or safety of the citizens of the City of Lubbock, be it related or caused by environmental, mechanical, operational, supervision or any other cause or factor. Specifically, the City may consider, among other things: a. Complaints to, or final orders entered by, the Occupational Safety and Health Review Commission (OSHRC), against the bidder for violations of OSHA regulations within the past three (3) years. b. Citations (as defined below) from an Environmental Protection Agency (as defined below) for violations within the past five (5) years. Environmental Protection Agencies include, but are not necessarily limited to, the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (USACOE), the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service (USFWS), the Environmental _ Protection Agency (EPA), the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ), the Texas Natural Resource Conservation Commission (TNRCC) (predecessor to the TCEQ), the Texas Department of State Health Services (DSHS), the Texas Parks and Wildlife Department (TP)?VD), the Structural Pest Control Board (SPCB), agencies of local governments responsible for enforcing environmental protection or worker safety related laws or regulations, and similar regulatory agencies of other states of the United States. Citations include notices of violation, notices of enforcement, suspension/revocations of state or federal licenses or registrations, fines assessed, pending criminal complaints, indictments, or convictions, administrative orders, draft orders, final orders, and judicial final judgments. c. Convictions of a criminal offense within the past ten (10) years, which resulted in bodily harm or death. I a. t 9 i Any other safety related matter deemed by the City Council to be material in determining the responsibility of the bidder and his or her ability to perform the services or goods required by the bid documents in a safe environment, both for the workers and other employees of bidder and the citizens of the City of Lubbock. In order to obtain proper information from bidders so that City of Lubbock may consider the safety records of potential contractors prior to awarding bids on City contracts, City of Lubbock requires that bidders answer the following three (3) questions and submit them with their bids: QUESTION ONE Has the bidder, or the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by the bidder, or anyone acting for such firm, corporation, partnership or institution, received citations for violations of OSHA within the past three (3) years? YES NO If the bidder has indicated YES for question number one above, the bidder must provide to City of Lubbock, with its bid submission, the following information with respect to each such citation: Date of offense, location of establishment inspected, category of offense, final disposition of offense, if any, and penalty assessed. QUESTION TWO Has the bidder, or the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by the bidder, or anyone acting for such firm, corporation, partnership or institution, received citations for violations of environmental protection laws or regulations, of any kind or type, within the past five years? Citations include notice of violation, notice of enforcement, suspension/revocations of state or federal licenses, or registrations, fines assessed, pending criminal complaints, indictments, or convictions, administrative orders, draft orders, final orders, and judicial final judgments. YES NO X If the bidder has indicated YES for question number two above, the bidder must provide to City of Lubbock, with its bid submission, the following information with respect to each such conviction: Date of offense or occurrence, location where offense occurred, type of offense, final disposition of offense, if any, and penalty assessed. QUESTION THREE Has the bidder, or the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by bidder, or anyone acting for such firm, corporation, partnership, or institution, ever been convicted, within the past ten (10) years, of a criminal offense which resulted in serious bodily injury or death? YES NO X If the bidder has indicated YES for question number three above, the bidder must provide to City of Lubbock, with its bid submission, the following information with respect to each such conviction: Date of offense, location where offense occurred, type of offense, final disposition of offense, in any, and penalty assessed. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT THE STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK I certify that I have made no willful misrepresentations in this Questionnaire nor have I withheld information in my statements and answers to questions. I am aware that the information given by me in this questionnaire will be investigated, with my full permission, and that any misrepresentations or omissions may cause my bid to be rejected. S' tur Jerry Smith ,Managing Partner Title M SUSPENSION AND DEBARMENT CERTIFICATION Federal Law (A-102 Common Rule and OMB Circular A-110) prohibits non -Federal entities from contracting with or making sub -awards under covered transactions to parties that are suspended or debarred or whose principals are suspended or debarred. Covered transactions include procurement contracts for goods or services equal to or in excess of $25,000 and all non -procurement transactions (e.g., sub -awards to sub -recipients). Contractors receiving individual awards of $25,000 or more and all sub -recipients must certify that their organization and its principals are not suspended or debarred by a Federal agency. Before an award of $25,000 or more can be made to your firm, you must certify that your organization and its principals are not suspended or debarred by a Federal agency. I, the undersigned agent for the firm named below, certify that neither this firm nor its principals are suspended or debarred by a Federal agency. COMPANY NAME: Mi nni x Commercial Partners, Ltd. Signature of Company Official:_ Date Sinned: 4/Scptember 20, 2005 Printed name of company official signing above: Jerry Smith 7 I ' i i I 7 1 � ' �....._.......�d BID OR PROPOSAL BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, Minnix Commercial Partners, Ltd. (hereinafter called the Principal), as Principal, and WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY, a corporation organized and doing business under and by virtue of the laws of the State of Arizona, and duly licensed for the purpose of making, guaranteeing or becoming sole surety upon bonds or undertakings required or authorized by the laws of the State of Texas as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called the Obligee) in the just and full sum of Five Percent of Greatest Amount Bid----------------------------------------------------------------- Dollars ($------- (5%)------------- ) lawful money of the United States of America, for the payment of which well and truly to be made, we hereby bind ourselves and each of our successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly be these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT, WHEREAS, the above bounden Principal as aforesaid, is about to hand in and submit the Obligee a bid or proposal for the Construction of New Fire Station in accordance with the plans and specifications filed in the office of the -' obligee and under the notice inviting proposals therefore. NOW, THEREFORE, if the bid or proposal of said principal shall be accepted, and the contract for such work be awarded to the principal thereupon by the said obligee, and said principal shall enter into a contract and bond for the completion of said work as required by law, then this obligation to be null and void: otherwise to be and remain in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, said Principal and said Surety have caused these presents to be duly signed and sealed this 20th day of September 20 05 Minns, Ltd. BY ' Commercial P ner MASHINGTON INT NATIONAL INS ANC MPANY By BDB 600201 ara D. Hancoc t Attorney In Vact i NAS SURETY GROUP NORTH AMERICAN SPECIALTY INSURANCE COMPANY WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY GENERAL POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, THAT North American Specialty Insurance Company, a corporation duly organized and existing under laws of the State of New Hampshire, and having its principal office in the City of Manchester, New Hampshire, and Washington International Insurance Company, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Arizona and having its principal office in the City of Itasca, Illinois, each does hereby make, constitute and appoint: Kevin J. Dunn, Cara D. Hancock and Harold D. Binggeli jointly or severally Its true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact, to make, execute, seal and deliver, for and on its behalf and as its act and deed, bonds or other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond on behalf of each of said Companies, as surety, on contracts of suretyship as are or may be required or permitted by law, regulation, contract or otherwise, provided that no bond or undertaking or contract or suretyship executed under this authority shall exceed the amount of: TEN MILLION (10,000,000.00) DOLLARS This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of both North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington Intemational Insurance Company at meetings duly called and held on the 240i of March, 2000: "RESOLVED, that any two of the President, any Executive Vice President, any Vice President, any Assistant Vice President, the Secretary or any Assistant Secretary be, and each or any of them hereby is authorized to execute a Power of Attorney qualifying the attorney named in the given Power of Attorney to execute on behalf of the Company bonds, undertakings and all contracts of surety, and that each or any of them hereby is authorized to attest to the execution of any such Power of Attorney and to attach therein the seal of the Company; and it is -� FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signature of such officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed to any such Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be binding upon the Company when so affixed and in the future with regard to any bond, undertaking or contract of surety to which it is attached." yIIIMM," �y I �ei bb�"'• � IC "Mr/ By =cif= _ CORPORATE J rJ O Steven P. Anderson, President & Chief Executive officer or washington International Insurance Company & t 1979 Vice President or North American Specialty Insurance Company a By '� •M'ir'9-- ~nnr*.ara�� --j David M. I-Ayman, Vice President of Was6•innggton International Insurance Company & Vice President of North American Specialty Insurance Company IN WITNESS WHEREOF, North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company have caused their official seals to be hereunto affixed, and these presents to be signed by their authorized officers this 9th day of August , 2005 . North American Specialty Insurance Company Washington International Insurance Company State of Illinois County of Du Page SS: On this 9th day of August 20 05 , before me, a Notary Public personally appeared Steven P. Anderson , President and CEO of Washington International Insurance Company and Vice President of North American Specialty Insurance Company and David M. Layman , Vice President of Washington International Insurance Company and Vice President of North American Specialty Insurance Company, personally known to me, who being by me duly sworn, acknowledged that they signed the above Power of Attorney as officers of and acknowledged said instrument to be the voluntary act and deed of their respective companies. "OFFICIAL SEAL" / SUSM AINSEL2::�� twlyFlitific,StaleofwMas Susan Ansel, Notary Public my cmirrilmort Expres 7!I'Jm :r I, James A. Carpenter , the duly elected Assistant Secretary of North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington Intemational Insurance Company, do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney given by said North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company, which is still in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have set my hand and affixed the seals of the Companies thi�Othday of September, 2005 . James A. Carpenter, Vice President & Assistant Secrelary of Washington Internationct Insurance Company & North American Specialty Insurance Company No Text PAYMENT BOND �;..i i Bond No. S-903 5021 STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021(a) OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE ti (CONTRACTS MORE THAN $25,000) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that h5 Principal(s), and N Minnix Commercial Partners, Ltd. Washington International Insurance Company (hereinafter called the Principal(s), (hereinafter called the Surety(s), as Surety(s), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of Othounmillion, urehundreddfprt3z&ORA /lpgllars ($1,141, 440.90aurful money of the United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 13th day of "5 October 520 05 �tp Bid #05-114-MA -Construction of New Fire Station #8 'and said Principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent f ' as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said 'contract, then, this obligation shall be void; other ise to remain in full force and effect; U PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021(a) of the -Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said 'FArticle to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this 25th day of October 2005 . Washington Internat Surety �a *By. (Title) r" Kevin J. �.i ..l l Insurance Company Attorney -In -Fact Minnix Commercial Partners',. Ltd. (Company Name) i-' By: I -_ . -- (Printed Name) M e) (Title) The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby lesignates Kevin J . Dunn an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered nd on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. 3hington Surety ance ( itle Kevin J. Dunn Attorney -In -Fact approved as to form: Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing hat this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact; we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. 2 NAS SURETY GROUP NORTH AMERICAN SPECIALTY INSURANCE COMPANY WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY i GENERAL POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, THAT North American Specialty Insurance Company, a corporation duly organized and existing under laws of the State of New Hampshire, and having its principal office in the City of Manchester, New Hampshire, and Washington International Insurance Company, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Arizona and having its principal office in the City of Itasca, Illinois, each does hereby make, constitute and appoint: Kevin J. Dunn, Cara D. Hancock and Harold D. Binggeli jointly or severally .� Its true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact, to make, execute, seal and deliver, for and on its behalf and as its act and deed, bonds or other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond on behalf of each of said Companies, as surety, on contracts of suretyship as are or may be required or permitted by law, regulation, contract or otherwise, provided that no bond or undertaking or contract or suretyship executed under this authority shall exceed the amount of: TEN MILLION (10,000,000.00) DOLLARS ? This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolutions adopted by the Boards of -j Directors of both North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company at meetings duly called and held on the 240' of March, 2000: "RESOLVED, that any two of the President, any Executive Vice President, any Vice President, any Assistant Vice President, the Secretary or any jAssistant Secretary be, and each or any of them hereby is authorized to execute a Power of Attorney qualifying the attorney named in the given Power of Attorney to execute on behalf of the Company bonds, undertakings and all contracts of surety, and that each or any of them hereby is authorized to attest to the execution of any such Power of Attorney and to attach therein the seal of the Company; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signature of such officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed to any such Power of Attorney or to any J certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be binding upon the Company when so affixed and in the future with regard to any bond, undertaking or contract of surety to which it is attached." —! 0 s3 z B $ RATE = C3,' SEAL_ Steven P. Anderson, President & Chief Exeentive Officer of Washington International Insurance Company & ��� u� 1073"lKm = Vice President of North American Specialty Insurance Company i h e tc - �7/fbON ��iinmumia�"\ \ K l- \3 is, By By — David M. Layman, Vice President of Washington International Inmrance Company & Vice President of North American Specialty Insurance Company IN WITNESS WHEREOF, North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company have caused their official seals to be hereunto affixed, and these presents to be signed by their authorized officers this 9th day of August 2005 . North American Specialty Insurance Company Washington International Insurance Company State of Illinois County of Du Page SS: On this 9th day of August 20_�5, before me, a Notary Public personally appeared Steven P. Anderson , President and CEO of Washington International Insurance Company and Vice President of North American Specialty Insurance Company and David M. Layman , Vice President of Washington International Insurance Company and Vice President of North American Specialty Insurance Company, personally known to me, who being by me duly sworn, acknowledged that they signed the above Power of Attorney as officers of and acknowledged said instrument to be the voluntary act and deed of their respective companies. "OPFICJAL SEAL' SUSM ANSEL Navy 110c, Stale of illn 3 Susan Ansel, Notary Public IAyCtxlrafs9ioa 60res7l�JLOOB It I, James A. Carpenter , the duly elected Assistant Secretes of North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company, do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy, pf aTower of Attorney given by said North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company, which is still in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have set my hand and affixed the seals of the Companies thi�?-5thday of October 2005 . i • i • Air .. � James A. Carpenter, Vice President & Assistant Secn-tary of Washington International Insurance Company & North American Specialty Insurance Company PERFORMANCE BOND STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021(a) OF THE TEXAS GON ERN`MEN`T CODE (CONTRACTS MORE TITAN $100,000) Minnix Commercial Partners, Ltd. NOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that / (hereinafter called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and Washington International Insurance Company iereinafter called the Surety s) as S e�ns), are h}e,ld and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the obligee), in the amount of oiousan ,Ar°nundreorror °vr y08rf llars ($1,141, 440. OOlawful money of the Inited States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, Kecutors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 13tiday of October ,20_,to Bid #05-114—MA — Construction of New Fire station #8 nd said principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond i the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent s if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall aithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall �e void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021(a) of the 'exas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said ticle to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN V�r=SS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this 25th [ay of October , 20 05 . Jashington Intea '0 1 Insurance Company >urety By: (Title) Kevin J. Dun 4 Attorney -In -Fact Minnix C (Company Name) By: `l i��+6 •J (Printed Frame) (Signature) (Title) N��'✓¢y- The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business inTexas, and hereby esignates Kevin J. Duntm agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on 9 whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. Washington International Insurance Surety n CO - Co *B (Title) Kevin J. Dunn/Attorney-In-Fact Approved as to Form ity of L��boc k City -"Xt—mey to Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company, there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws shoeing ,hat this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of -attorney for our files. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE NAS SURETY GROUP i NORTH AMERICAN SPECIALTY INSURANCE COMPANY WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY J GENERAL POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, THAT North American Specialty Insurance Company, a corporation duly organized and existing under laws of the State of New Hampshire, and having its principal office in the City of Manchester, New Hampshire, and Washington International Insurance Company, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Arizona and having its principal office in the City of Itasca, Illinois, each does hereby make, constitute and appoint: Kevin J. Dunn, Cara D. Hancock and Harold D. Binggeli jointly or severally Its true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact, to make, execute, seal and deliver, for and on its behalf and as its act and deed, bonds or other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond on behalf of each of said Companies, as surety, on contracts of suretyship as are or may be required or permitted by law, regulation, contract or otherwise, provided that no bond or undertaking or contract or suretyship executed under this authority shall exceed the amount of: TEN MILLION (10,000,000.00) DOLLARS Tl 1 This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of both North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company at meetings duly called and held on the 240' of March, 2000: "RESOLVED, that any two of the President, any Executive Vice President, any Vice President, any Assistant Vice President, the Secretary or any Assistant Secretary be, and each or any of them hereby is authorized to execute a Power of Attorney qualifying the attorney named in the given Power of Attorney to execute on behalf of the Company bonds, undertakings and all contracts of surety, and that each or any of them hereby is authorized to attest to the execution of any such Power of Attorney and to attach therein the seal of the Company; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signature of such officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed to any such Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be binding upon the Company when so affixed and in the future with regard to any bond, undertaking or contract of surety to which it is attached." �1111111111f!// �`���Q��pIAt1rVl�Gi4� �ttuntrtrr ��� /�• By IORPOpA� t' SEAI. I 1973 ea, � $ Steven P. Anderson, President & Chief Executive officer of Washington International Insurance Company & Mee President of North Americas Specialty Insurance Company S AL 4i/umlmmlla� By David NL layman, Vice President of Washington International Insurance Company & Vice President of North American Specialty Insurance Company IN WITNESS WHEREOF, North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company have caused their official seals to be hereunto affixed, and these presents to be signed by their authorized officers this 9th day of August , 20 05 . North American Specialty Insurance Company Washington International Insurance Company State of Illinois County of Du Page ss: On this 9th day of August 20 05 , before me, a Notary Public personally appeared Steven P. Anderson , President and CEO of Washington Intemational Insurance Company and Vice President of North American Specialty Insurance Company and David M. Layman , Vice President of Washington Intemational Insurance Company and Vice President of North American Specialty Insurance Company, personally known to me, who being by me duly swom, acknowledged that they signed the above Power of Attorney as officers of and acknowledged said instrument to be the voluntary act and deed of their respective companies. / SUSAN ANSFL 2e,4� Warr Pt161ic, Slele of W063 Susan Ansel, Notary Public MyCanminm Expires 71000 ) I, James A. Carpenter , the duly elected Assistant Secretary of North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington Intemational Insurance Company, do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney given by said North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company, which is still in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have set my hand and affixed the seals of the Companies thiE?-5thday of October 2005 . James A. Carpenter, Vice President & Assistant Secretary of Washington Intonational Insurance Company & _..._j North American Specialty Insurance Cmopany 1 POLICYHOLDER DISCLOSURE NOTICE OF TERRORISM INSURANCE COVERAGE ENDORSEMENT Coverage for acts of terrorism as defined in § 102(1) of the Terrorism Risk Insurance Act of 2002 ("the Act") is already included in this surety bond. You should know that, effective November 26, 2002, under your existing coverage, any losses caused by certified acts of terrorism would be partially reimbursed by the United States under a formula established by federal law. Under this formula, the United States pays 90% of covered terrorism losses exceeding the statutorily established deductible paid by the insurance company providing the coverage. The portion of your annual premium that is attributable to coverage for acts of terrorism is $0. �1 As your insurance/surety company we are sending you this notice to comply with the Terrorism Risk Insurance Act of 2002. For questions regarding this notice please visit our website www.nassurety.com or you may call our office at 630- 227- 4825. r.,..i REV: 2/03 agent notice IMPORTANT NOTICE In order to Obtain Information or Make a Complaint: You may call Washington International Insurance Company and/or North American Specialty Insurance Company at the foIIowing toll -free number: - 800/338-0753 or You may write to them at the following address: 1200 Arlington Heights Road #400 Itasca, IL 60143 You may also contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain information on companies, coverages, rights or complaints at: 800/252-3439 You may write the Texas Department of Insurance at the following address: P O Box 149104 Austin, TX 78714-9104 7 11/08/2005 11:29 18067940196 DAVIDTATEIN ICED. CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE JCM (806) 794-1177 THIS CERTIFICATE 19 ISSUFC ONLY AND CONFERS D. ID TATE It�sDRANCS AGENCY, LLP HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE 5: 3 79TN ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFOI i LI 20M TX 79424- INSURERS AFFORDING CO RA IN! IED INSURE A DAIJ AS F=RE M Nix c%MRCIAL PARTNERS, LTD INsuRER : TEXAS MUTUAL B : 64893 I N D: L MOCK TX 79464- IN ERE! C tRAGES A PAGE 01/02 DATE (MMMOVY" I POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICII PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY ]UIRRMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, e INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. 3REGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED 9Y rAID C AM TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY LIO � TIVE Rpp� M RA71LATE[0N LIMITS GENERAL WAMLITY 0=068178 07/07/2006 07/07/2006 EACH OCCURRENCE S •11000,000 X COMMERCUU-GENERALLVWlL1TY DAMAGEE TO RENTED 100,000 PREM13ES becurertw i CLAMS MADE � OCCUR / / / / MED EXP — $ 5, O00 PER80NAL 8 ADV INJURY ! 1,000,000 GENERALAGGRE"TE $ 2,000,000 GF_M1.AO0REGATELIMITAPPLIFSPRR Dig_ PIOPAM $ 2,000,000 POLICY LOC AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY / r / / COM13 NED SINOLE VMIT ANY AUTO (Ea tip ! ALL OWNED AUTOS / / I / BODILY INJURY SCHEDULFD AUTOS (Per pwmo ) HIREDAUTOS / / / / UODILY INJURY NON.OwNED AUTOS (Per ecddere) 3 PROPERTYDAMAGE ; (Por eco" GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY -EA ACCIDENT S ANYAUTO / / / / OTHERTHAN EA ACC $ AUTO ONLY: AGG $ ExCESSfUMBRELLA LIABILITY I / / / EACH OCCURRM.GE s OCCUR CLAMS MADE AGGREGATE $ DEDUCTIBLE RETENTION s $ WDRKERSCOMPENSATION AND 1095348 02/01/2005 01/01/2006 EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY s 500,000 ANY PROPRIETOR&ARTNERF-XECUTIVE E,L EACH ACCIDENT 0FFICERIMFNCEREccLuveb4 ..._ N yes, tleecrtde under E,L OISEASE-EASMPLOYE _,.vS0.0 q00 j EL;[ji E-.POIICY1AUIT 4`` ..:.3 ,0`E 000 SP CIALPROVISIONSbeiav OTHER Nov 8 20 KMPMON OF OMAT10N61LOCATION31VMCLF.@=CLUSIONS ADDED IYY ENDORSE ENTR PECLAL PROVISIONS CM xs A cMJLNXET VlAr R OF SUBROGATION Olq TUX WORKMS COfIQSATICBQ B#091141ft COINSTRUCTZON 09 MW PIM sTATxON #8 VMT Xk7aR OF MRAGATxoN Am AmT.TTONAL =SU11 M ON 1 M Cok4=C=L 6�N014L LZAF!=TIC. CITY OF LUBSO= Z9 12RI6�R>� bxTIOML TN9URW MM POLICY CQMXT3:ONS RTIFICATE HO LDER CANCELLATION ( ) - SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DE MINIM POLICIES BE CANCELLED SEFORP THE "PIRATIM DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INBURF,R VAL.L ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 10 DAYS WMTMN NOTICE TO THE CERTIRCATE NOLOER NAMED TO THE LEST, BUT CITY OFVUBBOCK �'-� // PAILURE To Do 3D $HALL IMPOSE NO OOUGATION OR LUUNLITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE 8 O BOX 2000 WOU ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTArVES. LUBBOCK,uTtIOR¢Ep A 'TX 7945-1- ORD 2S (2001109) i ItJ8QZ6 (Ototl),aa ELECTRONIC LASER FORMS, NC • (wo)=.w4s 0 ACORD CORPORATION 1080 Pegs I of: _ 11/08/2005 11:29 18067940196 DAVIDTATEIN PAGE 02/02 IMPORTANT If the Certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this Certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). DISCLAIMER The Certificate of insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon. ORD 25 (2MI00) INS025(0108).05 PnQ 2of2 No Text ACORDM INSURANCE BINDER DATE 11104/2005 THIS BINDER IS A TEMPORARY INSURANCE CONTRACT SUBJECT TO THE CONDITIONS SHOWN ON PAGE 2 SIDE OF THIS FORM. PRODUCER PHONE (A/C, No, Ext): (8 0 6) 7 9 4 -117 7 COMPANY BINDER# FAX (A/C, No): ( ) - GREAT AMERICAN 0576 DAVID TATE INSURANCE AGENCY, LLP EFFECTIVE DATE TIME EXPIRATION DATE TIME I X AM X 12:01 AM 5233 79TH 11/04/2005 12:01 PM il/04/2006 NOON THIS BINDER IS ISSUED TO EXTEND COVERAGE IN THE ABOVE NAMED COMPANY PER EXPIRING POLICY #: LUBBOCK TX 7 942 4 — CODE: SUB CODE: AGENCY CUSTOMER ID: DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONSNEHICLES/PROPERTY (Including Location) 2120 50TH LUBBOCK, TX INSURED MINNIX COMMERCIAL PARTNERS, LTD builders risk form BOX 64895 LUBBOCK TX 79464- CnVFRG(;FR I IMITA TYPE OF INSURANCE COVERAGEIFORMS DEDUCTIBLE COINS % AMOUNT PROPERTY CAUSES OF LOSS BASIC BROAD SPEC ALL DIRECT FORMS OF PHYSICAL LOSS EXCEPT AS EXCLUDED BY THE POLICY 1,000 100 1,140,000 GENERAL LIABILITY COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CLAIMS MADE OCCUR RETRO DATE FOR CLAIMS MADE: / / EACH OCCURRENCE $ DAMAGE TO RENTED PREMISES MED EXP (Any oneperson) $ PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ GENERAL AGGREGATE $ PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ANY AUTO ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS HIRED AUTOS NON -OWNED AUTOS COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $ BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ PROPERTY DAMAGE $ MEDICAL PAYMENTS $ PERSONAL INJURY PROT $ UNINSURED MOTORIST $ AUTO PHYSICAL DAMAGE DEDUCTIBLE COLLISION: OTHER THAN COL ALL VEHICLES SCHEDULED VEHICLES ACTUAL CASH VALUE $ STATEDAMOUNT OTHER GARAGE LIABILITY ANY AUTO AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $ OTHER THAN AUTO ONLY: _ EACH ACCIDENT _ $ AGGREGATE $ EXCESS LIABILITY UMBRELLA FORM OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM RETRO DATE FOR CLAIMS MADE: / / EACH OCCURRENCE $ AGGREGATE $ SELF -INSURED RETENTION $ WORKER'S COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYER'S LIABILITY WC STATUTORY LIMITS E.L. EACH ACCIDENT _ $ E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ SPECIAL CONDITIONS/ OTHER COVERAGES FEES $ TAXES is ESTIMATED TOTAL PREMIUM I $ NAME & ADDRESS MORTGAGEE X ADDITIONAL INSURED LOSS PAYEE CITY OF LUBBOCK BOX 2000 LOAN# AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE LUBBOCK, TX 79453- ACORD 75 (2001/01) NOTE: IMPORTANT STATE INFORMATION ON PAGE 2 © ACORD CORPORATION 1993 qZ INS075 (0011).04 ELECTRONIC LASER FORMS, INC. - (800)327-0545 Page 1 of 2 CONDITIONS This Company binds the kind(s) of insurance stipulated on page 1. The Insurance is subject to the terms, conditions and limitations of the policy(ies) in current use by the Company. This binder may be cancelled by the Insured by surrender of this binder or by written notice to the Company stating when cancellation will be effective. This binder may be cancelled by the Company by notice to the Insured in accordance with the policy conditions. This binder is cancelled when replaced by a policy. If this binder is not replaced by a policy, the Company is entitled to charge a premium for the binder according to the Rules and Rates in use by the Company. Applicable in California When this form is used to provide insurance in the amount of one million dollars ($1,000,000) or more, the title of the form is changed from "Insurance Binder" to "Cover Note". Applicable in Delaware The mortgagee or Obligee of any mortgage or other instrument given for the purpose of creating a lien on real property shall accept as evidence of insurance a written binder issued by an authorized insurer or its agent if the binder includes or is accompanied by: the name and address of the borrower; the name and address of the lender as loss payee; a description of the insured real property; a provision that the binder may not be canceled within the term of the binder unless the lender and the insured borrower receive written notice of the cancellation at least ten (10) days prior to the cancellation; except in the case of a renewal of a policy subsequent to the closing of the loan, a paid receipt of the full amount of the applicable premium, and the amount of insurance coverage. Chapter 21 Title 25 Paragraph 2119 Applicable in Florida Except for Auto Insurance coverage, no notice of cancellation or nonrenewal of a binder is required unless the duration of the binder exceeds 60 days. For auto insurance, the insurer must give 5 days prior notice, unless the binder is replaced by a policy or another binder in the same company. Applicable in Nevada Any person who refuses to accept a binder which provides coverage of less than $1,000,000.00 when proof is required: (A) Shall be fined not more than $500.00, and (B) is liable to the party presenting the binder as proof of insurance for actual damages sustained therefrom. ACORD 75 (2001101) ,M INS075 Iooffl.oa Page of ACORN CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE(MM/DD/YYYY 10/20/2005 PRODUCER (806) 794-1177 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION DAVID TATE INSURANCE AGENCY, LLP ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR 5233 79TH ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. LUBBOCK TX 79424— INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # INSURED INSURER A DALLA S FIRE MINNIX COMMERCIAL PARTNERS, LTD INSURER B: TEXAS MUTUAL, BOX 64895 — INSURER C: INSURER D: LUBBOCK TX 79464 INSURERE: COVERAGES THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING AN) REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR LTR ADD'L INSR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE DATE MM/DD POLICY EXPIRATION DATE(MMIDDfM LIMITS A GENERAL LIABILITY DGL068178 07/07/2005 07/07/2006 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,00 X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CLAIMS MADE � OCCUR DAMAGE TO RENTED PREMISES Ea oorurrence $ 100,00 MED EXP one son $ 5,00 PERSONAL BADVINJURY $ 1,000,00 GENERALAGGREGATE $ 2,000,00 GENT AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ 2,000,00 POLICY PE LOG AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ANY AUTO COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Ea accident) $ BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ HIRED AUTOS NON -OWNED AUTOS PROPERTYDAMAGE (Peraccidenl) $ GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $ OTHER THAN EA ACC $ ANY AUTO $ AUTO ONLY: AGG EXCESS/UMBRELLA LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ OCCUR CLAIMSMADE AGGREGATE $ $ DEDUCTIBLE $ RETENTION $ B WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE 1095348 01/01/2005 01/01/2006 WyVC� gg TORYLIMTITS ER E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ 500 , 00C E.L DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ 500, 00C OFFICER/MEMBEREXCLUDED? If yes, describe under SPECIAL PROVISIONS below E.L. DISEASE -POLICY LIMIT 500 OOC $ r OTHER DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONSILOCATIONSNEHICLES!EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT/SPECIAL PROVISIONS "THERE IS A BLANKET WAIVER OF SUBROGATION ON THE WORKERS COMPENSATION (BI20MT WAIVER OF SUBROGATION AND ADDITIONAL INSURED ON THE COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY iITB#05114MA CONSTRUCTION OF NEW FIRE STATION 48 CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE I=. EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 10 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT CITY OF LUBBOCK FAILURE TO DO SO SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES. P 0 BOX 2000 AUTHORIZE NTATI -% LUBBOCK TX 79453— ACORD 25 (2001/08) 0 ACORD CORPORATION 198E IT.r INS025 (Diwps ELECTRONIC LASER FORMS, INC. - (800)327-0545 Page 1 of IMPORTANT If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). DISCLAIMER The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon. ACORD 25 (2001/08) ` ,,, INS025 piosym Page 2 of 2 ACORPM CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE (MM/DD/YYYY) 10/20/Z005 PRODUCER (806)762-0544 FAX (806) 741-1527 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION Grimes Insurance Agency, Inc. ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE -= 1651 Broadway HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR y ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. Lubbock, TX 79401 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # INSURED MINNIX COMMERCIAL PARTNERS LTD INSURERA: General Ins. Co. of America Z4732 AND MINNIX HOMES, INC. INSURER B: PO BOX 64895 INSURERC: LUBBOCK, TX 79464 INSURERD: INSURER E: -JCOVERAGES THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDINr ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR ADIYL TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION LIMITS GENERAL LIABILITY COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CLAIMS MADE ❑ OCCUR EACH OCCURRENCE $ DAMAGE TO RENTED $ MED EXP (Any one person) $ PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ GENERAL AGGREGATE $ GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: POLICYF_j PROJECT LOC PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ -- AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ANY AUTO ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS HIRED AUTOS NON -OWNED AUTOS 24BA00046210 07/29/2005 07/20/2006 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Ea accident) $ 1,000,000 X BODILY INJURY (Per person) _ $ BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident) $ ..�.� GARAGE LIABILITY ANY AUTO AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $ OTHER THAN EAACC AUTO ONLY: AGG $ $ j --= EXCESS/UMBRELLA LIABILITY OCCUR CLAIMS MADE HDEDUCTIBLE RETENTION $ EACH OCCURRENCE $ AGGREGATE $ $ ^^ $ - WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE OFFICEWMEMBER EXCLUDED? It yes, describe under SPECIAL PROVISIONS below WC LIMIT OTR E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYE $ E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ .y OTHER DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS / VEHICLES / EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT / SPECIAL PROVISIONS -rtificate holder is named as Additional Insured as regards Auto Liability and Waiver of brogation applies to Auto Liability. City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, TX 79457 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 10 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE r ( Richard Duncan/DMB u^114—I�`�/ <� ORD 25 (2001/08) FAX: 775-2085 ©ACORD CORPORATION 1988 IMPORTANT If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). DISCLAIMER The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon. -ORD 25 (2001/08) ACORD CSR DR D�'� (�D�'YYYI CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE CL_1 10 21 Os PRODUCER THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATIO ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE RICH & CAMMILL HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR 2738 East 51st #400 ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW Tulsa Ox 74105 Phone:918-743-8811 Fax:918-744-8429 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# INSURED INSURER A: America First Insurance Cc 12696 INSURER e: NIIal;p=t Inaaranaa Corporation A� CleaningTeohnologiss Inc INSURERc 13g0 R Detroit INSURER o- Broken Arrow OR 74012 INSURER E COVERAGES THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAMS. LTR R TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER DAB E ON DA M LIMITS GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1000000 A X X COI WERgPLGENERALIABILRY CBP9876547 08/01/05 09/01/06 PURFRIUES(Edowwcri0et) $100000 1PCLAIMS MADE ® OCCUR MED EXP (AnY ON Person) s 5000 PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $1000000 GENERAL AGGREGATE s 2000000 GENL AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLES PER: PRODUCTS• COMPIOP AGG s 2000000 POLICY JECT LOC A AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY X ANYAUTO BA9077047 08/01/05 08/01/06 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Ea2den0 $1000000 BODILY INJURY (per Dersm) 5 ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS BODILY INJURY (Per ace dew s HIRED AUTOS NON -OWNED AUTOS PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per aceidert) $ GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY -EA ACCIDENT s OTHER THAN EA ACC AUTO ONLY: AGO s ANY AUTO s EXCESSNMBRELLA LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE s 5000000 A X I OCCUR CLAIMS MADE CU9877247 08/01/05 08/01/06 AGGREGATE $5000000 t s HDEDUCTIBLE s X RETENTION $10000 B WORKERS COMPENSATION AND ER LIABILITY ANY PRDPRETCRIPARTNERIEXECUTIVEWCX0009302 OFFICERIMEMBER EXCLUDETYJ 03/23/05 03/23/06 X TORV LIMBS ER EL.EACH ACCIDENT $ 500000 E.L. DISEASE -EA EMPLOY $ 500000 H yes. describe under SPECIAL PROVISIONS below E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT S 500000 OTHER DESCRIPTION OF AERATIONS I LOCATIONS I VEHICLES I EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEhEW 1 SPECIAL PROVISIONS There is a Blanket Waiver of Subrogation on the Workers Compensation Blanket Waiver of Subrogation and Additional Insured on the Commerical General Liability I CERTIFICATE HOLDER �f a CAME:v LI AIIUIY CITYO-7 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 010 DAYS WRITTEN City of Lubbock NOTICE TO THE CERrVICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO DO 30 SMALL Radley Borg P O Box 2000 IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER, ITS AGENTS OR Lubbock TX 79453 REPRESENTATIVES. Au NSENr ZZ ACORD 25 (2001108) 0ACORD CORPORATION 1988 -• -�... �.,r.., Q„LrC II UU0(z30itrbti ACORQ, CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE ioiisiz00 ' PRODUCER (806) 798- 7979 FAX (806) 798-7888 Butler -Carson Insurance Agency 4505 82nd St. Suite 10 Lubbock, TX 794Z4 Theresa Walker THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # INSURED Anson Hargrove & Associates 6204- 3 5t h Lubbock, TX 79407 INSURERA' America First Insurance Co. 1234 INSURER B: INSURER C: INSURER D: INSURER E: pnv1r0Al2CC THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REOUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS. EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSRADD' TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE DATE WIMIDDIM POLICY EXPIRATION DATE fMMfQQrYY1 LIMITS GENERAL LIABILITY CCP3001179489 07/29/2005 07/29/2006 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,00( X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY DAMAGE TO RENTED S 50,00( CLAIMS MADE � OCCUR MED EXP (Any one person) S 5 QQ Aff PERSONAL & ADV INJURY S 1,000,00i GENERAL AGGREGATE S 2,000,00( GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS - COMP-IOP AGG i 2,000,000 17 POLICY j LOC AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ANY AUTO COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Ea acodent) S ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS BODILY INJURY (Per perms) S BODILY INJURY (Per accident) S HIRED AUTOS NON -OWNED AUTOS PROPERTYOAMAGE (Per accident) S GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY- EA ACCIDENT S OTHER THAN EA ACC S ANY AUTO S AUTO ONLY: AGG EXCESS/UMBRELLA LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE S OCCUR CLAIMS MADE AGGREGATE S S S DEDUCTIBLE $ RETENTION S WORKERS COMPENSATION AND 4VC S LIMIT OTH- EMPLOYERS' LIABIUTY ANY PROPRIETOWPARTHERIEXECUTNE E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE S OFFICERIMEMBER EXCLUDED? If yes, describe under E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT S SPECIAL PROVISIONS below OTHER DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS! LOCATIONS I VEHICLES 1 EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT I SPECIAL PROVISIONS CERTIFICATE HOLDS .e, SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 10 DAYS HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, Minnix Commercial Partners, Ltd. �NOTICERnFICATE BUT FAILURELIMPOSENOOBLIGATIONORLIABILITY P 0 Box 64895 OF ANY .NTS OR REPRESENTATIVES. Lubbock, TX 79464-4895 A RIZ R R Gor ler ACORD25(2001/08) FAX: (806)793-8376 / ©ACORD CORPORATION 1988 Uct 21 05 02:17p Butler -Carson Insurance R 8067997888 p•1 AGOFiI?� CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE 09/2V20o PRODUCER (806) 798-7979 FAX (806) 798-7888 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION Butler -Carson Insurance Agency ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE 4505 82nd St, Suite 10 HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. Lubbock, TX 79424 Theresa Walker INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # INSURED C.C. Electric INSURERA: America First Lloyds 20404 CR 2040 INSURERS: America First Insurance Co. 1234 Lubbock, TX 79423 INSURERC: Texas Mutual Insurance Company 100SI INSURER D: INSURER E: rnVFRAnPq THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE 114SLJRE-D NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR AOD'L TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION LIMITS GENERAL LIABILITY CCP9763376 08/19/2005 08/19/2006 EACH OCCURRENCE S 1, Q00 , 000 X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY DAMAGE TO RENTED S 50,000 CLAIMS MADE XM OCCUR VIED EXP (Any one person) S 5 , 000 AI F::: PERSONAL & ADV INJURY E 1,000,000 GENERAL AGGREGATE S 21000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS - COMPIOP AGG S 2,000,000 P POLICY ECTRO- PRO- LOC AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY BA97SB196 08/19/2005 08/19/2006 COMBINED SINGLE LIMB X ANY AUTO (Ea accident) S 11000,000 ALL OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY S SCHEDULCD AUTOS (Per person) B BODILY INJURY S HIRED AUTOS NON -OWNED AUTOS (Per accident) PROPERTY DAMAGE S (Per accident) GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY -EA ACCIDENT S OTHER THAN EA ACC $ ANY AUTO S AUTO ONLY: AGG EXCESSIUMBRELLA LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE S OCCUR CLAIMS MADE AGGREGATE S S S DEDUCTIBLE E RETENTION $ WORKERS COMPENSATION AND TSF-0001116130 03/31/2005 03/31/2006 X VJCC STATU,Ry- OTH- ER EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY E.L. EACH ACCIDENT —' S 500, 000 C ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNERIEXECUTIVE E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE S 500,000 OFFICMMEM5EREXCLUOED7 If yes, describe under SPECIAL PROVISIONS below E.L. DISEASE • POLICY LIMIT $ 5001000 OTHER DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS I VEHICLES I EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT I SPECIAL PROVISIONS dditional Insured and Waiver of Subrogation in favor of the certificate holder on the General Liability and Auto policies as required by written contract. Waiver of Subrogation in regards to orkers Compensation in favor of the certificate holder as required by written contract. City of Lubbock Attn: Trina P. 0. Box 2000 Lubbock, TX 79408 ACORD 25 (2001108) SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 10 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IM SE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UP INSURER, ITS AGENT OR EPRESENTATIVES. AUTHORIZED RE ESENTA John Carson Lt i%��TZ—. ©ACORD CORPORATION 1988 Oct 21 05 02:17p Butler -Carson Insurance R 8067987808 p.2 1 - IMPORTANT If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certi icate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certifit,ate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). DISCLAIMER The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon. _j } -g I �.j ACORD 25 (2001108) 1AcA.E.i--�,:I- iFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE 14' 10 1 W24/2005 Sims -Perrin Ins. Agmq, Inc. TM CERTMATE 18 MUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO PUSIM UPON THE CERTIFICATE DBA M9, Inc. HOLDER THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND. EXTEND OR P.O. Box 6247 ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW, Lubbock TX 79493 I MIMRs AFFORDING COVERAGE Commercial Floor Covering MURNR A: UIDaOn StaDdffd j 5723 - 787h Sant Kpnm p, Union I-ubbOCk TX 79424 c i lua ms F Tom Mutual Ina. COmmm COVERAGEIII THE POLICIES OF MLIRANCE LISTED REL0W HAVE BEEN ISSMD TO THE POURED NAMED ABOVE rm THE POLICY PERIDO INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANOm ZANY REQUITEMENT, TERM OR OONDi110N OF ANY OONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS OERTF"TE MAY BE ISSUED OR 'MAY PERTAIN. THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICES DESCRRED HEREIN 13 SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDI11ONS OF SUCH 1 POLICIES. ASi M*GATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY MAVE SEEN REDUCED SY PAID CLAM, NUMBEit'UM a • ' i I ""E'L"" X COMMlRCIALOEN&MLIAIiLm CLAEWE MAD! X� CNA 1787471 - 26 01/01/2005 01/01/2006 RIWOAMAW Ioo0000 100000 VW Uft gniq Magal 5 SOOO MiJ4JRV 1000000 1000000 gerL LIMIT APPM PER: LOC 1000000 13 i I I I j i 1 LIAB'L" AW AVTD AMOVVNWAVrOM SCHEDULED AUTOS HIRED AUTOff NON.OYYNW AUTOS TA 4153124 - 10 04/12/2004 DV12/2005 commw mar LIMB tV s 1000000 BODILYRJURY pop—) �- s X 9opLvlN.URr II'ff -d" E Y�DAMAOB s E L AIILITY AM/AUTO Y _ O HMTHAN AVID ONLY: AGO I 1 I 1 I � cEse LIAeIL1TY OCCUR ❑ CLAWS MADE DiDucrlaLe ' Am TSF - 0012081401 20050218 02/18/2005 02/18/2006 X ILL. Mo AQM9KT 1 500000 d P 500000 500M ! i OTHER OF 0PWATI0W&0CATKWWVGWLl MCIJ iIONSADD®BY PIWVLE M ro is a Sla d= Wavier ofSubrogadon on the Worker's Compensation Cove+W. Blanket Wavier of Subrogation and Additional Insured on the Commercial General Liability. I LL- hor-W1F16AT! MR IkK it RISURES7 ENSURER TLON SHOULD AMY OFTNHAROYE DEACR10E0 POLICIES BE CAMCM.UM IEPOItR THE EXPIRATION City Of lA"odc DATE THROW. THE ISSUENO IINIBRmE WILL DMIRAVOR To NUM 0 DAY* VIRF'TDM P. O, Box 2000 NWM TO THE GMTIFICATE "KM NAM® TO THE LEFT. BUT FA>LURE[ TO DO aD SNALL ' Lubbmk TX 79453 IMF= NO oRLIOAWN OR OF ANY K= UPON THE W&URM, ITS AGENTS OF I 1 IATtVE � 1 ORD 28- (71M Q Ad:DRD CORPORATION /9U I 1 UUU (7c 2-)"i r.tiL 4 Lj MMA&SA " VGI\ I IrIV/'11 16 VI "r%LYILI I A L. I 10/Zl/ZOOS PRODUCER (306) 792-5564 FAX (806) 792-9344 Sanford Insurance Agency 6303 Indiana Ave. P.O. Box 64790 Lubbock, TX 79413 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFER$ NO RIOHT8 UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOGS NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC uleORlo BILL FREEMAN 8916 ELKRIOGE LUBBOCK, TX 79423 INSURER A: CIG T 42382 INsume: Texas Mutual Insurance Co. 0048 IN31JW6R C; INSURER 0. INSURER I!: THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED, NOTW ITHSTANDINi ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RI PECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES OESCRIBFD HFRFIN 18 BLOJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. WeTL TIME OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBERTELNfli A osNelw. LuISILm COMMERCIAL OENFRAL LTAWTY CLAIM MADE f7 OCCUR CLP 7998Z44 07/31/2005 07/31/20 EACH occuRReNCE s 1 000 0 DAMAGE TO RENTED PAEjQqF-q (F• �earem j 300 f 0 ON MED EXP (Any one person) I 5,004 PERSONAL A ADV INJURY $ 1100010 GENERAL AGGREGATE i 2,000,0 GEN'L AGGREGATE UMrT APPLIES PER. POLICY LOC PRODUCTS - COMPA]F AGO I 21000,0 AUTUNDS" LIABILITY ANY AUTO ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTO! HIRED AUTOS NOH-OWNeDAUTOS COMBINED SWGLE LIMIT (Ee ecdeenq S BODILY INJURY (Per Perevn) 5 BODILY INJURY (PersnWenl) S PROPERTY DAMAGE (Peroccklml) I OARAOII LIAWLITY ANY AUTO AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT S OTHER THAN _FJ1 ACC AUTO ONLY; AGO I I EXSESSIUMERELLA LIABILITY OCCUR CLAM MADE DEDUCTIBLE RETENTION s EACH OCCURRENCE / AGGREGATE I s S e g WOMMRS COWENIATXM AND ER LIAe1LJTY ANYM PRO PROER PRIETORA•ARTNERlDIEOUTNE OFFICERAIEWEREXCLUDED? N eetellee Wldef P ONS below TSF-0001147330 07 31/ZOOS 07/11/2006 W ,TATU• OTH• E.L. EACH ACCIDENT S 500100 E.L.DISEASE -EAEMPLOYE I S00 E•L, DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT E 5n0 OTHER DESCTSOOW ERT CATrHHOOLDER ISIAMED A5 ADDIT�I irL INSUR OsON GL NEH"W III IVER OF SUBROGATION ON GL AS PER NRMEN CONTRACT. CITY OF LUBBOCK P.O. BOX 2000 LUBBOCK, TX 79453 ACORD 28 (2001/08) rLLArlsm SHOULD ANY OF THE A W DESCRIED POLICIES BE CANCUM 11VOR1 THE EXIMATION DATE THEREOF, THE SONG MURER MALL ENDEAVOR TD MAL 10 DAYS MIRITTIEN WTICE TO THE CIRTWATR HOLDER MANED TO THE LEFT, SUT FAILURE TO NAIL SUCH NOTICE IIIIALL PAPOSS NO OSUMATION OR LWRTTY OF ANY MNPUPON THRWAI RAIKIT11^a2XTA A WOMMO REPRBSENTATINi _,-3 0 CACOROVORPORATION 1940 owo f7G 7J44 r.we IMPORTANT If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an andorvement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). DISCLAIMER The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon. ACORD 25 (2801/08) TOTAL P.02 al�v� ryVvl 7�7HI•ID{.ifC�7C..R rraut dli b1 RAM THE POLK313 OF INSURANCE LISTED !BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NA►49D AOM FOR THE POLICY MOD MEDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERT)F(CATTE MAY 8E ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, TW INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCR(SED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS. EXCLUSIONS AND CON LITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LMMTS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED 9Y PAID CLANS, LaL TYM OF 84IIR414ft POLICY NUIIMM?Jl Y E UVm IIAM ULLWMfIY F14TX 07/01/2005 07/01/2006 EACNocctrwmkm a 4000,000 X OoAAmma DEHERAL LWw" OAMAQE To FARM- SO -1u CLAIMS MADE XOCCUR men VW (Arty"mm) t i IM A PERaQMLAADV►NAMLY ri 1 000 GINEIM A001'ILa3ATa t 2,000,000 GEMLAQWGATELWTAPPLIESFelt PRODUCTS•CObAlOPAOO 1 2.000,090 POLICY F7 A LOG AUTOMOGILSUANUtY 04 BA 479429 02 22/0 004 1 / 1/ZCO COLIMNiOSINGLELM►IT i ANY AUTO (EaaetldallU 1 000 ON noOILYIWURY t All OWNSDAUTOa B X 8C►LEDL►LV0AUTOE I (Pa "-A) sOdLY►NJURY t X HIRED AUTOS X MW4WNEDAUT0t (?Ramftl1) YaAMAGE i (FRRDPV QARAQ@ UADY ft AUTO ONLY -EA AOCDMNT i ANY AVTQ 0 THAN EA ACC c AUTO ONLY: AGO i ULCEffAIYBRELLA UA!!a ITY EACH OCCU!lRIINCE i OCCUR ►--_.J CLAM MADE AOQNEWLTE t i DEDUCTIBLE = RWMNMN i i WORIMSO01TPIMSAMPIANO 10539202 12/01/7004 12/011200S LjvS,4T0Q dPLDYMI UARKM ANY�tlE7BO "NrWWW0", ECUTIVE E.L. EACH ACC►OEMT c 1 000 O ER [l1IC 07 Et_ dSEAlE - EA 0^0YU i LINO. H yyssss,. dgafUa uneir SPECIAL PRoVISIONt bftw OTTIEIt 1 oft I at anOC LIIW�K� Te7(ALLIMOHSADGQDtyYWi00R�M19f1'/IPECMLPIIOYISIGME ertificate holder is additional insured and clusdes waiver of subrogation for usiness Auto and General Liability. Waiver of subrogation applies to Workers Coepensation. *401AW ANY OF TIM "an ONIORDW 11"ES LIB CANCELLED SWORE TM 9W RATION DATE THOREOF. THE IS IMG SHKO :R ILILL ENIZAVOR TO MAIL 10 DAY! wmTTEN *am To THE OERTmm. ► oum NAYLEI TQ TIR LEFT, City of LubbockSLIT PMNMMSTOOWL SYCNNOT ICEMMALLN"SENOOIUGAT"ORIJAMILM PO Box 2000 OF ANY ► M U/" THE MNt101E1L ns AO� OR MPaUVI TATIM-L Lubbock, TX 7940E ALrr►Ioaallnlee ACORD 25 maims FAX: (E00722-30E7 eACORD CORPORATION IM 119V�G Nl7LY �►'tN1+IGUltl7trC FAGt 62/92 IMPORTANT If the oeAificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(les) must be endorsed. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in Neu of such endomemera(s). H SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such ?ndorsement(s). DISCLAIMER The Certificate of insurance on the reverse side d this torn does not constitute a contract between the issuing Insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certIfIcabe holder, nor does it affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or atter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon. ACORD 25 (2001108) ACaRP- CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE °"TEIMMMO"YM 10/25/2005 PRODUCER (806) 798-7800 Hettler Insurance Agency 4906 Lakeridge Drive Suite 1 Lubbock TX 7 9424- THIS CERTIFICATE 15 ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR HOLDER ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIL 0 INSURED Image Furnishings Inc PO Box 53323 Lubbock TX 79453- WSURERA 8af4pc0 Ins CO Of America R45URER0: WSURERG INSURER 0: 1 INSURFAV CAV9RAMr-q THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT. TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE THRMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INYSR R D'l INSAC TYPE OFINIURANCE POLICY NUMO1111111 DA N LAIRS A X GENERAL uA91ury eACH I NC s 11000,000 s 200,000 X COMM&RciALGENERAL LIABILITY letstMSwaDF oectlR 2�C-OOe966-2 /2005 -0W?2/20FAW EXI N — E--4,0,0 PERRONALLADV INIURY s 1,000,000 GFNFRAL AQQRF2M s 2,000,000 (IEN'L AGGREGATE APPLIES PER: P $ 2,000,000 p pLIMIT a. POLICY TLT LOC AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ANY AUTO / / / / COMOMIED 81NGLE LIMIT (Ea saw6mj s BODILY INJURY (Par PwM ) 9 ALI.OWWO AUTO$ 6CMEDuLEDAUTO6 / / / / OODILY *UURY (Par aadd&Vj s HIRCD AUTOS NON.OUIrNED AT1T0$ / / / / PROPERTY DAMAGE GARAGE UAWIJTY AUTO ONLY -EA ACCIDENT S OTHER THAN S ANY AUTO / / / / S AUTO ONLY: AOO EACESSIUMBRELLIL LIABILITY GACM OCCURRENCE S OCCUR ❑ CLAMS MADC AGGRECATE s I DEDUCTIBLE RETENTION s WORKERS COMPENSATION AND I T HMPLOMV LIABILITY ANY PROPRIETOR1PARTNER/ELECUTIVe E,L. FACM w IOFNT S E.L DISEASE- EA EMPtMk S OFFICERMIEMOCR U(CLUOEO9 / / / / 11 y�««ss w&"M4 unou APECIAL PROVISIONS blow E.L. DIBEABE - POLICY LI T s OTHER PROP 24 CC 00925E-2 06/22/2005 06/22/2006 OMPjPTION OF OPBRATIONSA.00ATIONSWHCLPSIERCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMGNVSPEFAAL.PP4)WSKM City of Lubbock in as additional insured under tho general liability oeation. RTIFICATE HOL 01:K {.AIVtxLL.A I II;JIV aw"m ANY OF THE AYOVE DESCRWD POLICIES BE CANCE1IED BEFORE THE EjUnRA71ON DATE THEREOP, THE ISSUING WSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 10 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLM NAMED TO THE LEFT. a" City of Lubbock FAILURE TO DO 30 SHALL IMPOSE OWGATTON OR LLAIH.LTY OF ANY IOND UPON TT� 1625 13 th St IN AGENTS OR RE RE.W au D RPPRE A Lubbock TX 79401- ACORD 2612001108) a ACORD CORPORATION 1988 n INS025wom.05 i ELECTRONIC LASER FGRMS. INC. - (60OM?-0(YLS Pepe I a12 ACORD CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE(MMIDp/YYYY) ,M 10/25/2005 PRODUCER Bledsoe Insurance Agency, Inc. THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE 1 5143 69th Street HOLDER. TIIIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. P.U. Box 65028 Lubbock TX 79464 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # INSURED J S L LANDSCAPING, INC. INSURERA:-%nl'ICII Insurance Setvices,lnc. 0 8008 Slide Road, Suite 29 INSURERs:__. Lubbock TX 79424_INSURERc-__ INSURER THE r 0I]CIE S OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY RFOUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SLTCI I rVL1k,1E0. F UU UC I U LIIVII1 J JI I VVIY 1-1 F1 V U UL I`11 UI U 1 F-U V1_P111VIV. ISR DD'L POLICY NUMBER POLICY EXPIRATION LIMITS POLICY EFFECTIVE 1000000 GENERAL LIABILITY SC1`00970410 06/l5/2005 0(t/15/2006 EACHO_CCURRENCE. S X DAMAGE TO RENTED 300000 COMIAFRCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY PREMISES -(Ea occurence) 100t10 CI -AIMS MADF I X I OCCUR MED EXUAny one person)____- E I t)0o600 PERSONAL & ADV INJURY S 2000000 GENERAL AGGREGATE--- S GENT AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS - COMPIOP AGG S 2000000 POLICY n -IFPRO- r� LOC � AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY: SITS00096 T621 06/ 1 S/2005 06/ 1 5/2006 COMBINED SitY'4 F LIMIT �. c 100000 ANY AUTO (Fa accidenH ALL OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY $ X SCHEDULED AUTOS (Per person) X HIRED AI ITOS BODILY INJUR', S ! X NON -OWNED AUTOS (Per accident) - - -- PROPERTY DAb1AGF (Per accident) u GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO -ONLY -.-EA ACCIDENT S ' !_ t ANY AUTO EA ACC OTHER THAN ' � $ E AUTO ONLY: AGG S EXCESSIUMBRELLA LIABILITY FACH OCCURRENCE S _ OCCUR C J CLAIMS MADE AGGREGAI E S DEDIICTIBLE $ RETENTION $ S - WORKERS COMPENSATION AND WC S1ATU• I OI FI- 1 ORY LIMITS FR EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY E.L. EACH ACCIDENT 5 _ ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE OFFICER/MEMSER EXCLUDED? E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE g If yes, describe under - SPECIAL PROVISIONS below E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ - OTHERC~ornn l Pkg. SCPU0970410 06/15/2005 06/15/2006 £,CRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS / VEHICLES / EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT / SPECIAL PROVISIONS r: 775-2089 `ertificate holder is named as Additional Insured with regard to general liability coverage. A waiver of subrogation applies !i1h regard to the general liability coverage. City of Lubbock P. 0. Box 2000 Lubbock ORD 25 (2001I08) SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFOM THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 11 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO DO SO SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR_LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER, ITS AGENTS OR Tx 79457 AUTHORIZED afl(� © ACORD CORPORATION 1988 ACORD. CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE 10/21/05D'YY'") PRODUCER THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION McQueary Henry Bowles Troy LLP 12700 Park Central Drive ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. 17th Floor Dallas, TX 75251-0470 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # INSURED Lydick Hooks Roofing Co of Lubbock Inc P O Box 2605 Lubbock, TX 79408 INSURERA: Employers Mutual Casualty 21415 INSURERB: EMCASCO Insurance Company 21407 INSURER C: INSURER D: INSURER E: COVERAGES THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. LTR NSR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE DATE MM/DD/YY POLICY EXPIRATION DATE MM/DD LIMBS A GENERAL LIABILITY 2D0001306 01/01/05 01/01/06 EACH OCCURRENCE $1,000,000 X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY DAMAGE TO RSES (E.ENTED RE MCLAIMS $100,000 MADE 51OCCUR MED EXP (Any one person) $5 000 PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $1,000,000 GENERAL AGGREGATE $2 OOO OOO GENT AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG s2,000,000 POLICY X JECOT- X LOC B AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY 2N0001306 01/01/05 01/01/06 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT X ANY AUTO (Ea accident) $1,000,000 BODILY INJURY $ ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS (Per person) BODILY INJURY $ HIRED AUTOS NON -OWNED AUTOS (Per accident) PROPERTY DAMAGE $ (Per accident) GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $ OTHER THAN EA ACC $ ANY AUTO $ AUTO ONLY: AGG A EXCESSIUMBRELLA LIABILITY 2V0001306 01/01/05 01/01/06 EACH OCCURRENCE $5 000,000 X OCCUR CLAIMS MADE AGGREGATE s5,000,000 $ DEDUCTIBLE $ RETENTION $ 1 O 000 B WORKERS COMPENSATION AND 2L0001306 01 /01105 01 /01106 X WRY I IMI ATT- oTH- EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $1 O,OO,000 ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $1,000,000 OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? If yes, describe under SPECIAL PROVISIONS below E.L. DISEASE -POLICY LIMIT 1 $1,000,000 A OTHER Installation 2Z0001306 01/01/05 01/01/06 $1,000,000 Any One Site Floater $25,000 Transit $1,000 Deductible DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS / VEHICLES / EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT / SPECIAL PROVISIONS Project: Fire Station #8, City of Lubbock City of Lubbock is named additional insured with regard to the liability policies of the insured, but only with respect to and to the extent of the liabilities assumed by the insured under written contract. _a CERTIFICATE HOLDER Minnix Construction PO Box 64895 Lubbock, TX 79464 ACORD 25 (2001/08) 1 of 2 #M49431 CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 1_ DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO DO SO SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE -40. � B 9 / KBN © ACORD CORPORATION 1988 IMPORTANT If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). DISCLAIMER The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon. ACORD 254 (2001108) 2 of 2 #M49431 AC40-R-D-1. CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE 1 10/21/2 5' PRODUCER (806)374-4621 FAX (806)374-2823 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION PIA Insurance Agency, Inc. ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE 500 S. Taylor, Suite 901 HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. P. 0. Box 2169 Amarillo, TX 79105-2169 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC 9 INSURED Panhandle Fire Protection, L.L.C. INSURERA: First Mercury Ins. Company P.O. BOX 8877 INSURER B: Service Lloyds Insurance Co. Amarillo, TX 79114 INSURERC: INSURER D: INSURER E: /`AVFRAPFC THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR DD'L NSRrGENERAL TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION LIMITS LIABILITY FMMI008334 09/02/2005 09/02/2006 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000.0001 X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY DAMAGE TO RENTED $ 5O, OO CLAIMS MADE rX OCCUR MED EXP (Any one person) $ 5,00 PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 A GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS -COMP/OP AGG $ 2,000,000 POLICY PRCTO- LOC JE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ANY AUTO COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Ea accident) $ ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ HIRED AUTOS NON -OWNED AUTOS PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident) $ GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $ OTHER THAN EA ACC $ ANY AUTO $ AUTO ONLY: AGG EXCESS/UMBRELLALIABWTY EACH OCCURRENCE $ OCCUR CLAIMS MADE AGGREGATE $ $ $ DEDUCTIBLE $ RETENTION $ WORKERS COMPENSATION AND SAW14175-05 09/22/2005 09/22/2006 X WCRYSTATIMIIU- OTH- L ER B EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE OFFICERWEMBER EXCLUDED? E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ 1,000,000 E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ 1,000,000 If yes, describe under SPECIAL PROVISIONS below E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ 1,000,000 OTHER DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS I VEHICLES I EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT I SPECIAL PROVISIONS ertificate Holder is shown as an Additional Insured as respects the General Liability. aiver of Subrogation is provided in favor of Certificate Holder as respects the eneral Liability and Workers' Compensation. CERTIFICATE HOLDER i r I f-AkIf%MI I ATIf%kl SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 10 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, City of Lubbock BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY P.O. Box 2000 OF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE j Lubbock, TX 79453 Robert Barks/KIM ACORD 25 (2001108) OACORD CORPORATION 1988 ------••Im •+•-11k • 64 #vnB•s. yr LIP%Q§L.1 I i 1114auf' AmtoC --- r� rr lOi2 2005 PROD uxR 306) 792 - 5564 FAX 306 2-9344 THIS CERTIFICATE 18 ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION Sanford Insurance Agency ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE 6303 Indians Ave. HOLDEILTHIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, 6IX eD OR ALTEREILM P.O. Box 54790 Lubbock, TX 79413 INSURERS AFFORDING CIDVERAGE NA C N INBtNTBo South Pans Service Heating and Air NIS~A: Evanston Insurance n 5 1116 Avenue T MISURER B: Lubbock. TX 711415 P aURBL C.- INSURER 0: INSURER E: nnuwewr_ee THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE SEEN ISSUED 10 THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY P[R10D INDICATED. NOTWM46TANO" ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN. THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. W R Jam TYPE OF BIBURANOI ►OL wr NLNElER iOLICY EFFEC POLICY EkPIRA Uwre OINEPAL LIABILITY CL420401153 03/30/2005 03/30 2006 EACH oot mmmcB I 1 OOp, X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY _ RENTED i S0 CLAIMS MADE a OCCUR MED Ilw (Any wIA permn) I — 1 A Pf,RiONAL I. ADV INJURY i 1 000 And 6&WRALAWjRWATI I 2 Sop' GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APF%S PER: PRODUCTS • LOMP/OP AGG I 250001 Q POLICY f7 VT r 1 LOC AUTOMOILE LIABILITY ANYAUTO COMBfldip IMOLE LIMIT ImpwddwI) I OWLY INJURY (PA' Rrw) = ALL OWNQDAUT08 BCHEOULED AUTOS BODILY NIJURY (PAf Awi&Ird) S HIRED AUTOC N1111•0WNE0 AUTOS (ROPEM Pw AtGIMB►E f GARAGE WBIL" AUTO ONLY • EAAC OWT S OTHER THAN EA ACC S ANY AUTO I AUTO ONLY; AGO EXC96LV44MLLA LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE I OCCUR rI CLAIMS MADE AGOREOATE S I s VeDUCTIMA RETENTION i WG aP4 COMPBNBATION AM , T iMPLOYew LIMEJTY ANY PROPRIETOR/P ECUTIVE OMCV MEMW1i)(CL EDT E.L.LAW ACCIDENT i E_L.OWASH•EAGWLOY I 4-II yywN dAAafbs urdw WAL P'r4'0 ION8 W .. E.L DIBE/L4B . POLICY IJW I OTHER LTESCRIPym OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS /V6HMM /EXCL *M— ADDED BY ENOORf@MBKf I aPEGAL PROVIEIONB TIFICATE HOLDER IS NAMED AS BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED ON GENERAL LIABILITY WITH A BLANKET WAIVER OF SUBROGATION ON GENERAL LIABILITY AS PER WRITTEN CONTRACT. 7OF HOLDER LUBBOCK P.O. BOX 2000 LUBBOCK, TX 79453 a ACORD 25 (2001108) GANCELL.A I RM SNOMD ANY OP rNE AWA ULSCRBED POUCH N CANCE IED BEPOIII THE EJIPIRATION DATE THEREOF. THE BISWM M MMM WILL EMOEAVOR TO MAL _IQ, DAY! WRIrTW NOTICE TO THE OERTBOCATO NDWIR NAMED TO THE UWT, BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH M YFWr SHALL BBPOSI N//O++��OBLIGATION OR LVALRY OF ANY WINO UPON THE INSURA K ITS AO@fll OR RORlBlILSMNE111 AUTHOWZIRp RE►RISSMA CORPORATION 1961 I I IMPORTANT If the certificate holder Is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement on this certificate does not corder rights to the certificate holder In lieu of such endorsement(s). If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endomement(s). DISCLAIMER The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between the issuing insurer(s), suftdzed representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does It affirmatively or negatively emend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon. u; -.i ... 1 i9 L ,3 Lj y �a ACORD 25 (2001108) TOTAL P.02 Lj -- -- - --- — — ...,..,. —1 , rnA nv, Iiii'tI I r. z CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE This certifies that STATE FARM FIRE AND CASUALTY COMPANY, Bloomington, Illinois ❑ STATE FARM GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY, Bloomington, Illinois ,�.�„� ❑ STATE FARM FIRE AND CASUALTY COMPANY, Scarborough, Ontario [j STATE FARM FLORIDA INSURANCE COMPANY, Winter Haven, Florida ❑ STATE FARM LLOYDS, Dallas, Texas Insures the following policyholder for the coverages indicated below, Policyholder SOUTH PLAINS SERVICE HEATING AND AIR Address of policyholder PO BOX 9 LUBBOCK , TX 79408 �T Location of operations 1116 N AVE T, LUBBOCK, TX 79415 M Description of operations Blanket waiver of Subrogation on Workers Comp. The policies listed below have been issued to the policyholder for the policy periods shown, The insurance described in these policies Is subject to all the terms, exclusions, and conditions of those policies. The limits of liability shown may have been reduced by any paid claims. POLICY PERIOD LIMITS OF LIABILITY POLICY NUMBER TYPE OF INSURANCE Effective pge; Expiration Dale (at beginning of policy period) Comprehensive BODILY INJURY AND Business Liability ---------- PROPERTY DAMAGE --------- This insurance includes 93-TK-0*719-2 F Products - Completed OI ❑ Contractual Liability [] Personal Injury ❑ Advertising Injury El 11 EXCESS LIABILITY ❑ Umbrella ❑ Other Workers' Compensation and Employers Liability POLICY NUMBER TYPE OF INSURANCE 93-Th-0719 2 F workers Camp POLICY PERIOD Effective Date ; Expiraba POLICY PERIOD Effective Date ; Expirattla 09/01/05 09/01 POLICY PERIOD Each Occurrence $ General Aggregate $ Products - Completed $ 80DtLY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE Date (Combined Single Limit) Each Occurrence $ Aggregate $ Dane Effective Date ; Expiration Dato 09/01/05 09/01/06 Part It - Employers Liability Each Accident $ Disease - Each Employee $ Disease Policy Limit $ LIMITS OF LIABILITY (at beginning of policy period) 1,000,000;1,000,000;1,000,000 1 I 1 THE CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE IS NOT A CONTRACT OF INSURANCE AND NEITHER AFFIRMATIVELY NOR NEGATIVEL AMENDS, EXTENDS OR ALTERS THE COVERAGE APPROVED BY ANY POLICY DESCRIBED HEREIN. Name and Address of Certificate Holder City of Lubbock PO Box 2000 Lubbock, TX 79454 5511-994 a.5 Rev. 11-08-2004 Prinled in U,SA If any of the described policies are canceled before their expiration date, State Farm will try to mail a written notice to the certificate holder 30 days before cancellation. If however, we fail to mail such notice, no obligation or liability w11i be imposed on State AVJ or its ag nt for representatives. 1 uror q ized Representative AGENT 110-21-2005 Title Date NELDA JETT Agent Name TetephoneNumber 806-793-2857____�__,._,__ Agent's Code Stamp Agent Code 6706 AFO Code F064 AGM. CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE Poomm" Atchley Inourance Associates P.O. Box 7 Olney, TX 76374 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# W KWAID W.A. Atchley, Jr DBA WA Paving 5022 N. FM 2528 Lub ock, TX 79415 weunln k Atlantic Caegalty- EVslwa& Old American County Rr-S wiftw RD EdURERE IrnwanAramc THE POUCIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REOUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN 18 SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES, AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS, NBR AM POuCY NUMBER Uw= aganu LIANLJTV EACHOCCURFWWS $1,000,000 A MMMEIICu1LaENERALIIABILITY OIA101AAOE Qx OCCUR L0 57002246 612/03 6/2/06 NEOQIP oM50.00 5,000 PEABONAL aADV KKIRY : aeteuL AOOKEDATE $1 non. pop oENLAQO11E0ATEUMITAPPLIESPM FOLICY P LoC PRODUCTS-oWWWAaG S AY1 OYDBKt Ll"UTY ANY A► O sEfou Llwrr f 55,016 80 1w B ALL OWNED AVMI SCHkDULiD mos ASB 40IL3249 4/24/05 4/24/06 BODILY MMJUM (wAnmrq f HEtED AUIOE NONVMMAUTOS PROPERTYDAHAOE T& 600" + OARMULIANUM AUTOONLY-EAAOCID[NT I CM"THAN ItAACO ANYALITO f MUMMY: Aa0 UMMA1MSHELLA LJAMIUM OCCUR CLAIMBMAOE EACH OCCURRENCE f AOaREOAT! f • D) DUCfIBLE RETENTION f WORKSRS COMMOATKIN AND E1FLDYMV LIABILITY EL FACHAOCINNY S OFFICkRMAiMBeAEKaLOFm � �Yw BPE�W � , below 11.L.01GRAU-MEMPLOYE! S C L, DISEASE - POLICY umrr C OTHER Group Accident Coverage GH4900-18 11-28-03 contino s $1,000,000. Per eae accident oEsaaPnoN aP oPERATIONB / LOCATIONS/YE/SaiB/ExCLUNOMS ApDEDBY �T/sPiM)t,LLPeDYlIuo1N Driveway,parking area paving 1L repaving THERE IS A BLANKET WAIVER OF SUBROGATION ON THE WORKERS COMPENSATION. AILANKET WAAVER OF SUBROGATION AND ADDITIONAL INSURED ON THE COMMERCIAL GENREAL LIABILITY. CANCELLATION CITY 0 F LUBBOCK WWUW AM OF WO ABOVE 0=S D POUMM BE CANCELLED SEfuRE THE ■iFMIATm P.O. BOX 2000 DATE TH�OF, THE MIMS WEINIER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 30 DAYS rY11ITTBN LUBBOCK, TX 79453 *OMTO TII! OERTIFI ATE HOLMN HAKE° TO THE LEI<T, BUT FAILURE TO 00 BO SHALL N{POES HO OBUGTKMI D11 YABILJTY OF ANY KEYD UFON T1I! 941iRER, 1Ti AwNn ON ( M-4w 'O: CITY OF LUBBOCK P.O. BOX 2000 LUBBOCK, TX 79457 CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DATE: TYPE OF PROJECT: CHIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT (Name and Address of Insured) is, ,t the date of this certificate, insured by this Company with respect to the business operations hereinafter described, for F,! the typed of insurance and in accordance with the provisions of the standard policies used by this company, the further Iereinafter described. Exceptions to standard policy noted hereon. TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER EFFECTIVE EFFECTIVE LMUTS DATE DATE ENERAL LIABILITI' ] Commercial General Liability General Aggregate $ ❑ Claims Made Products-Comp/Op AGG $ ❑ Occurrence Personal & Adv. Injury $ —'] Owner's & Contractors Protective Each Occurrence $ `-1 Fire Damage (Any one Fire) $ Med Exp (Any one Person) 1 UTOMOTIIIE LIABILITY -] Any Auto Combined Single Limit $ -J All Owned Autos Bodily Injury (Per Person) $ ❑ Scheduled Autos Bodily Injury (Per Accident) $ !7 Hired Autos Property Damage $ Non -Owned Autos ] GARAGE LIABILTTY Any Auto Auto Only - Each Accident $ ] Other than Auto Only: Each Accident $ Aggregate $ :: j B UILDER'S RISK 100% of the Total Contract Price $ ❑ INSTALLATIOA'FLOATER $ EXCESS LIABILITY __] Umbrella Form Each Occurrence $ Aggregate $ _p Other Than Umbrella Form $ WORKERS COMPEA'SATIONAND EMPLOIERS' LIABILITY The Proprietor/ ❑ Included Statutory Limits Partners/Executive ❑ Excluded Each"Accident $ Officers are: Disease Policy Limit $ Disease -Each Employee $ 'OTHER ";The above policies either in the body thereof or by appropriate endorsement provide that they may not be changed or canceled by the insurer in less than the legal time required after the insured has received written notice of such change or cancellation, or in case there is no legal requirement, in less than five days in advance of cancellation. FIVE COPIES OF THE CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE r (Name of Insurer) MUST BE SENT TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK By: Title: The Insurance Certificates Furnished shall name the City of Lubbock as a Primary Additional Insured on General Liability and Automobile Liability and provide a Waiver of Subrogation in favor of the City of Lubbock. CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST CONTRACTOR SI ALL: (1) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (2) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (3) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of r coverage ends during the duration of the project; (4) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (A) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and J (B) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showmi g extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (7) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: PROOF OF COVERAGE SHALL BE FURNISHED TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK IN THE FORM OF A 'CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE. THE INSURANCE CERTIFICATES FURNISHED SHALL NAME THE 2ITY OF LUBBOCK AS A PRIMARY ADDITIONAL INSURED AND PROVIDE A WAIVER OF 3UBROGATION IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK, OR IN THE ALTERNATIVE, SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY A STATEMENT FROM THE CONTRACTOR TO THE EFFECT THAT NO WORK ON PHIS PARTICULAR PROJECT SHALL BE SUBCONTRACTED. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TO THE OWNER ALL PROOF OF COVERAGE INSURANCE DOCUMENTS INCLUDING WORKERS COMPENSATION COVERAGE FOR EACH SUBCONZTRACTOR. 9 REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must (see reverse) be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering U.quipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the ,Adentity of their employer or status as an employee." ' "Call the Texas VATorkers' Compensation Commission at (512) 440-3789 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and (8) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: F- (A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the proj ect; (C) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this rule; (D) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (E) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (ii) -prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (F) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (G) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within (ten) 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (H) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services.❑ k- u 0 Ul CONTRACT #6238 STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 131h day of October, 2005 by and between the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through the Mayor, City of Lubbock, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and Minnix Commercial Partners Ltd. of the City of Lubbock, Countv of Lubbock and the State of Texas hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR. WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: BID #05-114-MA - CONSTRUCTION OF NEW FIRE STATION #8 - $1,141,440.00 and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement. Minnix Commercial Partners Ltd's bid dated September 20, 2005 is incorporated into and made a part of this agreement. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the bid submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make payment on account thereof as provided therein. -p IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed thistement in Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas in the year and day first above written. CONTRACTOR: Minnix Commercial Partners, Ltd. COMPLETE ADDRESS: Minnix Commercial Partners, Ltd. PO Box 64895 Lubbock, TX 79464-4895 ATTEST: Corporate Secretary CITY By:, A T: Ci e retary (OWNER): AS T CO TENT: 2il O is Representativgb- j APPROVED AS FORM: City Attorney GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 1. OWNER Whenever the word Owner, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas. 2. CONTRACTOR Whenever the word Contractor, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co- partnership or corporation, to wit MINIVIX COMMERCIAL PARTNERS, LTD who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this contract, or their legal representative. 3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to, City of Lubbock, or its representative HARLAN STAUFFER, FACILITIES MANAGER, so designated who will inspect constructions; or to such other representatives, supervisors, architects, engineers, or inspectors as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisors or inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or persons acting on behalf of the Contractor. 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Bid, Signed Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificates, and all other documents made available to Bidder for inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. The above described materials are sometimes referred to herein as the "contract" or "contract documents". 5. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 6. SUBCONTRACTOR The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor. WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last business address known to the party who gives the notice. 8. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. 10. LAYOUT Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. 11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be furnished copies, of all Plans and Specifications without expense to Contractor and Contractor shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. 12. RIGHT OF ENTRY The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress or quality of the executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents. Owner's Representative will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will Owner's Representative be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. Notwithstanding the Owner's Representative's rights of entry hereunder, the Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 13. LINES AND GRADES All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever Owner's Representative deems said lines and grades are necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall 2 suspend its work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by Contractor, its Subcontractors, or its employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the F, Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner`s Representative has the authority to review all work included herein. The Owner's Representative has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to ensure the proper execution of the contract. The Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under the contract documents, and shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to . the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The decision of the Owner's Representative shall be conclusive in the absence of written objection to same delivered to Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of any decision or direction by Owner's Representative. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper A inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within fifteen (15) calendar days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for its decision. In the R absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in its absence and all directions given to superintendent shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. It is expressly agreed that adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor. U-1 The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be bome by the Contractor. The Owner or Owner's Representatives shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any subcontractors, or any of Contractor's agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work. 7. 0 20 21 CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied itself as to the nature and location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way affect the work under the contract documents. No oral agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, or Owner's Representative either before or after the execution of this contract, shall affect or, modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Subject to the rights of Owner as set forth in Paragraph 23 hereof, all modifications and/or amendments to the contract documents, shall be in writing, and executed by Owner's Representative and Contractor. Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at its own cost and expense. CHARACTER OF WORKERS The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in the performance in the type of Rork required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform Contractor in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in Owner's Representative's sole opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unacceptable to Owner or Owner's Representative, such man or men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's Representative's written consent. CONSTRUCTION PLANT The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted. The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the Owner's Representative shall consent or direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. SANITATION Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced. OBSERVATION AND TESTING _j The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all times to observe and test the work. Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at any location wherever such work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any observation that may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject any I A such work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its . completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Representative has i 4 previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any such work should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and LI Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents. If any such work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests, inspections or approvals, and any work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approvals but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective, and shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under the contract documents to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from its obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES It is expressly agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owner's Representative as unsuitable or not in conformity with plans, specifications and/or contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance with the contract documents. It is further agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense. 2.3. , CHANGES .AND ALTERATIONS The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either g before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond. If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned. 24. EXTRA WORK The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work as shown on the. plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered by Contractor's bid, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein. It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods: Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the lesser of the following: (1) actual field cost of the extra work, plus fifteen (15%) percent; or (2) the amount that would have been charged by a reasonable and prudent Contractor as a reasonable and necessary cost for performance of the extra work. In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C)(1), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate Contractor for its profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost." No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which Contractor should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, Contractor shall prior to commencement of such extra work, make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof as provided under Method (C)(1). If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before the commencement of any extra work, any claim for payment due to alleged extra work shall be deemed waived. ?5. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS It is further agreed that it is the intent of the contract documents that all work described in the bid, the -, specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that 6 such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Owners' Representative and a clarification obtained before the bids are received, and if no such notice is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be deemed that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before bidding of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of bids. RIGHT OF OVATNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall comply with such order. If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase its force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress. PROTECTION AG_ALNST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC AND GENERAL INDEMNTI`Y The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the Rork and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, its sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees against any all losses, costs, damages, expenses, liabilities, claims and/or causes of action, whether known or unknown, fixed, actual, accrued or contingent, liquidated or unliquidated, including, but not limited to, attorneys' fees and expenses, in connection with, incident to, related to, or arising out of, the Contractor's or any subcontractor's, agent's or employee's, in any manner whatsoever, omission, execution and/or supervision of this contract, and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in its sole discretion as an Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses, are intended as reminders to the Contractor of its duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of its subcontractors. 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall not cornmence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of ' Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) calendar days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies of insurance, required herein, including policies of insurance required to be provided by Contractor .. 7 and its subcontractors, shall contain a waiver of any and all of the insurer's or payor's, in the event of self- insurance, rights to subrogation that any such insurer or payor, in the event of self-insurance, may acquire by virtue of payment of any loss under such insurance or self-insurance. All certificates of insurance submitted to the City in conformity with the provisions hereof shall establish such waiver. The Contractor shall procure and carry at its sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution. PROOF OF COVERAGE SHALL BE FURNISHED TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK IN THE FORM OF A CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE ALONG Vf'ITH A COPY OF THE ADDITIONAL INSURED ENDORSEMENT. THE INSURANCE CERTIFICATES FURNISHED SHALL NAME THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS A PRIMARY ADDITIONAL INSURED AND PROVIDE A WAIVER OF SUBROGATION IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS REQUIRED BELOW, OR IN THE ALTERNATIVE, SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY A STATEMENT FROM THE CONTRACTOR TO THE EFFECT THAT NO WORK ON THIS PARTICULAR PROJECT SHALL BE SUBCONTRACTED. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TO THE OWNER ALL PROOF OF COVERAGE INSURANCE DOCUMENTS INCLUDING WORKERS COMPENSATION COVERAGE FOR EACH SUBCONTRACTOR A. General Liability Insurance (Primary Additional Insured and Waiver of Subrogation required) The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $1.000.000 Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include: Premises and Operations Products & Completed Operations Hazard Contractual Liability Independent Contractors Coverage Personal Injury Advertising Injury B. Owner's and Contractor's Protective Liability Insurance — NOT REQUIRED C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance (Primary Additional Insured and Waiver of Subrogation Required) The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than; Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $500,000 Combined Single Limit, to include all owned and non -owned cars including: Employers Non -ownership Liability Hired and Non -owned Vehicles. The City is to be named as a primary additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. D. Builder's Risk Insurance/Installation Floater Insurance. The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of 100% of the total contract price (100% of potential loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured. E 8 it E. Umbrella Liability Insurance - NOT REQL`1RED F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance (Waiver of Subrogation required) Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $500,000. 1. Definitions: Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TVJCC- 82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the Contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in Section 0406.096, Texas Labor Code) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner - operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. 2. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. 3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. 4. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the governmental entity: (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (b) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. IJ 6 The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. 7. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any, change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. 8. The Contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating hove a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. 9. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on the project, to: (a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (b) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (c) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each other person %ith whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by paragraphs (a) - (g), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the 1 Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the project vrill be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes 1 10 and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self - Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. 11. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. G. Proof of Coverage Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance company setting forth: (1) The name and address of the insured. (2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies. (3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured E4 at the address shown in the bid specifications. (6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate. (7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the L, job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable. (8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project. (9) A Contractor shall: (a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and L filling of any coverage agreements; (b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a neiv certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing (, coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and L_ 11 (ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Texas Vdorker's Compensation Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30 point bold type and text in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPER'SAYYO.N' COJ'ERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project niust be covered by workers' compensation insurmice. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee. " "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 8001372-7713 or 512/804- 4000 (ittu://)4,ww.t}+,cc.state.ta:.us/twcccontacts.ht7it to receive information of the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the i required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage; " a7ld J (h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing I services on the project, for the duration of the project; (ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the Contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the following language: ''By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the person signing this ' contract is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the person signing this contract who will provide services on the project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reprinting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the 12 commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions."; (iv) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the proj ect; and (2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (i)-(�tii), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. DISABLED EMPLOYEES Contractors having more than fifteen (15) employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of r 1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and privileges of employment. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees that it will indemnify and save the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees, harmless against any and all claims, liabilities, losses, damages, expenses and causes of action arising out of, in any way, manner or form, the demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and supplies, incurred in the performance of this contract and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or owner �� 13 thereof. Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and save the Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is (� specified or required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, if the material or process specified or required by Owner and/or this contract is an infringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless it gives written notice of such infringement to the Owner's Representative prior to bidding. ? . LAVVS T AI\-D ORDINANCES The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local lavers, ordinances and regulations, which in any manner affect the contract or the work, and without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner, and all of its officers, agents, and employees against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor, its employees, or subcontractors. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall notify the Owner's Representative in writing prior to bidding and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. In the absence of timely written notification to Owner's Representative of such variance or variances within said time, any objection and/or assertion that the plans and specifications are at variance with any federal, state or local laws, ordinances or regulations shall be deemed waived. If the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors perform any work contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's Representative, Contractor shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. SUBCONTRACTING The Contractor agrees that it will retain personal control and will give its personal attention to the fulfillment of this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from its full obligations to the Owner, as provided by the contract documents. 4. TRYIE FOR SUBST_AN'TIAL COMPLETION AND LIOUIDATED DAMAGES It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract documents, of work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced as provided in the contract documents. If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to substantially complete the work within the time herein t. specified, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold perrnanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $350.00 EE- HUNDRED FIFTY) PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as LJ herein set forth for each and every working day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for substantially completing the work 14 It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the substantial completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because the actual damages Ellthe Owner would sustain in such event would be difficult and/or impossible to estimate, however, the amount agreed upon herein is a reasonable forecast of the amount necessary to render just compensation to Owner, and is expressly agreed to be not disproportionate to actual damages as measured at time of breach. IT IS FURTHER AGREED AND UNDERSTOOD BETATEEINT THE CONTRACTOR AND OWNER THAT T11VM IS OF THE ESSENCE OF THIS CONTRACT. THE AND ORDER OF COMPLETION It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be allowed to prosecute its work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the bid; provided, also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by its own force, the Owner's Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized. The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative, schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor intends to carry on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. TD E OF PERFORMANCE The Contractor agrees that it has submitted its bid in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 34 hereinabove set forth and expressly agrees that it shall not be entitled to, nor will it request, an extension of time on this contract, except when its work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. Any request for extension shall be in writing with the written request for same setting forth all justifications, in detail, for the request, and submitted to Owner's Representative within twenty (20) calendar days of the occurrence of the event causing said delay. A failure by Owner's Representative to affirmatively grant the extension no later than twenty (20) calendar days of written submission by Contractor shall be deemed a denial, and final. Further, in the absence of timely written notification of such delay and request for extension, as provided herein, any request for extension by Contractor shall be deemed waived. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS In executing the contract, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein fixed, Contractor has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such work, whether growing out of delays due to unusual and unanticipated circumstances, difficulties or delays in securing material or workmen, or any other cause or occurrence. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in which event, such expense as in the sole judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. d 15 3. QUAN'ITTIES AND MEASUREMENTS No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to shown clearly all work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimates, for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their bids offered for the work. In the event the amount of work to be done and materials to be famished are expressly stated to be estimated, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimated, it is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project. ?. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and Contractor shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. Without limiting, in any way, manner and form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner, and any of its officers, agents and employees, against any and all claims or damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, related to, arising from or growing out of the performance of this contract. PRICE FOR WORK In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the bid proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in fall for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by Contractor and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative. 1 T�M�•`, No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner, Owner's agents and employees, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract. 12. PARTIAL PAYMENTS t_l On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application for partial payment or, if the Contractor does not submit such application, the Owner's Representative shall 16 determine the amount to be partially paid. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment if submitted, and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order, shall prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month. The determination of the partial payment by the Owner's Representative shall be in accordance with Paragraph 14 hereof. The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by Owner under the terms of the contract documents. Any partial payment made hereunder shall not constitute a waiver by the Owner of any and all other rights to enforce the express terms of the contract documents, and all remedies provided therein, as to any and all work performed, to be performed and/or materials delivered hereunder, including, but limited to, work to which said partial payment is attributable. SUBSTANTLU COMPLETION Contractor shall give Owner's Representative written notice of substantial completion. Within thirty-one (31) worldng days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and/or the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time, if the work be found to be substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor a certificate of substantial completion. Notwithstanding the issuance of a certificate of substantial completion, Contractor shall proceed with diligence to finally complete the work within the time provided in this contract. FINAL COMPLETION AND PAYMENT The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner's Representative of final completion. Upon written notice of final completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement to determine whether final completion has occurred. If the Owner's Representative determines final completion has occurred, Owner's Representative shall so certify to the Owner. Upon certification by Owner's Representative of final completion, Owner shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31st worldng day after the date of certification of final completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement. Neither the certification of final completion nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the contract documents and/or any warranty or warranties implied by law or otherwise. CORRECTION OF WORK Contractor shall promptly remove from Owner's premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative on account of failure to conform to the contract documents, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and Contractor shall at its own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the contract documents. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense. Neither the final payment, nor certification of final completion or substantial completion, nor any provision in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and Contractor shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of certification of final completion by Owner's Representative. PAYNMNT WILD The Owner or Owner's Representative may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certification to such extent as may be necessary to protect itself from loss on account of: (a) Defective work not remedied and/or work not performed. (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims. (c) Damage to another contractor. When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. 7. CLAIM OR DISPUTE It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days after the Owner's Representative has given any direction, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. Timely written notice of dispute as provided in this contract of any decision by Owner's Representative or Owner shall be a condition precedent to the bringing and/or assertion of any action or claim by Contractor of any right under this Contract. If the matters set forth in the notice of dispute are not granted or otherwise responded to by Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of receipt of notice of dispute by Owner's Representative, said objections shall be deemed denied. Any decision by the Owner's Representative, or deemed denial by the Owner's Representative, shall be final and conclusive in the absence of fraud. It is further agreed that the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any and all claims of the Contractor, and constitute a waiver of the right to assert any claim against Owner, Owner's agents and employees and Owner's Representative, by Contractor. 8. NON-COMPLIANCE AND/OR ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR In case the Contractor should (1) abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within fifteen (15) calendar days after written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or (2) if the Contractor fails to comply with the written orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directedAo complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor. In the event a bond is not required by law, or otherwise obtained by the Contractor, no further notice of such non-compliance to Contractor shall be required. After receiving said notice of abandonment or non-compliance, the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. In the event the Contractor, or Surety, whichever is applicable, should fail to commence compliance with the notice hereinbefore provided within ten (10) calendar days after service of such notice, and/or shall fail to proceed with diligence to complete the project as contemplated and in compliance with all terms and provisions i of the contract documents, then the Owner may exercise any and all remedies available to it pursuant to law, contract, equity or otherwise, including, but not limited to, providing for completion of the work in either of the following elective manners: (a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or its Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or (b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. Should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith. In the event the Owner's Representative elects to complete the work, as described above, when the work shall have been finally completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certification of completion as provided in paragraph 44 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certification of completion. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) calendar days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies that remain on the jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, if applicable, to their proper owners. The remedies provided to Owner by law, equity, contract, or otherwise, shall be cumulative, to the extent permitted by law. It is expressly agreed and understood that the exercise by Owner of the remedies provided in this paragraph shall not constitute an election of remedies on the part of Owner, and Owner, irrespective of its exercise of remedies hereunder, shall be entitled to exercise concurrently or otherwise, any and all other remedies ` 19 available to it, by law, equity, contract or otherwise, including but not limited to, liquidated damages, as provided ir. paragraph 34, hereinabove set forth. f 1 LMTATIOINT ON CONTRACTOR'S REMEDY The remedies of Contractor hereunder shall be limited to, and Owner shall be liable only for, work actually performed by Contractor and/or its subcontractors as set forth in the contract documents, and Owner shall not be liable for any consequential, punitive or indirect loss or damage that Contractor may suffer in connection with the project which is the subject matter of this contract. 0. BONDS The Contractor is required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the Contractor is required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. All bonds shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. It is further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so furnished. SPECIAL CONDITIONS In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control. 2. LOSS OR EXPENSE DUE TO UNUSUAL OR UNTANTICIPATED CIRCUMSTANCES Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance or from unusual obstructions or difficulties, naturally occurring, man made or otherwise, which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. 3. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise, and control its own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's work during Contractor's performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. 4. CLEAMNG UP The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the completion of the work Contractor shall remove all such debris and also its tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor. 20 i HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND ASBESTOS Hazardous Substances (herein so called), as defined in the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (42 U.S.C.S. §9601(14)) and the regulations promulgated thereunder, as same may be amended from time to time, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, in any form; shall not (i) be utilized, in any way, manner or form, in the construction of, or incorporation into, the Project; or (ii) be brought upon, placed, or located, by any party, on the Project site, or any other property of the City, without the written consent of the Owner's Representative. If Contractor believes that the utilization of a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos is necessary in the construction of the Project, or that it is necessary to place and/or otherwise locate upon the site of the Project or other property of the City, a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative, and request consent therefrom, at least twenty (20) days prior to such action. Owner's Representative may grant or deny the request of Contractor and provide whatever requirements such consent, if granted, is conditioned upon, in its sole and absolute discretion. If the request of Contractor is not granted, or othemrise not responded to, by Owner's Representative within five (S) days of the receipt of said request, said request shall be deemed to be denied. In the event Owner's Representative shall consent to the request of Contractor, Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all personnel involved in the Project are (i) trained for the level of expertise required for proper performance of the actions contemplated by this Contract and, in particular, in all aspects of handling, storage, disposal and exposure of Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos; and (ii) are provided and utilize all protective equipment, including without limitation, personal protective gear, necessary to provide protection from exposure to Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos. 21 CURRENT WAGE DETERMPNIATIONS RE: RESOLUTION NO.2002-R0483, NOVEMBER 14, 2002 4:t City of Lubbock Viii Building Construction Trades Prevailing Rates r'! Craft 1"I'luoustical Ceiling Installer Air Conditioner Installer rAir Conditioner Installer -Helper 4sbestos Worker Asbestos Supenisor ;Bricklayer Bricklayer -Helper Carpenter )Carpenter -Helper Cement Finisher Drywall Hanger :Electrician Electrician -Helper )Equipment Operator -Heavy Equipment Operator -Light Fire Sprinkler Fitter-Joumey ;Fire Sprinkler Fitter -Apprentice Floor Installer Czator-Piping/Boiler ier Insulator -Helper L"Laborer-General Iron Worker Mortar Mixer LPainter Plumber Plumber -Helper [Roofer Roofer -Helper Sheet Metal Worker Sheet Metal Worker -Helper Welder -Certified Hourly Rate 11.50 12.00 7.50 9.00 12.50 12.50 7.00 11.00 7.00 9.00 11.00 15.00 8.00 10.00 9.00 18.00 10.00 9.50 10.50 10.50 7.00 11.00 6.00 6.00 9.50 12.50 7.00 9.00 7.00 10.00 7.00 11.00 1 EXHIBIT B Paving and Highway Construction Prevailing Wage Rates Craft Hourlv Rate .sphalt Heaterman 9.00 .sphalt Shoveler 7.50 oncrete Finisher 9.00 oncrete Finisher -Helper 7.50 lectrical Repairer -Equipment 12.50 lagger 6.50 onn Setter 8.00 orm Setter -Helper 6.50 aborer-General 6.00 aborer-Utility 6.75 iechanic 9.00 lechanic-Helper 7.00 over Equipment Operators .sphalt Paving Machine 9.00 ,ulldozer 9.00 :oncrete Paving Machine 9.00 ront End Loader 9.00 Leavy Equipment Operator 9.00 ,ight Equipment Operator 8.00 Zotor Grader Operator 10.25 _oller 7.00 craper 7.50 'ractor-Trailer 8.50 'ruck Driver -Heavy 8.00 'ruck Driver -Light 7.00 2 EXIMIT C Prevaililig Wage Rates Overtime Rate P.The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) shall be as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act. ri EXHIBIT D kPrevailing Wage Rates Legal Holiday Rate The rate for legal holidays shall be as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act. i i 3 SPECIFICATIONS Project Manual City of Lubbock Fire Station No. 8 August 2005 PSC Project#: 03878505 FX Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. Engineers ■ Architects ■ Planners LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 0 - BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND CONTRACT INFORMATION Not Used DIVISION 1- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01010 Summary of Work 01300 Administrative Requirements 01330 Submittal Procedures 01400 Quality Requirements 01410 Testing Laboratory Services 01500 Temporary Facilities & Controls 01600 Product Requirements 01650 Starting of Systems 01700 Execution Requirements DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK 02200 Earthwork 02280 Soil Treatment 02520 Portland Cement Concrete Paving 02810 Irrigation Systems 02920 Lawns and Grasses 02930 Exterior Plants DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04200 Unit Masonry DIVISION 5 - METAL 05120 Structural Steel 05210 Steel Joists 05313 Steel Roof Deck 05315 Steel Form Deck 05400 Cold -Formed Metal Framing 05500 Metal Fabrications Non e DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS fi 06100 Rough Carpentry 06410 Custom Cabinetwork 14746 0 B-IL-off 03878505 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - l 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07180 Water Repellants 07210 Building Insulation 07270 Firestopping 07410 Manufactured Metal Roof Panels 07525 Modified Bituminous Sheet Roofing 07600 Sheet Metal 07700 Roof Specialties and Accessories 07900 Joint Sealers DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08000 Door Schedule 08110 Steel Doors and Frames 08211 Solid Core Flush Wood Doors 08364 Steel Sectional Overhead Doors 0841.5 Aluminum Storefront 08520 Aluminum Windows 08710 Hardware 08800 Glazing DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09220 Portland Cement Plaster 09260 Gypsum Board System 09300 Tile 09511 Acoustical Lay -In Ceilings 09650 Resilient Flooring 09680 Carpet 09900 Painting 09910 Graffiti Resistant Coating 09916 Finish Schedule DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10170 Solid Color Reinforced Composite Toilet Partitions 10425 Signs 10505 Metal Lockers 10521 Fire Extinguishers 10810 Toilet Accessories DIVISION 11- EQUIPMENT Not Used DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12511 Horizontal Louver Blinds 12621 Marker Boards 03878505 TABLE OF CONTENTS 08/05 -c�3— PAGE-2 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Not Used DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS Not Used DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15000 General Mechanical Requirements 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 15170 Motors 15190 Mechanical Identification 15260 Piping Insulation 15290 Ductwork Installation 15310 Fire Protection Piping 15325 Sprinkler Systems 15410 Plumbing Piping 15430 Plumbing Specialties 15440 Plumbing Fixtures 15625 Low -Intensity Infrared Unit Heaters 15781 Packaged Rooftop Air Conditioning Units 15870 Power Ventilators and Exhaust Systems 15890 Ductwork 15910 Ductwork Accessories 15990 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16000 Basic Electrical Upgrades 16111 Conduit 16123 Building Wire and Cable 16130 Boxes 16140 Wiring Devices 16170 Grounding and Bonding 16180 Equipment Wiring Systems 16190 Supporting Devices 16195 Electrical Identification 16421 Electrical Service Entrance 16441 Enclosed Switches 16470 Panelboards 16481 Enclosed Motor Controllers 16510 Interior Luminaires 16670 Lighting Protection Systems 16721 Fire Alarm Systems 03878505 08105 TABLE OF CONTENTS 5— PAGE - 3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY The specification sections authenticated by my seal and signature are limited to the following: DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01010 Summary of Work 01330 Submittal Procedures DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04200 Unit Masonry DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06410 Custom Cabinetwork DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08000 Door Schedule 08710 Hardware 08800 Glazing DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09910 Graffiti Resistant Coating 09916 Finish Schedule DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10170 Solid Color Reinforced Composite Toilet Partitions 10810 Toilet Accessories 03878505 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY BPN -1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBELITY The specification sections authenticated by my seal and signature are limited to the following: DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK 02200 Earthwork 02280 Soil Treatment 02520 Portland Cement Concrete Paving DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete DIVISION 5 - METAL 05120 Structural Steel 05210 Steel Joists 05313 Steel Roof Deck 05400 Cold -Formed Metal Framing OF T ekgS' t t ............. JOSEPH R. R 1ER � ............... 61147 :.�• 03878505 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY JRR - 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY The specification sections authenticated by my seal and signature are limited to the following: DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK 02810 Irrigation Systems 02920 Lawns and Grasses 02930 Exterior Plants 03878505 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY TFS - 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY The specification sections authenticated by my seal and signature are limited to the following: DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15000 General Mechanical Requirements 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 15170 Motors 15190 Mechanical Identification 15260 Piping Insulation 15290 Ductwork Installation 15310 Fire Protection Piping 15325 Sprinkler Systems 15410 Plumbing Piping 15430 Plumbing Specialties 15440 Plumbing Fixtures 15625 Low -Intensity Infrared Unit Heaters 15781 Packaged Rooftop Air Conditioning Units 15870 Power Ventilators and Exhaust Systems 15890 Ductwork 15910 Ductwork Accessories 15990 Testing. Adjusting and Balancing �C;�P�E OF' PFkt�; to ................................. KEVEN WILLIS ... �e 90355 tto� sti A� .45 03878505 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY KAW - 1 08i05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY The specification sections authenticated by my seal and signature are limited to the following: DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16000 Basic Electrical Upgrades 16111 Conduit of - �' L . OF' 16123 Building Wire and Cable �+ 16130 Boxes * : *� 16140 Wiring Devices .................... TROY Q. SWINNE7 16170 Grounding and Bonding.......:.........................� 16180 Equipment Wiring PP Systems lo u•. 16190 Supporting Devices g Devi�.,/ - E?; a fS ? •' 16195 Electrical Identification (tk�`pF\`� 16421 Electrical Service Entrance 16441 Enclosed Switches 16470 Panelboards 16481 Enclosed Motor Controllers 16510 Interior Luminaires 16670 Lighting Protection Systems 16721 Fire Alarm Systems 03978505 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY TDS - 1 08/05 V-4 zO LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1- General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work covered by Contract Documents. B. Owner furnished products. C. Contractor use of site. D. Owner occupancy. 1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Identification: Fire Station 8. B. Location: 2120 50th Street, Lubbock, Texas. C. Verbal Summary: Without force or effect on requirements of the Contract Documents a brief description ofthe Project is as follows: A new 2-bay fire station with related sitework, utilities, equipment, etc. 1.4 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Products furnished to the site and paid for by Owner: 1. Hose dryer equipment — General Contractor to wire and vent dryer. 2. Washing machine/clothes dryer — General Contractor to provide utility hookups. 3. Refrigerators — General Contractor to provide utility hookups. 4. Ice machine and filter — General Contractor to provide utility hookups. B. Owner's Responsibilities: 1. Arrange for and deliver Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples, to Contractor. 2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site. 3. On delivery, inspect products jointly with Contractor. 4. Submit claims for transportation damage and replace damaged, defective, or deficient items. 5. Arrange for manufacturers' warranties, inspections and service. C. Contractor's Responsibilities: 1. Review Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 2. Receive and unload products at site; inspect for completeness or damage, jointly with Owner. 3. Handle, store, install and finish products. 4. Repair or replace items damaged after receipt. 03878505 SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1.5 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE A. Limit use of site to allow: 1. Owner occupancy 2. Work by Others and Work by Owner. 1.6 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. The Owner intends to occupy the entire portion of the Project by the calendar day set from Notice to Proceed. B. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict, and to facilitate Owner's operations. C. Schedule the Work to accommodate this requirement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION' 03878505 SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 2 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 01300 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1- General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Coordination. B. Field engineering. C. Preconstruction meeting. D. Progress meetings. E. Preinstallation meetings. F. Cutting and patching. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various Sections of the Project Manual to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. B. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various Sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. C. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with line of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. D. In finished areas, except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. E. Large Apparatus: Any large piece of apparatus which is to be installed in any space in the building, and which is too large to permit access through windows, doorways or shafts, shall be brought to the job by the Contractor involved and placed in the space before the enclosing structure is completed. F. Items which require electrical connections shall be coordinated with Division 16 for: 1. Voltage 2. Phase 3. Ampacity 4. No. and size of wires 5. Wiring diagrams 6. Starter size, details and location 7. Control devices and details G. Coordinate completion and clean up Substantial Completion. of Work of separate Sections in preparation for 03878505 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 - 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 H. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. 1.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Locate and protect survey control and reference points. B. Control datum for survey is that shown on Drawings. C. Verify set -backs and easements, confirm drawing dimensions and elevations. D. Provide field engineering services. Establish elevations, lines, and levels, utilizing recognized engineering survey practices. 1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Owner will schedule a meeting after Notice to Proceed. B. Attendance Required: Owner, Architect, Engineer, Contractor and major Subcontractors. C. Agenda: 1. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 2. Distribution of Contract Documents. 3. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of products, Schedule of Values, and progress schedule. 4. Designation of personnel representing the parties in Contract and the Architect/Engineer. 5. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders and Contract closeout procedures. 6. Scheduling. a. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. b. Owner's requirements. C. Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner. d. Temporary utilities provided by Owner. e. Survey and building layout. f. Security and housekeeping procedures. g. Schedules. h. Procedures for testing. i. Procedures for maintaining record documents. j. Requirements for start-up of equipment. k. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period. 7. Scheduling activities of gotechnical Engineer. Geotechnical information is on record at Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc., 4222 85th Street, Lubbock, Texas 79423. 1.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. The Owner shall schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at minimum bi-monthly intervals. B. The Owner shall make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants and preside at meetings. C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, and Architect/Engingeer as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. 038 78505 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 - 2 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 D. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off -site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. Coordination of projected progress. 11. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 13. Other business relating to Work. 1.7 PREINSTALLATION MEETING A. When required in individual specification Sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at work site prior to commencing work of the Section. B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific Section. C. Notify Architect/Engineer four days in advance of meeting date. D. Meeting: 1. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS A. Motors: Specific motor type is specified in individual specification sections. B. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Size terminal lugs to NFPA 70, include lugs for terminal box. C. Cord and Plug: Provide minimum 6 foot cord and plug including grounding connector for connection to electric wiring system. Cord of longer length is specified in individual specification sections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent Work. Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. C. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct location. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. 03979505 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 - 3 09105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply any manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. 3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting and patching. B. Submit written request in advance of cutting or altering elements which affects: 1. Structural integrity of element. 2. Integrity of weather -exposed or moisture -resistant elements. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of element. 4. Visual qualities of sight -exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate contractor. C. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill, to complete Work, and to: 1. Fit the several parts together, to integrate with other Work. 2. Uncover Work to install or correct ill-timed Work. 3. Remove and replace defective and non -conforming Work. 4. Remove samples of installed Work for testing. 5. Provide openings in elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical Work. D. Execute work by methods which will avoid damage to other Work, and provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing. E. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. F. Restore Work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. G. Fit Work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. H. Maintain integrity of wall, ceiling, or floor construction; completely seal voids. I. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. J. Identify any hazardous substance or condition exposed during the Work to the Architect for decision or remedy. END OF SECTION 03878505 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 08/05 01300 - 4 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submittal procedures. B. Construction progress schedules. C. Proposed products list. D. Shop drawings. E. Product data. F. Samples. G. Design data. H. Test reports. I. Certificates. J. Manufacturers' instructions. K. Manufacturers' field reports. L. Erection drawings. M. Construction photographs. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Manufacturers' field services and reports; Testing Laboratory Services. B. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Contract Closeout: Contract warranty, manufacturer's certificates and closeout submittals. 1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Submit to Architect for review for limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. B. Produce copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article and for record documents purposes described in Section 01700. C. Transmit each submittal with Contractor's standard transmittal letter including Contractor's name, address and phone number. D. Sequentially number transmittal forms using Section number or Contractors other sequential numbering system. E. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing sheet and detail number(s), and specification Section number, appropriate to submittal. F. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information, is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. 03878505 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 1 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 G. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and deliver to Architect at business address. Coordinate submission of related items. H. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor. I. Identify variations from Contract Documents and product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of completed Work. J. Allow space on submittals for Contractor and Engineer review stamps. K. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions. L. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed M. Format 1. Submit all submittals using an 8 % x 11 inch format. 2. For submittals larger than 8 V2. x 11 inches, prefold to an 8 V2 x 11 format. Submittals not pre -folded will be rejected. N. At Architect's/Engineer's option, submittals will not be individually marked, but will be reviewed using Architect's/Engineer's standard submittal review form. O. Copies Required 1. Structural and Architectural Submittals: Number of copies Contractor requires plus three copies, one which will be retained by Architect, and two will be retained by the Owner. 2. Mechanical, Plumbing and Electrical Submittals: Number of copies contractor requires plus three copies, one which will be retained by Architect, and two will be retained by the Owner. 1.5 RESUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Revise and resubmit submittals, as required, and resubmit to meet requirements as specified and as noted on submittal reviews. B. Mark as RESUBMITTAL. C. Re -use original transmittal number and supplement with sequential alphabetical or numeric suffix for each re -submittal. 1.6 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES A. Submit initial progress schedule in duplicate for Architect's/Engineer's review within 15 days after date established in Notice to Proceed. B. Revise and resubmit as required. C. Submit revised schedules with each Application for Payment, identifying changes since previous version. D. Submit a horizontal bar chart with separate line for each section of Work, identifying first work day of each week. E. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying Work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities. Indicate the early and late start, early and late finish, float dates, and duration. F. Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item of Work at each submission. G. Submit separate schedule of submittal dates for shop drawings, product data, and samples, including Owner furnished products and dates reviewed submittals will be required from Architect/Engineer. Indicate decision dates for selection of finishes. H. Indicate delivery dates for Owner furnished products. 03878505 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 2 08/05 I LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 I. Revisions To Schedules: 1. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submittal, and projected completion date of each activity. 2. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in scope, and other identifiable changes. 3. Prepare narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on Schedule. Report corrective action taken, or proposed, and its effect including effect of changes on schedules of separate contractors. 1.7 PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST A. Within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed, submit complete list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. B. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or catalog designation, and reference standards. 1.8 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. B. Drawing Size: Minimum 8 '/2 x 11 inches and maximum 30 x 42 inches — folded to 8 1/2" x 11". C. Form 1. For drawings larger than 11 x 17 inches, submit in the form of one reproducible transparency and one opaque reproduction. 2. For drawings 11 x 17 inches and smaller, submit opaque reproductions. D. Draw details to a minimum size of 1/2 inches equal to 1 foot. E. Draw site plans to same scale indicated on contract drawings. F. Draw all other plans to a minimum size of 1/8 inch equal to 1 foot. G. At Architect's/Engineer's option, depending on extent ofreview comments, either all opaque copies will be marked or only the reproducible will be marked and returned to the Contractor to make copies required. 1.9 PRODUCT DATA A. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to this Project. B. Include recommendations for application and use, and reference to compliance with specified standards of trade associations and testing agencies. C. Include notation of special coordination requirements for interfacing with adjacent work and building utilities where applicable. D. After review, distribute in accordance with Article on Procedures above and provide copies for Record Documents described in Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. 1.10 SAMPLES A. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. B. Unless otherwise specified, submit samples of finishes from manufacturers' full range of standard colors, textures, and patterns, for Architect!s/Engineer's selection. 03878505 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 3 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 01400 PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Quality control and control of installation. B. Tolerances. C. References. D. Mock-up requirements. E. Testing and Inspection services. F. Manufacturers' field services. G. Examination H. Preparation 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01420 - Reference Standards. B. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submission of Manufacturers' Instructions and Certificates. C. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality. D. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Starting of Systems. 1.4 QUALITY CONTROL AND CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. F. Verify field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings or as instructed by manufacturer. G. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement. 1.5 TOLERANCES 03878505 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 1 08/05 I LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding. C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing in place. 1.6 REFERENCES A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards, comply with requirements of standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date ofContract Documents, except where a specific date is established by Code. C. Obtain copy of standards when required by specification section. D. Neither contractual relationship, duties nor responsibilities of parties in Contract nor those of the Architect/Engineer shall be altered from Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.7 MOCK-UP REQUIREMENTS A. Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the respective product specification sections. B. Assemble and erect specified items, with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes. C. Accepted mock-ups shall be comparison standard for quality level for the Work. D. Where mock-up has been accepted by Architect/Engineer and is specified in individual specification sections to be removed, remove mock-up and clear area. 1.8 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES A. Employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency or laboratory acceptable to Owner and Architect/Engineer to perform specified inspection and testing. 1. Prior to start of Work, submit testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number, and names of full time registered Engineer specialist and responsible officer. 2. Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by Materials Reference Laboratory of National Bureau of Standards during most recent inspection, with memorandum of remedies of deficiencies reported by inspection. B. The independent firm will perform inspections, tests, and other services specified in individual specification Sections and as required by the Architect/Engineer or the Owner. 1. Laboratory: Authorized to operate at Project location in State of Texas. 2. Laboratory Staff. Maintain full time registered Engineer specialist on staff to review services. 3. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy traceable to National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants. C. Testing, inspections and source quality control may occur on or off project site. Perform off - site testing as required by Architect/Engineer or Owner. D. Submitted independent firm's reports to the Architect, in triplicate, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents. 03878505 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 2 08/05 = LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 E. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, storage, safe access, and assistance by incidental labor as requested. 1. Notify Owner, Architect and independent firm 48 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring services. 2. Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional samples and tests required for Contractor's use. F. Testing and employment of testing agency or laboratory does not relieve Contractor from performing Work to contract requirements. G. Perform re -testing and/or re -inspection required because of non-conformance to specified requirements using the same independent firm on instructions by the Architect/Engineer or Owner. Payment for retesting will be charged to the Contractor by deducting inspection or testing charges from the Contract Sum/Price. H. Agency Responsibilities: 1. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor. 2. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect/Engineer and Contractor in performance of services. 3. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 4. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or products. 6. Perform additional tests required by Architect/Engineer. 7. Attend preconstruction meetings and progress meetings. L Agency Reports: After each test, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect and to Contractor. When requested by Architect/Engineer, provide interpretation of test results. Include the following: 1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name of inspector. 4. Date and time of sampling or inspection. 5. Identification of product and specifications section. 6. Location in Project. 7. Type of inspection or test. 8. Date of test. 9. Results of tests. 10. Conformance with Contract Documents. J. Limits On Testing Authority: 1. Agency or laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Agency or laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency or laboratory may not assume duties of Contractor. 4. Agency or laboratory has no authority to stop the Work. 1.9 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in individual specification Sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust, and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. 03878505 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 3 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 B. Submit qualifications of observer to Architect 30 days in advance of required observations. Observer subject to approval of Architect/Engineer. C. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. D. Refer to Section 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, MANUFACTURERS' FIELD REPORTS article. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent Work. Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new Work being applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Verify utility services are available, of correct characteristics, and in correct locations. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying new material or substance in contact or bond. END OF SECTION 03878505 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 4 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES PART 1- GENERAL ln�110 WA 1:3 DO A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1- General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Selection and payment. B. Contractor submittals. C. Laboratory responsibilities. D. Laboratory reports. E. Limits on testing laboratory authority. F. Contractor responsibilities. G. Schedule of inspections and tests. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01330 - Submittals: Manufacturer's certificates. B. Section 01650 - Starting of Systems: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing. C. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Project Record Documents. D. Individual Specification Sections: Inspections and tests required, and standards for testing. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM D3740 - Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction. B. ANSI/ASTM E329 - Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction. 1.5 SELECTION AND PAYMENT A. Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing laboratory to perform specified inspection and testing. B. Employment of testing laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor of obligation to perform work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of ANSI/ASTM E329 and ANSI/ASTM D3740R. B. Laboratory: Authorized to operate in State of Texas. C. Laboratory Staff: Maintain a full time registered Engineer on staff to review services. 03878505 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01410 - 1 08/05 No Text LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1- General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting, heat, ventilation, telephone service, water, and sanitary facilities. B. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures and fencing, protection of the Rork, and water control. C. Construction Facilities: Access roads, Parking, progress cleaning, project signage, and temporary buildings. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: final cleaning. 1.4 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Provide and pay for power service required from utility source. B. Provide temporary electric feeder from electrical service at location as directed. C. Owner will pay cost of energy used. Exercise measures to conserve energy. D. Power Service Characteristics: As indicated on drawings. E. Provide main service disconnect and overcurrent protection at convenient location in conformance with National Electric Code. F. Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction. G. Provide adequate distribution equipment, wiring, and outlets to provide single phase branch circuits for power and lighting. 1. Provide 20 ampere duplex outlets, single phase circuits for power tools for every 2000 sq ft of active work area and at specific locations as required. 2. Provide flexible power cords as required. 3. Provide 20 ampere, single phase branch circuits for lighting. 1.5 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Provide and maintain lighting for construction operations to achieve a minimum lighting level of 2 watts/sq ft. B. Provide and maintain 1 watt/sq ft lighting to exterior staging and storage areas after dark for security purposes. C. Provide and maintain 0.25 watt/sq ft H.I.D. lighting to interior work areas after dark for security purposes. a 03878505 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS 01500 - 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 D. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required. E. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs. F. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction. 1.6 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Utilize permanent building heat plant, extend and supplement with temporary heat devices as required to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. B. Owner will pay cost of energy used. Enclose building prior to activating temporary heat in accordance with Article 1.14 — Exterior Enclosures, in this Section and exercise measures to conserve energy. C. Provide separate metering and reimburse Owner for cost of energy used. D. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary heating purposes, verify that installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated and filters are in place. Provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts. E. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F in areas where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications. F. Do not use permanent building heating equipment until all dust related operations are completed. 1.7 TEMPORARY VENTILATION A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, hones, vapors, or gases. 1.8 TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Provide, maintain and pay for telephone service to field office at time of project mobilization. 1.9 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A. Connect to existing water source for construction operations. B. Owner will pay cost of water used. Exercise measures to conserve water. C. Extend branch piping with outlets located so water is available by hoses with threaded connections. Provide temporary pipe insulation to prevent freezing. 1.10 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. B. Permanent building facilities shall not be used during construction operations. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition. 1.11 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to allow for Owner's use of site and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations. 03878505 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS 01500 - 2 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 B. Provide protection for plant life designated to remain. Replace damaged plant life. C. Protect non -owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site and structures from damage. 1.12 FENCING A. Construction: At Contractor's option, commercial grade chain link fence or solid wood fence, painted. B. Provide 6 foot high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks. 1.13 WATER CONTROL A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations pumping equipment. B. Protect site from puddling or running water from soil erosion. 1.14 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain Provide water barriers as required to protect site A. Provide temporary insulated weather -tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification Sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. B. Provide access doors with self -closing hardware and locks. 1.15 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification Sections. B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity in immediate work area to minimise damage. C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. F. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. 1.16 SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. 1.17 PARKING A. Arrange for temporary surface parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. B. When site space is not adequate, provide additional off -site parking. 03878505 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS 01500 - 3 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1.18 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site and dispose off -site at intervals as required to maintain clean site. 1.19 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION 1.20 1.21 A. Provide 8 ft. wide x 6 ft. high project sign of exterior grade plywood and wood frame construction, painted, with exhibit lettering by professional sign painter, to Architect's design and colors. B. List title of project, names of Owner, Architect, Engineer, Contractor and major subcontractors. C. Erect on site at location established by Architect. D. No other signs are allowed without Owner's percussion except those required by law. FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS A. Office: Weather -tight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling and ventilating equipment, and equipped with sturdy furniture drawing rack and drawing display table. REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary above grade or buried utilities, equipment, facilities, and materials as soon as permanent facilities can be utilized. B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet. Grade site as indicated. C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. D. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03878505 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS 01500 - 4 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1- General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Products. B. Product Delivery, Storage and Handling. C. Product options. D. Substitutions. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Document 00200 - Instructions to Bidders: Product options and substitution procedures. B. Section 01410 - Quality Requirements: Product quality monitoring. Testing Laboratory Services. 1.4 PRODUCTS A. Products: Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the Work and does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work Products may also include existing materials or components required for reuse. B. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for similar components. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery 1. Deliver materials, products and equipment to the project site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. 2. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. 3. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 4. Arrange deliveries in accordance with the construction schedule and in ample time to facilitate inspection prior to installation to avoid unnecessary delays in the construction process. B. Storage 1. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. 2. Store sensitive products in weather -tight, climate controlled enclosures. 3. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports, above ground. 03878505 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 4. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation or potential degradation of Products. 5. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well -drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. 6. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 7. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. 8. Materials, products and equipment may be stored off site in a bonded and insured warehouse approved by the Architect and Owner. Pay all costs incurred for off -site storage facilities. Products properly stored in off -site storage facilities may be included in progress pay requests with written approval of the Architect. C. Handling 1. Handle materials, products and equipment in a manner prescribed by manufacturer or specified to protect from damage during storage and installation. 1.6 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Products of manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named in accordance with the following article. 1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for Substitutions during the bidding period to requirements specified in this Section. B. Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor. C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance ofproposed Substitution with Contract Documents. D. A request constitutes a representation that the Bidder: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the Substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become apparent. 5. Will reimburse Owner, Architect and Engineer for review or redesign sen�ices associated with re -approval by authorities. E. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents. F. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit four copies of request for Substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed Substitution. 03878505 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 2 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer. 3. The Architect/Engineer will notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject request. PART2-PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03878505 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-3 08/05 LU13BOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 01650 STARTING OF SYSTEMS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. ® 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES Ell A. Starting systems. B. Demonstration and instructions. C. Testing, adjusting, and balancing. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Manufacturers field reports. B. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services: Manufacturers field reports. C. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: System operation and maintenance data and extra materials. D. Division 15 - Testing Adjusting and Balancing. 1.4 STARTING SYSTEMS A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Notify Architect seven days prior to start-up of each item. C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or other conditions which may cause damage. D. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. E. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. F. Execute start-up under supervision of responsible manufacturer's representative and Contractors' personnel in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. H. Submit a written report in accordance with Section 01400 and 01410 that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 1.5 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS U, A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of Products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of final inspection. B. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season. k, 03878505 STARTING OF SYSTEMS 01650 - 1 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 C. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. ReNiew contents of manual with Owners' personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. D. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble -shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed -upon times, at equipment location. E. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. PART2-PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3-EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03878505 STARTING OF SYSTEMS 01650 - 2 08/05 LU13BOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Closeout procedures. B. Final cleaning. C. Adjusting. D. Project record documents. E. Operation and maintenance data. F. Warranties. G. Spare parts and maintenance materials. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Progress cleaning. B. Section 01650 - Starting of Systems: System start-up, testing, adjusting, and balancing. 1.4 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's inspection. B. Provide submittals to Architect that are required by governing or other authorities. C. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. 1.5 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection. B. Clean interior and exterior glass and surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. C. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition. D. Replace filters of operating equipment. E. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. F. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. G. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site. H. Repair, patch and touch-up marred surfaces to match adjacent finishes. I. Clean ducts, blowers and coils if air conditioning units were operated during construction. 03878505 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1.6 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site, one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Contract Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. B. Store Record Documents separate from documents used for construction. C. Record information concurrent with construction progress. D. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product section description of actual Products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and Modifications. E. Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Details not on original Contract Drawings. 6. Changes made by addenda and modification. F. Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for Payment. 1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit one copy 15 days prior to final inspection, 8 'h x 11 inch text pages, bound in three D-ring binders with durable plastic covers. B. This copy will be returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content of documents as required prior to final submittal. C. Submit two final volumes revised within ten days after final inspection. D. Prepare binder covers with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required. E. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. F. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each Product or system description identified, type on 24 pound white paper. G. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. 03878505 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 2 08/05 i_� a LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 H. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: 1. Significant design criteria. 2. List of equipment. 3. Parts list for each component. 4. Operating instructions necessary for Owner to make full and efficient use of equipment including recommended maintenance and seasonal change -over procedures for HVAC systems. 5. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. 6. Maintenance instructions for finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. I. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: 1. Shop drawings and product data. 2. Air and water balance reports. 3. Certificates. 4. Photocopies of warranties and bonds. 1.9 WARRANTIES A. Provide duplicate notarized copies. B. Execute and assemble documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. ' C. Provide Table of Contents and assemble with metal prong binder in durable plastic presentation cover. D. Submit prior to final Application for Payment. E. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. 1.10 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in individual specification Sections. B. Deliver to project site and place in location as directed; obtain receipt prior to final payment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03878505 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01706 - 3 08/05 N z Mot, 11111 I LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 02200 ' 4 11:\"Al $1, PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Site clearing. 2. Earth moving and excavation. 3. Utilities trenching. 4. Grading. 5. Back -filling. 6. Compacting. 7. Subbase course for walks and pavements. B. Related Documents: Geotechnical data. 1. Geotechnical data prepared by: Terra Engineers, Inc. 2. Geotechnical data consists of the following, which is available for the contractor's inspection at the office of the architect: a. Geotechnical engineer's report. 3. Geotechnical data is not a part of the contract documents. The contractor is entitled to rely upon the factual information contained therein, such as locations and depths of tests or explorations made at the site and material encountered at each location, all as of the dates made. The contractor is not entitled to rely upon the nonfactual information contained therein such as interpretations, opinions, or extrapolations of data; nor is the contractor entitled to rely upon the completeness of the information for the contractor's purposes. C. Related Sections: 1. Changes in the work: General Conditions. 2. Paving: Elsewhere in Division 2. 3. Concrete: Elsewhere in Division 2. 4. Concrete: Division 3. 5. Installation of underground utilities: Divisions 15 and 16. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 1556-90 -- Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand -Cone Method; 1990. B. ASTM D 1557-91 -- Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3); 1991. C. ASTM D 2167-94 -- Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil In -Place by the Rubber Balloon Method; 1994. D. ASTM D 2487-93 -- Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System); 1993. E. ASTM D 2922-91-- Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil -Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 1991. F. ASTM D 2940-85 -- Standard Specification for Graded Aggregate Material for Bases or Subbases for Highways or Airports. 03878505 EARTHWORK 02200 - 1 f ... 08/05 t..y LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 G. ASTM D 3017-88(93) -- Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 1988 (Reapproved 1993. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Test Reports: Testing laboratory shall submit the following reports directly to the architect and shall copy the contractor: 1. Analysis of soil materials, whether procured on or off site, and including fill, back -fill, and borrow materials. 2. Verification of each footing subgrade. 3. In -place density test reports. 4. Moisture -density relationship test reports. 5. Gradation test reports for pavement base course aggregates. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Laboratory Services: 1. Secure and pay for the services of a qualified, independent geotechnical engineer to classify existing soil materials, to recommend and to classify proposed borrow materials when necessary, to verify compliance of materials with specified requirements, and to perform required field and laboratory testing. Geotechnical engineer shall be acceptable to the architect and the owner and shall be licensed to practice in the State of Texas. 1.5 SITE CONDITIONS A. Traffic: Do not interfere with or close public ways without permission of governing authorities. Do not interfere with adjacent private facilities. B. Site Utilities: 1. If underground utilities are encountered in locations other than indicated, immediately advise utility owners before proceeding. Amend project record documents to show actual locations. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Where sufficient approved materials are not available from required excavations on site, obtain and pay for materials from approved sources off site without charge to the owner. B. For each soil material proposed for use as fill or backfill, whether obtained on or off site, testing laboratory shall classify soil material, develop Proctor curve, and perform any other tests required. C. Obtain approval of the architect for each soil material. D. Satisfactory Topsoil: ASTM D 5268, Ph range of 5.5 to 7, 4 percent organic matoriac minimum, free of stones 1 inch or larger in any dimension, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. 1. Topsoil Source: Reuse surface soil stockpiled on the site. Verify suitability of surface soil to provide topsoil -meeting requirements and amend when necessary. Supplement with imported topsoil when quantities are insufficient. Clean topsoil of roots, plants, suds, stones, clay lumps and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. E. Backfill and Fill Materials: Materials classified as satisfactory. 03878505 EARTHWORK 02200 - 2 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 F. Satisfactory Soil Material (ASTM D 2487): Free of stones larger than 2 inches in any dimension, trash, debris, organic material, other objectionable material and the liquid limit and plasticity index shall not exceed 35 and 12 respectively. G. Aggregate Base Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand, ASTM D 2940, with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2 inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protection: Provide markers indicating limits of work and clear identification of items and areas requiring protection. B. Provide barricades, warning signs, and warning lights around open excavations as necessary to prevent injury to persons. C. The contractor is solely responsible for determining the potential for injury to persons and damage to property. 1. Where such potential is present, take appropriate protective measures. 2. Protect persons from injury and protect existing and new improvements from damage caused directly or indirectly by construction operations. D. Do not allow excavation subgrades and soil at foundations to be subjected to freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary. Should prepared, compacted subgrades be damaged by freezing, remove soil materials to the depth required by the architect and replace and recompact in conformance with specified requirements. 3.2 DEWATERING A. Do not allow surface or ground water to flow into or accumulate in excavations. B. Do not allow water to flow in an uncontrolled fashion across the project site or to erode slopes or to undermine foundations. Do not allow water to be diverted onto adjacent properties. Arrange excavation operations so as to provide continual and effective drainage of excavations. C. Provide and maintain temporary diversion ditches, dikes, and grading as necessary; do not use trench excavations for this purpose. When required by surface or subsurface water conditions, provide sumps, wellpoints, French drains, pumps, and other control measures necessary to keep excavations free of water. When existence of ground water near or above final excavation level is indicated or suspected, provide control measures prior to excavating to water level and maintain water level continuously below working level. 3.3 EXCAVATION A. General: Excavation includes the removal of any materials necessary to achieve the required subgrade elevations and includes reuse or disposal of such materials. B. Unnecessary Excavation: The expense of excavation of materials outside of limits indicated or ordered in writing by the architect and the correction thereof to the satisfaction of the architect shall be bome by the contractor. 1. Unnecessary excavation under footings: Either deepen footings to bear on actual subgrade elevation without changing top elevations or place concrete fill up to required elevation, as required by the architect. 03878505 EARTHWORK 02200 - 3 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 2. Unnecessary excavation other than under footings: Either place compacted fill or otherwise correct conditions, as required by the architect. C. Approval of Subgrade: Notify the architect when required elevations have been reached. 1. When required by the architect due to the unforeseen presence of unsatisfactory materials or other factors, perform additional excavation and replace with approved compacted fill material in accordance with the architect's instructions. 2. Payment for unforeseen additional work will be made in accordance with established unit prices or, if none, in accordance with provisions for changes in the work. No payment will be made for correction of subgrades improperly protected against damage from freeze -thaw or accumulation of water, or for correction of otherwise defective subgrades. D. Excavation Stabilization: Wherever it is possible to slope faces of excavations to achieve stabilization, do so in compliance with requirements of governing authorities. Otherwise, _a provide shoring and bracing. 1. Design, provide, maintain, and remove shoring and bracing in compliance with requirements of governing authorities. Remove temporary shoring and bracing when stabilization is no longer required. _ E. Excavation for Structures: 1. Excavate beyond footings and foundations so as to allow proper construction and inspection of concrete formwork and other materials. Excavate to the required elevation. a. Tolerance: Plus or minus 0.10 foot. F. Excavation for Footings and Foundations: l . Delay excavation to final grade and final compaction until just before concrete will be placed 2. Remove any loose or sloughed material and adjust excavations to conform to required lines, grades, and tolerances and to form a suitable bearing surface. Do not disturb bottom of completed excavations. G. Excavation for Trenches: 1. Unless otherwise required, begin trenching, utility installation, and back- illing at lowest portion of utility line, working toward highest portion of line. 2. Required trench width: Excavate accurately to provide not less than 6 nor more than 9 inches of clearance on each side of pipes and conduits, unless otherwise indicated. a. Where indicated trench widths are exceeded, redesign, stronger pipe, or special installation procedures may be required by the architect at no additional cost to the owner. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, trench walls for piping shall be vertical from trench bottom to one foot above top of pipe or to top elevation of initial backfill, whichever is higher. 4. Excavate trenches to the depths necessary to achieve required flow lines and invert elevations and to prevent freezing of liquids or frost heave during winter. 5. Dig trenches to depths indicated. 6. Trench bottoms: Unless otherwise indicated, excavate and shape trench bottoms as follows: a. Support pipes and conduit up to 5 inches diameter on smooth, accurately graded subgrade. Shape surface by hand to provide continuous support on undisturbed soil for bell and body of pipe and joints, fittings, and body of conduit. b. Support pipes and conduit 6 or more inches diameter on 4 inches of approved subbase material. Place and carefully compact additional layer of subbase material of depth required to support pipe haunches. Shape surface to provide 03878505 EARTHWORK 02200 - 4 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 continuous support for bell and body of pipe and joints, fittings, and body of conduit. H. Excavation for Walks and Pavements: Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated cross -sections, elevations and grades. 3.4 STORAGE A. Stockpile materials to be used for filling and backfilling, including excavated materials classified as satisfactory soil materials, at locations indicated or as directed. Stockpile in a manner to freely drain surface water; cover if necessary to prevent wind-blown dust. 1. Store soil materials without intermixing. Protect from contamination with other soils or debris. 3.5 FILLING AND BACKFILLING A. Preparation: Backfill excavations as soon as practicable. Complete the following operations before backfilling: 1. Inspection and acceptance of below -grade construction. 2. Inspection, testing, and approval of underground utilities. 3. Surveying of underground utilities for record documents. 4. Concrete formwork removal. 5. Removal of loose material, muck, debris, and trash from excavation. 6. Installation of temporary or permanent horizontal bracing for structures to receive backfill. B. Remove temporary shoring and bracing as the work progresses and when its use is no longer necessary. 1. Backfilling near footings, general: Where trenches occur underneath of footings, or where trench bottoms occur below and within 18 inches horizontally of footing bottoms, backfill trench with concrete to top of footing and up to 4 feet perpendicularly from each face of footing. C. Installation: Place approved soil materials in layers to required elevations. 1. Do not place material on muddy or frozen surfaces or on surfaces containing frost. D. Installation: Place fill materials to required elevations in lifts of required depth. Provide fill materials beneath each area as indicated. 1. Planted areas: Satisfactory soil materials with 9 inch depth of topsoil. 2. Building slabs: Satisfactory soil materials. 3. Piping/conduit: Subbase material where indicated; otherwise use satisfactory soil materials. 4. Walks/pavements: Use base material or satisfactory excavated or borrow soil material. 3.6 BUILDLNG SLAB AREAS A. Place fill or backfill lifts such that compaction true to grade and level is accomplished with a minimum of surface disturbance and segregation or degradation of materials. Maintain grade control and cross section by means of line and grade stakes. Maintain moisture content v6thin prescribed limits during placing and compacting. B. When the total thickness of materials to be placed is less than the maximum lift thickness permitted, place material in a single lift. When the total thickness of materials to be placed is greater than the maximum lift thickness permitted, place materials in two or more lifts of uniform thickness with no lift less than 3 inches in thickness. 03878505 " EARTHWORK 02200 - 5 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 3.7 COMPACTION A. Place materials used in backfilling and filling in layers not exceeding loose depths as follows: 1. Heavy equipment compaction: 8 inches. 2. Hand -operated tampers: 4 inches. B. Place material simultaneously on opposite sides of walls, small structures, utility lines, etc. to avoid displacement or overstressing. C. In -Place Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the values given below, expressed as a percentage of maximum density at optimum moisture content. 1. Unpaved areas: Top 6 inches of subgrade and subsequent lifts: a. 85 percent. 2. Building slabs and structures: Top 12 inches of subgrade and subsequent lifts: a. 95 percent. 3. Utility trenches: Compact backfill and fill materials to in -place density specified for applicable area of trench, but in no case less than 90 percent. 4. Paved areas: Base course materials: a. 95 percent. D. Moisture Control: During compaction, control moisture of subgrades and subsequent lifts to within tolerances from optimum moisture content as recommended by testing laboratory. Wet surface with water when additional moisture is required. Aerate soil to aid in drying or replace soil when excessive moisture is present. 3.8 GRADING A. General: Smooth grade to a uniform surface that complies with compaction requirements and required lines, grades, and cross sections and is free from irregular surface changes. B. Pro Ode smooth transition between existing adjacent grades and changed grades. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and cut down high spots to conform to required surfaces tolerances. C. Slope grades to direct water away from structures and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrade to required elevations within the following tolerance: 1. Unpaved areas: Plus or minus 0.10 foot. 2. Inside building lines: 1/2 inch as measured with a 10-foot straightedge. 3. Paved areas: Plus or minus 1/4 inch. D. Areas outside the building lines from which topsoil has been removed shall be topsoiled. The surface shall be free of materials that would hinder planting or maintenance operations. The subgrade shall be pulverized to a depth of 2 inches by disking or plowing for the bonding of topsoil with the subsoil. Top soil shall then be uniformly spread, graded, and compacted to the thickness, elevations, slopes shown, and left free of surface irregularities. Top soil shall be compacted by one pass of a cultipacker, roller, or other approved equipment weighing 100 to 160 pounds per linear foot of roller. Topsoil shall not be placed when the subgrade is frozen, excessively wet, extremely dry, or in a condition otherwise detrimental to seeding, planting, or proper grading. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Laboratory Services: Pro iride timely notice to testing laboratory. Do not proceed with construction until testing of each subgrade and lift of fill or bacldill has been performed and required inspections and approvals have been obtained. 03878505 EARTHWORK 02200 - 6 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 B. Maximum Density at Optimum Moisture Content: Determine in accordance with ASTM D 1557. 1. For each subgrade, fill, and backfill material, perform one moisture -density relationship test for each 1500 cubic yards, or fraction thereof, of material used. C. In -Place Density Tests: ASTM D 1556 (sand cone method), ASTM D 2167 (rubber balloon method), or ASTM D 2922 (nuclear method), as applicable. 1. When ASTM D 2922 is used, check and adjust calibration curves using ASTM D 1556 only. ASTM D 3017 shall be performed to measure water content of soil at the time in -place density tests are conducted. Calibrate density and moisture gages at the start of testing on each type of material encountered and at intervals as directed. D. Areas under Slabs and Pavements: Conduct not less than one in -place density test of subgrade and one in -place density test of each compacted fill or backfill layer for every 2000 square feet of overlying paved area, but in no case less than 3 tests per lift. E. Foundation Wall Backfill: Conduct not less than 2 in -place density tests per lift. F. Trench Backfill: Conduct not less than 2 in -place density tests per lift per trench. G. If testing service reports indicate that subgrade or fills are below specified density, scarify or remove and replace to the required depth, recompact, and retest at no cost to the owner. 3.10 MAINTENANCE A. Completed Areas: Protect from damage by pedestrian or vehicular traffic, freezing, erosion, and contamination with foreign materials. 1. Repair and re-establish grades to specified tolerances in settled, eroded, or rutted areas. B. Damaged Areas: Where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or lose compaction and whether due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions, restore materials to required conditions: Scarify or remove and replace to the required depth, return to optimum moisture content, and compact materials to the required density before continuing construction. C. Correction: Should settling occur within the project correction period, remove finished surfacing, add additional approved material, compact material, and reconstruct surfacing. Construct surfacing to match and blend in with adjacent surfacing as nearly as practicable. 3.11 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Properly dispose of any excess or unsatisfactory topsoil off site. B. Remove any material not required for use on the project (including unsatisfactory soil, excess satisfactory soil, trash, and debris) and legally dispose of it off the owner's property. C. On -site burning is not permitted. END OF SECTION 03978505 EARTHWORK 02200 - 7 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 02280 SOIL TREATMENT PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Subterranean termite prevention treatment of soil areas scheduled to receive new construction. 2. Subterranean termite prevention treatment of new construction in progress. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Title 7, United States Code 136 through 136y -- Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act as amended; 1947 (Revised 1988). A. Product Data: Submit product label or accompanying labeling in accordance with the Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act. B. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Certificates: Evidence of installer's authorization to apply products under applicable state and local law. 2. Manufacturer's instructions: Submit manufacturer's directions for use. C. Contract Closeout Submittals: 1. Project record documents: a. Submit a certificate signed by installer and contractor stating that treatment has been applied in accordance with applicable governing regulations and in accordance with this specification. b. Incorporate into the certificate or attach thereto a plan drawing indicating actual application locations and, for each location, noting methods and rates of application and including typical sections or details where necessary for clarity. 2. Warranty. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Licensed to install specified products in the state in which the project is located and in the local jurisdiction. 2. Comply with applicable pesticide regulations of the state in which the project is located. a. Comply with applicable local pesticide regulations. 03878505 SOIL TREATMENT 02280 - 1 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: P h' 1. Submit installer's warranty against infestation of treated areas. 2. Warranty shall not reduce or otherwise limit any other rights to correction which the '. owner may have under the contract documents. - B. Correction during the warranty period shall include not less that the following: 1. Retreatment of areas in which evidence of infestation is discovered. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 TERMITICIDE A. Registered with the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) for use as a termiticide under conditions of use prevailing at the project site. B. Registered with the applicable authorities in the state in which the project is located and with local governing authorities, as applicable for use as a termiticide under conditions of use prevailing at the project site. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Apply termiticide in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply termiticide at the maximum recommended application rates for the respective areas to be treated and methods of treatment used. C. Treat the entire structure. Do not leave any portion untreated. D. Schedule treatment of new construction to occur when treatment may be applied directly to the soils and surfaces to be treated, and prior to their concealment with subsequent construction. 3.2 CLEANING - A. Do not allow contamination of surfaces not intended to be treated. Follow manufacturer's instructions to completely remove chemical from surfaces should contamination occur. B. Remove from beneath the structure any cellulosic material, wood that is not pressure -preservative treated, and debris. Do not allow non -pressure -preservative treated wood - to contact with or remain proximate to soil. 03878505 08/05 END OF SECTION SOIL TREATMENT 02280 - 2 "� LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 02520 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING PART I - GENERAL A. Drawings, General conditions of the Agreement, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Formwork for pavements. 2. Formwork accessories. 3. Form stripping. 4. Reinforcing steel for pavements. 5. Cast -in -place concrete for pavements. 6. Concrete curing. 7. Striping. B. Related Sections: 1. Earthwork: Elsewhere in Division 2. 2. Cast -in -place concrete for structures: Division 3. 3. Joint sealers: Division 7. 1.3 REFERENCES A. AASHTO M 182-91I -- Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf; American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials; 1991. B. ACI 201.2R-92 -- Guide to Durable Concrete; American Concrete Institute; 1992. C. ACI 211.1-91 -- Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; American Concrete Institute; 1991. D. ACI 301-89 -- Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute; 1989. E. ACI 325.9R-91 -- Guide for Construction of Concrete Pavements and Concrete Bases F. ACI 330R-8713 Guide for Design and Construction of Concrete Parking Lots. G. ACI 304R-89 -- Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete Institute; 1989. H. ACI 305R-91-- Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute; 1991. I. ACI 306R-88 -- Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute; 1988. J. ASTM A 185-90a -- Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement; 1990. K. ASTM A 615-92 -- Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 1992. L. ASTM C 31-91 -- Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field; 1991. M. ASTM C 33-92 -- Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 1992. 03878505 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 N. ASTM C 39-93a-- Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens; 1993. O. ASTM C 42-90 -- Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete; 1990. P. ASTM C 94-92a -- Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete; 1992. Q. ASTM C 143-90a -- Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete; 1990. R. ASTM C 150-94 -- Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 1994. S. ASTM C 171-92 -- Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 1992. T. ASTM C 172-90 -- Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete; 1990. U. ASTM C 173-78 -- Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method; 1978. V. ASTM C 231-9 lb -- Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method; 1991. W. ASTM C 260-94 -- Standard Specification for Air -Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 1994. X. ASTM C 309-93 -- Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 1993. Y. ASTM C 494-92 -- Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 1992. Z. ASTM C 618-94a -- Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete; 1994. AA. ASTM D 1751-83(91) -- Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 1983 (Reapproved 1991). BB. ASTM E 329-93b -- Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction; 1993. CC. CRSI MSP-1-90 -- Manual of Standard Practice; Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; 1990. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for the following: 1. Concrete admixtures. 2. Curing compound. B. Quality Control Submittals: Submit the following information related to quality assurance requirements specified: 1. Design data: Submit proposed mix designs and test data before concrete operations begin. Identify for each mix submitted the method by which proportions have been selected. a. For mix designs based on field experience, include individual strength test results, standard deviation, and required average compressive strength f(cr) calculations. b. For mix designs based on trial mixtures, include trial mix proportions, test results, and graphical analysis and show required average compressive strength f(cr)• C. Indicate quantity of each ingredient per cubic yard of concrete. d. Indicate type and quantity of admixtures proposed or required. 2. Test reports: Submit laboratory test reports for all testing specified. 3. Certifications: Submit affidavits from an independent testing agency certifying that all materials furnished under this section conform to specifications. 4. Certifications: Provide certification from manufacturers of concrete admixtures that chloride content complies with specified requirements. 5. Cold weather concreting: Submit description of planned protective measures. 03878505 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 2 08/05 N LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 6. Hot weather concreting: Submit description of planned protective measures. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Services: 1. Provide testing as specified in Section 01400 - Quality Control Procedures. B. Source of Materials: Obtain materials of each type from same source for the entire project. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver reinforcement to project site bundled and tagged with metal tags indicating bar size, lengths, and other data corresponding to information shown on placement drawings. 1. Store concrete reinforcement materials at the site to prevent damage and accumulation of dirt or rust. B. Store cementitious materials in a dry, weathertight location. Maintain accurate records of shipment and use. C. Store aggregates to permit free drainage and to avoid contamination with deleterious matter or other aggregates. When stockpiled on ground, discard bottom 6 inches of pile. D. Handle aggregates to avoid segregation. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold -Weather Concreting: Comply fully with the recommendations of ACI 306. 1. Well in advance of proposed concreting operations, advise the architect of planned protective measures including but not limited to heating of materials, heated enclosures, and insulating blankets. B. Hot -Weather Concreting: Comply fully with the recommendations of ACI 305R. 1. Well in advance of proposed concreting operations, advise the architect of planned protective measures including but not limited to cooling of materials before or during mixing, placement during evening to dawn hours, fogging during finishing and curing, shading, and windbreaks. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMWORK A. Pavement Forms: Standard steel paving forms in sections not less than 10 feet in length. 1. Single piece; depth equal to slab thickness. 2. Base width at least three -fourths of form depth but not less than 8 inches, unless otherwise approved. 3. Straightness tolerance: 1 /8 inch in 10 feet from true plane surface along top; 1 /4 inch in 10 feet along face. 4. Locking provisions at ends of abutting form sections. 5. Wood forms complying with the above provisions, including base and locking, may be used only where form of less than 10 feet is required. 6. Wet screeds will not be permitted. 03878505 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 3 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: Provide deformed bars complying with the following, except where otherwise indicated: 1. ASTM A 615, Grade 60. B. Reinforcing Accessories: 1. Tie wire: Black annealed type, 16-1/2 gage or heavier. 2. Supports: Bar supports conforming to specifications of CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice." a. Precast concrete blocks of strength equal to or greater than specified strength of concrete or Class 3 supports equipped with sand plates, where concrete will be cast against earth. Concrete masonry units will not be accepted. C. Load Transfer Devices: 1. Dowels: Plain round or deformed bars, as shown on the drawings. Provide corrosion inhibitor on unbonded end. a. Metal expansion caps: Designed to provide not less than 1 inch of bar movement. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, and as follows: 1. Type I, except where other type is specifically permitted or required. B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type C or F. C. Water: Potable. D. Aggregates: 1. Normal weight concrete: ASTM C 33. a. Class 2M. 2. Maximum size of coarse aggregates: One-third of depth of pavements. E. Admixtures - General: Admixtures which result in more than 0.1 percent of soluble chloride ions by weight of cement are prohibited. F. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260 and certified by manufacturer for compatibility with other mix components. G. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. H. Water -Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. I. Water -Reducing and Accelerating Admixtures: ASTM C 494, Type E. J. Traffic Paint: Alkyd -Resin ready -mixed, complying with AASHTO M248, Type S, white color. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Burlap: AASHTO M 182, Class 2 jute or kenaf cloth. B. Moisture -Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, and as follows: 1. Curing paper. 2. Polyethylene film. 3. White burlap -polyethylene sheeting.. C. Liquid Curing Compounds: 1. Curing compounds: Liquid membrane -forming curing compounds complying with £-- ASTM C 309, Type 1. 2. Solvents: Provide water -based products. D. Expansion Joint Filler: 1. Nonextruding bituminous type: ASTM D 1751. 03878505 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 4 08/05 1J LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 E. Traffic Paint: Alkyd -Resin ready -mixed, complying with AASHTO M248, Type S, white color. 2.5 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Required Average Strength: Establish the required average strength f(cr) of the design mix on the basis of trial mixtures as specified in ACI 211, and proportion mixes accordingly. Employ an independent testing agency acceptable to the Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix design. B. Specified compressive strength f(c) at 28 days: 3,500 psi. C. Slump: Not to exceed 5 inches. D. Fly Ash: 1. The contractor may elect to replace a portion of the portland cement with fly ash up to a maximum percentage by weight of cement plus fly ash of 20. E. Admixtures: 1. Air -entraining admixture: Use in mixes for exterior exposed concrete unless otherwise specifically indicated. Add at rate to achieve total air content in accordance with Table 1.4.3 of ACI 201.2. For concrete not exposed to exterior, add at rate to achieve total air content between 2 percent and 4 percent. 2. Water -reducing admixture: Add as required for placement and workability. 3. Water -reducing and retarding admixture: Add as required in concrete mixes to be placed at ambient temperatures above 90 degrees F. 4. Water -reducing and accelerating admixture: Add as required in concrete mixes to be placed at ambient temperatures below 50 degrees F. 5. Do not use admixtures not specified or approved. F. Mix Adjustments: Provided that no additional expense to owner is involved, contractor may submit for architect's approval requests for adjustment to approved concrete mixes when circumstances such as changed project conditions, weather, or unfavorable test results occur. Include laboratory test data substantiating specified properties with mix adjustment requests. 2.6 CONTROL OF MIX IN THE FIELD A. Slump: A tolerance of up to 1 inch above approved design mix slump will be permitted for 1 batch in 5 consecutive batches tested. Concrete of lower slump than that specified may be used, provided proper placing and consolidation is obtained. B. Total Air Content: A tolerance of plus or minus 1-1/2 percent of approved design mix air content will be allowed for field measurements. C. Do not use batches that exceed tolerances. 2.7 CONCRETE MIXING A. Transit Mixers: Mix concrete materials in transit mixers, complying with requirements of ASTM C 94. 1. At ambient temperatures of 85 to 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 75 minutes. 2. At ambient temperatures above 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 03878505 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 5 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONCRETE FORM PREPARATION A. General: Comply with requirements of ACI 301 for formwork, and as herein specified. The contractor is responsible for design, engineering, and construction of formwork, and for its timely removal. B. Construction: Construct and brace formwork to accurately achieve end results required by concrete documents, properly located and accurately aligned. Provide for screeds, bulkheads, anchorages, and other features shown or otherwise required. C. Release Agent: Provide field -applied form coating. Thoroughly clean and recondition formwork and reapply coating before each use. 3.2 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with requirements of ACI 301 and as herein specified. B. Preparation: Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, soil, and other materials which adversely affect bond with concrete. 1. Size and Spacing: No. 4 bars at 12 inches o.c. each way. 2. Place reinforcement to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverages required for protection. 3. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. 4. Provide Class C tension lap splices complying with ACI 318 unless otherwise indicated. 5. Do not field -bend partially embedded bars unless otherwise indicated or approved. 6. Use approved bar supports and tie wire, as required. Set wire ties to avoid contact with or penetration of exposed concrete surfaces. C. Welding: Welding of reinforcement is not permitted. 3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. General: Provide joints of the types and in the locations shown on the drawings. 1. Construct joints in adjacent panels in precise alignment. Do not offset joints, except joints across expansion joints can be offset as indicated. 2. Tool slab edges and formed joints with 1/8-inch radius jointing tool. B. Expansion Joints: 1. Provide positive, firm support of filler during placement of concrete to ensure accurate alignment. 2. Install expansion joint filler to the full concrete depth. 3. Recess top edge of filler to the depth indicated to accommodate joint sealant. Protect top edge of filler with removable metal channel while concrete is being placed, or provide filler with removable portion of the required depth. 4. Where dowels are used, punch or drill filler to exact dowel diameter, spacing, and depth. C. Load Transfer Devices: 1. Apply a thin brush coat of approved lubricant to free end of dowels immediately before concrete placement. 2. Place at right angles to joints, in precise horizontal and vertical alignment and spacing, and firmly supported against movement during placing of concrete. 03878505 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 6 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 D. Sawn Contraction Joints: 1. Use only wet saws of an approved type. 2. Time sawing to occur before cracking occurs but after concrete has hardened sufficiently to avoid rough joint surfaces. 3. Saw to one-fourth of slab depth. 4. Extend saw cut to full width of concrete section, including adjacent curbs and gutters, if any. E. Joint Sealing: Seal joints as specified in Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. 3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Preparation: Provide materials necessary to ensure adequate protection of concrete during inclement weather before beginning installation of concrete. B. Inspection: Before beginning concrete placement, inspect formwork, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded, verifying that all such work has been completed. C. Placement - General: Comply with requirements of ACI 304 and as follows: 1. Schedule continuous placement of concrete to prevent the formation of cold joints. 2. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide keyed construction joints with tie bars of size and spacing as approved by the architect. 3. Deposit concrete as close as possible to its final location, to avoid segregation. D. Slab Placement: Schedule continuous placement and consolidation of concrete within planned construction joints. 1. Thoroughly consolidate concrete without displacing reinforcement or embedded items, using internal vibrators, vibrating screeds, roller pipe screeds, or other means acceptable to Architect. E. Cold Weather Placement: Comply with recommendations of ACI 306 when air temperatures are expected to drop below 40 degrees F either during concrete placement operations or before concrete has cured. 1. Do not use frozen or ice -laden materials. 2. Do not place concrete on frozen substrates. F. Hot Weather Placement: Comply with recommendations of ACI 305R when ambient temperature before, during, or after concrete placement is expected to exceed 90 degrees F or when combinations of high air temperature, low relative humidity, and wind speed are such that the rate of evaporation from freshly poured concrete would otherwise exceed 0.2 pounds per square foot per hour. I . Do not add water to approved concrete mixes under hot weather conditions. 2. Provide mixing water at lowest feasible temperature, and provide adequate protection of poured concrete to reduce rate of evaporation. 3. Use fog nozzle to cool formwork and reinforcing steel immediately prior to placing concrete. 3.5 FINISHING PAVEMENTS A. Finishing Operations - General: 1. Do not directly apply water to slab surface or dust with cement. 2. Use hand or powered equipment only as recommended in ACI 302.1R. 3. Screeding: Strikeoff to required grade and within surface tolerances indicated. Verify conformance to surface tolerances. Correct deficiencies while concrete is still plastic. 03878505 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 7 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 4. Bull Floating: Immediately following screeding, bull float or darby before bleed water appears to eliminate ridges, fill in voids, and embed coarse aggregate. Recheck and correct surface tolerances. 5. Do not perform subsequent finishing until excess moisture or bleed water has disappeared and concrete will support either foot pressure with less than 1/4-inch indentation or weight of power floats without damaging flatness. 6. Final floating: Float to embed coarse aggregate, to eliminate ridges, to compact concrete, to consolidate mortar at surface, and to achieve uniform, sandy texture. Recheck and correct surface tolerances. B. Float Finish: As specified above. C. Slab Surface Tolerances: 1. Achieve flat, level planes except where grades are indicated. Slope uniformly to drains. 2. Flatness tolerance: Maximum depression between high spots when measured by placing a 10-foot straightedge on surface at any orientation: 1/4 inch. D. Repair of Slab Surfaces: Test slab surfaces for smoothness and to verify surface plane to tolerance specified. Repair defects as follows: 1. High areas: Correct by grinding after concrete has cured for not less than 14 days. 2. Low areas: Immediately after completion of surface finishing operations, cut out low areas and replace with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend with adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when approved by the architect. 3.6 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION A. General: 1. Prevent premature drying of freshly placed concrete, and protect from excessively cold or hot temperatures until concrete has cured. 2. Provide curing of concrete by one of the methods listed and as appropriate to service conditions and type of applied finish in each case. B. Curing Period: 1. Not less than 7 days for standard cements and mixes. C. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms: 1. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared, but before surface is dry. 2. Keep continuously moist for not less than 3 days by uninterrupted use of any of the following: a. Water ponding. b. Water -saturated sand. C. Water -fog spray. d. Saturated burlap: Provide 4-inch minimum overlap at joints. 3. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has dried. a. Moisture -retaining cover: Lap not less than 3 inches at edges and ends, and seal with waterprooftape or adhesive. Repair holes or tears during curing period with same tape or adhesive. Maintain covering in intimate contact with concrete surface. Secure to avoid displacement. 1) Extend covering past slab edges at least twice the thickness of slab. 2) Do not use plastic sheeting on surfaces which will be exposed to view when in service. F 03878505 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 8 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 b. Curing_ compound: Apply at rate stated by manufacturer to conform with moisture -retention requirements specified, using second, immediate application at right angles to first, if necessary, and reapply if damaged by rain. 4. Continue final curing to end of curing period. D. Avoid rapid drying at end of curing period. E. Ensure that joints and slab edges receive adequate curing. 1. Ensure that sawn joints receive adequate curing after sawing. 2. Where joints subsequently will be sealed, do not apply curing compounds unless joint faces will be sandblasted free of compound. F. During and following curing period, protect concrete from temperature changes of adjacent air in excess of 5 degrees F per hour and 50 degrees F per 24 hours. Progressively adjust protective measures to provide uniform temperature changes over entire concrete surface. 3.7 REMOVAL OF FORMS AND SUPPORTS A. Provided that concrete has hardened sufficiently that it will not be damaged, forms may be removed after concrete has cured at not less than 50 degrees F for 8 hours. Maintain curing and protection operations after form removal. 3.8 TRAFFIC PAINT A. Apply traffic paint for striping and other markings with mechanical equipment to produce uniform straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a 15 mil wet film thickness. 3.9 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Composite Sampling, and Making and Curing of Specimens: ASTM C 172 and ASTM C 31. 1. Take samples at point of discharge. 2. For pumped concrete, perform sampling and testing at the frequencies specified herein at point of delivery to pump, and perform additional sampling and testing at the same frequency at discharge from line. Results obtained at discharge from line shall be used for acceptance of concrete. B. Slump: ASTM C 143.One test per strength test and additional tests if concrete consistency changes. 1. Modify sampling to comply with ASTM C 94. C. Air Content of Normal Weight Concrete: ASTM C 173 or ASTM C 231.One test per strength test performed on air -entrained concrete. D. Concrete Temperature: 1. Test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F or below. 2. Test hourly when air temperature is 90 degrees F or above. 3. Test each time a set of strength test specimens is made. E. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39. 1. Compression test specimens: Mold and cure one set of 4 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test required. 03878505 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 9 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 2. Testing for acceptance of potential strength of as -delivered concrete: a. Obtain samples on a statistically sound, random basis. b. Minimum frequency: 1) One set per 100 cubic yards or fraction thereof for each day's pour of each concrete class. 2) One set per 3500 square feet of slab area or fraction thereof for each day's pour of each concrete class. 3) When less than 5 cubic yards is placed in one day, the architect may, at architect's option, waive laboratory testing of specimens if adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided. (Molding and curing of these specimens is not waived.) 4) When the above testing frequency would provide fewer than 5 strength tests for a given class of concrete during the project, conduct testing from not less than 5 randomly selected batches, or from each batch if fewer than 5. C. Test one specimen per set at 7 days for information unless an earlier age is required. d. Test 2 specimens per set for acceptance of strength potential; test at 28 days unless other age is specified. The test result shall be the average of the two specimens. If one specimen shows evidence of improper sampling, molding, or testing, the test result shall be the result of the remaining specimen; if both show such evidence, discard the test result and inform the architect. e. Retain one specimen from each set for later testing, if required. f. Strength potential of as -delivered concrete will be considered acceptable if all of the following criteria are met: 1) No individual test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. 2) Not more than 10 percent of individual test results fall below specified compressive strength f(c). 3) Average of any 3 consecutive strength test results equals or exceeds specified compressive strength f(c). g. Evaluate construction and curing procedures and implement corrective action when strength results for field -cured specimens are less than 85 percent of test values for companion laboratory -cured specimens. F. Test Results: Testing agency shall report test results in writing to architect and contractor within 24 hours of test. 1. Test reports shall contain the following data: a. Project name, number, and other identification. b. Name of concrete testing agency. C. Date and time of sampling. d. Concrete type and class. e. Location of concrete batch in the completed work. f. All information required by respective ASTM test methods. 2. Nondestructive testing devices such as impact hammer or sonoscope may be used at architect's option for assistance in determining probable concrete strength at various locations or for selecting areas to be cored, but such tests shall not be the sole basis for acceptance or rejection. 03878505 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 10 08/05 1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 3. The testing agency shall make additional tests of in -place concrete as directed by the architect when test results indicate that specified strength and other concrete characteristics have not been attained. a. Testing agency may conduct tests of cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or tests as directed. b. Cost of additional testing shall be borne by the contractor when unacceptable concrete has been verified. 1 3.10 OPENING PAVEWNTS TO TRAFFIC A. Do not allow traffic, including construction traffic, on pavements until authorized. B. Pavements may be opened to traffic only after seven (7) days have elapsed after placement and pavements have developed at least 85 percent of specified final design strength. J i END OF SECTION 03878505 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 11 08/05 N LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. E WIIJSVIIV, IF.11 iii A. The work consists of installing a complete underground irrigation system as shown on the Drawings and as specified hereafter. The Contractor performing this work shall furnish all labor, equipment, materials and permits necessary for the completion of the system, except those specified to be furnished by others. t B. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, the construction of the irrigation j system shall include the furnishing, installing and testing of all pipe, fittings, valves, heads, controllers, wires, air release and vacuum valves, backflow prevention devices, inlet and discharge piping, automatic drain valves, manual drain valves, valve boxes, water meters, and all other components pertinent to the plans and specifications of this system. C. The Contractor shall perform all trenching, excavating, boring, backfilling, compacting, l concrete pouring, electrical work, welding, and any other work necessary for the H:9 completion of the project. 1.3 SITE INVESTIGATION A. The Contractor shall examine related work and surfaces before starting the work of this section. The Contractor shall report to the Landscape Architect or his authorized representative, in writing, conditions which will prevent the proper execution of irrigation installation. B. Deviations from plans and specifications shall be executed only with the express permission of the Landscape Architect and at no cost to the Owner. If obvious inadequacies or inappropriate design are found on the drawings, they shall be promptly brought to the attention of the Landscape Architect in writing before proceeding with installation of the system. Ell 1.4 CODES, RULES AND SAFETY ORDERS A. All work and materials shall be in full accordance with the latest local rules and regulations of safety. 1.5 PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall furnish and maintain all warning signs, shoring, barricades, red lanterns, etc., as required by the Safety Orders of the Division of Industrial Safety and local ordinances. 03878505 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 - 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1.6 DEFINITIONS A. Lateral Piping: Downstream from control valves to sprinklers, specialties, and drain valves. Piping is under pressure during flow. B. Irrigation Main Piping: Downstream from point of connection to water distribution piping to, and including, control valves. Piping is under water -distribution -system pressure. C. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials: 1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic. 2. FRP: Fiberglass -reinforced plastic. 3. PA: Polyamide (nylon) plastic. 4. PE: Polyethylene plastic. 5. PP: Polypropylene plastic. 6. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic. 7. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. 8. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic. 1.7 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain 100 percent water -coverage irrigation system for exterior plants indicated. B. Location of Sprinklers and Specialties: Design location is approximate. Make minor adjustments necessary to avoid plantings and obstructions such as signs and light standards. Maintain 100 percent water coverage of planting areas indicated. C. Minimum Working Pressures: The following are minimum pressure requirements for piping, valves, and specialties, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Irrigation Main Piping: 200 psig. 2. Lateral Piping: 200 psig. 1.8 SUBMITTALS A. Prepare and make five sets of submittals providing manufacturer's specifications and "cut sheets" on the following components: 1. Controllers 2. Manual and automatic valves 3. Emitters 4. Enclosures for backflow prevention devices 5. 24 volt wire 6. Piping 7. Joint materials 8. Backflow enclosure heating devices 9. Backflow prevention device 10. Irrigation heads 11. Filters 12. Valve boxes 13. Wire splicing materials 14. PVC fittings B. Provide irrigation system record drawings: 1. Legibly mark drawings to record actual construction. 2. Indicate horizontal and vertical locations, referenced to permanent surface improvements 3. Identify field changes of dimension and detail any changes made by Change Order. LJ 03878505 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 - 2 08/05 11 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 C. The Contractor shall provide one controller chart showing the area covered by a controller for each automatic valve. The chart shall be a reduced drawing of the actual "Record Drawing" system. The size of the chart shall be the maximum size that the controller door will allow. If controller sequence is not legible when the drawing is reduced, drawing shall be enlarged to a size that is readable. D. Chart shall be a blackline print with a different color used to show area of coverage for each system. When completed and approved, the chart shall be hermetically sealed between two pieces of plastic, each piece being a minimum 20 mils thick. Charts shall be completed and approved prior to final inspection and acceptance of the irrigation system. E. Field quality -control test reports. F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For irrigation systems, to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Include data for the following: 1. Automatic -control valves. 2. Irrigation heads. 3. Controllers. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with sections on general conditions. Quality control and Standard landscape practices. C. Installer's Qualifications: Minimum of 5 years experience installing irrigatin systems of comparable size, and current Irrigator's License. Submit a copy of Irrigator's License to the Landscape Architect. D. Materials, equipment and methods of installation shall comply with the following codes and standards: 1. Manufacturer's Instructions. 2. National fire Protection Association (NFPA): national Electrical code. 3. American society for testing Materials (ASTM). 4. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF). 5. The Irrigation Association (IA). 6. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ). E. Excavation, backfilling and compaction operations: Contractor shall meet State and Local requirements. F. Obtain Owner's and Landscape Architect's acceptance of installed and tested irrigation system prior to installing backfill materials. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver irrigation system components in manufacturer's original, undamaged and unopened containers with labels intact and legible. B. Deliver plastic piping in bundles, packaged to provide adequate protection of pipe ends, both threaded or plain. C. Store and handle materials to prevent damage and deterioration. D. Provide secure, locked storage for valves, sprinklers heads, and similar components that can not be immediately replaced, to prevent installation delays. E. Contractor to provide and honor all manufacturer warranties on all irrigation products. 03878505 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 - 3 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 F. Deliver piping with factory -applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe -end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. G. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. 1.11 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Landscape Architect and Owner no fewer than five days in advance of proposed interruption of water service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of water service without Owner's written permission. B. Known underground and surface utility lines are indicated within the drawing set. If utilities are not shown on plans, that does not mean there are no utilities in the construction limits. C. Protect existing trees, plants, lawns and other features designated to remain as part of the final landscape work. D. Promptly repair damage to adjacent facilities caused by irrigation system work. Cost of repairs at Contractor's expense. E. Promptly notify the Landscape Architect of unexpected subsurface conditions. F. Irrigation system layout is diagrammatic. Exact location of piping, sprinkler heads, valves and other components shall be established by Contractor in the field at the time of installation. 1. Cut through concrete and masonry with core drills. Jackhammers are not permitted. 2. Materials and finishes for patching shall match existing surface materials and finish. Exercise special care to provide patching at openings in exterior walls watertight. 3. Methods and materials used for cutting and patching shall be acceptable too the Landscape Architect. 1.12 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for pedestal -mount irrigation controllers. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. B. The Contractor shall coordinate and cooperate with other contractors on site to ensure rapid and efficient completion of all contracted work. 1.13 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish 5 pop-up irrigation heads that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. B. Furnish two CR2032 3V Cell Batteries for replacement of Rain/freeze sensor batteries as needed. Tape additional batteries to inside of irrigation controller door and label "Additional Rain/freeze sensor batteries". 03878505 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 - 4 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1.14 WARRANTY A. Irrigation system shall be guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for one (1) year after final acceptance. Work covered under the guarantee period will include, but not be limited to, emergency repairs. Repair settling backfilling trenches, and repair replacement of any malfunctioning equipment. B. Correct all defects and resulting damages within 24 hours after the Owner's notification. If no response to the notification is made within the 24 hour period, the Owner may proceed with repairs and charge the expense incurred with the work to the Contractor. The Owner may make emergency repairs as necessary without voiding the guarantee. C. Furnish all materials, labor and equipment for correction at no expense to the Owner. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, fitting, and joining materials. B. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, PVC 1120 compound, Class 200 IPS 1. PVC Socket Fittings, Schedule 40: ASTM D 2466. C. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, PVC 1120 compound, Schedule 40. 1. PVC Socket Fittings, Schedule 40: ASTM D 2466. D. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, PVC 1120 compound, Schedule 80. 1. PVC Socket Fittings, Schedule 80: ASTM D 2467. 2. PVC Threaded Fittings: ASTM D 2464. 2.3 SWING JOINTS A. Swing joints shall be LASCO "o" ring swing joints as required to protect the head from breakage. Swing joints shall be the same size as the inlet opening. 2.4 JOINING MATERIALS A. Solvent Cement: ASTM F 656 primer and ASTM D 2564 solvent cement in color other than orange. Solder: ASTM B 32, Alloys Sn95 and E. B. Gaskets and Fasteners for Metal and Metal -to -Plastic Flanged Joints. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, asbestos -free, flat 1/8 inch thickness gaskets and ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel bolts, nuts, and washer. C. Gaskets for Plastic Flanged Joints: Materials recommended by plastic pipe and fittings manufacturer. 03878505 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 - 5 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 2.5 GENERAL -DUTY VALVES A. Spears PVC True Union 2000 standard ball valve. B. Wilkins full port bronze ball valve. 2.6 SPECIALTY VALVES A. Plastic Automatic Control Valves: Rain Bird Model PESB electric remote control valve. 1. The electric remote control valve shall be a normally closed 24 VAC 50/60 cycle solenoid actuated globe pattern design. The valve pressure rating shall not be less than 200 psi (13,80 bars). The valve shall have the following characteristics (circle one): Flow rate: 50 gpm m3/h Us Pressure loss not to exceed: 3.1 psi bars The valve body and bonnet shall be constructed of heavy-duty glass -filled UV resistant nylon and have stainless steel studs and flange nuts; diaphragm shall be of nylon reinforced nitrile rubber. 2. The valve shall have both internal and external manual open/close control (internal and external bleed) to manually open and close the valve without electrically energizing the solenoid. The valve's internal bleed shall prevent flooding of the valve box. 3. The valve shall house a fully -encapsulated, one-piece solenoid. The solenoid shall have a captured plunger with a removable retainer for easy servicing and a leverage handle for easy turning. This 24 VAC 50/60 Hz solenoid shall open with 19.6 volt minimum at 200 psi (13,80 bars). At 24 VAC, average inrush current shall not exceed 0.41 amps. Average holding current shall not exceed 0.23 amps. 4. The valve shall have a brass flow control stem for accurate manual regulation and/or shutoff of outlet flow. The valve must open or close in less than 1 minute at 200 psi (13,80 bars), and less than 30 seconds at 20 psi (1,38 bars). 5. The PESB valve shall have a self-cleaning stainless steel screen designed for use in dirty water applications. 6. The valve construction shall be such as to provide for all internal parts to be removable from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation. B. Medium Flow Control Zone Kit with BFF: Rainbird XCZ-100-BFF Control Zone Kit. 1. The control zone kit shall have a 200-mesh inline self-cleaning Back Flush Filter. The filter body shall be constructed of heavy duty, glass -filled, UV resistant plastic material providing a pressure rating of not less than 120 psi. The filter element shall be constructed of a durable polyester fabric attached to a propylene frame. 2. The standard 200-mesh (75 micron) screen shall be serviceable for cleaning purposed by unscrewing the cap from the body and removing the filter element. 3. The Back Flush Filter comes with a rubber Duck Bill Boot that is attached over the cap to prevent bugs and debris from entering the cleaning ports of the cap. The 1" filter body shall have a 1" (26/34) male threaded inlet and outlet. The design shall be of a compact "Y" body and cap configuration. The dimensions for the filter shall not exceed the following: Height: 4 %"(11,4 cm), Length: 5 %" (14,0 cm), Width: 2" (5,1 cm). 4. The control zone kit shall have an inline pressure regulator. The pressure regulator is a normally open device that allows full flow with little pressure loss unless the inlet pressure is greater than preset level. As the inlet pressure increases above the preset level it compresses a spring and begins to reduce the flow and downstream pressure. 03878505 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 - 6 `"'' 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 5. The inline pressure regulator shall have a preset outlet pressure of approximately 40 psi (2,5 bar) at a flow rate of 15 GPM or (1/s; m3/h). The pressure regulator shall be constructed of durable, UV resistant non -corrosive material able to accommodate an inlet pressure rating of not less than 120 psi (8,3 bar). The pressure regulator shall be identifiable as to the flow range: 3 to 15 GPM (0,45 to 3,41 m3/h) with a yellow label. 6. The control zone kits shall have the ability to be installed either above or below ground. The control zone kit shall have an automatic irrigation control valve. The valve shall be normally closed at 24 VAC 50/60 cycle, solenoid actuated, balanced pressure type capable of a flow rate of 15GPM or (1/s; m3/h) with a pressure loss not to exceed 55.1 psi or (bar). 7. The valve pressure rating shall not be less than 120 psi. The valve body and bonnet shall be constructed of high impact, weather -resistant plastic, stainless steel and other chemical/UV resistant materials. 8. The valve shall have a diaphragm constructed of durable Bun-N rubber with a clog - resistant metering orifice. The valve shall have one 90-mesh (200 micron) filter attached to the solenoid base. 9. The kit shall include a check valve to prevent water from draining upstream of the check valve or back into the valve box. The check valve shall be rated to 120 psi (8,3 bar) with 1" FPT connections. 10. The valve shall have a 1" female threaded inlet and outlet. 11. The valve shall be actuated by a low power .30 amp (A) (7.2VA) inrush current and a 0.19 amp (A) (4.56VA) holding current. 12. The valve shall be capable of on/off control by turning the solenoid'/4 turn. 2.7 CONTROL -VALVE BOXES A. Plastic Control -Valve Boxes: Box and cover, and box extensions with open bottom and openings for piping; designed for installing flush with grade. Include size as required for valves and service. 1. Shape: Rectangular. 2. Sidewall Material: PE. Injection molded of structural foam polyethylene. 3. Cover Material: PE. a. Lettering: IRRIGATION. 4. Manufacturers: a. Carson Industries LLC. b. NDS. C. Ametek. d. Strongwell. B. Pro Series Rectangular Valve Box, Cover and Extensions as required. C. Drainage Baclfill: 6" depth cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum to 2 inches (75 mm) maximum. D. Quazite polymer concrete enclosure with extra heavy-duty cover. A. Pop-up, Spray Sprinklers: Rainbird 1806 Pop-up Full or Part Circle Spray Sprinkler. 1. The sprinkler body, stem, nozzle and screen shall be constructed of heavy-duty, ultraviolet resistant plastic. It shall have a heavyduty stainless steel retract spring for positive pop -down and a ratcheting system for easy alignment of the pattern. 03878505 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 - 7 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 2. The sprinkler shall have a soft elastomer pressure -activated comolded wiper seal for cleaning debris from the pop-up stem as it retracts into the case to prevent the sprinkler from sticking up to minimize "flow -by." 3. The sprinkler shall have a matched precipitation rate (MPR) plastic or brass nozzle with an adjusting screw capable of regulating the radius and flow. The sprinkler shall be capable of housing protective, nonclogging filter screens or pressure compensating screens (PCS) under the nozzle. The screen shall be used in conjunction with the adjusting screw for regulating. The 6" (15 cm) and 12" (30 cm) models shall have both a side and a bottom 1/2" (15/21) (FNPT) inlet for ease of installation. 4. The sprinkler shall have a Pop-TopTM Flush Plug pre -installed. The plug shall prevent debris from clogging the sprinkler during installation and allow for the system to be flushed before nozzling. The plug shall be bright orange in color and constructed of polypropylene material. 5. When so indicated on the design pop-up spray sprinkler shall also include a pressure regulating (PRS) device to prevent high pressure fogging to the nozzle stream. This regulating device shall be an integral part of the pop-up stem, removable through the top of the case. These units shall be identifiable from the top with "PRS" markings on the cap. The device shall regulate the nozzle pressure to 30 psi for inlet pressures from 3 5 to 70 psi. Below 35 psi the pressure loss shall not exceed 6 psi. 2.9 SPRINKLER SPECIALTIES A. Wireless Rain/Freeze Sensor: Irritrol RFS1000 Wireless RainSensor Series or approved equal. 1. The sensor shall have enhanced communication and signal link integrity features. 2. The sensor shall have constant transitter power over the entire battery life. 3. The sensor shall have fully adjustable shutoff points from 1/8" to 1" of accumulated rainfall. 4. The sensor shall have over 300-foot transmission range. 5. The sensor shall have one-piece mounting Quick -Clip gutter bracket. 6. The sensor shall include Smart Bypass, for easy system override (sensor switches back automatically on next activation) 7. The sensor shall have an approximate battery life of five years. 8. The sensor shall have Rain and freeze sensors fiilly integrated into one unit. B. Self-cleaning, pressure compensating dripperline: Netafim Techline CV 1. Techline is a low volume dripperline with integral and evenly spaced pressure compensating drippers at specified intervals in three discharge rates (0.4, 0.6 & 0.9 gallons per hour [GPH]). Techline is available in 100', 250' and/or 1,000' coils. Techline Blank Tubing is available in 100', 250' and/or 1,000' coils. 2. Techline shall consist of nominal sized one-half inch (%") inch low -density linear polyethylene tubing with internal pressure compensating, continuously self-cleaning, integral drippers at a specified spacing, (12", 18", or 24" centers) or blank tubing without drippers. The tubing shall be brown in color and conform to an outside diameter (O.D.) of 0.67 inches and an inside diameter (I.D.) of 0.57 inches. Individual pressure compensating drippers shall be welded to the inside wall of the tubing as an integral part of the tubing assembly. These drippers shall be constructed of plastic with a hard plastic diaphragm retainer and a self-flushing/cleaning elastomer diaphragm extending the full length of the dripper. 03878505 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 - 8 LA 08/05 II LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 3. The drippers shall have the ability to independently regulate discharge rates, with an inlet pressure of seven to seventy (7-70) pounds per square inch (PSI), at a constant flow and with a manufacturer's coefficient of variability (Cv) of 0.03. Recommended operating pressure shall be between 15-45 PSI. The dripper discharge rate shall be 0.4, 0.6, or 0.9 gallons per hour (GPH) utilizing a combination turbulent flow/reduced pressure compensation cell mechanism and a diaphragm to maintain uniform discharge rates. The drippers shall continuously clean themselves while in operation. The dripperline shall be available in 12", 18" and 24" spacing between drippers unless otherwise specified. Techline pipe shall be installed beneath landscape mulch unless otherwise specified. Maximum system pressure shall be 45 PSI. Filtration shall be 120 mesh or finer. Bending radius shall be 7". For on -surface or under mulch installations, 6" metal wire staples (TLS6) shall be installed 3'-5' on center, and two staples installed at every change of direction. Techline shall be Netafim Model Number TLCV9-1210 or approved equal. The Techline Blank Tubing shall be Netafim Model Number TLCV0025 or approved equal. 2.10 AUTOMATIC -CONTROL SYSTEM A. Irrigation Controller: Rainbird ESP-8LXI Plus 1. The controller shall be a hybrid type, that combines electromechanical and microprocessor based circuitry capable of fully automatic, semiautomatic, and manual control of irrigation systems. 2. The controller shall be housed in a wallmountable, heavy-duty, plastic, (weather - resistant in ESP-LX Plus) cabinet with a key -lock door and shall be suitable for indoor or outdoor applications. 3. The controller shall operate on 117 VAC± 10% at 60Hz (230 VAC± 10% 50/60Hz for International Models) and shall be capable of operating up to two 5.5 VA 24 VAC electric remote control valves per station plus a master valve or a pump start relay. 4. The controller shall have an electronic, diagnostic circuit breaker that shall sense a station with an electrical overload or short circuit and shall bypass the station and shall continue to operate all other stations in the program in sequence. 5. The controller shall have four separate irrigation programs (A, B, C, & D-drip) which may be programmed for different start times, station assignments, station watering time lengths and any of four independent cycle modes CUSTOM, CYCLICAL, ODD, or EVEN. Each program shall be capable of up to 6 start times per day. 6. The controller shall have 8 stations, each capable of an operating range of from 0 to 12 hours, with 0 to 120 minutes selectable in 1 minute increments and above 120 minutes selectable in 10-minute increments. 7. The controllers shall have a separate water budget feature for each of the A, B, C, or D-drip programs. Water budget shall allow simultaneous adjustment for all stations on a program from zero % of set running time to 300% of set running time. Adjustments shall be in 1% increments. 8. The controller shall be capable of "stacking" A, B, and C programs and operating them sequentially to prevent overlapping irrigation cycles. Only the D-drip program shall be allowed to start at any time regardless of another program in operation. When the D-drip program is in operation along with an A, B, or C program, the controller shall be capable of displaying both stations that are in operation and their program assignments. 03878505 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 - 9 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 9. The controller shall have a 365-day calendar with a day -of -the -month OFF feature allowing the operator to set specific dates to be off up to 30 days in advance. A date set to OFF shall override the normal, repeating day schedule and shall remain off on that date, and shall display to the operator that the current day is a non -water day. All OFF days shall revert to ON once the day passes, with the exception of the 31 st which must be manually reset to ON. Each of the four programs shall have the ability to be set with a time delay between operation of stations. This delay shall occur at the end of each station's watering and before proceeding to the next assigned watering station. The delay shall be adjustable from 0 seconds to 9 hours. 10. The controller shall have a master valve/ pump start circuit that shall provide 24-volt A. C. power for either a master valve or pump start relay when any of the controller's stations are in operation. 11. The controller shall provide the operator the capability to disable concurrent operation of the master valve/pump start circuit from any station desired. 12. The controller shall have a sensor circuit for connection to a rain sensor or to an underground moisture sensor system. When the sensor reaches its "wet" setting and is either interrupting or restricting voltage, the same restriction shall be made to the valve common terminal to prevent or interrupt irrigation. 13. The controller shall have an indicator light that shall be on whenever the sensor switch is set to "ACTIVE". 14. The controller shall have a front -face -panel -mounted sensor bypass switch that shall allow the operator to override the sensor if desired. 15. The controller shall have a battery recharging circuit and a factory -supplied 9-volt rechargeable battery. A fully charged battery shall maintain clock time and program memory up to one week during a power outage. 16. The controller shall have a nonvolatile memory to maintain the program during power outage in the absence of battery backup. The front panel shall be removable and programmable under battery power. 17. The controller shall have a connector to mate to the remote control receiver. The operator shall be able to remotely initialize and advance a manual test program that sequentially runs all stations that have time scheduled in any program for the default run time, start and stop any station without sequencing, start and stop any program and program the run time on any station in the program. The remote operation shall override the controller's rain sensor and off modes. 18. ' The controller shall be as manufactured for Rain Bird Corporation, Glendora, California, or approved equal. B. Wiring: UL 493, Type OF-B multiconductor, with solid -copper conductors and insulated cable; suitable for direct burial- 1 . Available Manufacturers: a. AFC Cable Systems Inc. b. Alcatel Canada Wire, Inc. C. American Electric Cable Co. d. American Insulated Wire Corp. e. Cerro Wire & Cable Co., Inc. f. Colonial Wire and Cable Co., Inc. g. Essex Group, Inc.; Building Wire Products Division. h. Precision Cable Manufacturing Co., Inc. i. Southwire Company. j. Triangle Wire and Cable Co. 2. Feeder -Circuit Cables: No. 12 AWG minimum, between building and controllers. C 03878505 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 - 10 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 3. Low -Voltage, Branch -Circuit Cables: No. 14 AWG minimum, between controllers and automatic control valves; color -coded different from feeder -circuit -cable jacket color; with jackets of different colors for multiple -cable installation in same trench. 4. Splicing Materials: Manufacturer's packaged kit consisting of insulating, spring -type connector or crimped joint and epoxy resin moisture seal; suitable for direct burial. C. Concrete Base: 3500 psi reinforced precast concrete with opening for wiring. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 POINT OF CONNECTION A. All existing water main line locations shown on the Drawings are schematic. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to pot hole and field check to determine actual locations as incidental requisite to the construction contract. B. The proposed controller location indicted on the plans is approximate. Actual location of the controller shall be determined by Owner's representative in the field. C. Where connections to existing stub -outs are required, the Contractor shall make necessary adjustments should stubs not be located exactly as shown, at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.2 STATIC PRESSURE TEST A. The design pressure of the irrigation system is shown on the Drawings. Prior to start of construction of the irrigation system, the Contractor shall provide a gauged test of available static pressure at the point of connection. In the event that the actual static pressure is less than the design static pressure, the Contractor shall not proceed with the work until receiving written direction from the Owner's Representative. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Examine final grades and installation conditions. Do not start irrigation system work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Contractor will be responsible for gaining access under all existing paving by boring under the paving. Sleeves should be coordinated before all work begins. 3.4 EARTHWORK A. Excavating and Trenching: 1. _All excavation shall be considered unclassified excavation and include all materials encountered. 2. Install piping and wiring in sleeves under sidewalks, roadways, parking lots, and railroads. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for locating all cables, conduits, piping, and any other utilities or structures that may be encountered either above or below ground. All necessary precautions must be taken by the Contractor to prevent any damage to these existing utilities and improvements. In the event that such damage should occur from his operations, the Contractor shall repair or replace damaged utilities to their original condition at no additional expense to the Owner 03878505 IRRIGATION, SYSTEMS 02810 - 11 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 4. Excavation and trenching for pipe lines shall be a true and straight line with the trench banks as nearly vertical as practical. The width of the trenches shall not be greater than necessary to permit proper joining, tamping, backfilling, bedding or any other installation procedures that may be necessary. Trench widths shall also be wide enough so that there will be a minimum horizontal and vertical separation of 4" between pipes in the same trench. 5. In areas where trees are present, trench lines will be adjusted on the site to eliminate any damage to tree roots. In areas where avoidance of tree roots is not possible, trenches shall be hand dug. Roots greater than or equal to 1" in diameter shall not be cut. 6. Trench depths shall be sufficient to provide the specified pipe cover as described elsewhere in these specifications or as noted on the Drawings. In rocky areas the trenching depth shall be 6" below normal trench depth to allow for pipe bedding as described in other portions of these specifications. 7. Provide minimum cover over top of underground piping according to the following: a. Irrigation Main Piping: Minimum depth of 18 inches below finished grade, or not less than 6 inches below average local frost depth, whichever is deeper. b. Lateral Piping: 12 inches. C. Sleeves: Same as line depth, 12" minimum. 8. If the Contractor encounters rock or other unfavorable trenching conditions, no additional compensation will be paid. When material from the excavation or trenching is unsuitable for use as backfill, additional back -fill material suitable for this purpose shall be brought in at the expenses of the Contractor. It shall also be the Contractor's responsibility to remove and dispose of all unsuitable materials removed from the trench that cannot be used in the back -fill operation. B. Backfilling: 1. Upon completion of a particular section of the irrigation system, and after sufficient time has elapsed for the curing of solvent weld joints, partial backfilling shall begin, leaving all joints, risers and connections exposed for visual inspection during the hydrostatic testing. Only upon successful completion of the hydrostatic test shall the backfill operation be completed for any one particular section. 2. All backfill material shall be subject to approval by the Landscape Architect. Backfill material shall be free from rock, large stones, brush, sod, frozen material or other unsuitable substances that may damage pipe during the backfilling operations. 3. In the event that the material from the excavation or trenching is found to be unsuitable for use in backfill by the Owner's Representative, it shall be removed from the site and properly disposed of by the Contractor and at his own expense. The Contractor shall then, at no additional cost to the Owner, arrange for, purchase, and furnish suitable backfill material consisting of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand or other approved materials free of large clods of earth or sharp stones and capable of attaining the same relative density of the surrounding ground. 4. In rocky areas, the trench depth shall be 6" below the normal trench depth to allow for 6" of suitable backfill as padding for the pipe. In like manner, there shall be at least 6" of padding on all sides of the pipe as a padding against the rock wall of the trench. 5. Install warning tape directly above pressure piping, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grades, except 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavement and slabs. _ l 03878505 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 - 12 LA 09105 I LU13BOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 M I 6. Backfill shall be placed in horizontal layers not exceeding 6" in depth and shall be thoroughly tamped, or water compacted to near original density or so that no settling will result. Backfill shall be placed to the original ground level. If settlement of trenches occurs within one (1) year from date of completion, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to refill trenches and re -seed or sod the repaired areas. 7. After all piping, risers, valves, thrust blocks, etc., have been installed and partially backfilled as specified in other parts of these specifications, the control valve shall be opened and a full head of water used to flush out the system. After the system is thoroughly flushed, risers shall be capped off and the system pressure tested in accordance with the testing section of these specifications. At the conclusion of the pressure test, the heads shall be installed and the backfill operation completed. PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. B. Piping in control -valve boxes and aboveground may be joined with flanges instead of joints indicated. 1. NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Schedule 40, PVC pipe and socket fittings; and solvent -cemented joints. C. Underground Irrigation Main Piping: 1. Schedule 40, PVC pipe and socket fittings, and solvent -cemented joints. D. Lateral Piping: 1. Class 200, PVC pipe and socket fittings; and solvent -cemented joints. E. Underground Branches and Offsets at Sprinklers and Devices: Class 200, PVC pipe; threaded PVC fittings; and threaded joints. F. Risers to Aboveground Sprinklers and Specialties: Class 200, PVC pipe and socket fittings; and solvent -cemented joints. G. Sleeves: Class 200, PVC pipe and socket fittings; and solvent -cemented joints. 1. Irrigation piping and irrigation control wire shall not be installed in the same sleeve. 2. Sleeve pipe shall be a minimum of two sizes larger than irrigation lines within sleeve. 3. Sleeves for irrigation control wiring shall be sized as follows: Maximum Number of Wires to be Installed in PVC Sleeve Wire Size V2" 3/4" 1" j 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2" 3" (AWG 14 4 6 10 18 25 40 56 88 12 3 5 7 15 20 33 50 75 H. Transition Fittings: Use transition fittings for plastic -to -metal pipe connections according to the following: 1. Couplings: a. Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling. b. Underground Piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: AWWA transition coupling. 2. Fittings: a. Underground Piping: Union with plastic end of same material as plastic piping. 03878505 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 - 13 08/05 0 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 3.6 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Where specific types are not indicated following requirements apply. 1. Buried Valves 2" and Smaller: Wilkins 850 full port brass ball valve. 2. Buried Valves 2" and Larger: Spears PVC utility ball valves. 3.7 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install plastic pipe in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Provide for thermal expansion and contraction. B. Saw cut plastic pipe. Use a square -in -saw vice to ensure a square cut. Remove burrs and shavings at ends prior to installation. C. Make plastic to plastic joints with solvent weld joints. Use only solvent recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Install plastic pipe fittings in accordance with pipe manufacturer's instructions. Contractor shall make arrangements with pipe manufacturer for all necessary field assistance. D. Make plastic to metal joints with plastic male adapters. E. Location and Arrangement: Drawings indicate location and arrangement of piping systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations are approved on Coordination Drawings. F. The minimum horizontal and vertical clearance between lines in the same trench shall be 4" G. Pipe shall not be laid when the temperature is 32 degrees F or below. 3.8 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Make solvent weld joints in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Pressure Main IPS Weld -on 711 (grey Heavy duty) for all Pressure Main and PVC pipe overt". 2. Lateral: IPS Weld -on 710 for all PVC pipe up to 2". 3. Primer: IPS Weld -on, Purple P-68 or P-70 4. Cleaner: IPS Weld -on 5. Allow joints to set al least 24 hours before pressure is applied to the system. 6. Maintain pipe interiors free of dirt and debris. Close open ends of pipe by acceptable methods when pipe installation is not in progress. 3.9 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Underground Manual Valves: Install in valve box with top flush with grade. 1. Install valve boxes on a minimum 4" depth base of pea gravel with landscape fabric beneath. Valve boxes shall be large enough to house the entire valve assembly and allow for maintenance. 2. Provide valve box extension, if necessary, to ensure that entire valve assembly is enclosed in valve box and top of box or extension is flush with adjacent grade. B. Backflow Prevention Valves: 1. Install backflow prevention valve, fittings and accessories as shown or required to complete the system. Insulate against freezing weather. Install per local plumbing codes and per manufacturer's specifications. 2. Backflow prevention valve installed below grade shall have a minimum of 12" clear space above and below assembly with 4" base of pea gravel below clear space. 3. Valve boxes shall be large enough to house the entire assembly and allow for removal and maintenance. 03878505 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 - 14 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 C. Automatic Control Valve: Install in valve box with top flush with grade. l . Install valve boxes on a minimum 4" depth base of pea gravel with landscape fabric beneath. Valve boxes shall be large enough to house the entire valve assembly and allow for maintenance. 2. Provide valve box extension, if necessary, to ensure that entire valve assembly is enclosed in valve box and top of box or extension is flush with adjacent grade. 3. Automatic control valves shall be of the type and size as indicated on the Drawings. Installation shall be according to these specifications, the Drawings and the manufacturer's specifications. 4. Valve wire splices shall be waterproofed. 5. Contractor shall provide a 36" wire expansion coil to facilitate raising splices to ground level without cutting wires. 6. Seal threaded connections on pressure and non -pressure side of control valves with Teflon tape only. 3.10 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION ri A. Flush circuit piping with full head of water and install sprinklers after hydrostatic test is completed. z B. Install sprinklers at manufacturer's recommended heights. C. Locate part -circle sprinklers to maintain a minimum distance of 4 inches (100 mm) from walls and 2 inches (50 mm) from other boundaries, unless otherwise indicated. D. Heads shall be installed in the vertical position and backfilled and compacted to near original density. E. Heads shall be of the type and make specified and shall be installed as shown on the Drawings. F. Head spacing shall not exceed the spacing shown and shall be in the location and configuration as shown on the Drawings. Contractor shall verify turf area dimension while staking head location. Heads shall be spaced to achieve uniform coverage. G. After all piping and risers are in place and connected and before installation of the heads, all control valves for a given section shall be fully opened and a full head of water shall be used to flush out the system. H. Install popup spray heads with LASCO swing joints. L Install popup impact or gear driven sprinklers with an adjustable swing joint riser of at least 3 standard 90 degree elbows. Fabricate double swing joints risers of schedule 80 pvc nipples and schedule 40 PVC elbows. 3.11 AUTOMATIC -CONTROL SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install freestanding controllers on precast concrete bases not less than 36 by 24 by 4 inches (900 by 600 by 100 mm) thick, and not less than 6 inches (150 mm) greater in each direction than overall dimensions of controller. B. Install control cable in same trench as irrigation piping and at least 6 inches (50 mm) beside piping. Provide conductors of size not smaller than recommended by controller manufacturer. Install cable in separate sleeve under paved areas if irrigation piping is installed in sleeve. C. The Controller make model, and approximate location is indicated on the Drawings. D. The Controller shall be mounted and wired according to the manufacturer's recommended procedures and as specified herein and on the Drawings. 03878505 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 -15 08105 I LUBBOCK FIRE STATION' NO. 8 E. When Controllers are mounted outside of any building, vault or enclosure, the Contractor shall direct wire the 120 volt power supply to the Controller. 120 volt power shall be ' supplied to the Controller location by a licensed electrician. F. Remote control valves shall be connected to Controller in the numerical sequences as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Owner's Representative. G. Controllers shall be grounded as specified by the manufacturer. H. Install electric control cable in the piping trenches wherever possible. Place wire in trench adjacent to pipe. Install wire with slack to allow for thermal expansion and contraction. Expansion joints in wire may be provided at 200' intervals by making 5-6 turns of the wire around a piece of '/2" pipe instead of slack. Where necessary to run wire in a separate trench, provide a minimum cover of 18" 1. Connect each remote control valve to one station of a controller except as otherwise indicated. J. Connect remote control valves to common ground wire system. Each controller shall have an independent common wire from any other controller. Connect only valves on the controller to that common wire. K. Wire installation procedures as described herein shall be checked to conform to local codes. L. Continual wire shall be one color and in no case shall wires of different colors be spliced together. M. All 24 volt wiring shall be installed in pvc conduit when inside a building. All 24 volt wiring installed on exterior building walls shall be installed in metal conduit. _. 3.12 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque - tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. D. Valve wire splices shall be waterproofed using 3M Scotchlok Connectors and the Contractor shall provide a 36" wire expansion coil to facilitate raising splices to ground level without cutting wires. 3.13 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic -laminate equipment nameplates and signs on each automatic controller. 1. Text: In addition to identifying unit, distinguish between multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations. 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Observation 1. The following observations shall be the minimum required observations during the course of construction. Additional observations shall be made at any time at the discretion of the Owner or Landscape Architect. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to notify the Owner's Representative, in writing, 48 hours in advance of each required observation. The sequence of required observations shall not be changed from the sequence listed below. The Contractor shall not proceed with work 03878505 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 - 16 08/05 I LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 of the next sequence without written approval of the work of the previous sequence. The Contractor shall attach a copy of the written observation approvals to all applications for payment. a. Observe head placement, coverage and operating pressure prior to planting. b. Observe at end of maintenance period. B. Testing 1. Upon completion of the irrigation system's mainline, the entire mainline shall be tested for a one hour period at 100 psi, unless otherwise noted. Prior to testing, the mainline shall be partially backfilled, leaving all joints and connections exposed for visual inspection. All dirt shall be flushed from the system and the line filled with water to remove air. The mainline shall be brought to static pressure. A pressure gauge and temporary valve shall be installed at the end of the mainline to permit air pressure to be applied to the main. A pressure of 100 psi must be retained for a one hour period. Any leaks resulting in the one hour pressure test shall be repaired and the system retested until the system passes the test. 2. Upon completion of the lateral piping sections, each lateral system shall be pressure tested. On systems using flex nipples, or swing joints, the lateral system shall be tested prior to installation of the flex nipples or swing joints. Prior to testing the lateral lines shall be partially backfilled leaving all joints and connections exposed for visual inspection. All air and dirt shall be flushed from the system and all open fittings shall be capped. The testing procedure shall be the same as used for the main line. If after one hour 100 psi pressure has been retained, the heads shall be installed, and the backfill operation completed. Any leaks resulting from the hydrostatic test shall be repaired and the system retested until the system passes the test. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for payment of construction observations for retesting of any lines or system components that fail initial pressure or performance test. Costs shall include the time of the observer at the observers standard rate, travel time and travel expenses. 3.15 STARTUP SERVICE A. Verify that controllers are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents. B. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements in Division 16 Sections. C. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.16 ADJUSTING A. Contractor shall adjust all valves for the proper operating pressure and adjust all heads for uniform coverage and even flow. B. Contractor shall wire the Controller (valve/station) as directed by the Landscape Architect. The valve number shall be indicated on the Controller panel for each station. C. Contractor shall program Controller to provide optimum system performance. 3.17 CLEANING A. The Contractor shall continuously keep a neat and orderly area in which he is installing the system. Disposal of rubbish and waste material resulting from the installation shall be continual. Upon completion of the system, the Contractor shall remove from the Owner's property at his own expense, all temporary structures, rubbish waste material, tools and equipment resulting from or used in the installation of the system. 03878505 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 - 17 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 B. The Contractor shall repair damage resulting from irrigation system installation. C. Flush dirt and debris from piping before installing sprinklers and other devices. 3.18 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. When the Contractor is satisfied that the system is operating properly, that it is balanced and adjusted, that all work and clean-up is completed he shall issue notice of completion to the Owner's Representative requesting a final inspection. The Owner's Representative will respond to the notice of completion by the Contractor and shall appear with the Owner for an observation of the project. At that time the Contractor shall demonstrate the operation of each system in its entirety. In judging the work, no allowance for deviation from the original Drawings and Specifications will be made unless prior approval has been obtained. B. Any inconsistency to the Specifications or the Drawings shall be noted by the Owner's Representative and a written copy of required corrections shall be given to the Contractor. 3.19 DEMONSTRATION A. After the system has been tested and accepted, the Contractor shall instruct the Owner's Representative in the operation and maintenance of the system. B. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with two (2) keys for the following: 1. Manual Gate Valves. 2. Manual Drain Valves. 3. Valve Boxes. 4. Valve Markers. 5. Controllers. 6. Any locking assembly in need of key access. C. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with two copies of an Irrigation Maintenance Manual bound in a three ring binder. The maintenance manual shall include copies of the approved submittals, controller operations manuals and manufacturers warranties on all irrigation products. 3.20 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND GUARANTEE A. Maintenance of the irrigation system shall begin immediately following the installation of the system and shall continue until the entire project is accepted. Maintenance shall include repair of defects or damages, and adjustments and fine tuning of the system, and repairs of damages resulting from vandalism, erosion, weather, and the like. B. For a period of one (1) year from final acceptance of the system, the Contractor shall promptly furnish and install, without cost to Owner, any and all parts or materials which prove defective in material or workmanship. Damage due to irrigation system line breaks shall be repaired and brought to original condition by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner. C. In the fall, at the Owner's request, the Contractor shall drain the system, and otherwise prepare the system for winter. In the spring, at the Owner's request, the Contractor will reactivate the system, repair any defects or damage and adjust the system. As these services are performed, the Contractor shall instruct the Owner. D. For a period of one (1) year from final acceptance of the system, the Contractor shall repair any settlement of trenches by one of the following methods as directed by the Owner's Representative. 1. Bring to grade by top -dressing (raking topsoil into the planting bed). 2. Bring to grade with topsoil. r� 03878505 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 - 18 08/05 I t .7 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 3. Remove existing plant material, fill depression with topsoil, and replace with new plant material to match original plantings. 4. Repair by any of the above methods shall result in a smooth, level area. Maintenance of repaired areas shall be the responsibility of the Owner. END OF SECTION 02810 03979505 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 e 19 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 02920 LAWNS AND GRASSES PART I -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plugging. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil. B. Manufactured Soil: Soil produced off -site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil. C. Planting Soil: Native or imported topsoil, manufactured topsoil, or surface soil modified to become topsoil; mixed with soil amendments. D. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately beneath planting soil. E. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms. A. Product Data: For Turffalo plugs. B. Certification of Grass Plugs: Certification of Turffalo's genetic identity from the Texas Department of Agriculture, with the name Tech Turf I, identifying Frontier Hybrids, Inc. as the source and including the name and telephone number of supplier. Turffalo is a hybrid of turfgrass that utilized buffalograss (Buchloe dactyloides) in its breeding. C. Qualification Data: For qualified landscape Installer. D. Product Certificates: For soil amendments and fertilizers, from manufacturer. E. Material Test Reports: For existing surface soil and imported topsoil. F. Planting Schedule: Indicating anticipated planting dates for each type of planting. G. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of lawns during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required initial maintenance periods. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful lawn establishment. 1. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when planting is in progress. 03878505 08/05 LAWNS AND GRASSES 02920 - 1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 2. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than two hours normal travel time from Installer's place of business to Project site. B. Soil -Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent laboratory, recognized by the State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed. C. Topsoil Analysis: Furnish soil analysis by a qualified soil -testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt and clay content; cation exchange capacity; deleterious material; deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant -nutrient content of topsoil. 1. Report suitability of topsoil for lawn growth. State -recommended quantities of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory topsoil. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Plugs: Deliver Turffalo plugs in original, labeled and undamaged containers. Trays must be watered daily enough to keep roots moist and kept in an area where the plants can receive at least 50% sunlight. B. Seed: Deliver seed in original sealed, labeled, and undamaged containers. 1.7 SCHEDULING A. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting periods with initial maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion. 1. May 15t' to August 31" for Turffalo plugging. 2. Overseeding — Annual Rye Grass. a. If Turffalo plugs cannot be established by September 30, lawn areas are to be over -seeded with annual rye grass at a rate of 4-lbs/1,000sf. If this is required, the contractor shall maintain the annual grass lawn, as needed, including, but not limited to irrigation, weeding and mowing to maintain a maximum height of 3", and edging, as required. b. This annual rye grass maintenance shall be considered as a separate item from the 180-day maintenance period specified for the plugging of Turffalo grass. C. The Contractor shall apply a minimum of two applications of Roundup herbicide to the annual rye grass in early spring in preparation for Turffalo grass installation. The two applications should be separated by a period of 10-14 days and contractor should notify the Landscape Architect of the schedule of Roundup application. d. After sufficient annual grass kill has been verified by the Landscape Architect, lawn areas should be tilled to a depth of 2"- 3" prior to plugging Turffalo grass as specified. B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit. 03878505 LAWNS AND GRASSES 02920 - 2 08/05 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting periods with initial maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of planting completion. 1. Spring Planting: After the last normal freeze date. 2. Winter Planting: Sixty days prior to the first normal freeze date. B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit. C. Growing Zones: Turffalo may be grown in Zones 5-11, States: Texas, Oklahoma, New Mexico, Kansas, Nebraska, Colorado, Arizona, Utah, Nevada, California, Iowa, Illinois, Missouri, Arkansas, Louisiana, Mississippi, Alabama, Tennessee, Georgia, and Florida. 1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Lawn Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable lawn is established, but for not less than the following periods: 1. Plugged Lawns: 180 days from date of planting completion. a. The plugged turf maintenance period will temporarily suspend October 31, and will resume March 1. Contractor will be responsible for a total of 180 days maintenance period during the two growing seasons if so required by the schedule of the project. 2. Seeded Lawns: 90 days from date of planting completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLUGS A. Plugs: Turffalo plugs, certified by the Texas Department of Agriculture as Tech Turf I, grown in individual cells with uniform density, color and texture, strongly rooted and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted; of the following turfgrass species and plug size. 1. Turfgrass Species: Buffalograss (Buchloe dactyloides) 2. Plug Size: 2 inches (50 mm) deep and 1.5 inches square at the top. 2.2 SEED A. Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new -crop seed complying with AOSA's "Journal of Seed Technology; Rules for Testing Seeds: for purity and germination tolerances. B. Seed Species: Seed of grass species as follows, with not less than 95 percent germination, not less than 85 percent pure seed, and not more than 0.5 percent weed seed: 1. Annual Ryegrass (Lolium multiflorum). 03878505 LAWNS AND GRASSES 02920 - 3 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 2.3 TOPSOIL A. Topsoil: ASTM D 5268, pH range of 6 to 8.5, a minimum of 2 percent organic material content, free of stones 2 inches (50 mm) or larger in any dimension and other extraneous material harmful to plant growth. 1. Topsoil Source: Reuse surface soil stockpiled on -site. Verify suitability of stockpiled surface soil to produce topsoil. Clean surface soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps and other extraneous material harmful to plant growth. a. Supplement with imported or manufactured topsoil from off -site sources when quantities are insufficient. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well - drained construction or mining sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches (100 mm) deep; do not obtain from agricultural land, bogs or marshes. 2.4 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Lime: If pH is below 6, use ASTM C 602, agricultural limestone containing a minimum of 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent and as follows: 1. Provide lime in form of dolomitic limestone. 2.5 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Compost: If there is too much sand for the soil to facilitate rapid lawn establishment, use compost with well -composted, stable, and weed -free organic matter, pH range of 6 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing though a 1-inch (25-mm) sieve; soluble salt content of 5 desisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows: 1. Organic Matter Content: 50 percent of dry weight. 2. Feedstock: Agricultural, food, or industrial residuals; biosolids; yard trimmings; or source -separated or compostable mixed solid waste. B. Peat: If there is too much sand for the soil to facilitate rapid lawn establishment, use peat with finely divided or granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, containing partially decomposed moss peat, native peat or reed -sedge peat and having water -absorbing capacity of 1100 to 2000 percent. 2.6 PLANTING ACCESSORIES A. Selective Herbicides: After installing plugs, use EPA registered and approved, of type recommended by manufacturer for application: 1. In areas with trees use: "All -Seasons" containing Barricade pre -emergent herbicide by Fertilome. 2. In large areas without trees use: "Ally" pre -emergent herbicide by Dupont. 2.7 FERTILIZER A. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial -grade fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast - and slow -release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea-1 formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: Per 1000 sq. ft. use 2 lbs of actual nitrogen, 3 lbs of phosphorous, 3 lbs of potash, 0.1 lb of iron chelate and 0.1 lb of zinc chelate. 03878505 LAWNS AND GRASSES 02920 - 4 I 08/05 i_ L111 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive Turffalo plugs for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and plantings from damage caused by planting operations. B. If project requirements result in Turffalo plug spacing to exceed 17 inches, provide erosion -control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil - bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. 3.3 LAWN PREPARATION A. Limit lawn subgrade preparation to areas to be planted. B. Newly Graded Subgrades: Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 3 inches (75 mm). Remove stones larger than 2 inches (50 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1. Apply fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening. 2. When applicable, thoroughly blend planting soil mix off -site before spreading or spread topsoil, apply soil amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil mix. a. Delay mixing fertilizer with planting soil if planting will not proceed within a few days. b. If required, mix lime with dry soil before mixing fertilizer. 3. Spread planting soil to a depth of 4 inches (100 mm) but not less than required to meet finish grades after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. C. Unchanged Subgrades: If lawns are to be planted in areas unaltered or undisturbed by excavating, grading, or surface -soil stripping operations, prepare surface soil as follows: 1. Remove existing grass, vegetation, and turf. Do not mix into surface soil. For Bermuda grass, allow it to grow 3 inches tall and then spray it with Round -Up. Wait 3 to 4 days, then mow it very short and spray it once more with Round -Up. 2. Loosen surface soil to a depth of at least 6 inches (150 mm). Apply soil amendments and fertilizers according to planting soil mix proportions and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches (100 mm.) of soil. Till soil to a homogeneous mixture of fine texture. a. Apply fertilizer directly to surface soil before loosening 3. Remove stones larger than 2 inches (50 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, trash, and other extraneous matter. 4. Legally dispose of waste material, including grass, vegetation, and turf, off Owner's property- D. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm) of finish elevation. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit finish ?; grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future. 03878505 LAWNS AND GRASSES 02920 - 5 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 E. Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil. F. Before planting, restore areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading. 3.4 PREPARATION FOR EROSION -CONTROL MATERIALS A. Prepare area as specified in "Lawn Preparation" Article. B. Moisten prepared area before planting if surface is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil. C. For areas where spacing of Turffalo plugs is to exceed 17 inches (425 mm), the areas should be seeded with annual ryegrass 35 days prior to plugging Turffalo and then killed - out with Round -up after 30 days (5 days prior to plugging Turffalo). 3.5 PLUGGING A. Plant plugs in holes or furrows spaced on center as noted on plans. B. Compress the plugs into the holes or furrows with light rolling to facilitate adequate contact between the roots and surrounding soil. C. When complete, the top of the roots should be even with the surrounding soil. D. Immediately after plugging, pre -emergent herbicide should be applied. 3.6 SEEDING A. Sow seed with spreader or seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h). Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in two directions at right angles to each other. 1. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged. 2. Do not seed against existing trees. Limit extent of seed to outside edge of planting saucer. B. Sow seed at a total rate of 3 to 4 lb/1000 sq. ft. (1.4 to 1.8 kg/92.9 sq. m). C. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch (3 mm) of soil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray. D. Protect seeded areas with slopes exceeding 1:4 with erosion -control blankets installed and stapled according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Protect seeded areas with erosion -control mats where shown, installed and anchored according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7 HYDROSEEDING A. Hydroseeding: Mix specified seed, fertilizer, and fiber mulch in water, using equipment specifically designed for hydroseed application. Continue mixing until uniformly blended into homogeneous slurry suitable for hydraulic application. 1. Mix slurry with manufacturer's recommended tackifier. 2. Apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded in a one-step process. Apply slurry at a rate so that mulch component is deposited at not less than 1500-1b/acre (15.6-kg/92.9 sq. m) dry weight, and seed component is deposited at not less than the specified seed -sowing rate. 03878505 LAWNS AND GRASSES 02920 - 6 08/05 i_ LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 3.8 LAWN MAINTENANCE A. Maintain and establish lawn by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting and other operations. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth lawn. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation. B. Watering: Provide and maintain temporary piping, hoses and lawn -watering equipment to convey water from sources and keep lawn uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches (100 mm). 1. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or mulch. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly planted areas. 2. Water lawn with fine spray at a minimum rate of V4 inch per day for the first five days, or enough to keep roots moist. After the first five days, cut back to watering a minimum of V4 inch every three days, taking rainfall, humidity and temperature into consideration. C. Mowing: If possible, delay mowing until Turffalo has achieved complete coverage. If it must be mowed prior to covering the area, mow at the highest setting to avoid cutting runners. Repeat mowing to maintain specified height without cutting more than 1/3 of grass height. Remove no more than 1/3 of grass -leaf grown in initial or subsequent moorings. Do not mow when grass is wet. Schedule initial and subsequent mowings to maintain a grass height of 2 to 3 inches (50 to 75 mm). D. Lawn Postfertilization: Apply fertilizer after initial mowing and when grass is dry that will provide actual nitrogen of at least 2 lbs/l000 sq. ft. (0.90 kg/92.9 sq. m). E. Re -Treatment with Pre -Emergent Herbicides: If Turffalo has not completely covered the area where it is planted prior to expiration of the effective weed prevention period of the pre -emergent herbicide, subsequent applications of pre -emergent herbicide are required. F. Ongoing Herbicide and Insecticide Treatment: All 2-4-D type herbicides may be used on Turffalo. DO NOT USE Atrazine, Banvel, Dicambia, Simazine or Trimec. Once fully established, herbicides such as Treflan or Surflan may be used on Turffalo. Once a year, in the spring, a grub worm killer, such as Merit by Bayer, must be applied to Turffalo. 3.9 SATISFACTORY LAWNS A. Lawn installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Landscape Architect: 1. Satisfactory Plugged Lawn: At end of maintenance period, the required number of plugs has been established as well -rooted, viable patches of grass; and areas between plugs are free of weeds and other undesirable vegetation. Overall coverage of the turf grass shall be obtained with non bare spots greater than 6 inches by 6 inches anywhere in the turf area. 2. Satisfactory Seeded Lawn: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand of grass has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage exceeding 90 percent over any 10 sq. ft. and bare spots not exceeding 8 by 8 inches. B. Use specified materials to reestablish lawns that do not comply with requirements and continue maintenance until lawns are satisfactory. 1. Satisfactory Seeded Lawn: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand of grass has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage exceeding 90 percent over any 10 sq. ft. (0.92 sq. m) and bare spots not exceeding 6 by 6 inches (125 by 125 mm). 03878505 LAWNS AND GRASSES 02920 - 7 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 3.10 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. Promptly remove soil and debris, created by lawn work, from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas. B. Erect temporary fencing or barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from traffic. Maintain fencing and barricades throughout initial maintenance period and remove after lawn is established. END OF SECTION 02920 03878505 LAWNS AND GRASSES 02920 - 8 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 02930 EXTERIOR PLANTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Trees. 2. Shrubs. 3. Ground cover. 4. Plants. 5. Edgings. 6. Planters. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Balled and Potted Stock: Exterior plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they are grown and placed, unbroken, in a container. Ball size is not less than diameter and depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of exterior plant required. B. Container -Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well -rooted exterior plants grown in a container with well -established root system reaching sides of container and maintaining a firm ball when removed from container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and protect root mass during shipping and be sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for kind, type, and size of exterior plant required. C. Fabric Bag -Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well -rooted exterior plants established and grown in -ground in a porous fabric bag with well -established root system reaching sides of fabric bag. Fabric bag size is not less than diameter, depth, and volume required by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of exterior plant. D. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil. E. Planting Soil: Native or imported topsoil, manufactured topsoil, or surface soil modified to become topsoil; mixed with soil amendments. F. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill, before placing planting soil. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Verification of Plant Origin: A list of all plants to be supplied to the project and the nursery and point of origin from which they will be supplied. C. Samples for Verification: For each of the following: 1. 1 lb of rock mulch for each color and texture of stone required, in labeled plastic bags. 03878505 EXTERIOR PLANTS 02930 - 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 D. Planting Schedule: Indicating anticipated planting dates for exterior plants. E. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of exterior plants during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required maintenance periods. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful establishment of exterior plants. 1. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when exterior planting is in progress. B. Topsoil Analysis: Furnish soil analysis by a qualified soil -testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange capacity; sodium absorption ratio; deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant -nutrient content of topsoil. 1. Report suitability of topsoil for plant growth. State recommended quantities of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce a satisfactory topsoil. C. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of exterior plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1, "American Standard for Nursery Stock." 1. Selection of exterior plants will be made by Landscape Architect, who will tag and/or approve all plants. D. Tree and Shrub Measurements: Measure according to ANSI Z60.1 with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position. Do not prune to obtain required sizes. Take caliper measurements 6 inches above ground for trees up to 4-inch caliper size, and 12 inches above ground for larger sizes. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread; do not measure branches or roots tip -to -tip. E. Observation: Landscape Architect will observe trees and shrubs either at place of growth or at site before planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, size, and quality. Landscape Architect retains right to observe trees and shrubs further for size and condition of balls and root systems, insects, injuries, and latent defects and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from Project site. 1. Notify Landscape Architect of sources of planting materials fourteen days in advance of delivery to site. F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery, except as approved by Landscape Architect. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind -tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of exterior plants during delivery. Do not drop exterior plants during delivery. Damaged plants may be rejected by Landscape Architect or Owner on site. B. Handle planting stock by root ball. 03878505 EXTERIOR PLANTS 02930 - 2 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 C. Deliver exterior plants after preparations for planting have been completed and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set exterior plants trees in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist. 1. Do not remove container -grown stock from containers before time of planting. 2. Water root systems of exterior plants stored on -site with a fine -mist spray. Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist condition. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit. B. Coordination with Lawns: Plant trees and shrubs after finish grades are established and before planting lawns, unless otherwise acceptable to Landscape Architect. 1. When planting trees and shrubs after lawns, protect lawn areas and promptly repair damage caused by planting operations. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Warrant the following exterior plants, for the warranty period indicated, against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from lack of adequate maintenance, neglect, or abuse by Owner, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control. 1. Warranty Period for Trees and Shrubs: One year from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Ground Cover and Plants: Six months from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Remove dead exterior plants immediately. Replace immediately unless required to plant in the succeeding planting season. 4. Replace exterior plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at end of warranty period. 5. A limit of one replacement of each exterior plant will be required, except for losses or replacements due to failure to comply with requirements. 1.9 MAINTENANCE A. Trees and Shrubs: Maintain for the following maintenance period by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, restoring planting saucers, tightening and repairing stakes and guy supports, and resetting to proper grades or vertical position, as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. Restore or replace damaged tree wrappings. 1. Maintenance Period: Six months from date of Substantial Completion. B. Ground Cover and Plants: Maintain for the following maintenance period by watering, weeding, fertilizing, and other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings: 1. Maintenance Period: Six months from date of Substantial Completion. 03878505 EXTERIOR PLANTS 02930 - 3 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TREE AND SHRUB MATERIAL A. General: Furnish nursery -grown trees and shrubs complying with ANSI Z60.1, with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well -shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement. B. Grade: Provide trees and shrubs of sizes and grades complying with ANSI Z60.1 for type of trees and shrubs required. Trees and shrubs of a larger size may be used if acceptable to Landscape Architect, with a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls. C. Label each tree and shrub with securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. 2.2 SHADE AND FLOWERING TREES A. Shade Trees: Single -stem trees with straight trunk, well-balanced crown, and intact leader, of height and caliper indicated, complying with ANSI Z60.1 for type of trees required. 1. Provide container -grown trees. 2. Branching Height: One-third to one-half of tree height. B. Small Upright or Spreading Trees: Branched or pruned naturally according to species and type, with relationship of caliper, height, and branching according to ANSI Z60.1; stem form as follows: 1. Stem Form: Single stem or multistem, shrub, with multiple stems according to species and plant schedule on drawings. 2. Provide container -grown trees. C. Multistem Trees: Branched or pruned naturally according to species and type, with relationship of caliper, height, and branching according to ANSI Z60.1; stem form as follows: 1. Stem Form: Clump. 2. Provide container -grown trees. 2.3 DECIDUOUS SHRUBS A. Form and Size: Deciduous shrubs with not less than the minimum number of canes required by and measured according to ANSI Z60.1 for type, shape, and height of shrub. 1. Provide container -grown shrubs. 2.4 CONIFEROUS EVERGREENS A. Form and Size: Normal -quality, well-balanced, coniferous evergreens, of type, height, spread, and shape required, complying with ANSI Z60.1. B. Form and Size: Specimen -quality, exceptionally heavy, tightly knit, symmetrically shaped coniferous evergreens and the following grade: 1. Heavy Grade: "XXX." 2. Provide container -grown trees. 2.5 BROADLEAF EVERGREENS A. Form and Size: Normal -quality, well-balanced, broadleaf evergreens, of type, height, spread, and shape required, complying with ANSI Z60.1. 1. Provide container -grown trees. 03878505 EXTERIOR PLANTS 02930 - 4 08/05 t_ N LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 2.6 GROUND COVER PLANTS A. Ground Cover: Provide ground cover of species indicated, established and well rooted in pots or similar containers, and complying with ANSI Z60.1. 2.7 PLANTS A. Annuals: Provide healthy, disease -free plants of species and variety shown or listed. Provide only plants that are acclimated to outdoor conditions before delivery and that are in bud but not yet in bloom. B. Perennials: Provide healthy, field -grown plants from a commercial nursery, of species and variety shown or listed. 2.8 TOPSOIL A. Topsoil: ASTM D 5268, pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 2 percent organic material content; free of stones 1 inch or larger in any dimension and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. 1. Topsoil Source: Amend existing in -place surface soil to produce topsoil. Verify suitability of surface soil to produce topsoil. Clean surface soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. a. Surface soil may be supplemented with imported or manufactured topsoil from off -site sources. The Owner will provide all required supplemental topsoil to the site. 2.9 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Text: Inorganic amendments are only as needed to produce acceptable topsoil. B. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, containing a minimum of 90 percent sulfur, with a minimum 99 percent passing through No. 6 sieve and a maximum 10 percent passing through No. 40 sieve. C. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10 percent sulfur. D. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated. E. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade. F. Agricultural Gypsum: Finely ground, containing a minimum of 90 percent calcium sulfate. G. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, free of toxic materials. H. Diatomaceous Earth: Calcined, diatomaceous earth, 90 percent silica, with approximately 140 percent water absorption capacity by weight. I. Zeolites: Mineral clinoptilolite with at least 60 percent water absorption by weight. 2.10 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Text: Organic soil amendments are only as needed to produce acceptable topsoil. B. Compost: Well -composted, stable, and weed -free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 3/4-inch sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows: 1. Organic Matter Content: 50 to 60 percent of dry weight. 2. Feedstock: Agricultural, food, or industrial residuals; biosolids; yard trimmings; or source: -separated or compostable mixed solid waste. 03878505 EXTERIOR PLANTS 02930 - 5 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 i C. Wood Derivatives: Decomposed, nitrogen -treated sawdust, ground bark, or wood waste; of uniform texture, free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic materials. 1. In lieu of decomposed wood derivatives, mix partially decomposed wood derivatives with at least 0.15 lb of ammonium nitrate or 0.25 lb of ammonium sulfate per cubic foot of loose sawdust or ground bark. D. Manure: Well -rotted, unleached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks, soil, weed seed, and material harmful to plant growth. 2.11 FERTILIZER A. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble, a minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid. B. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial -grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow -release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight. 2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil -testing agency. C. Slow -Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water - insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight. 2.12 MULCHES A. Mineral Mulch: Hard, durable stone, washed free of loam, sand, clay, and other foreign substances, of following type, size range, and source: 1. Type: Crushed granite. 2. Size Range: 1-1/2 inches maximum, 3/4 inch minimum. 3. Source: Decomposed granite mulch as supplied by Collier Materials of Marble Falls, Texas (or approved equal). 2.13 WEED -CONTROL BARRIERS A. Nonwoven Fabric: Polypropylene or polyester fabric, 3 oz./sq. yd. minimum. 2.14 STAKES AND GUYS A. Upright and Guy Stakes: Rough -sawn, sound, new hardwood, redwood, or pressure - preservative -treated softwood, free of knots, holes, cross grain, and other defects, 3 by 3 inches by length indicated, pointed at one end. B. Guy and Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1, galvanized -steel wire, 2-strand, twisted, 0.106 inch in diameter. C. Hose Chafing Guard: Reinforced rubber or plastic hose at least 1/2 inch in diameter, black, cut to lengths required to protect tree trunks from damage. D. Flags: Standard surveyor's plastic flagging tape, white, 6 inches long. 03878505 EXTERIOR PLANTS 02930 - 6 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 2.15 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS A. Trunk -Wrap Tape: Two layers of crinkled paper cemented together with bituminous material, 4-inch- wide minimum, with stretch factor of 33 percent. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive exterior plants for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting installation and performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, signs, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, and lawns and existing exterior plants from damage caused by planting operations. B. Provide erosion -control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil -bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. C. Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple exterior plantings. Stake locations, outline areas, adjust locations when requested, and obtain Landscape Architect's acceptance of layout before planting. Make minor adjustments as required. 3.3 PLANTING BED ESTABLISHMENT A. Loosen subgrade of planting beds to a minimum depth of 12 inches. Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1. Apply slow release fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening. a. Spread approximately one-half the thickness of required additional topsoil mix over loosened subgrade. Mix thoroughly into top 4 inches of subgrade. Spread remainder of topsoil as required to meet finished grades. B. Finish Grading: Grade planting beds to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. C. Restore planting beds if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading and before planting. 3.4 TREE AND SHRUB EXCAVATION A. Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular pits with sides sloped inward. Trim base leaving center area raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage. Do not further disturb base. Scarify sides of plant pit smeared or smoothed during excavation. 1. Excavate approximately two times as wide as ball diameter for container -grown stock. B. Subsoil removed from excavations may be used as backfill. C. Obstructions: Notify Landscape Architect if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or shrubs are encountered in excavations. D. Drainage: Notify Architect if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or retention in tree or shrub pits. 03878505 EXTERIOR PLANTS 02930 - 7 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 E. Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate away before positioning trees and shrubs. 3.5 TREE AND SHRUB PLANTING A. Set container -grown stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of root ball 1 inch above adjacent finish grades. 1. Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant. 2. Place planting soil mix around root ball in layers, tamping to settle mix and eliminate voids and air pockets. When pit is approximately one-half backfilled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. 'Water again after placing and tamping final layer of planting soil mix. B. Wrap trees of 2-inch caliper and larger with trunk -wrap tape. Start at base of trunk and spiral cover trunk to height of first branches. Overlap wrap, exposing half the width, and securely attach without causing girdling. Inspect tree trunks for injury, improper pruning, and insect infestation; take corrective measures required before wrapping. 3.6 TREE AND SHRUB PRUNING A. Prune, thin, and shape trees and shrubs as directed by Landscape Architect. 3.7 GUYING AND STAKING A. Upright Staking and Tying: Stake trees of 2- through 5-inch caliper. Stake trees of less than 2-inch caliper only as required to prevent wind tip -out. Use a minimum of 2 stakes of length required to penetrate at least 18 inches below bottom of backfilled excavation and to extend at least 72 inches above grade. Set vertical stakes and space to avoid penetrating root balls or root masses. Support trees with two strands of tie wire encased in hose sections at contact points with tree trunk. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree. 3.8 GROUND COVER AND PLANT PLANTING A. Set out and space ground cover and plants as indicated. B. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots, and backfill with planting soil. C. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to hold water. D. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil. E. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery from transplanting shock. 3.9 PLANTING BED MULCHING A. Install weed -control barriers before mulching according to manufacturer's written instructions. Completely cover area to be mulched, overlapping edges a minimum of 6 inches. 1. Material and Seam Treatment: Nonwoven fabric with seams pinned. B. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting beds and other areas as indicated on plans. 1. Shredded Cypress Mulch: Apply to a depth of V. 2. #20 jogging track material, 2400 lbs per cubic yard, 70% limestone fines. Available from RE Janes in Slaton, Texas. Apply to a depth of 4". 03978505 EXTERIOR PLAINTS 02930 - 8 lJ 09105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 3.10 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. During exterior planting, keep adjacent pavings and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition. B. Protect exterior plants from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other contractors and trades, and others. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged exterior planting. 3.11 DISPOSAL A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 02930 03878505 EXTERIOR PLANTS 02930 - 9 08105 M z 0 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Formwork for cast -in -place concrete, with shoring, bracing, and anchorage. 2. Formwork accessories. 3. Form stripping. 4. Reinforcing steel for cast -in -place concrete. 5. Cast -in -place concrete, including concrete for the following: a. Foundations, footings. b. Slabs on grade. C. Supported slabs. 6. Concrete curing. B. Related Sections: 1. Portland cement concrete paving: Division 2. 2. Joint sealers: Division 7. 1.2 REFERENCES A. AASHTO M 182-91I -- Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf, American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials; 1991. B. ACI 117-90 -- Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; American Concrete Institute; 1990. C. ACI 201.2R-92 -- Guide to Durable Concrete; American Concrete Institute; 1992. D. ACI 211.1-91-- Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; American Concrete Institute; 1991. E. ACI 301-89 -- Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute; 1989. F. ACI 302AR-89 -- Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute; 1989. G. ACI 304R-89 -- Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete Institute; 1989. H. ACI 30SR-91-- Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute; 1991. I. ACI 306R 88 -- Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute; 1988. J. ACI 318-89 — Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete; American Concrete Institute; 1989. K. ACI SP-66-88 -- ACI Detailing Manual; American Concrete Institute; 1988. L. ASTM A 185-90a -- Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement; 1990. M. ASTM A 615-92 -- Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 1992. N. ASTM C 31-91-- Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field; 1991. O. ASTM C 33-92 -- Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 1992. 03878505 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 P. ASTM C 39-93a-- Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens; 1993. Q. ASTM C 42-90 -- Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete; 1990. R. ASTM C 94-92a -- Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete; 1992. S. ASTM C 143-90a -- Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete; 1990. T. ASTM C 150-94 -- Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 1994. U. ASTM C 171-92 -- Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 1992. V. ASTM C 172-90 -- Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete; 1990. W. ASTM C 173-78 -- Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method; 1978. X. ASTM C 231-9l b -- Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method; 1991. Y. ASTM C 260-94 -- Standard Specification for Air -Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 1994. Z. ASTM C 309-93 -- Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 1993. AA. ASTM C 494-92 -- Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 1992. BB. ASTM C 618-94a -- Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete; 1994. CC. ASTM C 881-90 -- Standard Specification for Epoxy -Resin -Base Bonding Systems for Concrete; 1990. DD. ASTM C 1059-91 -- Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete; 1991. EE. ASTM C 1107-91 a -- Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic -Cement Grout (Nonshrink); 1991. FF. ASTM D 1751-83(91) -- Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 1983 (Reapproved 1991). GG. ASTM E 154-88 -- Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover; 1988. HH. ASTM E 329-93b -- Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction; 1993. II. CRSI MSP-1-90 -- Manual of Standard Practice; Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; 1990. JJ. NBS PS 1-83 -- Construction and Industrial Plywood; U.S. Department of Commerce/National Bureau of Standards; U.S. Government Printing Office; 1983 (Revised 1984). 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Unexposed Finish: A general -use finish, with no appearance criteria, applicable to all formed concrete concealed from hew after completion of construction. B. Exposed Finish: A general -use finish applicable to all formed concrete exposed to view and including surfaces which may receive a paint coating (if any). C. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast -furnace slag, and silica fume. 1.4 SUBMITTALS Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for the following: 1. Formwork accessories. 03878505 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 2 08/05 N LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 2. Concrete admixtures. 3. Grout. 4. Chemical hardener. 5. Curing compound 6. Bonding compound. 7. Epoxy bonding system. B. Aggregates: Submit test reports showing compliance with specified quality and gradation. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and placement of the following: 1. Reinforcement: Comply with ACI SP-66. Include bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement of concrete reinforcement, and splices. a. Show stirrup spacing. D. Quality Control Submittals: Submit the following information related to quality assurance requirements specified: 1. Design data: Submit proposed mix designs and test data before concrete operations begin. Identify for each mix submitted the method by which proportions have been selected. a. For mix designs based on field experience, include individual strength test results, standard deviation, and required average compressive strength f(cr) calculations. b. For mix designs based on trial mixtures, include trial mix proportions, test results, and graphical analysis and show required average compressive strength f(cr). C. Indicate quantity of each ingredient per cubic yard of concrete. d. Indicate type and quantity of admixtures proposed or required. 2. Test reports: Submit laboratory test reports for all testing specified. 3. Certifications: Submit affidavits from an independent testing agency certifying that all materials furnished under this section conform to specifications. 4. Certifications: Provide certification from manufacturers of concrete admixtures that chloride content complies with specified requirements. 5. Cold weather concreting: Submit description of planned protective measures. 6. Hot weather concreting: Submit description of planned protective measures. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the following documents, except where requirements of the contract documents or of governing codes and governing authorities are more stringent: 1. ACI 301. 2. ACI 318. 3. CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. B. Testing Agency Services: 1. Employ, at contractor's expense, an independent testing agency acceptable to the architect to perform specified tests and other services required for quality assurance. a. Testing agency shall meet ASTM E 329 requirements. C. Source of Materials: Obtain materials of each type from same source for the entire project. D. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. E. ACI Publications: Comply arith the following, unless more stringent provisions are indicated: 1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete." 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." 03878505 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 3 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 F. Pre -installation conference for elevated slabs: Conduct conference at project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings". 1. Prior to placing any concrete, hold a pre -installation conference meeting involving the Superintendent, Architect, applicable subcontractors, and testing lab. The meeting will include the following subject (minimum): a. Site Preparation. b. Grades and drainage C. Installation of auxiliary materials (vapor retarders, ducts, etc.) d. Type of floor and thickness e. Reinforcement and placement f. Joints. g. Flatness and levelness. h. Concrete materials, production, placement and delivery. i. Compaction of soil. j. Finishing tools and finishing. k. Curing/Sealing hardeners: type and timing/duration of application. 1. Testing and inspection. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver reinforcement to project site bundled and tagged with metal tags indicating bar size, lengths, and other data corresponding to information shown on placement drawings. 1. Store concrete reinforcement materials at the site to prevent damage and accumulation of dirt or rust. B. Store cementitious materials in a dry, weathertight location. Maintain accurate records of shipment and use. C. Store aggregates to permit free drainage and to avoid contamination with deleterious matter or other aggregates. When stockpiled on ground, discard bottom 6 inches of pile. D. Handle aggregates to avoid segregation. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold -Weather Concreting: Comply fully with the recommendations of ACI 306. 1. Well in advance of proposed concreting operations, advise the architect of planned protective measures including but not limited to heating ofmaterials, heated enclosures, and insulating blankets. B. Hot -Weather Concreting: Comply fully with the recommendations of ACI 305R. 1. Well in advance of proposed concreting operations, advise the architect of planned protective measures including but not limited to cooling of materials before or during mixing, placement during evening to dawn hours, fogging during finishing and curing, shading, and windbreaks. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMWORK A. Facing Materials: 1. Unexposed finish concrete: Any standard form materials that produce structurally sound concrete. 03878505 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 4 08/05 . i .J LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 2. Exposed finish concrete: Materials selected to offer optimum smooth, stain -free final appearance and minimum number of j oints. Provide materials with sufficient strength to resist hydrostatic head without bow or deflection in excess of allowable tolerances, and as follows: a. Overlaid plywood: PS-1 'B-B High Density Concrete Form Overlay," Class I. B. Formwork Accessories: 1. Form coating: Form release agent that will not adversely affect concrete surfaces or prevent subsequent application of concrete coatings. 2. Metal ties: Commercially manufactured types; cone snap ties, taper removable bolt, or other type which will leave no metal closer than 1-1/2 inches from surface of concrete when forms are removed, leaving not more than a 1-inch-diameter hole in concrete surface. 3. Fillets: Wood or plastic fillets for chamfered comers, in maximum lengths possible. 2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: Provide deformed bars complying with the following, except where otherwise indicated: 1. ASTM A 615, Grade 60. B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, cold -drawn steel, plain. C. Reinforcing Accessories: 1. Tie wire: Black annealed type, 16-1/2 gage or heavier. 2. Supports: Bar supports conforming to specifications of CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice." a. Class 1 (plastic protected) at all formed surfaces which will be exposed to weather. b. Class 1 (plastic protected) or Class 2 (stainless steel protected) at all formed surfaces which will be exposed to view but not to weather. C. Precast concrete blocks of strength equal to or greater than specified strength of concrete or Class 3 supports equipped with sand plates, where concrete will be cast against earth. Concrete masonry units will not be accepted. d. Wood, concrete, or clay blocks are not permissible 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, and as follows: 1. Type I. B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type C. C. Water: Potable. D. Aggregates: 1. Normal weight concrete: ASTM C 33. a. Class 2M. 2. Maximum size of coarse aggregates, whichever is least: a. One -fifth narrowest dimension between sides of forms. b. One-third of depth of slabs. C. Three -fourths of minimum clear distance between reinforcing bars or between bars and side of form. d. Columns and piers: Two-thirds of minimum clear distance between bars. E. Admixtures - General: Admixtures which result in more than 0.1 percent of soluble chloride ions by weight of cement are prohibited. 03878505 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 5 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 F. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260 and certified by manufacturer for compatibility with other mix components. G. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. H. Water -Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. I. Water -Reducing and Accelerating Admixtures: ASTM C 494, Type E. J. High -Range Water -Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer): ASTM C 494, Type F or G. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Vapor Retarder: Membrane for installation beneath slabs on grade, resistant to decay when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154, and as follows: 1. Polyethylene sheet, not less than 8 mils thick. B. Nonshrink Grout: ASTM C 1107, 1. Type: Provide nonmetallic type only. C. Chemical Hardener: Colorless, aqueous solution of fluosilicates and wetting agents for application to cured concrete for surface densification, where scheduled in the drawings. 1. Products: The following products, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. "Lapidolith"; Sonnebom Building Products Division/ChemRex, Inc. D. Burlap: AASHTO M 182, Class 2 jute or kenaf cloth. E. Moisture -Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, and as follows: 1. Curing paper. 2. Polyethylene film. 3. White burlap -polyethylene sheeting. F. Liquid Curing Compounds: 1. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Sonnebom Building Products Division/ChemRex, Inc. 2. Material - curing compounds: Comply with ASTM C 309, Type 1. a. Non -yellowing formulation where subject to ultraviolet light. b. Where compounds are proposed for use on surfaces to which finishes, coatings, or coverings subsequently will be applied, compound shall possess demonstrated compatibility with finish, coating, or covering, and use shall be subject to approval of the architect. C. Curing and sealing compound: Where indicated, provide curing and sealing formulation with long-lasting finish that is resistant to chemicals, oil, grease, deicing salts, abrasion, and compatible to chemical hardener to be applied. 3. Solvents: Provide water -based products. G. Bonding Compound: Non-redispersable acrylic bonding admixture, ASTM C 1059, Type 11. H. Epoxy Bonding Systems: ASTM C 881; type, grade, and class as required for project conditions. I. Expansion Joint Filler: 1. Nonextruding bituminous type: ASTM D 1751. 2.5 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Review: Do not begin concrete operations until proposed mix has been reviewed by the architect. B. Proportioning of Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with recommendations of ACI 211.1. 03878505 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 6 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 C. Required Average Strength: Establish the required average strength f(cr) of the design mix on the basis of either field experience or trial mixtures as specified in ACI 301, and proportion mixes accordingly. If trial mixtures method is used, employ an independent testing agency acceptable to the architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix design. D. Specified compressive strength f(c) at 28 days: 3000 psi. 1. Slump: 4 inch minimum, 8 inch maximum. 2. Water Count Ratio:.50. E. Fly Ash: 1. The contractor may elect to replace a portion of the portland cement with fly ash up to a maximum percentage by weight of cement plus fly ash of 20 F. Admixtures: 1. Air -entraining admixture: Use in mixes for exterior exposed concrete unless otherwise specifically indicated. Add at rate to achieve total air content in accordance with Table 1.4.3 of ACI 201.2. For concrete not exposed to exterior, add at rate to achieve total air content between 2 percent and 4 percent. a. Do not use in slabs -on -grade scheduled to receive topping, unless manufacturer of topping recommends use over air -entrained concrete. 2. Water -reducing admixture: Add as required for placement and workability. 3. Water -reducing and retarding admixture: Add as required in concrete mixes to be placed at ambient temperatures above 90 degrees F. 4. Water -reducing and accelerating admixture: Add as required in concrete mixes to be placed at ambient temperatures below 50 degrees F. 5. High -range water -reducing admixture (superplasticizer): Add as required for placement and workability. 6. Do not use admixtures not specified or approved. G. Mix Adjustments: Provided that no additional expense to owner is involved, contractor may submit for architect's approval requests for adjustment to approved concrete mixes when circumstances such as changed project conditions, weather, or unfavorable test results occur. Include laboratory test data substantiating specified properties with mix adjustment requests. H. Moisture Retaining Film: Dayton Superior — Sure Film J-74. 2.6 CONTROL OF MIX IN THE FIELD A. Total Air Content: A tolerance of plus or minus 1-1/2 percent of approved design mix air content will be allowed for field measurements. B. Do not use batches that exceed tolerances. 2.7 CONCRETE MIXING A. Transit Mixers: Mix concrete materials in transit mixers, complying with requirements of ASTM C 94. 1. At ambient temperatures of 85 to 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 75 minutes. 2. At ambient temperatures above 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 2.8 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Three-ply, nylon- or polyester -cord -reinforced, laminated, high -density polyethylene sheet;10 mils thick, minimum 03878505 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 7 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 B. Fine -Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a No. 4 sieve and 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 sieve; meeting deleterious substance limits of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregates. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 CONCRETE FORM PREPARATION A. General: Comply with requirements of ACI 301 for formwork, and as herein specified. The contractor is responsible for design, engineering, and construction of formwork, and for its timely removal. B. Earth Forms: Hand -trim bottoms and sides of earth forms to profiles indicated on the drawings. Remove loose dirt before placing concrete. C. Design: Design and fabricate forms for easy removal, without impact, shock, or damage to concrete surfaces or other portions of the work. Design to support all applied loads until concrete is adequately cured, within allowable tolerances and deflection limits. D. Construction: Construct and brace formwork to accurately achieve end results required by contract documents, with all elements properly located and free of distortion. Provide for necessary openings, inserts, anchorages, and other features shown or otherwise required. 1. Joints: Minimize form joints and make watertight to prevent leakage of concrete. a. Align joints symmetrically at exposed conditions. 2. Chamfers: Provide chamfered edges and comers at exposed locations, unless specifically indicated otherwise on the drawings. 3. Permanent openings: Provide openings to accommodate work of other trades, sized and located accurately. Securely support items built into forms; provide additional bracing at openings and discontinuities in formwork. 4. Temporary openings: Provide temporary openings for cleaning and inspection in most inconspicuous locations at base of forms, closed with tight -fitting panels designed to minimise appearance of joints in finished concrete work. E. Tolerances for Formed Surfaces: Comply with minimum tolerances established in ACI 117, unless more stringent requirements are indicated on the drawings. F. Release Agent: Provide either form materials with factory -applied nonabsorptive liner or field -applied form coating. If field -applied coating is employed, thoroughly clean and recondition formwork and reapply coating before each use. Rust on form surfaces is unacceptable. 3.2 V_APOR RETARDER INSTALLATION A. General: Place vapor retarder sheet over prepared base material, aligning longer dimension parallel to direction of pour and lapped 6 inches. Seal joints with appropriate tape. Cover with sand to depth shown on drawings. 3.3 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with requirements of ACI 301 and as herein specified. B. Preparation: Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, soil, and other materials which adversely affect bond with concrete. L� 03878505 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 8 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 C. Placement: Place reinforcement to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverages required for protection. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Provide Class C tension lap splices complying with ACI 318 unless otherwise indicated. Do not field -bend partially embedded bars unless otherwise indicated or approved. 1. Use approved bar supports and tie wire, as required. Set wire ties to avoid contact with or penetration of exposed concrete surfaces. Tack welding of reinforcing is not permitted. 2. Wire fabric: Install in maximum lengths possible, lapping adjoining pieces not less than one full mesh. Offset end laps to prevent continuous laps in either direction, and splice laps with tie wire. D. Welding: Welding of reinforcement is not permitted. E. Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. F. All reinforcement to be in place prior to placing of concrete. Equipment will not be allowed to drive over reinforcement. 3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints as indicated on drawings. If construction joints are not indicated, locate in manner which will not impair strength and will have least impact on appearance, as acceptable to the architect. 1. Keyways: Provide keyways not less than 1-1/2 inches deep. 2. Reinforcement: Continue reinforcement across and perpendicular to construction joints, unless details specifically indicate otherwise. B. Isolation Joints: Construct isolation joints in slabs poured on grade at points of contact with vertical components, such as foundation walls and column pedestals. Install expansion joint filler to full concrete depth. Recess top edge of filler 1/8 inch where joints are unsealed. C. Expansion Joints: Construct expansion joints where indicated. Install expansion joint filler to full depth of concrete. Recess edge of filler to depth indicated to receive joint sealant (and backer rod where necessary) specified in Division 7. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. General: Set anchorage devices and other items required for other work connected to or supported by cast -in -place concrete, using templates, setting drawings, and instructions from suppliers of items to be embedded- 1. Edge Forms and Screeds: Set edge forms and intermediate screeds as necessary to achieve final elevations indicated for finished slab surfaces. 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Preparation: Provide materials necessary to ensure adequate protection of concrete during inclement weather before beginning installation of concrete. B. Inspection: Before beginning concrete placement, inspect formwork, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded, verifying that all such work has been completed. 1. Wood forms: Moisten immediately before placing concrete in locations where form coatings are not used. 03878505 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 9 08/05 1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 C. Placement - General: Comply with requirements of ACI 304 and as follows: 1. Schedule continuous placement of concrete to prevent the formation of cold joints. 2. Provide construction joints if concrete for a particular element or component cannot be placed in a continuous operation. 3. Deposit concrete as close as possible to its final location, to avoid segregation. D. Placement in Forms: Limit horizontal layers to depths which can be properly consolidated, but in no event greater than 24 inches. 1. Consolidate concrete by means of mechanical vibrators, inserted vertically in freshly placed concrete in a systematic pattern at close intervals. Penetrate previously placed concrete to ensure that separate concrete layers are knitted together. 2. Vibrate concrete sufficiently to achieve consistent consolidation without segregation of coarse aggregates. 3. Do not use vibrators to move concrete laterally. E. Slab Placement: Schedule continuous placement and consolidation of concrete within planned construction joints. 1. Thoroughly consolidate concrete without displacing reinforcement or embedded items, using internal vibrators, vibrating screeds, roller pipe screeds, or other means acceptable to architect. 2. Strike off and level concrete slab surfaces, using highway straightedges, darbies, or bull floats before bleed water can collect on surface. Do not work concrete further until finishing operations are commenced. F. Cold Weather Placement: Comply with recommendations of ACI 306 when air temperatures are expected to drop below 40 degrees F either during concrete placement operations or before concrete has cured. 1. Do not use frozen or ice -laden materials. 2. Do not place concrete on frozen substrates. G. Hot Weather Placement: Comply with recommendations of ACI 305R when ambient temperature before, during, or after concrete placement is expected to exceed 90 degrees F or when combinations of high air temperature, low relative humidity, and wind speed are such that the rate of evaporation from freshly poured concrete would otherwise exceed 0.2 pounds per square foot per hour. 1. Do not add water to approved concrete mixes under hot weather conditions. 2. Provide mixing water at lowest feasible temperature, and provide adequate protection of poured concrete to reduce rate of evaporation. 3. Use fog nozzle to cool formwork and reinforcing steel immediately prior to placing concrete. 3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Repairs, General: Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork. 1. Remove honeycombed areas and other defective concrete down to sound concrete, cutting perpendicular to surface or slightly undercutting. Dampen patch location and area immediately surrounding it prior to applying bonding compound or patching mortar. 2. Before bonding compound has dried, apply patching mixture matching original concrete in materials and mix except for omission of coarse aggregate, and using a blend of white and normal portland cement as necessary to achieve color match. Consolidate thoroughly and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. LJ 03878505 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 10 08105 - LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 B. Unexposed Form Finish: Repair tie holes and patch defective areas. Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas exceeding 1/4 inch height. C. Exposed Form Finish: Repair and patch defective areas, with fins or other projections completely removed and smoothed. 1. Smooth rubbed finish: Apply to surfaces indicated no later than 24 hours after form removal. a. 'Wet concrete surfaces to be finished and rub with Carborundum brick or other abrasive until uniform color and texture are achieved. b. Do not apply separate grout mixture. 2. Contiguous unformed surfaces: Strike smooth and float to a similar texture tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and other unformed surfaces adjacent to or contiguous with formed surfaces. Continue final finish of formed surfaces across unformed surfaces, unless otherwise specifically indicated. D. When weather conditions create a rate of evaporation of .21b/sf/hr or greater as determined by the graph on the next page, Contractor shall apply moisture -retaining film. E. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces, Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Effect of concrete and air temperatures, relative humidity, and wind velocity on rate of evaporation of surface moisture from concrete. 3.8 FINISHING SLABS A. Finishing Operations - General: 03878505 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 11 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1. Do not directly apply water to slab surface or dust with cement. 2. Use hand or powered equipment only as recommended in ACI 302.1R. 3. Screeding: Strikeoff to required grade and within surface tolerances indicated. Verify conformance to surface tolerances. Correct deficiencies while concrete is still plastic. 4. Bull Floating: Immediately following screeding, bull float or darby before bleed water appears to eliminate ridges, fill in voids, and embed coarse aggregate. Recheck and correct surface tolerances. 5. Do not perform subsequent finishing until excess moisture or bleed water has disappeared and concrete will support either foot pressure with less than 1/4-inch indentation or weight of power floats without damaging flatness. 6. Final floating: Float to embed coarse aggregate, to eliminate ridges, to compact concrete, to consolidate mortar at surface, and to achieve uniform, sandy texture. Recheck and correct surface tolerances. 7. Troweling: Trowel immediately following final floating. Apply first troweling with power trowel except in confined areas, and apply subsequent trowelings with hand trowels. Wait between trowelings to allow concrete to harden. Do not overtrowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over it. Consolidate concrete surface by final troweling operation. Completed surface shall be free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and within surface tolerance specified. a. Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph through final floor covering system. B. Coordinate appearance and texture of required final finishes with the architect before application. C. Trowel Finish: As specified above. D. Chemical Hardener Finish: 1. Trowel finish and allow complete curing and drying of concrete surface. 2. Apply chemical hardener finish following manufacturer's printed application instructions, applying in 3 coats diluted with water. Evenly apply each coat, allowing 24 hours for drying between coats. 3. Remove any surplus hardener according to manufacturer's instructions. E. Slab Surface Tolerances: 1. Achieve flat, level planes except where grades are indicated. Slope uniformly to drains. 2. Troweled finishes: Achieve level surface plane so that depressions between high spots do not exceed the following dimension, using a 10-foot straightedge: a. 1/4 inch. F. Slab Finish Schedule: Apply finishes in the following typical locations and as otherwise shown on the drawings: 1. Trowel finish: a. Exposed interior floors not otherwise scheduled. b. Surfaces to receive resilient tile. C. Surfaces to receive carpet. 2. Chemical hardener finish: In locations shown on the drawings. G. Repair of Slab Surfaces: Test slab surfaces for smoothness and to verify surface plane to tolerance specified. Repair defects as follows: 1. High areas: Correct by grinding after concrete has cured for not less than 14 days. 2. Low areas: Immediately after completion of surface finishing operations, cut out low areas and replace with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend with adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when approved by the architect. 03878505 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -12 u 08/05 11 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 3. Crazed or cracked areas: Cut out defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 inch in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts. Dampen exposed concrete and apply bonding compound. Mix, place, compact, and finish patching concrete to match adjacent concrete. 4. Isolated cracks and holes: Groove top of cracks and cut out holes not over 1 inch in diameter. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound; place dry pack or proprietary repair compound acceptable to architect while bonding compound is still active: a. Dry -pack mix: One part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate and enough water as required for handling and placing. b. Install patching mixture and consolidate thoroughly, striking off level with and matching surrounding surface. Do not allow patched areas to dry out prematurely. 3.9 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION A. General: 1. Prevent premature drying of freshly placed concrete, and protect from excessively cold or hot temperatures until concrete has cured. 2. Provide curing of concrete by one of the methods listed and as appropriate to service conditions and type of applied finish in each case. B. Curing Period: 1. Not less than 7 days for standard cements and mixes. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. 1. Keep wooden or metal forms moist when exposed to heat of the sun. 2. If forms are removed prior to completion of curing process, continue curing by one of the applicable methods specified. D. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms: 1. Start curing as soon as free water has disappeared, but before surface is dry. a. Curing and sealing compound: Apply at rate stated by manufacturer to conform with moisture -retention requirements specified, using second, immediate application at right angles to first, if necessary, and reapply if damaged by rain. Apply additional coat near substantial completion to act as sealer. Apply to areas scheduled in the drawings as sealer and hardener. b. Use curing compounds only in locations permitted or required, and where use will not interfere with other finishes, coatings, or coverings to be applied. 2. Continue final curing to end of curing period. E. Avoid rapid drying at end of curing period. F. During and following curing period, protect concrete from temperature changes of adjacent air in excess of 5 degrees F per hour and 50 degrees F per 24 hours. Progressively adjust protective measures to provide uniform temperature changes over entire concrete surface. 3.10 REMOVAL OF FORMS AND SUPPORTS A. Non -Load -Bearing Formwork: Provided that concrete has hardened sufficiently that it will not be damaged, forms not actually supporting weight of concrete or weight of soffit forms may be removed after concrete has cured at not less than 50 degrees F for 24 hours. Maintain curing and protection operations after form removal. 03878505 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 13 08105 1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS r_ A. Fill-in: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades after such work is in place. Place such fill-in concrete to blend with existing construction, using same mix and curing methods. 3.12 CONCRETE REPAIRS A. Perform cosmetic repairs of concrete surfaces as specified under concrete application. B. Perform structural repairs with prior approval of the architect for method and procedure, using epoxy bonding systems. The architect's approval is required for repair methods using materials other than those specified. 3.13 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Composite Sampling, and Making and Curing of Specimens: ASTM C 172 and ASTM. C 31. 1. Take samples at point of discharge. 2. For pumped concrete, perform sampling and testing at the frequencies specified herein at point of delivery to pump, and perform additional sampling and testing at the same frequency at discharge from line. Results obtained at discharge from line shall be used for acceptance of concrete. B. Slump: ASTM C 143. One test per strength test and additional tests if concrete consistency changes. 1. Modify sampling to comply with ASTM C 94. C. Air Content ofNormal Weight Concrete: ASTM C 173 or ASTM. C 231.One test per strength test performed on air -entrained concrete. D. Concrete Temperature: 1. Test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F or below. 2. Test hourly when air temperature is 90 degrees F or above. 3. Test each time a set of strength test specimens is made. E. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM. C 39. 1. Compression test specimens: Mold and cure one set of 4 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test required. 2. Testing for acceptance of potential strength of as -delivered concrete: a. Obtain samples on a statistically sound, random basis. b. Minimum frequency: 1) One set per 100 cubic yards or fraction thereof for each day's pour of each concrete class. 2) One set per 3500 square feet of slab or wall area or fraction thereof for each day's pour of each concrete class. 3) When less than 5 cubic yards is placed in one day, the architect may, at architect's option, waive laboratory testing of specimens if adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided (Molding and curing of these specimens is not waived.) 4) When the above testing frequency would provide fewer than 5 strength tests for a given class of concrete during the project, conduct testing from not less than 5 randomly selected batches, or from each batch if fewer than 5. 03878505 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -14 08/05 L. LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 C. Test one specimen per set at 7 days for information unless an earlier age is required. d. Test 2 specimens per set for acceptance of strength potential; test at 28 days unless other age is specified. The test result shall be the average of the two specimens. If one specimen shows evidence of improper sampling, molding, or testing, the test result shall be the result of the remaining specimen; if both show such evidence, discard the test result and inform the architect. e. Retain one specimen from each set for later testing, if required. f. Strength potential of as -delivered concrete will be considered acceptable if all of the following criteria are met: 1) No individual test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. 2) Not more than 10 percent of individual test results fall below specified compressive strength f(c). 3) Average of any 3 consecutive strength test results equals or exceeds specified compressive strength f(c). g. Evaluate construction and curing procedures and implement corrective action when strength results for field -cured specimens are less than 85 percent of test values for companion laboratory -cured specimens. F. Test Results: Testing agency shall report test results in writing to architect and contractor within 24 hours of test. 1. Test reports shall contain the following data: a. Project name, number, and other identification. b. Name of concrete testing agency. C. Date and time of sampling. d. Concrete type and class. e. Location of concrete batch in the completed work. f. All information required by respective ASTM test methods. 2. Nondestructive testing devices such as impact hammer or sonoscope may be used at architect's option for assistance in determining probable concrete strength at various locations or for selecting areas to be cored, but such tests shall not be the sole basis for acceptance or rejection. 3. The testing agency shall make additional tests of in -place concrete as directed by the architect when test results indicate that specified strength and other concrete characteristics have not been attained. a. Testing agency may conduct tests of cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or tests as directed. b. Cost of additional testing shall be borne by the contractor when unacceptable concrete has been verified. END OF SECTION 03300 03878505 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 15 08!05 No Text LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 04200 l J��i 'V11 VM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the agreement, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete masonry units (CMU). B. Decorative Concrete masonry units (CMU). C. Face Brick. D. Mortar. E. Grout for masonry. F. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories. G. Molded insulation inserts. H. Admixtures for mortar and grout. I. Glass masonry units. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01400 - Testing Laboratory Services: Testing laboratory services. B. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Loose steel lintels, and fabricated steel items. C. Section 07600 - Sheet Metal: Cap flashings over masonry work and placement of flashing receivers. D. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Rod and sealant at control joints. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ACI 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. B. ACI 530.1 - Specifications For Masonry Structures. C. ASTM A82 - Cold -Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. D. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. E. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. F. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. G. ASTM A641- Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire. H. ASTM C90 - Load -Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. I. ASTM C94 - Ready -Mixed Concrete. J. ASTM C129 - Non -Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. K. ASTM C144 - Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. L. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement. M. ASTM C207 - Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. N. ASTM C216 - Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale). O. ASTM C270 - Mortar for Unit Masonry. P. ASTM C404 - Aggregates for Masonry Grout. Q. ASTM C476 - Grout for Masonry. 03878505 UNIT MASONRY 04200-1 09105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 R. ASTM C578, Type I, Molded insulation units. S. ASTM C 10 19 - Method of Sampling and Testing Grout. T. IMIAC - International Masonry Industry All -Weather Council: Recommended Practices and Guide Specification for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. U. IMIAC - International Masonry Industry All -Weather Council: Recommended Practices and Guide Specification for Hot Weather Masonry Construction. V. NCMA - TEK Manual. W. UL - Fire Resistance Directory. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Indicate bars sizes, spacings, locations, reinforcement quantities, bending and cutting schedules, supporting and spacing devices for reinforcement and accessories. B. Product Data 1. Provide data for facing brick decorative and fire rated masonry units and fabricated wire reinforcement. 2. Include design mix, using the Property specification of ASTM C270 required ' environmental conditions, and admixture limitations. C. Samples 1. Samples a. Face Brick: Submit two samples of face brick, to illustrate color, texture and extremes of color range. b. Decorative CMU: Submit two samples of decorative CMU to illustrate color, texture and extremes of color range. C. Glass Masonry Units: Submit four samples of glass block to illustrate color, texture and pattern. 2. Submit two samples of mortar, illustrating mortar color and color range. D. Reports 1. Submit reports on mortar indicating conformance of component mortar materials to requirements of ASTM C270 and test and evaluation reports to ASTM C780. 2. Submit reports on grout indicating conformance of component grout materials to requirements of ASTM C476 and test and evaluation reports to ASTM C 1019. 3. If equivalent thickness method of determining fire resistance rating of CMU is used, submit calculations in conformance with NCMA TEK 7 - 1 indicating compliance. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. - 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 530 and ACI 530.1. B. Fire Rated CMU: Provide fire ratedunits complying with UL618 or units having an equivalent thickness in conformance with NCMA TEK 7 - 1. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 03878505 UNIT MASONRY 04200-2 08/05 1� ............................................ .............. ._ ._._. LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to UL assembly No. U906 requirements for fire rated masonry construction using masonry thickness indicated on drawings. 1.9 MOCKUP A. Provide mockup of masonry back-up and veneer under provisions of Section 01400. B. Construct a masonry wall into a panel sized 4 feet long by 2 feet high, which includes mortar and accessories, structural backup, wall openings, flashings, wall insulation, and vaporbarrier. C. Locate where directed. D. Mockup may not remain as part of the Work. 1.10 PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section, under provisions of Section 01039. 1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign matter. 1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Cold Weather Requirements: Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. B. Hot Weather Requirements: Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. 1.13 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. B. Coordinate the masonry work with installation of window frames, Owner furnished equipment and Exterior Installation and Finish System. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Face Brick 1. Acme Brick Co. 2. Boral Brick Co. 3. Henderson Brick Co. B. Concrete and Decorative Concrete Masonry Units 1. Featherlite Block Co. C. Portland Cement, Mortar Cement, Masonry Cement, and Lime 1. Essroc Materials, Inc. 2. Glen-Gery Corporation. 03878505 UNIT MASONRY 04200-3 08/05 0 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 3. Lafarge Corporation. 4. Lehigh Portland Cement Co. 5. Riverton Corporation (The). D. Mortar Pigments 1. Davis Colors. 2. Lafarge Corporation. 3. Solomon Grind -Chem Services, Inc. E. Joint Reinforcement, Ties, and Anchors 1. Dur-O-Wal, Inc. 2. Heckman Building Products, Inc. 3. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 4. Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America. 5. National Wire Products Industries. 6. Southern Construction Products. F. Admixtures 1. Integral CMU Water Repellent l„ a. W.R. Grace & Co. 2. Cold -Weather Admixture a. Euclid Chemical Co. b. W.R. Grace & Co. 3. Water -Repellent Admixture a. W.R. Grace & Co. G. Insulation Inserts 1. Korfil 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Hollow Load Bearing Block Units (CMU): ASTM C90, Type I - Moisture Controlled medium weight, with integral water repellent admixture. B. Hollow Non -Load Bearing Block Units (CMU): ASTM C129, Type I - Moisture Controlled medium weight, with integral water repellent admixture. C. Size and Shape: Nominal modular size of 8 x 8 x 16 inches. Provide special units for 90 degree corners, bond beams and lintels. D. Decorative Block Units 1. Conformance: ASTM C129, Type I - Moisture Controlled with integral water repellent admixture. 2. Size and Shape: Nominal size of 8 x 8 x 16 inches. 3. Surface Finish a. Type I: Ground face. b. Type IV: Ground face, Single scored vertically to simulate 8 x 8 inch units. 4. Color a. Type I: Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. b. Type IV: Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. 2.3 FACE BRICK UNITS A. General 1. Conformance Face Brick: ASTM C216, Type FBS, Grade SW. 2. Size and Shape: Nominal modular size of 3 x 4 x 8 inches. 3. Color and Texture. 03878505 UNIT MASONRY 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 a. Type II: Velour texture, color as selected by Architect. b. Type III: Rockface brick, color as selected by Architect. 4. Solid Face Brick: Provide where indicated on drawings 2.4 GLASS BLOCK A. Hollow Glass Units: Permanently seal hollow unit by heat fusing joint with joint key to assist mortar bond. Factory coat unit edges to improve bond with mortar: 1. Nominal size: 8 x 8 x 3 7/8 inch. 2. Color: Clear. 3. Pattern and Design: Random wave. 4. Insulation Value: R1.5 min. 5. Light Transmission: 70 percent min. 2.5 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; steel wire, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A641 Class 1 after fabrication, 9 gage side rods with 9 gage cross ties. B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, 40 ksi yield grade, deformed billet bars, uncoated finish. C. Strap Anchors: Bent steel shape, 2 x 10 inch size x 22 gage thick, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A123 B2. D. Veneer Wall Ties: Formed steel wire, adjustable, eye and pintle type, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A123 B2. 2.6 MORTAR AND GROUT A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I. B. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, standard masonry type. C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. D. Grout Course Aggregate: ASTM C404. E. Water: Clean and potable. F. Bonding Agent: Latex type. G. Mortar Color: Mineral oxide pigment; Standard gray at interior exposed masonry and color as selected by architect at all exterior masonry. 2.7 ADMIXTURES A. Water Repellent: Liquid type; Dry -Block Mortar Admixture. 2.8 FLASHINGS A. Copper/Kraft Paper Flashings: 2 oz/sq ft sheet copper bonded to fiber reinforced asphalt treated Kraft paper. B. Lap Sealant: Butyl type as specified in Section 07900. C. Joint Filler: Closed cell polyethylene or polyurethane oversized 50 percent to joint width; self expanding; by maximum lengths. D. Building Paper: No. 30 asphalt saturated felt. E. Weeps: Preformed plastic tubes, cotton wick filled or cotton rope. F. Cleaning Solution: Non -acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials. 03818505 UNIT MASONRY 04200-5 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 2.9 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. Mortar For Load Bearing Walls and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type S using the Property specification, with water repellent admixture for all exterior mortar. B. Mortar For Non -Load Bearing Walls and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type S using the Property specification, with water repellent admixture for all exterior mortar. C. Mortar For Glass Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, Type S using the Property for specification with water repellant admixture for all exterior mortar. 2.10 GROUT MIXES A. Bond Beams and Lintels: 3,000 psi strength at 28 days; 8-10 inches slump; or premixed type in accordance with ASTM C94. Mix in accordance with ASTM C476 Course grout. B. Engineered Masonry: 3,000 psi strength at 28 days; 8-10 inches slump; premixed type in accordance with ASTM C94. 2.11 GROUT MIXING A. Pre -mixed Grout: Mix grout in accordance with ASTM C94. B. Field Mixed Grout: Thoroughly mix grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM C476 Course grout. C. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly. D. Do not use anti -freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of grout. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. B. Verify items provided by other sections of work are properly sized and located. C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. D. Request inspection of spaces to be grouted. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other sections. B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. C. Apply bonding agent to existing concrete surfaces. D. Plug clean -out holes with brick or block masonry units. Brace masonry for Bret grout pressure. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Mortar Mixing 1. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in accordance with ASTM C270 in quantities needed for immediate use. 2. Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing process. 3. Add mortar color and admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide uniformity of mix and coloration. 4. Do not use anti -freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar. 03878505 UNIT MASONRY 04200-6 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 5. If water is lost by evaporation, re -temper only within two hours of mixing. 6. Use mortar within two hours after mixing at temperatures of 90 degrees F or two -and -one-half hours at temperatures under 40 degrees F. B. Coursing 1. General a. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. b. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. 2. Concrete Masonry Units: a. Bond: Running. b. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. C. Mortar Joints: Concave. 3. Brick Units: a. Bond: Running or Stacked as indicated on drawings. b. Coursing: Three units and three mortar joints to equal 8 inches. C. Mortar Joints: Concave. 4. Decorative Masonry Units. a. Bond: Running b. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint equal to 8 inches. C. Mortar Joints: Raked. C. Placing and Bonding 1. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work. 2. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. 3. Buttering comers of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted. 4. Remove excess mortar as work progresses. 5. Interlock intersections and external corners. 6. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. 7. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit comers or edges. 8. Cut mortar joints flush where resilient base is scheduled, or furring chemicals are applied. 9. Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or decks with compressible joint filler. D. Weeps I . Install weeps in veneer at 32 inches oc horizontally above through -wall flashing, above shelf angles and lintels, and at bottom of walls. 2. Cavity Wall 3. Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plug weeps. E. Reinforcement and Anchorage - Single Wythe Masonry 1. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches oc vertically. 2. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening. 3. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls. 4. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. 5. Reinforce joint corners and intersections with strap anchors 16 inches. F. Reinforcement and Anchorage - Masonry Veneer 1. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches oc. 03878505 UNIT MASONRY 04200-7 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 2. Place masonryjoint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening. 3. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls. 4. Provide eyes in joint reinforcing of masonry back-up to bond veneer at maximum 16 inches oc vertically and 36 inches horizontally. Place at maximum 3 inches oc each way around perimeter of openings, within 12 inches of openings. 5. Reinforce stack bonded unit joint comers and intersections with strap anchors 16 inches oc. G. Masonry Flashings 1. Extend flashings horizontally at foundation walls, above ledge or shelf angles and lintels, under parapet caps, and at bottom of walls. 2. Turn flashing up minimum 8 inches and bed into mortar joint of masonry or seal to existing back-up. 3. Lap end joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight. 4. Turn flashing, fold, and seal at comers, bends, and interruptions. H. Lintels 1. Install loose steel lintels over openings. 2. Install reinforced unit masonry lintels over openings where steel lintels are not scheduled. 3. Do not splice reinforcing bars. 4. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned position. 5. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. 6. Allow masonry lintels to attain specified strength before removing temporary supports. 7. Maintain minimum 8 inch bearing on each side of opening. I. Mortar and Grout 1. Install mortar in accordance with ASTM C270. Install grout in accordance with ASTM C476. 2. Work grout into masonry cores and cavities to eliminate voids. 3. Do not install grout in lifts greater than 16 inches or two CMU courses without consolidating grout by rodding. 4. Do not displace reinforcement while placing grout. 5. Remove excess mortar from grout spaces. 6. At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for a minimum 12 inches either side of opening. 7. High Lift Grouting a. Provide cleanout opening no less than 4 inches high at the bottom of each cell to be grouted by cutting one face shell of masonry unit. b. Clean out masonry cells and cavities with high pressure water spray. Permit complete water drainage. C. After cleaning seal openings with masonry units. d. Limit gout lift to 60 inches and rod for grout consolidation. Wait 30 to 60 minutes before placing next lift. J. Control Joints 1. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control joints. 2. Form control joint with a sheet building paper bond breaker fitted to one side of the hollow contour end of the block unit. Fill the resultant core with grout fill. Rake joint at exposed unit faces for placement of backer rod and sealant. 3. Size control joint in accordance with Section 07900 for sealant performance. 03878505 UNIT MASONRY 04200-8 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 3.4 BUILT-IN WORK A. As work progresses, install built-in metal door and frames, fabricated metal frames, window frames, anchor bolts, plates, and other items to be built-in the work and furnished by other sections. B. Install built-in items plumb and level. C. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings. D. Do not build in organic materials subject to deterioration. 3.5 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Alignment of Columns: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32 inch. C. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft and 1/2 inch in 20 ft or more. D. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non -cumulative. E. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft and 1/4 inch in 10 ft 1/2 inch in 30 ft. F. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft. G. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch. H. Variation From Joint Width: Plus or minus 1/8 inch and minus 0 inches. 3.6 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit and sleeves. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location. B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 0 14 10. B. Test and evaluate grout in accordance with ASTM C1019. 3.8 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01700. B. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. C. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. D. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. E. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. F. Do not scratch or deface units. 3.9 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500. B. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external comers which may be damaged by construction activities. C. Maintain protective boards at exposed external comers. Provide protection without damaging completed work. 03878505 UNIT MASONRY 04200-9 08", ...y LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 3.10 SCHEDULE A. Provide CMU with integral water repellent admixture at the following locations: 1. All exterior CMU back-up walls including upper walls above roof at Apparatus Bay. i 2. All exterior decorative CMU veneer. ` B. Provide water repellent mortar admixture at the following locations: 1. All mortar in exterior CMU backup walls including upper walls above roof at Apparatus Bay. 2. All mortar in exterior decorative CMU veneer. 3. All mortar in exterior face brick veneer. END OF SECTION [r f 03878505 UNIT MASONRY 04200-10 08/05 ............... 0 1-0 W rP No Text LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fabrication and erection of structural steel framing members, as defined in AISC Code and as indicated on the drawings. 2. Welding. 3. Shop painting. B. Products Furnished but Not Installed under This Section: 1. Steel anchorages cast in concrete. 2. Steel anchorages embedded in masonry. C. Related Sections: 1. Steel joists: Elsewhere in Division 5. 2. Steel decking: Elsewhere in Division 5. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 36/A 36M-94 -- Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 1994. B. ASTM A 307-94 -- Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength; 1994. C. ASTM A 325-93 -- Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 1993. D. ASTM A 500-93 -- Standard Specification for Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 1993. E. ASTM A 501-93 -- Standard Specification for Hot -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing; 1993. F. ASTM C 1107-91 a -- Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic -Cement Grout (Nonshrink); 1991. G. AWS D 1.1-92 --Structural Welding Code -Steel; American Welding Society; 1992. H. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. (AISC); 1986. I. Specification for Structural Steel Buildings -- Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. (AISC); 1989. J. Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts; Research Council on Structural Connections; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. (RISC); 1985. K. Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volume 2, Systems and Specifications; Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC); 1995, 7th Edition. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Items as listed in 2.1 of AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and excluding steel, iron, or other metal items not listed, even if attached to the structural framing. 03878505 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: Unless otherwise specifically approved in writing, furnish exact sections, weights, and kinds of material specified, using details and dimensions shown. 1. Not all connections are detailed; similar details apply to similar conditions, unless otherwise indicated. Contact the architect promptly to verify design of members or connections in any situation where design requirements are unclear. 2. Substitution of other shapes of equivalent or greater strength and no greater dimension may be allowed by the architect, but only under normal substitution procedures. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Complete drawings for structural steel, including information on location, type, and size of all connections, distinguishing between those made in the shop and those made in the field. 1. Indicate weld lengths and sizes, using standard American Welding Society (AWS) welding symbols. 2. Include setting drawings and templates for anchorages to be installed by others. 3. The fabricator is specifically responsible for the adequacy of any connections designed by the fabricator to performance standards established in the contract documents. Approval by the architect of shop drawings shall not relieve the fabricator of this responsibility, despite wording to the contrary in paragraph 4.2.1 of the AISC Code. B. Welder Qualifications: Evidence that welders employed in the work are currently certified under American Welding Society (AWS) qualification procedures. - 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Procedures: Establish that joint welding procedures are prequalified or test in accordance with American Welding Society (AWS) qualification procedures. B. Welder Qualifications: Welders must be currently certified under American Welding Society (AWS) qualification procedures. C. Regulatory Requirements: Unless other requirements of governing authorities or particular requirements of this specification are more stringent, comply with provisions of the following: 1. AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 2. AISC "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings -- Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design," with Commentary and Supplements. 3. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Shipping: Deliver steel in timely fashion, to permit the most efficient and economical flow of work. Deliver steel members properly marked for field assembly and erection. 1. Deliver anchor bolts, washers, and other anchorage devices to be built into other work in time to avoid delays and permit their proper installation. B. Storage: Protect steel and other materials of this section from damage and corrosion. If temporary storage at the project site is required, keep steel members off the ground, using platforms or pallets, in location easily accessible for inspection. 03878505 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 2 08/05 4 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL MATERIALS A. Structural Steel Members: ASTM A 36. B. Structural Tubing, Cold -Formed: ASTM A 500. C. Structural Tubing, Hot -Formed: ASTM A 501. D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, Carbon steel, Grade C; ASTM A 36 steel plate washers. E. Carbon Steel Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 307, Grade A. F. High -Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325. 1. Type 1, plain (medium carbon steel). 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Electrodes and Fluxes: AWS D1.1; types as required by materials being welded. B. Nonshrink Grout: Prepackaged material requiring only the addition of water and complying with ASTM C 1107, and as follows: 1. Natural aggregate (nonmetallic) type. C. Shop Primer: Fabricator's standard primer. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Shop Assembly - General: Comply with requirements of AISC Specifications. Shop fabricate and assemble to maximum degree possible. B. Thermal Cutting: Perform all thermal cutting by machine. 1. Plane thermally cut edges which are to be welded. C. Connections: 1. Shop connections: Welded or bolted, as required. 2. Field connections: Bolted, unless welds are specifically indicated. 3. Bolts: High -strength steel bolts, except as otherwise indicated. a. Bolting: Comply with requirements of AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts." 4. Welds: Comply with requirements of AWS Code for welding procedures and quality of welds, including appearance. a. Built-up sections: Assemble components and weld using procedures which will maintain proper alignment of finished section. D. Finishing: Accurately mill ends of columns and other members which must transmit loads in bearing. E. Holes in Steel Members: Make all holes by means of cutting, drilling, or punching at right angles to surface of metal. Do not make or enlarge holes by burning. 1. Provide holes in steel members as required to permit connection of work by others. 2.4 SHOP COATING - PAINT A. Shop prime all steel members. 1. Do not paint the following surfaces: a. Machined or milled surfaces. b. Surfaces adjacent to field welds. C. Faying surfaces of bolted connections. 03878505 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 3 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 B. Preparation: Thoroughly clean steel surfaces to be shop primed, removing loose rust, loose mill scale, dirt, oil, and grease. Clean steel in accordance with SSPC procedures as follows: 1. SSPC-SP 2: Hand tool cleaning. C. Painting: As soon as possible after cleaning, apply specified primer paint in accordance with instructions of paint manufacturer, at a rate sufficient to provide a finished thickness of not less than 1.5 mils and an average thickness of2.0 mils. 2.5 SHOP QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspection: 1. Shop bolted connections: Comply with testing and verification procedures in AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts." 2. Shop welded connections: Inspect and test shop -fabricated welds as follows: a. Visually inspect all welds. i .l PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions for erection of structural steel and verify that the work may properly proceed. Do not commence erection of structural steel until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected or fabricated steel components have been adjusted with the architect's agreement. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary guys, braces, falsework, cribbing, or other elements required to secure the steel framing against loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove such temporary support only when permanent connections have been made and the steel framing is fully capable of supporting design loads, including any temporary construction loads. 3.3 ERECTION A. General: Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC Code and Specifications. B. Assembly: 1. Set structural members accurately to locations and elevations indicated, within tolerances established in AISC Code, before making final connections. 2. Do not use thermal cutting to correct fabrication errors on any major structural member. a. Thermal cutting of secondary members may be permitted by the architect upon request, but only when members involved are not loaded. C. Columns and Bearing Surfaces: 1. Clean bearing and contact surfaces before assembly. Slightly roughen concrete and masonry surfaces to improve bond. 2. Set base and bearing plates accurately, using metal wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 3. After tightening anchor bolts and ensuring that structure is plumb, grout solidly between plates and bearing surfaces. a. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for nonshrink grout. t_J 03878505 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 4 08/05 �1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 D. Bolting: 1. Carbon steel bolts: Use only for temporary bracing during erection, unless otherwise specifically permitted by contract documents. 2. High -strength bolts: Comply with requirements of AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts." E. Welding: 1. Do not perform field welding when ambient temperature is at 0 degrees F or below, or when surfaces are wet, exposed to rain, snow, or high wind. 2. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 3. Tighten and leave in place erection bolts used in field -welded construction. F. Touch-up Painting: As soon as possible after erection of primed structural steel, clean painted areas which have been abraded or otherwise damaged by welding, bolting, or other field operations. Apply touch-up paint matching shop coating by brush or spray to all damaged paint areas, achieving a minimum final thickness of 1.5 mils. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspection: 1. Field -bolted connections: Comply with testing and verification procedures in AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts." 2. Field -welded connections: Inspect and test field -fabricated welds as follows: a. Visually inspect all field welds. END OF SECTION 05120 03878505 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 5 08105 0 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 05210 STEEL JOISTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. K-series open web steel joists. 2. Bracing. B. Related Sections: 1. Structural steel: Elsewhere in Division 5. 2. Metal decking: Elsewhere in Division 5. 1.2 REFERENCES A. SJI Technical Digest No. 9 -- Handling and Erection of Steel Joists and Joist Girders; Steel Joist Institute; July 1987. B. Standard Specifications Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders; Steel Joist Institute (SJI); 1992. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide joist system which is designed and fabricated to comply with requirements of the contract documents and which strictly conforms to material, manufacturing, and erection requirements of the Steel Joist Institute's (SJI) "Standard Specifications Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders" (referred to hereinafter as SJI "Specifications"). 1. Wind uplift: Design joists and connections to comply with wind uplift requirements indicated. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit for each distinct type of joist required and for accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Drawings for fabrication and erection of joists; include plans, elevations, and large scale details of typical sections, special connections, joining, and accessories. 1. Show location and spacing of joists; indicate mark number and type. 2. Show bridging. C. Quality Control Submittals: Submit the following: 1. SJI certification of joist characteristics. 2. Manufacturers' certification of joist characteristics. 3. Manufacturer's installation instructions, including specific installation sequence. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Strictly conform to requirements of SJI Technical Digest No. 9. 03978505 08/05 STEEL JOISTS 05210 - 1 r- LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 05313 STEEL ROOF DECK PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standard roof deck. 2. Formed steel accessories. 3. Framing for openings up to 18 inches. B. Related Sections: 1. Structural steel: Elsewhere in Division 5. 2. Steel joists: Elsewhere in Division 5. 3. Steel form deck: Elsewhere in Division 5. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 611-93 -- Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Cold Rolled, Structural Quality; 1993. B. AS TM A 526/A 526M-90 -- Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Commercial Quality, 1990. C. AWS D1.1-92 -- Structural Welding Code --Steel; American Welding Society; 1992. D. AWS D1.3-89 -- Structural Welding Code --Sheet Steel; American Welding Society; 1989. E. SDI Publication No. 28 -- Steel Deck Institute Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks, Corner Decks and Cellular Metal Floor Deck with Electrical Distribution; Steel Deck Institute, Inc.; 1992. F. Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members; American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI); 1986 (with 1989 Addendum and 1990 Errata). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit deck manufacturer's specifications and product information, indicating compliance with specified requirements. 1. Include Steel Deck Institute certification of manufacturer's deck characteristics. 2. Include manufacturer's certification of deck characteristics. 3. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions, including specific installation sequence. 4. Submit manufacturer's data on mechanical fasteners. B. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings indicating deck types and plan layout; support locations and anchorages; projections; openings and reinforcement; and pertinent details and accessories. C. Calculations: Submit manufacturer's documentation of deck design loads, allowable spans, and section properties. 1. Prepare calculations under seal of a professional structural engineer registered in the state in which the project is located. 03978505 STEEL ROOF DECK 05313 - 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with requirements of the following, except where exceeded by the contract documents or requirements of governing authorities: 1. AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members." 2. AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code -Sheet Steel." 3. "Steel Deck Institute Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks, and Cellular Metal Floor Deck with Electrical Distribution." B. Qualifications: Qualify welding processes and welding operators according to procedures specified in AWS D1.1. C. Installer: A company specializing in this type of work and with 3 years of documented experience. D. Testing: Welded decking in place is subject to inspection and testing by an independent agency paid by the owner. If testing indicates that welds do not comply with requirements, remove defective work and replace at no additional expense to the owner. 1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Storage: Separate sheets and store units on dry wood sleepers, sloped to promote drainage. Cover with waterproof material ventilated to avoid condensation. B. Marking: Unless deck units are all of the same gage and yield strength for the project, mark each unit clearly to identify differences. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel for Painted Metal Deck Units: ASTM A 611, Grade C, D or E. B. Sheet Metal Accessories: ASTM A 526, galvanized. C. Primer Paint: Manufacturer's standard primer for baked -on finish. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Roof Deck Units - General: Provide deck complying with SDI specifications for properties indicated. B. Standard Roof Deck Unit Type 1 : Comply with the following: 1. Profile type: Wide rib (Type WR). 2. Material: G60 coated steel. a. Minimum yield strength: 33,000 psi. b. Minimum metal thickness: 0.034 inch. 3. Spanning configuration: Multiple span. 4. Sheet coverage width: Contractor's option. 5. Side joints: Lapped or lock seam, at contractor's option. 6. Flute sides: Plain vertical faces. C. Standard Roof Deck Unit Type 2: Comply with the following: 1. Profile type: Wide rib (Type WR) Cellular. 2. Material: G60 coated steel. a. Minimum yield strength: 33,000 psi. b. Minimum metal thickness: 0.034 inch. 3. Spanning configuration: Multiple span. 03878505 STEEL ROOF DECK 05313 - 2 08/05 E LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 4. Sheet coverage width: Contractor's option. 5. Side joints: Lapped or lock seam, at contractor's option. 6. Flute sides: Plain vertical faces. 7. Cellular bottom plate: a. Minimum yield strength: 33,000 psi. b. Factory fabricated. C. Minimum metal thickness: 0.034 inch. D. RidgeNalley Plates: Fabricate of same material and gage as deck units, in slope to match roof slope, not less than 4-1/2 inches wide. E. Fasteners: Galvanized hardened steel, self -tapping. F. Weld Washers: Uncoated mild steel, sized as recommended by manufacturer of steel deck units. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine field conditions and substrates to receive metal decking, and verify that existing conditions are acceptable before commencing installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install deck units and accessories in compliance with Steel Deck Institute specifications, manufacturer's recommendations, and requirements of this specification section. Fasten deck units to supports promptly after placement and alignment. Do not leave placed sheets unattached at end of working day. 1. Shop drawings: Comply with final shop drawings. 2. Steel bearing: Allow minimum bearing of 1-1/2 inches at steel supports; align and level deck units. 3. Placement: Place deck units flat and square, without excessive warp or deflection. a. Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks. 4. End laps: Lap ends of deck units over supports and make laps not less than 2 inches. 5. Precautions: Coordinate location of decking bundles to prevent overloading of structure. B. Fastening: 1. Fasten roof deck units to steel supporting members as follows: a. Minimum 5/8-inch-diameter fusion welds or elongated welds of equal strength. 1) Use weld washers for metal of less than 0.028 inch in thickness. b. Mechanical fasteners approved by the architect may be used in lieu of welds. C. Spacing: 12 inches on center average, but not more than 18 inches apart and not fewer than 2 fasteners at any support. 2. Side laps: At contractor's option, fasten side laps of adjacent deck units using one of the following methods: a. Weld laps. b. Mechanically clinch, or button -punch. C. Mechanically fasten, using self -tapping machine screws of No. 8 size or larger. d. Spacing: Not to exceed 18 inches on center. 03878505 STEEL ROOF DECK 05313 - 3 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 3.3 C. Openings: 1. Cut deck units and accessories to fit snugly around other work penetrating decks. 2. At openings up to 18 inches in either dimension, provide reinforcement and closure strips as shown or as required for strength and rigidity. D. Metal Accessories: Fasten metal accessories securely to deck units, using welding or mechanical fasteners as appropriate to conditions. t 1. Install other metal accessories as indicated. E. Touch-up Painting: After installation of deck units and accessories, wire -brush burned and abraded areas and rust spots and apply touch-up paint. 1. On shop primed surfaces, apply matching paint. CLEANING A. Upon completion of work, remove all rubbish, debris, and excess materials from project site.-� 03878505 08/05 END OF SECTION 05313 STEEL ROOF DECK 05313 - 4 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 05315 STEEL FORM DECK PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Noncomposite steel form deck. 2. Framing for openings up to 18 inches. B. Related Sections: 1. Concrete: Division 3. 2. Structural steel: Elsewhere in Division 5. 3. Steel joists: Elsewhere in Division 5. 4. Steel roof deck: Elsewhere in Division 5. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 446/A 446M-93 -- Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality; 1993. B. ASTM A 525-93 -- Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process; 1993. C. AWS D1.1-92 -- Structural Welding Code --Steel; American Welding Society; 1992. D. AWS D1.3-89 -- Structural Welding Code --Sheet Steel; American Welding Society;1989. E. MIL P-21035B(NAVY) -- Paint, High Zinc Dust Content, Galvanizing Repair (Metric); U.S. Department of Defense; 1991. F. SDI Publication No. 28 -- Steel Deck Institute Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks, Corner Decks and Cellular Metal Floor Deck with Electrical Distribution, Steel Deck Institute, Inc.; 1992. G. Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members; American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI); 1986 (with 1989 Addendum and 1990 Errata). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit deck manufacturer's specifications and product information, indicating compliance with specified requirements. 1. Include Steel Deck Institute certification of manufacturer's deck characteristics. 2. Include manufacturer's certification of deck characteristics. 3. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions, including specific installation sequence. 4. Submit manufacturer's data on mechanical fasteners. B. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings indicating deck types and plan layout; support locations and anchorages; projections; openings and reinforcement; and pertinent details and accessories. C. Calculations: Submit manufacturer's documentation of deck design loads, allowable spans, and section properties. 03879505 STEEL FORM DECK 05315 - l' 08/05 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with requirements of the following, except where exceeded by the contract documents or requirements of governing authorities: 1. AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members." 2. AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code --Sheet Steel." 3. "Steel Deck Institute Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks, and Cellular Metal Floor Deck with Electrical Distribution." B. Qualifications: Qualify welding processes and welding operators according to procedures specified in AWS D 1.1. C. Installer: A company specializing in this type of work and with 3 years of documented experience. 1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Storage: Separate sheets and store units on dry wood sleepers, sloped to promote drainage. Cover with waterproof material ventilated to avoid condensation. B. Marking: Unless deck units are all of the same gage and yield strength for the project, mark each unit clearly to identify differences. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel for Galvanized Metal Deck Units: ASTM A 446. B. Galvanizing: ASTM A 525, G60 coating where indicated. C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: Comply with requirements of Military Specification MIL P-21035B, Type I or H. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Steel Form Deck - General: Provide units complying with SDI specifications for deck type indicated. q B. Steel Form Deck: Comply with the following: 1. Profile type: Corrugated 2. Material: Galvanized steel. a. Minimum yield strength: 33,000 psi. t b. Minimum metal thickness: 0.0358 inch._ C. Maximum profile height: 2.0 inch. 3. Spanning configuration: Multiple span. 4. Sheet coverage width: Contractor—s option. 5. Side joints: Lapped seam. C. Fasteners: Galvanized hardened steel, self -tapping. D. Weld Washers: Uncoated mild steel, sized as recommended by manufacturer of steel deck ^ I units. 1 L_J 03878505 STEEL FORM DECK 05315 - 2 08105 i. LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine field conditions and substrates to receive metal decking, and verify that existing conditions are acceptable before commencing installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install deck units and accessories in compliance with Steel Deck Institute specifications, manufacturer's recommendations, and requirements of this specification section. Fasten deck units to supports promptly after placement and alignment. Do not leave placed sheets unattached at end of working day. 1. Shop drawings: Comply with final shop drawings. 2. Steel bearing: Allow minimum bearing of 1-1/2 inches at steel supports; align and level deck units. 3. Placement: Place deck units flat and square, without excessive warp or deflection. 4. End laps: Lap ends of deck units over supports and make laps not less than 2 inches. 5. Precautions: Coordinate location of decking bundles to prevent overloading of structure. B. Fastening: 1. Fasten form deck units to steel supporting members as follows: a. Minimum 5/8-inch-diameter fusion welds or elongated welds of equal strength. b. Use weld washers for metal of less than 0.028 inch in thickness. C. Mechanical fasteners approved by the architect may be used in lieu of welds. d. Spacing: 12 inches on center average, but not more than 18 inches apart and not fewer than 2 fasteners at any support. 2. Side laps: Fasten side laps of adjacent deck units as follows: a. Weld laps. b. Spacing: Not to exceed 24 inches on center. C. Openings: 1. Cut deck units and accessories to fit snugly around other work penetrating decks. 2. At openings up to 18 inches in either dimension, provide reinforcement and closure strips as shown or as required for strength and rigidity. D. Touch-up Painting: After installation of deck units and accessories, wire -brush burned and abraded areas and rust spots and apply touch-up paint. 1. Apply galvanizing repair paint to galvanized surfaces, complying with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 CLEANING A. Clear debris from deck before concrete is placed. B. Upon completion of work, remove all rubbish, debris, and excess materials from project site. END OF SECTION 05315 03878505 STEEL FORM DECK 05315 - 3 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 05400 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes load bearing formed steel joist and purlin framing and bridging. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Masonry support. 2. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Framing and Sheathing. 1.2 REFERENCES A. AISI (American Iron and Steel Institute) - Cold -Formed Steel Design Manual. B. ASTM A123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. C. ASTM A653, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. D. ASTM C955 - Standard Specification for Load -Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging, for Screw Application of Gypsum Board and Metal Plaster Bases. E. AWS D 1.1 (American Welding Society) - Structural Welding Code - Steel. F. AWS D1.3 (American Welding Society) - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel. G. ML/SFA 540 - (Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association, Division of National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; NAAMM) - Lightweight Steel Framing Systems Manual. H. SSPC-Paint 20 (Steel Structures Painting Council) - Zinc Rich Primers. 1.2. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Size components to withstand design loads as indicated on drawings: B. Maximum Allowable Deflection: 1:600 of span. C. Roof System: 1. Design to AISI - Cold -Formed Steel Design Manual. 2. Design to provide for movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night temperature ranges. 3. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings. 1.3. SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate component details, framed openings, bearing, anchorage, loading, welds, type and location of fasteners, and accessories or items required of related Work. 2. Indicate ceiling joist, roof joist and roof rafter layout. 3. Describe method for securing framing to supporting construction. 03878505 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1- General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Carpentry work not specified as part of other sections and which generally is not exposed, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Rough carpentry for: a. Miscellaneous lumber for attachment and support of other work- b. Construction panels for miscellaneous uses. 3. Preservative treatment. 4. Wall sheathing. B. Related Sections: 1. Finish carpentry: Elsewhere in Division 6. 1.3 REFERENCES A. APA PRP-108 -- Performance Standards and Policies for Structural -Use Panels; American Plywood Association; 1988 (Revised 1989). B. ASTM A 153-82(87) — Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 1982 (Reapproved 1987). C. ASTM C 79 - Gypsum Sheathing Board. D. AWPB LP-2-88 -- American Wood Preservers Bureau Quality Control and Inspection Procedures for Softwood Lumber, Timber and Plywood Pressure Treated with Waterborne Preservatives for Above Ground Use; 1988. E. NBS PS 1-83 -- Construction and Industrial Plywood; U.S. Department of Commerce, National Bureau of Standards; 1983 (with 1984 Revision). F. NIST PS 20-94 -- American Softwood Lumber Standard; U.S. Department of Commerce, National Institute of Standards and Technology; 1994. G. NFPA WCD #1 -- Manual for Wood Frame Construction; American Forest and Paper Association (formerly National Forest Products Association); 1988. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit technical data on roof sheathing, wood preservative materials and application instructions. 03878505 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber: Comply with NIST PS 20 and approved grading rules and inspection agencies. B. Inspection Agency: Any agency whose rules are approved by American Lumber Standards Committee. C. Grade Stamps for Concealed Lumber: Each piece of lumber, applied by inspection agency and showing compliance with each specified requirement. D. Construction Panels: Comply with NBS PS 1 where veneer plywood is specified; comply with APA PRP-108 where APA rated panels are specified; bearing APA trademark showing compliance with each specified requirement. 1.6 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect wood products and sheathing against moisture and dimensional changes. Support stacks at several uniformly spaced points to prevent deformation. Store stacks raised above ground. Cover to protect from rain and snow. Select and arrange cover to allow air circulation under and all around stacks to prevent condensation. Maintain and restore displaced coverings. Remove from the site any wood products that have been subjected to moisture or that do not comply with the specified moisture requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Size: Provide nominal sizes indicated, complying with NIST PS 20 except where actual sizes are specifically required. 1. Surfacing: Dressed lumber (S4S). 2. Moisture content: S-dry or MCI (19 percent maximum moisture content). a. Any allowed under referenced grading rules. 3. Grade: Construction (Light Framing). B. Miscellaneous Lumber: Provide dimension lumber and boards necessary for the support of work specified in other sections, whether or not specifically indicated, and including but not limited to blocking, nailers, etc. 1. Moisture content: 19 percent maximum (S-dry). 2. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or standard grade. 2.2 CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Construction Panels/Plywood: Miscellaneous uses. 1. Concealed plywood: C-C Plugged exterior. 2. Electrical/telephone panel backer: C-C plugged, APA rated sheathing, Exposure 1, rated. 2.3 SHEATHING A. ASTM C79; moisture and fire resistant type;1/2 inch thick except where otherwise scheduled, maximum permissible lengths; ends square cut; book tongue and grooved edges; water repellent paper faces. 03878505 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-2 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 05400 PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes load bearing formed steel joist and purlin framing and bridging. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Masonry support. 2. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Framing and Sheathing. 1.2 REFERENCES A. AISI (American Iron and Steel Institute) - Cold -Formed Steel Design Manual. B. ASTM A123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. C. ASTM A653, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. D. ASTM C955 - Standard Specification for Load -Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging, for Screw Application of Gypsum Board and Metal Plaster Bases. E. AWS D1.1 (American Welding Society) - Structural Welding Code - Steel. F. AWS D1.3 (American Welding Society) - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel. G. ML/SFA 540 - (Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association, Division of National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; NAAMM) - Lightweight Steel Framing Systems Manual. H. SSPC-Paint 20 (Steel Structures Painting Council) - Zinc Rich Primers. 1.2. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Size components to withstand design loads as indicated on drawings: B. Maximum Allowable Deflection: 1:600 of span. C. Roof System: 1. Design to AISI - Cold -Formed Steel Design Manual. 2. Design to provide for movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night temperature ranges. 3. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings. 1.3. SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate component details, framed openings, bearing, anchorage, loading, welds, type and location of fasteners, and accessories or items required of related Work. 2. Indicate ceiling joist, roof joist and roof rafter layout. 3. Describe method for securing framing to supporting construction. 03878505 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 4. Provide calculations for loadings and stresses of roof framing under the professional engineer's seal. B. Product Data: Submit data on standard framing members; describe materials and finish, product criteria and limitations. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Calculate structural properties of framing members in accordance with AISI Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members. 1.5. QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Design structural elements under direct supervision of a professional structural or civil engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State of Texas. D. Form, fabricate, install, and connect components in accordance with ML/SFA 540 - Lightweight Steel Framing Systems Manual. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING A. Manufacturers: 1. Alabama Metals Corporation (AMICO). 2. Dietrich Industries, Inc. 3. Dale/Incor. 4. Unimast Incorporated. 5. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 1.6. FRAMING MATERIALS A. Joists, Purlins, and Rafters: ASTM A6531A653M Grade sheet steel, formed to channel shape, solid web; 16 gauge thick. Width, depth and return leg as required for total loads indicated. B. Track: Formed steel; channel shaped; same width as studs, tight fit 16 gauge thick, solid web. C. Framing Materials: Roll from new sheet steel; cold reduction steels not being acceptable. 1.7. ACCESSORIES A. Bracing, Furring, Bridging: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined by performance requirements specified. B. Plates, Gussets, Clips: [Formed] sheet steel, thickness determined by performance requirements specified. C. Touch -Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC Paint 20 Type 11 Organic zinc rich. 1.8. FASTENERS 03878505 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 2 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 A. Self -drilling, Self -tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Steel, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A123 1.25 oz/sq ft. B. Anchorage Devices: Drilled expansion bolts. C. Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.3. 1.9. FABRICATION A. Fabricate assemblies of formed sections of sizes and profiles required. B. Fit, reinforce, and brace framing members to suit design requirements. 1.10. FINISHES A. Tracks and Headers: Galvanize to G90 coating class. B. Joists and Purlins: Galvanize to G90 coating class. C. Bracing, Furring, and Bridging: Same finish as framing members. D. Plates, Gussets, and Clips: Same finish as framing members. PART 3 - EXECUTION 1.11. EXANM\TATION A. Verify substrate surfaces are ready to receive Work. B. Verify that rough -in utilities are in proper location. 1.12. ERECTION OF JOISTS, PURLINS AND RAFTERS A. Install framing components. B. Make provisions for erection stresses. Provide temporary alignment and bracing. f, C. Place joists, purlins and rafters at 16 inches oc; not more than 2 inches from abutting walls. Connect joists to supports using fastener method. D. Set ceiling joists parallel and level, with lateral bracing and bridging. E. Locate joist end bearing directly over load bearing studs or provide load distributing member to top of stud track. F. Provide web stiffeners at reaction points as required by calculations. G. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer. H. Complete framing ready to receive decking. 1.13. ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Variation of any Member from Plane: 1/4 inch. END OF SECTION 03878505 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 3 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1- General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated ferrous metal items, prime painted and galvanized. B. Steel floor grating. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Placement of anchors in concrete. B. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Placement of anchors in masonry. C. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Structural bearing plates, angles and miscellaneous items, including anchorage. D. Section 06100 -Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking for support of accessories. E. Section 09900 - Painting: Field preparation and paint finish. 1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Gratings 1. General a. Size components using single support design. b. Maximum Allowable Deflection Under Live Load: 1/240. 2. Type I a. Design Wheel Load (Heavy Vehicle): Wheel load of 15,6001bs. conforming to ASSHTO Grade 15, with 30 percent impact loading. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Prepare shop drawings for stairs .and gratings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Texas. B. Welders' Certificates: Submit certificates certifying welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. 1.6 REFERENCES A. AASHTO - Standard Specification for Highway Bridges. B. ANSI/NAA1v M MBG 532 - Heavy Duty Metal Bar Grating Manual. C. ASTM A36 - Structural Steel. D. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -coated Welded and Seamless. E. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 03878505 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 1 08/05 N LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 F. ASTM Al53 - Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. G. ASTM A283 - Carbon Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars. H. ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners. I. ASTM A386 - Zinc -Coating (Hot -Dip) on Assembled Steel Products. J. AWS A2.0 - Standard Welding Symbols. K. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code. L. FS-S-325 - Shield, Expansion; Nail Expansion; and Nail, Drive Screw (Devices, Anchoring, Masonry). M. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1. Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. 2. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. 3. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.0 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. 4. Indicate adjacent construction and required anchorages to be provided by other sections. 5. Submit manufacturer's standard printed descriptive product literature for manufactured items. B. Design Data 1. Submit span and deflection tables for specified grating loads. C. Certification: Submit Welder's certificate verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. 1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings and as instructed by manufacturer. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Gratings 1. IKG Industries, Nashville, TN. 2. United Interlock, Columbus, OH. 3. Alhambra Foundry Co., Alhambra, CA. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. General 1. Steel Sections: ASTM A36. 2. Steel Plates: ASTM A283. 3. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B Schedule 40. 4. Fasteners: FS-S-325, type as required by condition indicated. 5. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307 galvanized to ASTM A153 for galvanized components. , 03878505 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 2 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 6. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. 7. Shop and Touch -Up Primer: SSPC 15, Type 1, red oxide. 8. Touch -Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc rich type. B. Gratings 1. ANSI A202.1, Types as specified and/or detailed. ;j 2. Types I: ASTM A36 steel, rectangular shape. 3. Fasteners and J-Hooks: Of same material as grating. 4. Perimeter Closure: Of same material as grating. € C. Pipe Bollards: ASTM A53, Grade B Schedule 40, 8 inch outside diameter, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. D. Miscellaneous Materials 1. Grout: Nonmetallic, noncorrodible, nonshrink, factory blended and packaged; complying with ASTM C 1107; recommended by manufacturer for exterior use. 2. Concrete: Normal weight ready -mix concrete as specified in Division 3. a. Compressive strength: 2500 pounds per square inch, minimum, at.28 days, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Concrete Inserts: Style as required for application. 4. Fasteners: Use fasteners suitable for the material being fastened and for the type of i connection required. -1 a. For exterior use or built into exterior walls: Nonferrous stainless steel, zinc 1 coated or cadmium plated. b. Use fasteners of same material as items being fastened unless otherwise indicated. C. Bolts and studs: ASTM A 307. d. Nuts: ASTM A 563. e. Lag bolts: FS FF-B-561. f. Machine screws: FS FF-S-92. g. Wood screws: FS FF-S-111. h. Plain washers: FS FF-W-92. i. Lock washers: FS FF-W-84. j. Expansion shields: FS FF-S-325. k. Toggle bolts: FS FF-B-588. 5. Galvanizing Repair Paint: Zinc dust paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or MEL P-2103513, Type I or II. # 6. Shop Primer: Rust -inhibitive, lead and chromate free, low VOC primer, complying with FS TT-P-664, or equivalent. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General 1. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site. 2. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. 3. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. 4. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. 5. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise. 03878505 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 3 08/05 w z LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Carpentry work not specified as part of other sections and which generally is not exposed, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Rough carpentry for: a. Miscellaneous lumber for attachment and support of other work. b. Construction panels for miscellaneous uses. 3. Preservative treatment. 4. Wall sheathing. B. Related Sections: 1. Finish carpentry: Elsewhere in Division 6. 1.3 REFERENCES A. APA PRP-108 -- Performance Standards and Policies for Structural -Use Panels; American Plywood Association; 1988 (Revised 1989). B. ASTM A 153-82(87) — Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 1982 (Reapproved 1987). C. ASTM C 79 - Gypsum Sheathing Board. D. AWPB LP-2-88 -- American Wood Preservers Bureau Quality Control and Inspection Procedures for Softwood Lumber, Timber and Plywood Pressure Treated with Waterborne Preservatives for Above Ground Use; 1988. E. NBS PS 1-83 -- Construction and Industrial Plywood; U.S. Department of Commerce, National Bureau of Standards; 1983 (with 1984 Revision). F. NIST PS 20-94 -- American Softwood Lumber Standard; U.S. Department of Commerce, National Institute of Standards and Technology; 1994. G. NFPA WCD #1 -- Manual for Wood Frame Construction; American Forest and Paper Association (formerly National Forest Products Association); 1988. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit technical data on roof sheathing, wood preservative materials and application instructions. 03878505 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber: Comply with NIST PS 20 and approved grading rules and inspection agencies. B. Inspection Agency: Any agency whose rules are approved by American Lumber Standards Committee. C. Grade Stamps for Concealed Lumber: Each piece of lumber, applied by inspection agency and showing compliance with each specified requirement. D. Construction Panels: Comply with NBS PS 1 where veneer plywood is specified; comply with APA PRP-108 where APA rated panels are specified; bearing APA trademark showing compliance with each specified requirement. 1.6 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect wood products and sheathing against moisture and dimensional changes. Support stacks at several uniformly spaced points to prevent deformation. Store stacks raised above ground. Cover to protect from rain and snow. Select and arrange cover to allow air circulation under and all around stacks to prevent condensation. Maintain and restore displaced coverings. Remove from the site any wood products that have been subjected to moisture or that do not comply with the specified moisture requirements. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Size: Provide nominal sizes indicated, complying with NIST PS 20 except where actual sizes are specifically required. 1. Surfacing: Dressed lumber (S4S). 2. Moisture content: S-dry or MC 19 (19 percent maximum moisture content). a. Any allowed under referenced grading rules. 3. Grade: Construction (Light Framing). B. Miscellaneous Lumber: Provide dimension lumber and boards necessary for the support of work specified in other sections, whether or not specifically indicated, and including but not limited to blocking, nailers, etc. 1. Moisture content: 19 percent maximum (S-dry). 2. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or standard grade. 2.2 CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Construction Panels/Plywood: Miscellaneous uses. 1. Concealed plywood: C-C Plugged exterior. 2. Electrical/telephone panel backer: C-C plugged, APA rated sheathing, Exposure 1, rated. 2.3 SHEATHING A. ASTM C79; moisture and fire resistant type; 1/2 inch thick except where otherwise scheduled, maximum permissible lengths; ends square cut; book tongue and grooved edges; water repellent paper faces. i 03878505 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-2 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Provide as required by applicable codes and as otherwise indicated. 1. Provide fasteners with a hot -dip zinc coating (ASTM A 153) for treated lumber and where wood is in ground contact, subjected to high relative humidity, or exposed to weather. B. Sheathing Joint Tape: 1. Rubberized asphalt with polyethylene film backing, minimum 30 mils thick. 2. Acceptable Product: W.R. Grace "Perm -a -Barrier" wall seam tape. 2.5 WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS A. Aboveground Lumber: AWPB LP-2 (waterborne preservatives). 1. Kiln dried after treatment to 19 percent maximum moisture content for lumber and 18 percent for plywood. 2. Treat the following: a. Wood in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing. b. Wood in contact with masonry or concrete. C. Wood within 18 inches of grade. d. Other members indicated. B. Fasteners for Preservative Treated Wood: Hot -dip galvanized steel (ASTM Al53). 1. Fire -retardant treated plywood: AWPA C27. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Arrange work to use full length pieces except where lengths would exceed commercially available lengths. Discard pieces with defects that would lower the required strength or appearance of the work. B. Cut and fit members accurately. Install plumb and true to line and level. C. Fasten carpentry in accordance with applicable codes and recognized standards. D. Where exposed, countersink nails and fill flush with suitable wood filler. E. Use fasteners of appropriate type and length. Predrill members when necessary to avoid splitting wood 3.2 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY A. Provide miscellaneous blocking, nailers, grounds, and framing as shown and as required for support of facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. Cut and shape to the required size. Provide in locations required by other work. B. Use countersunk fasteners appropriate to applied loading. C. Install permanent grounds for concrete and masonry where required. 3.3 WOOD FRAMING - GENERAL A. Comply with sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated. Where not specifically indicated, comply with applicable codes and NFPA "Manual for Wood Frame Construction." Splice members only where specifically indicated or approved. 03878505 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-3 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 3.4 B. Space fasteners as indicated. Where not specifically indicated, comply with applicable codes and the "Recommended Nailing Schedule" ofNFPA "Manual for Wood Frame Construction" and "National Design Specification for Wood Construction." 1. Nail or screw miscellaneous plywood panels to supports. SHEATHING A. Install sheathing so that long edges are parallel to studs. Center edges over studs. B. Provide solid wood blocking or metal framing to support horizontal edges which do not bear on horizontal framing members. C. Coordinate installation of flashings, anchors, and similar items necessary to construct and weatherproof wall systems. D. Apply rubberized asphalt joint tape to edges and joints of sheathing. E. Install to a maximum allowable tolerance variation from plumb, level, and true to line of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. END OF SECTION 03878505 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-4 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 06410 CUSTOM CABINETWORK PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. fl�►��iaul►T/�`� A. Section Includes: 1. Interior architectural woodwork. a. Wood cabinets. b. Cabinet hardware. C. Plastic laminate clad tops. B. Related Sections: 1. Hollow Core Doors: Section 08211. 2. Hardware References: Section 08710. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI A135.4 - Basic Hardboard. B. ANSI A208.1 - Mat Formed Wood Particleboard. C. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards D. BHMA A156.1 - Butts and Hinges. E. BHMA A156.9 - Cabinet Hardware. F. BHMA A156.11 - Cabinet Locks. G. BHMA A156.16 - Auxiliary Hardware. H. BHMA A156.18 - Materials and Finishes. I. FS MMM-A-130 - Adhesive, Contact. J. HPMA HP - American Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. K. NEMA LD3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates. L. NHLA - Rules for the Measurement and Inspection of Hardwood & Cypress M. PS 1- Construction and Industrial Plywood. N. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings. 1. Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule of finishes. 2. For shop drawings submitted in phases, number phases in sequential order and provide master cross reference indicating room number in numerical sequence, millwork elevation and shop drawing sheet where detailed. B. Samples 1. Submit four 2 x 3 inch size samples, illustrating counter top and cabinet finish. C. Plastic Laminate: 03878505 CUSTOM CABINETWORK 06410 - 1 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1. Product data. 2. Samples for selection. 3. Maintenance data. D. Cabinet Hardware: 1. Product data. 2. One sample of each type. 3. Samples showing each finish on each item of hardware exposed to view. 4. Maintenance data. 5. Operation data for drawer slides. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality of Materials and Workmanship: Provide woodwork that complies with requirements of "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards," published by Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) (hereinafter referred to as "woodworking standard"). B. Where contract documents indicate deviations from the woodworking standard, the contract documents shall govern. C. Coordinate installation of woodwork with other work to avoid damage. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CABINETWORK A. All Cabinetwork: 1. Grades: "A" custom, as applicable of AWI Section 400. 2. Species: Rift cut red oak. 3. Finishes: Stained. Refer to Section 09900. 4. Matching: Book match. 2.2 WOOD MATERIALS A. Lumber: Species and grade as specified in woodworking standard, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Comply with applicable requirements of AWI Section 100. 2. Moisture content at time of fabrication: Not greater than optimum moisture content as specified in woodworking standard. 3. Provide lumber dressed on all exposed faces, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Do not use twisted, warped, bowed, or otherwise defective lumber. 5. Sizes indicated are nominal, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Do not mark or color lumber, except where such marking will be concealed in finish work. B. Plywood: Types, grades, and cores as specified in the woodworking standard, except as otherwise specified in this section. 1. Comply with applicable requirements of AWI Section 200. 2. Medium density overlaid plywood: Exterior Type. C. Medium Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Product Class MD.. D. Hardboard: AHA A135.4; tempered, with exposed faces smooth. 03878505 CUSTOM CABINETWORK 06410 - 2 08/05 i LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. High -Pressure Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3. 1. Grades and thicknesses required by AWL B. Transparent Finish Materials for Field Finishing: As specified in Division 9. C. Opaque Finish Materials for Field Finishing: As specified in Division 9. D. Wood Filler for Transparent Finish Woodwork: Match final finish color. E. Fasteners: Style, size, material, and finish as required for the purpose. 2.4 CABINET HARDWARE A. Provide hardware and accessories indicated and as required for a complete installation. B. Concealed Hinges: Totally concealed style, self -closing, opening 180 degrees. C. Butt Hinges: BHMA 156.1, A8133. D. Pulls: Standard wire style, 3 1/2-inch centers by 5/16-inch diameter, no escutcheons. E. Drawer slides: BHMA A156.9, Type B05051, Side -mounted, 75-pound capacity, full extension, with nylon ball -bearing rollers; positive pull-out stop, self -closing, lift -out feature. F. Locks: BHMA A156.11 , E07261, 5-pin tumbler, sized for door thickness. G. Shelf supports: BHMA A156.9, B04013, brass or nickel plated steel, no plastics allowed. H. Closet Rod: BHMA A156.16, Type L03131, 7/8" diameter stainless steel. I. Coat Hooks: BHMA A156.16, Type L03111, stainless steel or solid brass. J. Silencers: BHMA A156.16, Type L03021. K. Lever Extension Flush Bolts: BHMA Al56.16, Type L04091. L. Finishes on exposed hardware: Comply with BHMA A156.18 as follows: 1. Exposed Hardware: 630, satin stainless steel. 2. Concealed hardware: Manufacturer's standard non -corroding plated finish, complying with applicable requirements of BHMA A156.9. M. Magnetic Catches: BHMA A156.16, Type BO 3162. N. Manufactured Support: 1. Counter Support a. 6063 `T' shaped extruded aluminum with 5/ 16 inch diameter mounting/attaching holes, mill finish and 7/8 inch hole with rubber grommet for wiring. b. Acceptable Product: RAKKS Model No. EH1824-FM. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate in sizes and shapes indicated and using details indicated. B. Plastic laminate counter and backsplash and front edge of counter shall be seamless with radius transitions. C. Complete fabrication and assembly in shop. 1. For applied fixtures and fittings, cut openings in shop. 2. Ease edges of solid lumber members using: a. 1/16-inch radius for members 1 inch or less nominal thickness. b. 1/8-inch radius for members more than 1 inch nominal thickness. D. Drilled holes, at 1 inch spacing, for shelf support clips at each shelf indicated to be adjustable. E. Make special provisions as required for 1 3/8" solid core doors at dorm lockers. This may require reinforced jambs for hinges, special cylinders, flush bolts, internal blocking, etc. F. Prepare for finishing in accordance with woodworking standard. 03878505 CUSTOM CABINETWORK 06410 - 3 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 r PART 3 - EXECUTION r-1 3.1 PREPARATION A. Verify that blocking and backings have been installed at appropriate locations for anchorage, and for coat hooks or other required hardware on dorm locker doors. 3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL LA A. Do not begin installation of interior woodwork until potentially damaging construction operations are complete in the installation area. B. Field Joinery: Comply with requirements of the woodworking standard for shop joinery. C. Make joints neatly, with uniform appearance. D. Install woodwork in correct location, plumb and level, without rack or warp. 1. Install with no variation in flushness of adjoining surfaces. E. Touch-up shop finishes at field cuts. F. Secure woodwork to blocking or use anchors indicated. 1. Where anchorage method is not indicated, conceal all fasteners where possible. 2. Where exposed nailing is required or indicated, use finishing nails, countersink, and fill. G. Repair damaged and defective woodwork to eliminate visual and functional defects; where repair is not possible, replace woodwork. H. Cabinets: 1. Install so doors operate smoothly, with edges aligned. 2. Install so drawers operate smoothly. 3. Install all hardware not installed in shop. 4. Anchor tops securely. 5. Install tops level, within 1/8 inch in 8 feet. s , 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect woodwork from damage and maintain design environmental conditions. B. Repair and damaged woodwork like new. 3.4 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Flush Reveal Cabinets Each door to have: 2 concealed, self closing hinges. 1 pull. 1 lock where indicated on drawings. Each drawer to have: Pair drawer slides. I pull. I lock where indicated on drawings. 03878505 CUSTOM CABINETWORK 0641 0-4_ 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 B. Wardrobe Cabinets/Closet Single door cabinets to have: 1 1/2 pair butts 1 deadbolt lock 1 pull 3 silencers 1 clothes rod 2 coat hooks 1 magnetic catch Double door cabinet to have: 3 pair butts 1 deadbolt lock 2 pulls 1 set flush bolts 2 silencers 1 clothes rod 4 coat hooks 1 magnetic catch END OF SECTION _a 03878505 CUSTOM CABINETWORK 06410 - 5 08/05 I LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 07180 WATER REPELLENTS PART I -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Application of clear water repellent coating to the following exposed surfaces: a. Exterior: 1) Brick masonry. 2) Concrete unit masonry. B. Section Does Not Include: Application of water repellents to horizontal traffic surfaces. C. Coordinate the application of this materials with the application of the Graffiti Resistant coating called for in Section 09910. Follow each manufacturer's recommendations. Notify architect of potential conflicts. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical product data and recommendations for use of each type of product required. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Detailed application instructions, including weather limitations, condition of substrates, surface preparation or cleaning, protection of adjacent surfaces, application of product, and cleaning of accidental over -spray and spills. C. Samples - Clear Water Repellent: Submit 16-inch-square samples of each material to receive water repellent. Leave 1/3 of panel untreated, apply 1 coat of water repellent to 1/3 of panel, and apply 2 coats to remaining 1/3 of panel. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable rules of the pollution control regulatory agency having jurisdiction in the project locale regarding use of hydrocarbon solvents. B. Mock-up: Apply water repellent to mock-up constructed as work of other section(s). 1. Do not apply water repellents to project surfaces without the architect's approval of water-repellent mock-up. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Furnish warranty to provide materials and labor required to repair or replace materials which fail to perform properly due to defective materials or workmanship. This warranty shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the owner may have against the contractor under the contract documents. 1. Warranty period is 5 years after date of substantial completion. 03878505 WATER REPELLENTS 07180-1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CLEAR WATER REPELLENTS A. General: Provide products recommended by the manufacturer for compatibility and proper performance when applied to the substrates indicated to receive water repellent treatment. B. Products: The following products, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: 1. Siloxane -- Mineral spirit based alkyl-alkoxy siloxane solution: a. "CP-250"; Chemical Products Corporation. b. "Euco Weather -Guard'; The Euclid Chemical Company. C. "Hydropel"; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. d. "Shed Ox"; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. e. "Rainstopper 100'; Textured Coatings of America, Inc. f. "Rainstopper 200"; Textured Coatings of America, Inc. g. "Water -Guard"; Nox-Crete, Inc. h. "Weather Seal Special Siloxane"; ProSoCo, Inc. i. "Weather Seal Siloxane'; ProSoCo, Inc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Do not proceed with application of water repellent until sealants for joints adjacent to surfaces to receive water repellent treatment have been installed and cured. B. Protection: 1. Mask off and cover adjacent surfaces to prevent contamination by water repellents whether by spray, drift, drip, or spillage. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install water repellants to all exterior masonry surfaces. B. Comply with manufacturer's written application instructions. C. Unless specifically contraindicated by manufacturer's instructions, use low pressure spray equipment to apply a heavy saturation coat to substrate followed by a second saturation coat after the manufacturer's recommended drying time has elapsed. D. Remove protective coverings from adjacent surfaces. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field test on non -water repellent treated and water repellent treated area for each substrate scheduled to be treated. Perform separate test for masonry and water joints. 1. Perform test using Rilem 25 PEM method IIA for a period of one hour. 2. Perform minimum three separate tests for each substrate scheduled to receive water repellent treatment using specified methods and materials. 3. Acceptable Application: Minimum 80 percent reduction in water absorption between treated and non -treated areas. 4. Provide additional coatings until required reduction in absorption is achieved. 3.4 SCHEDULE 03878505 WATER REPELLENTS 07180-2 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 A. Exterior Brick and Prefinished Concrete Masonry Units: Siloxane, minimum two coats. 03878505 08/05 END OF SECTION WATER REPELLENTS 07180-3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Uniform General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1- General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Rigid insulation in exterior wall construction. B. Batt insulation on top of lay -in acoustical and gypsum drywall ceilings. C. Acoustical insulation. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07536 - Modified Bitumen Roofing: Rigid insulation at roof system. B. Section 07270 - Firestopping: Sealing fire rated partitions C. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems: Vapor barrier and acoustical sealant. Supporting construction D. Section 09510 - Acoustical Ceilings: Supporting construction. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM C208 - Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board. B. ASTM C240 - Testing Cellular Glass Insulation Block. C. ASTM C552 - Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation. D. ASTM C578 - Preformed, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. E. ASTM C612 - Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation Board. F. ASTM C665 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. G. ASTM C1289 - Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board. H. ASTM D2842 - Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics. I. ASTM E 84-87 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. J. ASTM E 90-87 Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. K. ASTM E96 - Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. L. ASTM E 119-83 Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. M. ASTM E 413-87 Determination of Sound Transmission Class. N. NFPA 255 - Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 0. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 03878505 08/05 BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Insulation k Values 1. k values indicated are based on 75 deg. F. 2. Where scheduled, provide insulations with conditioned k values complying with RIC/TIMA 281-1 Conditioning Procedure. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to Uniform Building Code - 1997 for combustibility and smoke development requirements for materials as follows: 1. Flame Spread: 25 or less. 2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less. B. Identify insulation with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, limitations. B. Manufacturer's Certificate 1. Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to successful installation. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect insulations from physical damage and from becoming wet or soiled. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage and protection. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Flexible Insulation 1. Owens/Corning Corporation 2. CertainTeed 3. Manville Corp. 4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600 B. Board Insulation 1. Polystyrene Insulation a. AFM - Molded Polystyrene Insulation. b. EPS - Molded Polystyrene Insulation. C. W.R. Grace Construction Products d. DivsersiFoam Products. e. Dow Chemical. f. Tenneco Foam Products. 03878505 BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 2 08/05 I LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 2. Polyisocyanurate Insulation a. Celotex. b. NRG Barriers/Johns Manville. C. Rmax - Polyisocyanurate Insulation. 3. Cellular Glass Insulation a. Pittsburgh Corning. 4. Cellular Glass Insulation a. Certain Teed. b. Johns Manville, Insulation Group. C. Knauf Fiber Glass. d. Owens-Corning Fiberglas. C. Accessories 2.2 MATERIALS A. Flexible Thermal Insulation 1. Conformance: ASTM C 665, Type I, glass fiber batt. 2. Thermal Resistance: R19. 3. Size: To fit framing spacing 4. Facing: Kraft faced. B. Flexible Acoustical Insulation 1. Conformance: ASTM C 665, Type 1, glass or mineral fiber batt. 2. Thermal Resistance: R8. 3. Size: To fit framing spacing 4. Facing: Unfaced. C. Thermal Board Insulation 1. Extruded Polystyrene Insulation: ASTM C578 Type VI; cellular type, conforming to the following: a. Board Density: 1.6 lb/cu ft. b. Board Size: 16 inch x maximum length available. C. Board Thickness: 2 inches. d. Thermal Resistance: R of 10. e. Water Absorption: In accordance with ASTM D2842 0.05 percent by volume maximum. f. Compressive Strength: Minimum 60 psi. g. Board Edges: Square edges. h. Flame/Smoke Properties: In accordance with ASTM E84. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Tape: Bright aluminum self -adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2 inch wide. B. Wire Mesh: Galvanized steel, hexagonal wire mesh. C. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application. D. Adhesive Type 2: Vapor retarder type, trowel consistency; compatible with insulation and substrate, conforming to the following: E. Impaling Clips: Galvanized steel with washer retainer and clips, to be mechanically fastened to surface to receive board insulation, length to suit insulation thickness and substrate, capable of securely and rigidly fastening insulation in place. - 03878505 BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 3 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate and adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive insulation. B. Verify insulation is dry. C. Verify substrate surface is flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, materials or substances that may impede adhesive bond. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Install insulation in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions. 2. Install insulation without gaps or voids. 3. Place insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. 4. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. B. Flexible Thermal Insulation 1. Place between and tight to framing members. 2. Staple or nail facing flanges in place at maximum 6 inches oc. C. Flexible Acoustical Insulation 1. Place between and tight to framing members. 2. Tape in place. D. Cavity Walls 1. Secure impale fasteners to substrate at a frequency of 6 per insulation board. 2. Adhere a 2 inch wide strip of polyethylene sheet over control joint with double beads of Type 1 adhesive each side of joint between sheets. Extend sheet full height of joint. 3. Apply Type 1 adhesive in three continuous beads per board length to full bed 1/8 inch thick on substrate. Daub adhesive right to protrusions to ensure continuity of vapor retarder and air seal. 4. Install boards horizontally between wall reinforcement. 5. Place membrane surface facing out, butter with adhesive tape seal board joints. 6. Place boards in a method to maximize contact bedding. Stagger side joints. Butt edges and ends tight to adjacent board and no protrusions. Place impale fastener locking discs. END OF SECTION r 03878505 BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 4 08/05 I' LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 07270 FIRESTOPPING PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1- General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fireproof firestopping and firesafing materials and accessories. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Masonry partitions. B. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems: Gypsum wallboard partitions. C. Division 15 - Mechanical: Mechanical work requiring firestopping. D. Division 16 - Electrical: Electrical work requiring firestopping. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. ASTM El 19 - Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. C. ASTM E814 - Test Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops. D. UL-05 - Fire Resistance Directory. E. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. F. UL 723 - Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. G. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through -Penetration Firestops. H. WHI - Certification Listings. 1.5 DEFINITION A. Firestopping (Firesafing): A certified sealing or stuffing material or assembly placed in spaces between building materials to arrest the movement of smoke, heat, gases, or fire through wall or floor openings and to maintain the integrity of fire resistance rated walls, partitions and roof -ceiling assemblies and construction joints. Through -penetrations include the annular space around pipes, tubes, conduit, wires, cables and vents. 1.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Surface Burning: ASTM E84 or UL 723 with a flame spread / smoke developed rating of 0-25/0-450. B. Firestop all interruptions to fire rated assemblies, materials, and components. 03878505 FIRESTOPPING 07270 - 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Provide detail drawing of each type firestop and location drawing referencing each type application. B. Product Data: Provide descriptive data on product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria and fire test data. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions. D. Manufacturer's Certificate 1. Submit certificates attesting that firestopping material complies with specified requirements. 2. Label or listing of Underwriters Laboratories will be acceptable evidence. 3. In lieu of label or listing, a written certificate may be submitted from an approved, nationally recognized testing agency equipped to perform such services, stating that items submitted have been tested and conform to specified requirements and testing methods. 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to UL or VG'H for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics. B. Provide certificate of compliance from Texas Department of Health indicating approval of materials used. 1.10 MOCKUP A. Provide mockups of applied firestopping assemblies under provisions of Section 01400. B. Apply 1 sq ft to a representative substrate surface. C. Apply firestop material to a representative penetrated masonry, concrete, and stud wall. D. If accepted, mockup will demonstrate minimum standard for the Work- E. Mockup may not remain as part of the Work. 1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery, store and handle products to project site in accordance with requirements of Section 01600. 1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60 degrees F. B. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days after installation of materials. C. Provide ventilation in areas to receive solvent cured materials. 03878505 FIRE -STOPPING 07270 - 2 �- 08/05 i LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Commercially manufactured, non -toxic products as listed in UL 05. B. Use of fireproofing materials specified in Sections 07255 and 07265 as firestopping is strictly prohibited. C. Provide "F" and "T" fire resistance ratings for through -penetrations, as described in paragraph 1.4 DEFINITIONS in accordance with ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, except that T Ratings are not required for penetrations smaller than or equal to a 4-inch nominal pipe or 16 square inches in overall cross sectional area. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces. B. Dam Material: Permanent: 1. Mineral fiberboard or sheet metal. C. Installation Accessories: Clips, collars, fasteners, temporary stops or dams, and other devices required to position and retain materials in place. 2.3 FINISHES A. Color: As selected by Architect to match adjacent wall surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify openings are ready to receive work of this section. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter which may affect bond of firestopping material. B. Remove incompatible materials which may affect bond. C. Install backing and/or damming materials to arrest liquid material leakage. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Install material at walls or partition openings which contain penetrating sleeves, piping, ductwork, conduit and other items, requiring firestopping. B. Completely fill void spaces regardless of geometric configuration, subject to tolerance established by manufacturer. C. Design firestopping for filling floor voids 4 inches or more in any direction to support the same load as floor is designed to support, or protect by permanent barrier to prevent loading or traffic in firestopped area. D. Apply primer and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve rating and to uniform density and texture. 03879505 FIRESTOPPING 07270 - 3 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 F. Compress fibered material to achieve a density of 40 percent of its uncompressed density. G. Place sealant to completely seal junctions with adjacent dissimilar materials. H. Remove dam material after firestopping material has cured. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean Work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500. B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. END OF SECTION 03878505 FIRESTOPPING 07270 - 4 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 07410 MANUFACTURED METAL ROOF PANELS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manufactured metal roofing system: a. Manufactured metal roof panels. b. Installation accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Sheet metal flashing: Elsewhere in Division 7. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 792-93a -- Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum -Zinc Alloy -Coated by the Hot -Dip Process, General Requirements; 1993. B. ASTM D 226-89 -- Standard Specification for Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing; 1989. C. Roofing Materials and Systems Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.(UL); 1993. D. UL 580 -- Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 1994. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Provide for expansion and contraction of system components due to ambient temperature and solar heat gain. Accommodate movement due to temperature change without buckling, undue stress on structural elements, reduction of performance, or other damaging effects. a. Anticipated ambient temperature range: 0 to 110 degrees F. B. Wind Uplift: Provide metal roof panel systems which have been tested in accordance with UL 580 and listed in the UL "Roofing Materials and Systems Directory" for the following rating: J 1. Class 60. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's written technical information, including performance data, details, and installation recommendations, which demonstrate that metal panel assembly components comply with contract documents. 03878505 MANUFACTURED METAL ROOF PANELS 07410 - 1 08/05 t LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 B. Shop Drawings: Drawings which show arrangement and orientation of panels and details of panel joints, comers, custom profiles, supporting devices, and closure trim and flashing. Show ` panel system in relation to adjacent construction. C. Samples for Selection of Coated Finish Colors: 2 x 3 inch square pieces of actual panel , materials. Submit full range of samples. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A company with a minimum of 5 years' successful experience in the design, fabrication, and installation of metal panel systems comparable in size and nature to those required for this project. B. Field Measurements: Measure in -place construction on which panel system will be installed if possible, before fabrication of panels. If not feasible, fabricate material to allow in -field trimming of panels to assure proper fit. 1. Coordinate field measurements and shop drawings with shop fabrication to minimise field adjustments, splicing, and mechanical joints. C. The same roofer must install both flat or membrane roof and metal roofs under this contract. 1.7 WARRANTY 1_J A. Warrant coated finish against cracking, peeling, blistering, chalk in excess of 8 units, and fade in excess of 5 NBS points, for a period of 20 years, without reducing or otherwise limiting any other rights to correction which the owner may have under the contract documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufactured Metal Panel Systems: Fumish basic materials, including panels, accessories, and fasteners, from a single source manufacturer. Furnish other products integral with panel system from the same manufacturer as basic materials, or from a manufacturer approved or recommended by the basic materials manufacturer. 1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. AEP-Span Division/United Dominion Co. b. Fabral-Alcan Building Products. C. Architectural Panels, Inc. d. Berridge Manufacturing Company. e. Flexospan, Inc. f. Robertson, a United Dominion Company. g. Metal Building Components, Inc. h. Steelite, Inc. A. "Galvalume" Sheet: ASTM A 792; steel sheet, coated with zinc -aluminum alloy, manufactured under licensing requirements of BIEC International Inc. 03878505 MANUFACTURED METAL ROOF PANELS 07410 - 2 08105 i� .. _..._.................... LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 2.3 ROOF SYSTEM A. System Type: Uninsulated system consisting of roof panels with concealed attachment clips in panel; clips secured directly to rigid substrate. 1. Seam type: Panel joint covered and locked by applied cap or strip (batten cover). 2. Fabricate panels from "Galvalume" sheet steel, minimum 24 gage (0.034 inch thick). 3. Exterior finish: Fluoropolymer. 4. Interior (underside) finish: Manufacturer's standard corrosion -inhibiting wash coat. 5. Panel width (nominal coverage):16 inches. 6. Panel profile: Match MBCI Craftsman Series HB16-1/2. Color to be selected from standard colors. B. Rigid Insulation under the panels: The term "Uninsulated" is used to indicate the roof panel itself is not insulated. Insulation is required, however, under the panel as shown in the drawing details. This insulation should be the same type as used on the flat roof areas and may be either one or two layers totaling a minimum of R-20 complying with the International Energy Code, 2000. C. Underlayment: Unperforated asphalt -saturated felt; ASTM D 226, Type H, No. 30. D. Concealed Panel Clips: 1. Fabricate from galvanized steel. 2. Provide roof system manufacturer's standard type clips to suit project requirements, including but not limited to the following: a. Live loads. b. Thermal movement; accommodate expansion and contraction without introducing stress into roof system. C. Slope of roof. d. Special conditions at transitions, penetrations, and terminations. E. Fasteners: 1. Threaded fasteners - general: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant fasteners of size and type required for intended application. a. Use of cadmium -plated fasteners is not allowed. 2. Rivets: Noncorrosive metal, compatible with metals to be fastened. F. Accessories: 1. Flexible closures: Closed -cell neoprene rubber, formed to fit panel profile with 5 to 10 percent compression when secured in place. 2. Sheet metal closures, flashing, and trim: Fabricate from same type of sheet metal, and with same finish, as adjacent roof panel. 3. Flexible sheet flashing: Neoprene or EPDM sheet, minimum 0.060 inch thickness. 4. Concealed sealants and gaskets: Manufacturer's standard. 5. Exposed joint sealant: As specified elsewhere in Division 7.- G. Classification: Class B minimum. 2.4 FINISHES A. Fluoropolymer Finish: 1. Pretreatment: Caustic etch and conversion coating, each followed by water rinse. 2. Primer: Modified epoxy primer, minimum 0.2 mil thick; bake to cure. 3. Finish coat: 70 percent "Kynar 500" or "Hylar 5000" resin finish coat, minimum 0.8 mil thick; bake to cure. Match MBCI standard colors. 4. Protective film: Provide strippable plastic film, applied to finish of coil stock before forming. �- 03878505 MANUFACTURED METAL ROOF PANELS 07410 - 3 08/05 11 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 B. Mill Finish: As -fabricated, welds cleaned and dressed, exposed welds ground smooth. Remove oil, grease, dirt, and weld spatter from finished units. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate or structural system to receive work of this section is complete, properly sized, and is laid out correctly in plan and elevations. B. Correct unacceptable substrate installations before start of metal panel erection. C. Coordinate work with other adjacent elements of building envelope to ensure watertight construction. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install manufactured metal panels in accordance with panel manufacturer's recommended practices. 1. Fasten panels to structure as necessary to comply with performance criteria, allowing for expansion and contraction due to temperature variations and building movement. 2. Install gaskets, sealants, closures, and trim as the work progresses to ensure airtight and watertight performance of the completed installation. B. Roof System Installation: 1. Underlayment: Install one layer of underlayment, starting at low point of roof. Lap seams a minimum of 2 inches. Conceal or arrange fasteners to prevent contact between fastener head and underside of metal roofing. 2. Install roof panels in single, continuous piece from eaves to ridge. 3. Roof panel installation: Install roof panels using concealed clips in panel joints. a. Use of exposed fasteners is not permitted unless specifically approved by the architect. 4. Do not penetrate finish ceiling in Apparatus Bay with screws. 3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Roof Systems: 1. Alignment: 1/4 inch in 20 feet for conformity to lines of roof slope and seam locations. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove protective coverings from prefinished metal surfaces after each panel is installed. B. Touch up or refinish marred or abraded surfaces. Replace damaged units and units which cannot be refinished to the architect's satisfaction. C. Clean finished surfaces using techniques and materials recommended by panel manufacturer. Protect cleaned surfaces until project completion. END OF SECTION 03878505 MANUFACTURED METAL ROOF PANELS 07410 - 4 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 07525 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 41u:_M A. Section Includes: 1. Substrate preparation. 2. Insulation. 3. Roof membrane. 4. Base flashings. 5. Roof accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Carpentry - wood blocking and nailers: Division 6. 2. Flashing and sheet metal (weather protection for base flashings): Elsewhere in Division 7. 3. Roof specialties and accessories: Elsewhere in Division 7. 4. Roof drains, curbs for equipment: Division 15. 5. Metal roof panels: Elsewhere in Division 7. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 208-94 -- Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board; 1994. B. ASTM C 518-91 -- Standard Test Method for Steady -State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 1991. C. ASTM C 728-91 -- Standard Specification for Perlite Thermal Insulation Board; 1991. D. ASTM E 84-91 a -- Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 1991. E. FM P7825 -- Approval Guide 1992; Factory Mutual System; 1992 (with Supplement 1). F. The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors Association; 1989. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Factory Mutual System Classification: Provide roofing materials and a roofing system assembly which have been listed in the Factory Mutual System "Approval Guide" as being acceptable for Class I roof assembly construction. 1. Provide roof system, including insulation and fasteners, rated by FM for Class I-60 wind uplift. B. Roof covering classification: Class B minimum. 03878505 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07525-1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit technical product information installation instructions and , P , recommendations for each type of roofing material. Furnish additional information as necessary to demonstrate products comply with project criteria. B. Color samples for selection. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: A company that has produced roofing materials and accessories of the type included in this section for at least three years. B. Installer Qualifications: A company approved or licensed by the roofing materials manufacturer and which has completed at least 10 previous installations of roofing material similar to the type included in this section. 1. Certification: Furnish to the architect, before roofing contract award, written documentation that installer is manufacturer certified to install roofing systems of the type included in this section. 2. Installer supervision: Have installer identify a supervisor with at least 5 years experience in the application of the type of modified bituminous sheet roofing system included in this section, to provide full-time review of built-up roofing installation work. 3. The same roofer must install both flat or membrane roof and metal roofs under this contract. C. FM Label: Roofing material packaging shall bear FM Classification marking. D. Pre -Roofing Meeting: Organize and conduct a meeting at the construction site 2 weeks before scheduled start ofroof system installation with roofing installer; installer of each component of related work, including deck or substrate construction, roof equipment, penetrations of roof deck, and other work integral with or adjacent to roofing; the architect; the owner; roofing manufacturer's representative; and other parties involved with roofing system performance, including owner's insurance representative, independent testing agencies, and governing authorities. 1. Walk roof areas to review and discuss substrate preparation including repair of unacceptable surfaces, roof drainage, penetrations, equipment curbs, and work performed by other trades which requires coordination with roofing system. 2. Examine steel deck for proper flatness and slope, review structural capability for supporting roofing system and methods of fastening. 3. Review contract document requirements and submittals for roofing system, including roofing schedule, inspection and testing, and environmental conditions. Identify what are considered unacceptable weather conditions for roofing, and which governing regulations or insurance requirements will affect roofing system installation. 4. Document discussions in writing, including actions required, and distribute copy of report to each meeting participant. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Begin roofing installation when weather conditions are within acceptable limits according to manufacturer's installation instructions and warranty requirements. '1 03878505 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07525-2 08i05 t _f LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1.8 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Deliver materials to project site in manufacturer's unopened, sealed containers or packages, with manufacturer's labels intact. B. Store materials in weather -protected environment, clear of ground and moisture. 1.9 WARRANTIES A. Project Installation Guarantee: Submit written agreement signed by the installer and the contractor, guaranteeing to correct failures in product and workmanship for a 2-year period from date of substantial completion, without reducing or otherwise limiting other rights to correction which the owner may have under the contract documents. Failure is defined to include product failure which leads to interruption of a water -tight installation. Guarantee shall cover work of this section, including: 1. Roof membrane. 2. Base flashings. 3. Insulation. 4. Roof accessories. B. Manufacturer's Product Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard limited product warranty signed by the manufacturer's authorized official, guaranteeing to correct failures in product which may occur during the warranty period, without reducing or otherwise limiting any other rights to correction which the owner may have under the contract documents, for the following period of time: 1. 15 years after date of substantial completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Roof System: 1. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Celotex Corporation. b. Firestone Building Products Company. C. GAF Building Materials Corporation. d. Tamko Asphalt Products, Inc. e. Intec/Permaglas, Div. of U.S. Intec, Inc. 2. Specification: Tamko System 107 FR is used as a standard. Other systems must equal or exceed this product installation and other provisions in this section. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Base Sheet: Asphalt and polymer modifiers of styrene butadiene styrene (SBS) type, reinforced with non -woven polyester fabric with the following characteristics: 1. Thickness: 100 mils minimum. 2. Minimum Weight: .591b/sq ft minimum. 3. Sheet Width: 39.4 inches 4. Tensile Strength per ASTM 2523. a. Longitudinal:69% b. Transverse:65% 03878505 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07525-3 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 5. Elongation to Break: per ASTM 2523 a. Longitudinal: 130 lbs/in. b. Transverse: 129 lbs/in. 6. Aging: None when test to ARMA MB-08 7. Elasticity: 57 percent with full recovery without set when tested to ARMA MB-04. 8. Surfacing: Uncoated. B. Insulation 1. Type A Insulation: HH-I-1972/2, Polysiocyanurate rigid board, both faces finished with non -asphaltic glass mat, with the following characteristics: a. Board Density 2.0 lb/cu ft. b. Board Size 48x96 inch. C. Board Thickness minimum 1 inch. d. Thermal Conductivity K factor of 0.36 as determined by ASTM C177. e. Board Edges square 2. Type B Insulation: ASTM C208, Cellulose fiber roof insulating board, with the following characteristics: a. Board Density 1.0 lb/cu ft. b. Board Size 48x96 inch. C. Board Thickness 1/2 inch. d. Thermal Conductivity K factor of 0.38 as determined by ASTM C177. e. Board Edges square 3. Type C Insulation: ASTM C728, expanded perlite mineral aggregate board with the following characteristics: a. Board Density 1.5 lb/cu ft. b. Board Size 48x96 inch. C. Board Thickness 3/4 inch. d. Thermal Conductivity K factor of 0.36 as determined by ASTM C177. e. Board Edges square 4. Type D Insulation: ASTM C578, Type U or VIII (as required by roofing system manufacturer) expanded polystyrene board with the following characteristics: a. Board Desity minimum 1.15 lb/cu ft. b. Board Size 48x96 inch C. Board Thickness minimum 1 inch. d. Thermal Conductivity K factor of 0.36 as determined by ASTM C177. e. Board Edges square C. Membrane: Asphalt and polymer modifiers of styrene butadiene styrene (SBS) type, reinforced with non -woven polyester fabric with the following characteristics: 1. Thickness: 150 mils minimum. 2. Average Weight: 1.0 lb/sq ft minimum. 3. Sheet Width: 39.4 inches 4. Tensile Strength per ASTM 2523. a. Machine Direction: 181 lbf/in b. Cross Direction: 135 lbf/in 5. Elongation to Break: per ASTM 2523 a. Machine Direction: 53% b. Cross Direction: 59% 6. Tear Strength: a. Machine Direction: 185 lbs. b. Cross Direction: 139 lbs. 7. Aging: None when test to ARMA MB-08 03878505 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 075254 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 8. Elasticity: 57 percent with full recovery without set when tested to ARMA MB-04. 9. Surfacing: Manufacturer's standard white ceramic granular coating. D. Asphalt Bitumen: ASTM D312, Type III. E. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41. F. Plastic Cement: ASTM D2822 Type I, cutback asphalt type. G. Flashings 1. Flexible Base Flashings: Manufacturer's standard SBS type conforming to the same requirements at the membrane. 2. Counter Flashings: Metal, as specified in Section 07600. H. Accessories 1. Wood Cant: Treated wood, preformed to 45 degree angle. 2. Tapered Edge Strip. Asphalt impregnated wood fiberboard or perlite, 1 1/2 inches high x 18 inches wide x manufacturer's standard length. 3. Insulation Joint Tape: Asphalt treated glass fiber reinforced; 6 inches wide; self adhering. 4. Roofing Nails: Galvanized, hot dipped or non-ferrous type, size as required to suit application. 5. Fasteners: Appropriate for purpose intended and approved by system manufacturer; length required for thickness of material with metal washers. 6. Sealants: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. ZJ PART 3 - EXECUTION r 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work. B. Verify deck is supported and secured. C. Verify deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or projections. D. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice. Verify flutes of metal deck are clean and E. Ve fy pull-out force of existing gypsum deck to comply with manufacturer's requirement for ..i proposed fasteners. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Insulation 1. Install Type A or D (at Contractor's option with membrane manufacturer's approval) insulation, in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions. 2. Install insulation units in continuous application of roofing bitumen or insulation adhesive or mechanically attach per manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Mechanically fasten insulation units at roof perimeter to meet wind uplift requirements, but using not less than one fastener per 4 square feet and at least 2 fasteners per board. 4. Tape joints of Type D insulation in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions. 5. In full mopping of hot bitumen, install top constant thickness layer of either Type B or Type C (at Contractor's option with membrane manufacturer's approval) insulation with all joints staggered from joints in first layer of insulation by a minimum of 6 inches. 6. Out insulation to fit neatly to perimeter blocking and around penetrations through roof. 7. Lay boards with edges in moderate contact without forcing. 03878505 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07525-5 08/05 r' LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 8. Apply no more insulation that can be covered with membrane in same day. 9. Total insulation thickness to provide a minimum aged R-value of 20, complying with the International Energy Code, 2000. B. Membrane Application 1. Over Type B or C insulation, install base sheet in full mopping of hot bitumen. 2. Over base sheet, install membrane in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Apply membrane; lap and seal edges and ends permanently waterproof. 4. Apply membrane smooth, free from air pockets, wrinkles, or tears. Ensure full bond of membrane to substrate. 5. Extend membrane up cant strips and minimum of 8 inches onto vertical surfaces or as otherwise detailed. 6. Mop and seal membrane around roof protrusions and penetrations. 7. Provide waterproof cut-off to membrane at end of day's operation. Remove cut-off before resuming roofing. C. Flashings and Accessories 1. Apply flexible sheet base flashings to seal membrane to vertical elements. 2. Secure to substrate as recommended by membrane manufacturer. 3. Seal flashings and flanges of items penetrating or protruding through the membrane. 4. Stripping: Do not strip metal items heavier than 24 gage sheet steel, 16-oz copper or 0.040-inch aluminum. Do not strip metal items greater than 10 feet in length. a. Set metal flange in a full bed of roofing cement. Prime metal surface to receive stripping. b. Install stripping as specified for fleshings above, except for nailing requirements. I) Extend modified bituminous stripping a minimum of 6 inches onto roof membrane. D. Surfacing 1. Apply granular surfacing, matching membrane surfacing, as recommended by manufacturer to completely cover all lap joints in membrane. E. Roof Walkway Pads 1. At locations indicated on the drawings, install second layer of membrane for walkway pads. 2. Apply granular membrane surfacing as recommended by manufacturer to completely cover all edges at walkway pads. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. B. Correct identified defects or irregularities. 3.4 CLEANING A. 1� In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by work of this section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and comply with their documented instructions. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this section. 03878505 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07525-6 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect building surfaces against damage from roofing work. B. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces. END OF SECTION 03879505 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 08105 07525-7 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 07600 SHEET METAL PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Coping flashings. B. Fascias and sealant pockets. C. Sill and lintel flashings. D. Thm-wall scupper and conductor head. E. Flashing receiver and cap flashing over bituminous, base flashings. F. Counterflashings for roof hatches. G. Counterflashings at roof mounted equipment and vent stacks. H. Gutters and downspouts. I. Sheet metal splash pans. J. Concrete splash blocks. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Masonry flashing, placement of flashing receivers and substrate construction. B. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood milers and substrate construction. C. Section 07410 - Manufactured Metal Roof Panels: Related flashings, gutters and downspouts. D. Section 07525 - Modified Bituminous Sheet Roofing: Roofing system. E. Section 07710 - Roof Specialties and Accessories: Metal Curbs. F. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. G. Section 08415 - Aluminum Storefront: Sill flashings associated with doors and storefronts. H. Section 08520 - Aluminum Windows: Sill flashings associated with windows. I. Section 10200 - Louvers and Vents: Sill flashings associated with louvers. J. Division 15 Section: Roof curbs for mechanical equipment. K. Division 15 Section: Flashing sleeves and collars for mechanical items protruding through roofing membrane. L. Division 15 Section: Flashing sleeves and collars for plumbing items protruding through roofing membrane. M. Division 16 Section: Roof curbs for electrical equipment. N. Division 16 Section: Flashing sleeves and collars for electrical items protruding through roofing membrane. 1.4 REFERENCES A. AA DAF - 45 - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. B. AAMA 603.8 - Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Extruded Aluminum. 03878505 SHEET METAL 07600 - 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 C. AAMA 605.2 - Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels. D. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. E. ASTM A653/A653M - Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated by the Hot -Dip Process. F. ATM A755/A755M - Steel Sheet, Metallic coated by the Hot -Dip Process and Prepainted by the Coil -Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building Products. G. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal. H. ASTM B486 - Paste Solder. I. ASTM B749 - Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products. J. ASTM C728 - Perlite Thermal Insulation Board K. ASTM D226 - Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. L. ASTM D4586 - Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos Free. M. NRCA (National Roofing Contractors Association) - Roofing Manual. N. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profiles, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details. B. Product Data: Submit data on manufactured components metal types, finishes, and characteristics. C. Samples: Submit one full size sample illustrating typical external coping comer, fabrication, material and finish. D. Submit two samples 2 x 3 inch in size illustrating metal finish color. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with AISI, SMACNA and NRCA standard details and requirements. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Fabricator and Installer: Company specializing in sheet metal flashing work with five years documented experience. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Stack preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. C. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 0 103 9. B. Coordinate with the work of Section 04200 for installing flashing receivers. C. Coordinate the work with downspout discharge pipe inlet. 03878505 SHEET METAL 07600 - 2 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Preformed Metal and Accessories 1. Cheney Flashing Co.; 2. Keystone Flashing Co;. 3. Metal -Era Inc; Waukesha, Wl. B. Prefinished Metal 1. MBCI - Grand Prairie, Texas 2. AEP/Span Metals Corp., Dallas, Texas 3. Alumax Corp., Mesquite, Texas C. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.2 SHEET MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, G90 (Z275) zinc coating; thickness as indicated in schedule at end of this section. B. Pre -Finished Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A755/A755M using ASTM A653/A653M, G90 (Z275) zinc coated sheet; thickness as indicated in schedule at end of this section, pre -coated with PVDF (polyvinylidene fluoride) coating. C. Lead: ASTM B749, 2.5 lb/sq ft, 0.039 inch thick. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Same material and finish as flashing metal, with soft neoprene washers. B. Underlayment: ASTM D226, No. 15 or No. 30 asphalt saturated roofing felt as indicated. C. Protective Backing Paint: Bituminous type as specified in Section 09900. D. Sealant: Specified in Section 07900. E. Bedding Compound: Rubber -asphalt type. F. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type II. G. Gutter Supports: Brackets and straps. H. Downspout Supports: Brackets of same material as gutter and downspout. I. Solder: ASTM B32; type suitable for application and material being soldered. J. Touch-up Paint: To match factory finish. 2.4 COMPONENTS A. Splash Blocks: Precast concrete type, of size and profiles indicated; minimum 3000 psi at 28 days, with minimum 5 percent air entrainment complying with requirements of Section 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE. B. Tapered Edge Strip: ASTM C728; minimum 2 inch thick, tapered to match coping flashing profile, same width as parapet. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General 1. Fabricate sheet metal items in accordance with SMACN . details indicated in paragraph SCHEDULE at the end of this section unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. 2. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. 03878505 SHEET METAL 07600 - 3 08/05 t; LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 3. Fabricate cleats of same material as sheet, minimum 2 inches wide, interlockable with sheet. 4. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. 5. Fabricate with required connection pieces. 6. Hem exposed edges on underside 2 inch; miter and seam comers. 7. Form material with flat lock seams. 8. Solder shop formed galvanized steel metal joints. After soldering, remove flux. Wipe and wash solder joints clean. Weather seal joints. 9. Fabricate comers from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; solder for rigidity, seal with sealant. 10. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 2 inch and hemmed to form drip. B. Fabricate all exposed sheet metal from pre -finished galvanized steel sheet. C. Fabricate all concealed sheet metal and sheet metal hidden from normal view from galvanized steel. D. Splash Pans 1. ASTM A653, galvanized steel, formed to 12 x 18 inches size; rolled sides of 2 inch high for inverted pan placement. E. Sealant Pans 1. ASTM A653, galvanized steel, formed with minimum 2 inch horizontal distance from penetrating item, with 3 inch upstand, and 4 inch flanges. 2. Form top edge with continuous 45 degree backbend, minimum 1/4 inch long, facing toward inside of pan. F. Gutters 1. Fabricate gutter to profile indicated in schedule at end of this section. 2. Provide expansion joint at maximum 40 feet on center unless otherwise indicate on drawings. 3. Form metal and seal watertight. 4. Size: 4 inch width x 4 inch front height. 5. Accessories: Profile to suit gutters and downspouts. G. Downspouts 1. Fabricate downspouts to profile indicated in schedule at end of this section. 2. Fabricate bottom or downspout with 45 degree turn -out with 3 inch long top face. 3. Form metal and seal watertight. 4. Downspout Size: 4 inch wide x 4 inch deep. 5. Accessories: Profile to suit gutters and downspouts. H. Coping Flashings 1. Fabricate cap flashing to profile indicated in schedule at end of this section. 2. Provide minimum 4 inch vertical leg on front side with continuous cleat. 3. Provide minimum 3 inch vertical leg on back side. 4. Fabricate inside and outside comers with continuously factory mechanically seamed and sealed joints. Provide finish to match remainder of cap flashing. 2.6 FINISH A. Field painting of expose metal: As specified in section 09900 - PAINTING. B. Prefinished Metal: Fluoropolymer coating produced with Kynar-500 resin complying with the following: 1. Salt Spray Test 03878505 SHEET METAL 07600 - 4 ' 08/05 _t LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 a. Withstand salt spray test for a minimum of 1000 hours in accordance with ASTM B 117, including scribe requirement in test. b. Receive a rating of 10, no blistering, as determined by ASTM D 714 immediately upon removal ofpanel from test, and rating of 7,1/16-inch failure at scribe, as determined by ASTM D 1654. 2. Formability Test: No evidence of fracturing to naked eye when subjected to a 180-degree bend over a 3/8-inch diameter mandrel in accordance with ASTM D 522. 3. 2000 Hour Accelerated Weathering Requirements a. Test Conformance: ASTM G 23 using a Type D apparatus. b. No cracking, peeling, blistering, loss of adhesion of protective coating, or corrosion of base metal. C. Loss of Adhesion: Protective coating that can be readily removed from base metal with tape in accordance with ASTM D 3359, Test Method B. d. Chalking: Not greater than No. 8 rating in accordance with ASTM D 4214 test procedures. e. Color Change: Maximum 2 NBS units in accordance with ASTM D 4214 and ASTM D 2244 test procedures. 4. Humidity Test: No signs of blistering, cracking, creepage or corrosion when scored panel subjected to a humidity cabinet test in accordance with ASTM D 2247 for 1000 hours. 5. Impact Resistance: Withstand direct and reverse impact in accordance with ASTM D 2794 equal to 1.5 times metal thickness in mils, expressed in inch -pounds, with no loss of adhesion. 6. Abrasion Resistance Test: Withstand a minimum of 80 liters of sand before appearance of base metal when subjected to falling sand test in accordance with ASTM D 968. 7. Pollution Resistance: No visual effects when immersion tested in a 10 percent hydrochloric acid solution for 24 hours in accordance with ASTM D 1308. 8. Color a. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard line. C. Exposed Fasteners: Factory finished to match color of item being fastened. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in place, and nailing strips located. B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Conform to details on drawings and details included in the AISI, CDA, SMACNA and NRCA manual. B. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15. C. Fill back of cap flashing with plastic roofing cement. 03878505 SHEET METAL 07600 - 5 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 D. Backbed lap joints of flashings in horizontal position. } E. Insert cap flashing into flashing receiver to form tight fit. Bend top of flashing receiver down over cap flashing without hammer marks, dents or other visual distractions. F. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted. G. Coping Flashing 1. Install with front edge engaged in continuous cleat. 2. Fasten back edge to parapet substrate with hex head washered fasteners. H. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. I. Fit flashings tight in place. J. Make comers square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. K. Seal metal joints watertight. L. Secure gutters and downspouts in place using concealed fasteners. M. Set splash pans under downspouts draining from a higher to lower roof area. Set in place with plastic cement. N. Set concrete splash blocks under downspouts where indicated on drawings. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. B. Inspection will involve surveillance of work during installation to ascertain compliance with specified requirements. 3.5 SCHEDULE A. Metal Fabrications ITEM SMACNA FIGURE GAGE 1. Gutter a. Gutter Profile 1-2 A 24 b. Expansion Joint 1-7 24 C. Straps 1-18A 24 d. Screens 1-24 D e. Outlet Tube 1-24 C 24 2. Conductor Head 1-25 B 24 3. Scupper 1-26 24 4. Downspouts a. Downspout 1-32 B Smooth surface 26 b. Connections 1-33 B Detail 1 26 5. Splash Pan 1-36 24 6. Counter Flashing a. In Face Brick 4-3 A 24 7. Cap Flashing a. In Face Brick/CMU 4-3 A 24 8. Vent Pipe Flashing 4-14 B 2.5# lead 9. Coping Flashing a. Form 3-4 A 24 b. Anchorage 3-7 A 24 C. Joint Table 3-1, Type J2 03878505 SHEET METAL 07600 - 6 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 END OF SECTION 03878505 SHEET METAL 07600-7 08/05 No Text LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 07700 ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manufactured curbs. 2. Pre -manufactured pipe flashings. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data. B. Shop Drawings. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 526 or A 527, minimum G90 coating. B. Hot -Dip Galvanizing (fabricated products and hardware): ASTM A 123. C. Fasteners: 1. For attachment of roof accessories to supporting structure: Hot -dip galvanized zinc plated or cadmium plated steel, or stainless steel. 2. For steel and galvanized steel: Hot -dip galvanized steel. D. Steel for Structural Supports and Reinforcements: ASTM A 36, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 123. E. Sealant: Single- or multi -component urethane as specified in Division 7 section on sealants. 2.2 MANUFACTURED CURBS A. Manufacturer: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: 1. Custom Curb, Inc. 2. Louvers & Dampers, Inc. 3. The Pate Company. 4. Penn Ventilator Company, Inc. 5. S & L Manufacturing Company. 6. ThyCurb Fabricating Division/Thybar Corporation. 7. Uni-Curb, Inc. 8. Vent Products Company, Inc. B. Manufactured Curbs: Fabricate from galvanized steel sheet, minimum 18 gage, with seams fully welded, ground smooth, and painted with zinc -rich primer. Engineer units to support superimposed loads. 1. Style: Vertical sides (no cant). 03878505 ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES 07700 - 1 08/05 PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS - GENERAL A. General: Provide only products which are recommended and approved by their manufacturer for the specific use to which they are put and which comply with all requirements of the contract documents. 1. Provide only materials which are compatible with each other and with joint substrates. 2. Colors of exposed sealers: As selected by the architect from manufacturer's standard colors. B. Manufacturers: Products of the manufacturers listed, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents will be among those considered acceptable. 1. Urethane sealants: a. Bostik Inc. b. Mameco International, Inc. IJ C. Pecora Corporation. d. Products Research & Chemical Corporation. l e. Sika Corporation. f. Sonneborn Building Products Division/ChemRex, Inc. g. Tremco, Inc. h. W. R. Meadows, Inc. 1 2. Acrylic solvent -release sealants: a. Pecora Corporation. b. Koch Protective Treatments, Inc. ? C. Tremco, Inc. 3. Acrylic -latex emulsion sealant: a. Bostik Inc. k b. Pecora Corporation. ;. C. Sonneborn Building Products Division/ChemRex, Inc. 2.2 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealants - General: Chemically curing elastomeric sealants of types indicated, complying with ASTM C 920, including specific Type, Grade, Class, and Uses indicated, as well as all other requirements specified. 1. Where movement capability exceeding that measured by ASTM C 920 is specified, sealant shall withstand the total movement indicated while remaining in compliance with the other requirements specified, when tested in accord with ASTM C 719, with base joint width measured at the time of application. 2. For M-type substrates: Comply with requirements for Use M. 3. For G-type substrates: Comply with requirements for Use G. 4. For A -type substrates: Comply with requirements for Use A. 5. For O-type substrates: Comply with requirements for Use M (minimum) and Use O for the particular substrate. B. Two -Part Nonsag Low -Modulus Urethane Sealant: Type M, Grade ITS, Class 25, Use NTT, plus movement capability of 50 percent in both extension and compression. C. Nonsag Urethane Sealant for Use T: Type S or M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use T. D. One -Part Nonsag Urethane Sealant: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NTT. E. One -Part Nonsag Low -Modulus Urethane Sealant: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, plus movement capability of 50 percent in both extension and compression. 03878505 JOINT SEALERS 07900-2 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 F. Urethane Sealant for Water Immersion: One- or two-part urethane, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, specifically recommended by the manufacturer for sealing j oints immersed continuously in water. 2.3 PAVING JOINT SEALANTS A. Two -Part Urethane Paving Sealant: Pourable, chemically curing (cold -applied) complying with FS SS-S-200: 1. Composition: Urethane, with minimum movement capability of plus or minus 12'/z percent. 2. Composition: Bitumen modified polymer; also complying with ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, Use T. 3. Composition: Bitumen modified urethane. 2.4 SOLVENT -RELEASE -CURING SEALANTS A. Acrylic Sealant: Nonsag, one -part, solvent -release -curing; complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Use NT, with the following exceptions: 1. Weight loss: 15 percent, maximum. 2. Movement capability: 7-1/2 percent in both extension and compression, minimum. 2.5 LATEX SEALANTS A. Acrylic -Latex Emulsion Sealant: One -part, nonsag, mildew -resistant, paintable; complying with ASTM C 834. 2.6 SEALANT BACKERS A. Backers - General: Nonstaining; recommended or approved by sealant manufacturer for specific use. PART 3-EXECUTION A. Do not begin joint sealer work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to keep primers and sealers off of adjacent surfaces which would be damaged by contact or by cleanup. Remove tape as soon as practical. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with sealer manufacturers' installation instructions and recommendations, except where more restrictive requirements are specified. 03878505 08105 JOINT SEALERS 07900-3 11 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 3.4 SCHEDULE OF JOINT SEALERS A. Exterior Joints for Which No Other Sealer Is Indicated: 1. Use one of the following sealants: a. Two-part nonsag low -modulus urethane sealant. b. One -part nonsag urethane sealant. C. One -part nonsag low -modulus urethane sealant. 2. Backer: Backer rod. 3. Joint shape: Concave joint configuration. B. Interior Joints for Which No Other Sealer Is Indicated: 1. Use one of the following sealants: a. Acrylic -emulsion latex sealant. 2. Backer: Backer rod. 3. Joint shape: Concave joint configuration. C. Exterior Joints Well Protected from Weather and Not Subject to Movement: 1. Use one of the following sealants: a. Acrylic sealant. 2. Backer: Backer rod. D. Vehicular Paving Joints, Not Over 1-1/2 Percent Slope: 1. Use one of the following sealants: a. Two-part cold -applied urethane paving sealant. 2. Use bond -breaker tape. 3. Backer: Joint filler specified elsewhere. E. Interior Floor Joints and Pedestrian Paving Joints, Less than 1-1/2 Percent Slope: 1. Use one of the following sealants: a. Two-part nonsag urethane sealant for Use T. 2. Backer: Backer rod. 3. Joint shape: Flush joint configuration. END OF SECTION 03878505 JOINT SEALERS 08/05 ao z 0 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 B. Fire Resistive Ratings 1. L1= 20 min. 2. L2 = 45 min. 3. L3 = 90 min. 03878505 DOOR SCHEDULE 08000 - 2 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 C. Door Schedule Door Door Frame Frame Frame Details Fir Mark PR Size Type Const Glaz Type Const Size Head Jamb Sill Remarks 1 01 24-0 x 14-0 4 OH Al - - - A2/301 C5/A502 D1/A501 1 01A 24-0 x 14-0 4 OH Al - - A2/A301 C5/A502 D1/A501 1 01B 3-0 x 7-0 x 1 3/4 2 HM HM-1 HM 5 7/8 Al/A501 D2/A501 A3/A501 1 02 3-0 x 7-0 x 1 3/4 1 HM S1 11M-1 HM 5 7/8 B1/A501 B1/A501 SIM C2/A502 Ll 1 04 3-0 x 7-0 x 1 314 2 SCTF HM-1 HM 5 7/8 Cl/A501 Cl/A501 D2/A502 1 05 3-0 x 7-0 x 1 3/4 3 AL 12 AL-1 AL 4 1/2 D5/A503 S1M D5/A503 A5/A503 I 1 06 3-0 x 7-0 x 1 3/4 1 SCTF L1 HM-1 HM 5 7/8 Cl/A501 C1/A501 D2/A502 1 ' 07 3-0 x 7-0 x 1 3/4 2 SCTF HM-1 HM 5 7/8 C1/A501 C1/A501 D2/A502 1 07A 3-0 x 7-0 x 1 3/4 1 HM S1 HM.-1 HM 5 7/8 B1/A501 B1/A501 Sim C2/A502 L1 i 07B 3-0 x 7-0 x 1314 2 HM HM-1 HM 5 7/8 AVA501 D2/A501 ANA501 1 08 2-0 x 7-0 x 1 3/4 2 SCTF HM-1 HM 5 7/8 C1/A501 Cl/A501 - 1 09 3-0 x 7-0 x 1 3/4 2 SCTF HM-1 HM 5 7/8 C1/A501 C1/A501 - 1 11 • 3-0 x 7-0 x 1 3/4 2 HM HM-1 HM 5 7/8 Al/A501 D2/A501 A3/A501 1 • 12 • 3-0 x 7-0 x 1 3/4 2 HM HM-1 HM 5 7/8 B1/A501 B1/A501 SIM C2/A502 Ll 1 14 3-0 x 7-0 x 1 3/4 2 HM HM-1 HM 5 7/8 B1/A501 B1/A501 SiM C2/A502 L1 1 17 3-0 x 7-0 x 1 3/4 2 HM HM-1 HM 5 7/8 B1/A501 BI/A501 SIM C2/A502 L1 1 20 3-0 x 7-0 x 1 3/4 2 SCTF HM-1 HM 5 7/8 C1/A501 C1/A501 - 1 22 3-0 x 7-0 x 1 3/4 1 HM SI HM-1 HM 5 7/8 B1/A501 B1/A501 SIM C2/A502 Ll 1 30 2-0 x 7-0 x 13/4 1 2 03878505 DOOR SCHEDULE 08000 - 3 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION .; 03878505 DOOR SCHEDULE 08000 - 4 `-- 1 08/05 ll L� LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standard steel doors and frames. 2. Assemblies for fire -rated openings. 3. Insulated doors. 1.3 REFERENCES A. SDI 100-1991-- Recommended Specifications: Standard Steel Doors and Frames; Steel Door Institute; 1991. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's printed product information indicating compliance with specified requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings for fabrication and installation of specified items, coordinated with opening schedule included in contract documents. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standard: Comply with SDI 100. B. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: In compliance with NFPA 80 and labeled per ASTM E 152 by agency acceptable to governing authorities. C. Coordination: Transmit copy of final shop drawings to wood door manufacturer to allow prefitting of wood doors to steel frames. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A- Deliver products in crates or cartons suitable for storage at the site. 03878505 08/05 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 1 V__; LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 ? 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: 1. Allied Steel Products, Inc. 2. Amweld Building Products, Inc. 3. Benchmark Commercial Door Products. 4. Ceco Door Products, a Division of United Dominion. 5, Copco Door Company. 6. Curries Company/Essex Industries, Inc. 7. Kewanee Corporation. 8. Mesker Door, Inc. 9. Pioneer Industries Division/CORE Industries, Inc. 10. Premier Products. 11. Republic Builders Products Division/DESCO. 12. Steelcraft Manufacturing Company/Masco Industries. 13. Trussbilt, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: 1. Regardless of whether or not the DOOR SCHEDULE has every door opening and component scheduled for each opening, provide all necessary components required to make every opening functional based on scheduled doors and frames for similar openings and the referenced codes. B. Steel Sheets, Hot -Rolled: ASTM A 569 and ASTM A 568, commercial quality, pickled and oiled. C. Steel Sheets, Cold -Rolled: ASTM A 366 and ASTM A 568, commercial quality, matte finish exposed, oiled. D. Steel Sheets, Galvanized: ASTM A 526 and ASTM A 525, commercial quality, A60 zinc -iron or G60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. E. Steel Sheets, Galvanized: ASTM A 591, electrolytic zinc -coated, Class A, mill phosphatized. F. Anchorages: Galvanized steel, minimum 18 gage. G. Fasteners and Inserts: Units standard with manufacturer. 1. Exterior walls: ASTM A 153, hot -dip galvanized, Class C or D. H. Paint: 1. Primer: Manufacturer's standard rust -inhibitive coating, suitable to receive finish coatings specified. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Exposed Door Faces: Fabricate from cold -rolled steel. B. Frames: Fabricate from cold -rolled or hot -rolled steel. C. Exterior Doors: Fabricate from galvanized steel. D. Seal top and bottom edges integrally with door construction, or use minimum 16 gage steel channels to form flush closure. E. Exterior Frames: Fabricate from galvanized steel. U, LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 F. Exposed Screws and Bolts: Where required, provide only countersunk, flat Phillips -head fasteners. G. Insulated Assemblies: At locations scheduled, provide insulating door and frame assemblies which have been tested in accordance with ASTM C 236 for thermal resistance. 1. R-value: Rl I minimum complying with the International Energy Code, 2000. H. Hardware Preparation: Comply with DIM Al 15 series specifications. 1. Locations: Comply with final shop drawings. I. Shop Painting: 1. Primer: Apply primer evenly to achieve full protection of all exposed surfaces. 2.4 STEEL DOORS A. General: Fabricate steel doors in accordance with requirements of SDI 100. B. Interior Doors: 1. Grade Il - Heavy -Duty, Model 2. - Full Flush. C. Exterior Doors: 1. Grade III - Extra Heavy -Duty, Model 2. - Full Flush. 2.5 STEEL FRAMES A. General: Fabricate steel frames for scheduled openings, in styles and profiles as shown, using concealed fasteners. 1. Minimum thickness: 16 gage interior; 14 gage exterior. 2. Construction: Mitered and welded comers. B. Guards: Weld protective covers to back of hardware openings at locations where grout, plaster, or other materials might interfere RRth hardware operation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION i A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories to comply with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Comply with detailed installation requirements of final shop drawings. B. Frame Installation: 1. General: Adhere to provisions of SDI 105. 1 2. Anchors: Provide 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels and minimum 18 gage base anchors. 3. Fire -rated openings: Comply with requirements of NFPA 80. C. Door Installation: 1. General: Comply with requirements and clearances specified in SDI 100. 2. Fire -rated doors: Comply with NFPA 80 requirements and clearances. 3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Touch -Up: At locations where primer has been abraded or minor rusting has occurred, sand smooth and spray -apply compatible primer. B. Final Operating Adjustments: Check hardware at all openings for proper operation of doors, making final corrections as required to assure that work of this section is complete and undamaged. 03878505 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 3 09105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 2. Certify that doors meet or exceed adhesive bond test of NWWDA T.M.-6. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with NWVVDA Industry Standard I.S.1-A for Flush Wood Doors. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire Door Construction: Conform to ASTM E152 or NFPA 252. B. Installed Fire Rated Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as scheduled. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Protect doors with manufacturer's standard sealed resilient packaging. C. Handle doors with clean hands or while wearing clean gloves. D. Store doors in flat position, raised above floor, not in damp or wet areas or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. E. Seal top and bottom edges if stored more than one week Break seal on -site to permit ventilation. 1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.11 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. B. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation. 1.12 NVARRANTY A. Provide warranty under provisions of Section 01700 to the following term: 1. Interior Doors: a. Solid Core Doors: Life of installation. b. Hollow Core Doors: 2 years. B. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction. 03878505 SOLID CORE FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 2 08/05 A LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 F. Exposed Screws and Bolts: Where required, provide only countersunk, flat Phillips -head fasteners. G. Insulated Assemblies: At locations scheduled, provide insulating door and frame assemblies which have been tested in accordance with ASTM C 236 for thermal resistance. 1. R-value: RI 1 minimum complying with the International Energy Code, 2000. H. Hardware Preparation: Comply with DHI Al15 series specifications. 1. Locations: Comply with final shop drawings. I. Shop Painting: 1. Primer: Apply primer evenly to achieve full protection of all exposed surfaces. 2.4 STEEL DOORS A. General: Fabricate steel doors in accordance with requirements of SDI 100. B. Interior Doors: 1. Grade Il - Heavy -Duty, Model 2. - Full Flush. C. Exterior Doors: 1. Grade III - Extra Heavy -Duty, Model 2. - Full Flush. 2.5 STEEL FRAMES A. General: Fabricate steel frames for scheduled openings, in styles and profiles as shown, using concealed fasteners. 1. Minimum thickness: 16 gage interior; 14 gage exterior. 2. Construction: Mitered and welded comers. B. Guards: Weld protective covers to back of hardware openings at locations where grout, plaster, or other materials might interfere with hardware operation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories to comply with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Comply with detailed installation requirements of final shop drawings. B. Frame Installation: 1. General: Adhere to provisions of SDI 105. 2. Anchors: Provide 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels and minimum 18 gage base anchors. 3. Fire -rated openings: Comply with requirements of NFPA 80. C. Door Installation: 1. General: Comply with requirements and clearances specified in SDI 100. 2. Fire -rated doors: Comply with NFPA 80 requirements and clearances. 3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Touch -Up: At locations where primer has been abraded or minor rusting has occurred, sand smooth and spray -apply compatible primer. B. Final Operating Adjustments: Check hardware at all openings for proper operation of doors, making final corrections as required to assure that work of this section is complete and undamaged. 03878505 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 3 n. 09105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO, 8 END OF SECTION 03878505 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 4 O8/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 08211 SOLID CORE FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non -rated and fire rated flush wood doors to receive transparent finish. B. Cut outs for glass panels. C. Metal door lite surround frames. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06400 - Architectural Woodwork: Wood door frames. B. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames: Steel doors and frames. C. Section 08710 - Door Hardware. D. Section 08800 - Glazing. E. Section 09900 - Painting: Site finishing doors. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI A135.4 - Basic Hardboard. B. ANSI/HPMA HP - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. C. ASTM El52 - Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. D. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. E. NFPA 252 - Standard Method of Fire Tests for Door Assemblies. F. NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door Association. G. Warnock -Hersey - Certification Listings for fire doors. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1. Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts require(L special beveling, special blocking for hardware, and identify cutouts for glazing. 2. Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics and factory machining criteria. B. Samples 1. Submit two samples of door construction, 12 x 12 inch in size cut from top comer of door. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions 1. Indicate special installation instructions. D. Manufacturer's Certificates 1. Certify that doors meet or exceed specified requirements and requirements ofNT)A7VdDA standards referenced. 03878505 SOLID CORE FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION' NO. 8 2. Certify that doors meet or exceed adhesive bond test of NTWWDA T.M.-6. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with NWWDA Industry Standard I.S.1-A for Flush Wood Doors 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire Door Construction: Conform to ASTM E152 or NFPA 252. B. Installed Fire Rated Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as scheduled. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Protect doors with manufacturer's standard sealed resilient packaging. C. Handle doors with clean hands or while wearing clean gloves. D. Store doors in flat position, raised above floor, not in damp or wet areas or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. E. Seal top and bottom edges if stored more than one week. Break seal on -site to permit ventilation. 1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.11 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. B. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Provide warranty under provisions of Section 01700 to the following term: 1. Interior Doors: a. Solid Core Doors: Life of installation. b. Hollow Core Doors: 2 years. B. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction. 03878505 SOLID CORE FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 2 ` 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SOLID CORE WOOD -FACED DOORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. b. Buell Door Company. C. Benton Doors, Inc. d. Eggers Industries. e. Fenestra Corporation. f. G1enMar Door Manufacturing Company. g. Graham Manufacturing Corporation. h. Haley Brothers, Inc. i. Ipik Door Company, Inc. j. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc. k. Vancouver Door, Inc. 1. VT Industries, Inc. In. Weyerhaeuser Company. B. Materials 1. Lumber: a. Transparent Finish: NHLA first grade, Red Oak, plain sawn, kiln dried to maximum 10 percent moisture content. 2. Cores a. Solid Core 1) Non -Fire Rated: ANSI 208.1, grade 1-OD2 particleboard, minimum 40 pounds per cubic foot density. 2) Fire Rated (a) 20 Minute Rated: ANSI 208.1, LD2 fire retardant treated particleboard, minimum 40 punds per cubic foot density. (b) 3/4 and 12 Hour Rated: Manufacturer's standard mineral core. b. Hollow Core: Manufacturer's standard phenolic impregnated honeycomb corrugated fiberboard. 3. Veneers a. Transparent Finish:.050 inch thick, NWWDA, Custom, A grade, Red Oak species wood, plain sliced. 4. Glazing Stops a. Rolled steel channel shape as detailed, butted corners; prepared for countersink style screws. 5. Adhesives a. Interior Doors: Type II - water resistant. 2.2 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Regardless of whether or not the DOOR SCHEDULE has every door at every opening scheduled, provide all components required to make every door opening functional based on scheduled doors for similar openings and the referenced codes. 03878505 SOLID CORE FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 3 08/05 3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1) Control station enclosure: Also, provide remote control operation for each door. Supply 6 dual frequency remote controls, with each door set to a unique frequency. e. Automatic reversing device: Pneumatic bottom bar switch. 12. Vision panels: Double -strength glass. 13. Accessories: a. Head and jamb weatherstripping. b. Infra -red motion stop sensor on each side of each door. 14. Roll -up drum - heavy duty, high performance. 2.4 COMPONENTS A. Tracks: 1. Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel tracks and accessories designed to accommodate door size, weight, and clearances indicated from adjacent construction. 2. Accessories: Provide brackets and reinforcing for rigid support ofroller guides, for door type and size. 3. Fabricate vertical track sections with slots for door drop safety device at 2 inches on center. 4. Tilt tracks from vertical to achieve closure at jambs when sectional door is closed. Weld or bolt to track supports. B. Track Support: 1. Support tracks with manufacturer's standard anchors and brackets for size and weight of door, to provide strength and rigidity, and smooth and continuous operation. 2. Wall support: Provide continuous steel plate and angle anchored to wall and welded to track in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Overhead support: Provide continuous angle welded to inclined tracks and braced laterally to overhead structural members at each end of tracks. C. Counterbalancing Mechanisms: 1. Torsion spring: a. Tempered steel torsion springs mounted on and secured to a hardened tubular steel shaft, with cable drums attached at each end of shaft. b. Cable drums: Grooved cast aluminum or gray iron castings, wrapped with cable attached to door, heavy duty, high performance. C. Counterbalance supports: One ball -bearing bracket at each end of shaft and at midpoint, for shafts up to 16 feet long. Provide two additional brackets at third points to support shafts over 16 feet long. d. Emergency door stop: Spring -loaded steel or bronze cam secured to bottom door rollers at each track. e. Cushion door stop: Spring bumper attached at end of each horizontal track. D. Electric Door Operators: 1. Manufacturer's standard electric operator size as indicated, complete with gear reduction mechanism and control devices. 2. Emergency disconnect: Provide mechanism to allow transfer to manual hand chain operation, with safety device to lock out use of motor when chain is in use. 3. Door operator type: a. Hoist type, with worm and gear reduction drive, clutch disconnect and auxiliary chain hoist. 4. Electric motors: 03878505 STEEL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08364 - 4 08105 i 1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 a. Reversible, constant duty, Class A insulated motor protected against overload; with capacity to move door at rate of 2/3 foot to 1 foot per second. b. Totally enclosed, nonventilated type motor, complying with NEMA MG 1; controller with enclosure of type indicated, complying with NEMA ICS 6. 5. Control station: a. Provide control stations of type indicated complete with enclosure complying with NEMA ICS 6. 6. Remote Control Station: 2-1020 digital eye receiver with 6-two channel transmitters. E. Automatic Reversing Control: 1. Automatic safety switch: Complying with UL 325, installed within neoprene or rubber astragal located along full width of door bottom. 2. Safety switch type: Pneumatic; where indicated. F. Weather Seals: 1. Continuous rubber, neoprene, or flexible vinyl adjustable weatherstrip gasket at head and jambs of overhead door, for weathertight installation. G. Vision Panels: 1. Provide manufacturer's standard insulated, tinted vision panels of materials indicated, located where shown on the drawings. 2. Metal framed doors: Install vision panels with manufacturer's standard dry glazing gasket. 3. Glazing stops: Removable; made from door section frame material. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Hardware: 1. Extra heavy duty hardware, made from noncorrosive metal and provided with noncorrosive fasteners, as required for door type. 2. Hinges: a. Heavy steel hinges at each end and intermediate stile, of type recommended by manufacturer for size of overhead door. b. Thru-bolt hinges to door sections at stiles and rails using lock washers and nuts, or rivets where access to nuts is not available. C. Provide manufacturer's recommended double hinges for doors exceeding 16 feet in width. 3. Rollers: a. Heavy duty ball -bearing rollers, in steel races. Mount rollers with projections from door surface as required to suit slope of track. b. Double hinges: Install roller shaft through both hinges. C. Roller tires: Type indicated; 3-inch diameter tires for 3-inch track, 2-inch diameter tires for 2-inch track; track size as recommended by door manufacturer for required door size. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Steel Door Sections: 1. Fabricate from galvanized steel sheet, maximum 24-inch-high section, nominal 2 inches deep, and in profile indicated on the drawings. 2. Section end closures and reinforcing: Provide 16 gage galvanized steel channel end closures, and intermediate 16 gage channel reinforcing at 48 inches on center, maximum along interior surface of section. 03878505 STEEL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08364 - 5 09105 �.d LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 3. Bottom section reinforcements: Continuous channel or angle matching section profile. 4. Section reinforcing: Continuous horizontal and diagonal steel reinforcing, as necessary to comply with wind loading performance criteria. B. Insulation: 1. Type: Manufacturer's standard polyurethane foam insulation. 2. Conceal insulation with manufacturer's standard interior steel facing sheet. C. Factory Finishing: 1. Steel door sections: a. Pretreatment: Clean zinc -coated steel and apply zinc phosphate conversion coat. b. Factory paint system: Apply prime coats to interior and exterior surfaces of door faces. PART 3 - EXECLTTf©N 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Examine openings to receive sectional overhead doors for conditions that will prohibit proper installation. Correct unacceptable conditions before start of installation. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare surfaces at openings where sectional overhead doors will be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install complete overhead door assembly in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Anchor vertical tracks to rough opening perimeter at minimum 24 inches on center. C. Horizontal Tracks: Support from overhead framing with welded or bolted steel angles or channels, including diagonal bracing as necessary for secure installation. D. Install digital eye receivers at push button control stations. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. After door installation is complete, examine door performance, test operation, and adjust installation to provide smooth and quiet operation. B. Adjust door operators for proper performance in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean all door surfaces, tracks, springs, and operators, before final acceptance. 3.6 PROTECTION A. After installation and until final acceptance, protect door, equipment, and accessories from damage, and maintain in clean condition and operating properly. END OF SECTION , i' 03878505 STEEL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08364 - 6 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 08415 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement, Supplementary conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum door frames. 2. Aluminum framing system. B. Related Sections: 1. Joint sealants: Division 7. 2. Glass: Elsewhere in Division 8. 3. Aluminum windows: Elsewhere in Division 8. 1.3 REFERENCES A. AAMA 605.2-92 -- Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 1992. B. AAMA 1503.1-88 -- Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 1988. C. ASCE 7-95 -- Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; American Society of Civil Engineers; 1995. D. ASTM A 123-89a -- Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 1989. E. ASTM B 209-93 -- Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate; 1993. F. ASTM B 221-93 -- Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes; 1993. G. ASTM C 864-93 -- Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Sea] Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers; 1993. H. ASTM E 283-91-- Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; 1991. I. ASTM E 330-90 -- Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 1990. J. ASTM E 331-93 -- Standard Test Methodfor Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 1993. l_Y 03878505 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT 08415 - 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Exterior Assemblies: Design to comply with the performance criteria listed below. B. Thermal Movement: Design to accommodate expansion and contraction resulting from air temperature range of 120 degrees F, solar heat gain, and nighttime re -radiation. C. Structural Performance: Design to withstand all live and dead loads without deformation and without deflection greater than l/175 of span. 1. Deflection in plane of wall: Not greater than that which would reduce glass edge clearance to 25 percent of design dimension or 1/8 inch, whichever is greater, or that which would reduce glass bite to 75 percent of design dimension. 2. Design system to withstand 150 percent of design wind load with no failure or permanent deformation greater than 0.2 percent of span. D. Wind Loads: Determine in accordance with ANSI/ASCE 7. E. Air Infiltration: 1. Fixed framing: Not more than 0.06 cfrn per square foot of fixed area. a. Measure at 6.24 psf. F. Water Penetration: 1. Fixed framing (excluding operable door edges): No penetration at 6.24 psi G. Thermal Transmittance (U-Value): 1. Fixed framing: Not more than 0.65. 2. Door frames: Not more than 0.93. H. Color: Must match storefront system colors. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's material specifications, drawings of standard components, and installation recommendations. B. Certification by Manufacturer that Aluminum Framing System Complies with Performance Requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Show elevations, field measurements, composite members, reinforcement, anchorages, expansion provisions, hardware mounting, and glazing. D. Samples for Color Selection of Coated Finishes: Coating manufacturer's color selection data. E. Warranty on Fabricated Products. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standard for Wind Load Testing: ASTM E 330. B. Standard for Air Infiltration Testing: ASTM E 283; report result as cubic feet per minute per unit of measurement indicated, at pressure differential indicated. C. Standard for Water Penetration Testing: ASTM E 331; report result at pressure differential indicated. D. Standard for Thermal Transmission Testing: AA Lk 1503.1; report result as U-value (Btu per hour per square foot per degree F). 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Take field measurements before starting fabrication. 03878505 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT 08415 -2 08/05 f LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1.8 WARRANTY A. Fabricated Products: Submit a written warranty, guaranteeing to correct failures in work which occur within 5 years from date of substantial completion, without reducing or otherwise limiting any other rights to correction which the owner may have under the contract documents. 1. Failures are defined to include faulty workmanship, failure to meet the specified performance requirements, faulty operation, and deterioration other than normal weathering. Correction may include repair or replacement. 2. Warranty to be signed by manufacturer, installer, and contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Packaged Entrances: 1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Arch Amarlite. b. CMI Archtectural Products, Inc. C. Kawneer Company, Inc. d. Tubelite Architectural Systems. e. United States Aluminum Corporation. f. Vistawall Architectural Products Division/Butler Manufacturing Company. g. Besam, Inc. h. Dor-O-Matic Division/Republic Industries, Inc. i. Gyro Tech Inc. j. Horton Automatics/a division of the Overhead Door Corp. k. Keane Monroe Corporation. 1. Stanley Magic Door, Division of The Stanley Works. B. Aluminum Framing Systems: 1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Arch Amarlite. b. CMI Architectural Products, Inc. C. Kawneer Company, Inc. d. Tubelite Architectural Systems. e. United States Aluminum Corporation. f. Vistawall Architectural Products Division/Butler Manufacturing Company. 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Aluminum Framing System: Extruded aluminum. 1. Style: Flush glazed (without projecting stops), with glazing centered in frame members; see drawings for profiles, dimensions, and arrangement of members. 2. Products which have minor differences will be accepted when, in the judgment of the architect, such differences do not detract from design concept or performance. 3. Framing members: Thermal break design with concealed, low thermal conductance material completely separating exterior metal members from interior metal members. Use only a standard construction which has been in use for at least 3 years. 03878505 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT 08415 - 3 .; 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 4. Glazing method: Resilient gasket glazed, with provision for replacement of glazing without disassembly of framing. 5. Finish: a. Fluoropolymer finish, 2-coat. 1) Color and sheen: As selected by the Architect from standard products of coating manufacturer. B. Aluminum Door Frames: Extruded tube or channel frames with either mechanical or welded joints. 1. Finish: a. Fluoropolymer finish, 2-coat. 1) Color and sheen: As selected by the Architect from standard products of coating manufacturer. 2.3 MATERIALS - GENERAL A. Aluminum Members: ASTM B 221 for extrusions, ASTM B 209 for sheet/plate; alloy and temper recommended by the manufacturer for the strength required, for corrosion resistance, and for the finish required. B. Fluoropolymer Finish: Multiple coats of thermally cured primer and topcoats, resin minimum i 70 percent "Kynar 500" or "Hylar 5000"; comply with AAMA 605.2 and AA-C 12C42R1X (inhibited chemical -cleaned; acid chromate -fluoride -phosphate chemical coating; organic coating). 1!! 1. Clean with inhibited chemicals and conversion -coat with acid chromate -fluoride -phosphate treatment, in accordance with coating manufacturer's C instructions. 2. Products: The following products, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. "Fluoroceram"; Morton International. b. "Fluropon"; The Valspar Corporation. C. "Nubelar" or "Nubelar S'; Lilly Industries, Inc. d. "Trinar"; Akzo Coatings, Inc. e. "Duranar' ; PPG Industries, Inc. a C. Fasteners: Compatible with aluminum; aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other noncorrosive, noncorrodible material. 1. Do not use exposed fasteners. D. Concealed Flashing: Fully annealed, soft stainless steel, 26 gage minimum; or extruded aluminum, 0.040 inch minimum. E. Miscellaneous Concealed Metal Members: High -strength aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel; hot -dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 123 may be used for members which are not exposed to weather or abrasion. F. Concrete Inserts: Cast iron, malleable iron, or steel hot -dip galvanized in accordance with 1 ASTM A 123. G. Dissimilar Metal Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic, or other nonconductive, nonabsorptive material. H. Glazing Gaskets: Comply with ASTM C 864; style as recommended by manufacturer. I. Joint Sealers: Provide products specified in Division 7. J. Door Hardware: 1. Refer to Section 08710 for hardware specification and quality requirements. 2. See hardware schedule in 3.4 of this section 03878505 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT 08415 - 4 � 08/05 r� LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOLID CORE WOOD -FACED DOORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. b. Buell Door Company. C. Benton Doors, Inc. d. Eggers Industries. e. Fenestra Corporation. f. GlenMar Door Manufacturing Company. g. Graham Manufacturing Corporation. h. Haley Brothers, Inc. i. Ipik Door Company, Inc. j. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc. k. Vancouver Door, Inc. 1. VT Industries, Inc. In. Weyerhaeuser Company. B. Materials 1. Lumber: a. Transparent Finish: NHLA first grade, Red Oak, plain sawn, kiln dried to maximum 10 percent moisture content. 2. Cores a. Solid Core 1) Non -Fire Rated: ANSI 208.1, grade 1-OD2 particleboard, minimum 40 pounds per cubic foot density. 2) Fire Rated (a) 20 Minute Rated: ANSI 208.1, LD2 fire retardant treated particleboard, minimum 40 punds per cubic foot density. (b) 3/4 and 12 Hour Rated: Manufacturer's standard mineral core. b. Hollow Core: Manufacturer's standard phenolic impregnated honeycomb corrugated fiberboard. 3. Veneers a. Transparent Finish:.050 inch thick, NWWDA, Custom, A grade, Red Oak species wood, plain sliced. 4. Glazing Stops a. Rolled steel channel shape as detailed, butted comers; prepared for countersink style screws. 5. Adhesives a. Interior Doors: Type H - water resistant. 2.2 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Regardless of whether or not the DOOR SCHEDULE has every door at every opening scheduled, provide all components required to make every door opening functional based on scheduled doors for similar openings and the referenced codes. " 03878505 SOLID CORE FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 3 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION? NO. 8 B. Doors: Fabricate to provide consistent clearances as indicated. 1. Hinge and lock edges: Provide standard (1/8-inch in 2 inches) bevel at edges, unless standard bevel would not precisely match hardware bevel; provide proper bevel for hardware. 2. Prefitting: Fabricate and trim the following types of doors to size at factory to coordinate with frame shop drawings and floor finishes as indicated in the finish schedule: a. Prefinished doors. C. Openings: Cut, trim, and seal openings in doors at the factory. D. Veneer Match 1. Between Individual Pieces of Veneer: Slip match 2. Assembly on Door Face: Running match 3. On Pair of Doors: Pair match 2.3 FINISHING A. Transparent Finish as Specified in Section 09900 - Painting. 1. Type: AWI System TR-2 - Catalyzed Lacquer. 2. Staining: Color to be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color range. 3. Grain effect: Open. 4. Sheen: Satin (low luster). 5. Grade: Custom. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's recommended procedures and requirements of referenced standard. B. Fitting of Doors: 1. Accurately align and fit doors for trouble free operation throughout range of door swing. C. Clearances: 1. Clearance between door edge and head: 1/8 inch. 2. Clearance between door edge and jamb: 1/8 inch. 3. Clearance between door bottom edge and top surface of threshold: 1/4 inch. 4. Clearance between door bottom edge and floor covering surface or finish (where threshold is not indicated): 1/8 inch. 5. Clearance between meeting edges at pairs of doors: 1/8 inch- D. Finish: Before installing doors, restore finish at door edges cut during field fitting. E. Touch up finishes as required at end of job. END OF SECTION 03878505 SOLID CORE FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 4 ' 08/05 1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 08364 STEEL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS PART I - GENERAL A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel sectional overhead doors. 2. Locations for sectional overhead doors are indicated on the drawings and schedules. B. Products Furnished but Not Installed under This Section: 1. Anchors installed in masonry for support of overhead door units. 2. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and manufacturer's instructions for anchor installation to trades executing the work. C. Related Sections: 1. Installation of anchors in concrete: Division 3. 2. Installation of anchors in masonry: Division 4. 3. Electric service characteristics for motor operators: Division 16. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 446/A 446M-93 -- Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality; 1993. B. ASTM A 525-93 -- Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process; 1993. C. ASTM A 526/A 526M-90 -- Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Commercial Quality; 1990. D. ASTM E 330-90 -- Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 1990. E. NAGDM 102-1988 -- Specifications for Sectional Overhead Type Doors; National Association of Garage Door Manufacturers; 1988. F. NEMA ICS 6-1993 -- Enclosures for Industrial Control and Systems; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1993. G. NEMA MG 1-1993 -- Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1993. H. UL 325 -- Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 1986 (Revised 1988). 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: 1. Sectional overhead doors standard: Comply with ATAGDM 102. 2. VGTind loading: Sectional overhead doors shall comply with NAGDM 102 wind loading criteria unless otherwise indicated. 03878505 STEEL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08364 - 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 a. Design and construct sectional overhead doors to withstand indicated wind loads as tested in accordance with ASTM E 330. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical information and installation directions demonstrate that products comply with contract documents. B. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings only for components which are not described completely in manufacturer's technical information. C. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Certificates: For information only, manufacturer's written certification, indicating doors comply with specified design criteria for the following: a. General requirements of NAGDM 102. b. Wind loading. C. Thermal performance. 2. Manufacturer's directions: Submit directions for installation and operation of door units; distribute a copy to installer before start of work. 3. Installer qualification: For information only, submit installer's written statement of compliance,with installation experience requirement. D. Contract Closeout Submittals: 1. Operation and maintenance data: Door operation instructions and maintenance data for each door type. E. Warranty: For information only, submit specimen copy of manufacturer's written warranty. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Furnish sectional overhead door units by one manufacturer for entire project. B. Qualifications: 1. Installer qualifications: Door manufacturer's authorized installer. C. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Automatic reversing: Doors with motor operators shall comply with requirements of UL 325. D. Certifications: 1. Submit door manufacturer's written certification that sectional overhead doors comply with wind resistance design criteria. 2. Submit door manufacturer's written certification that sectional overhead doors comply with thermal performance design criteria. 3. Submit door manufacturer's written certification that sectional overhead doors comply with NAGDM 102. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Schedule the building in of masonry anchors for support of overhead sectional doors with masonry work. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Product Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard 10-year limited product warranty signed by the manufacturer's authorized official, guaranteeing to correct failures in i 03878505 STEEL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08364 - 2 08/05 r3 i i_.1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 product which may occur during the warranty period, without reducing or otherwise limiting any other rights to correction which the owner may have under the contract documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Steel Sectional Overhead Doors: 1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Overhead Door Corporation. b. Raynor Garage Door Company. C. Wayne -Dalton Corp. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel: 1. Structural quality carbon steel, ASTM A 446, Class A, or commercial quality steel sheets, ASTM A 526; minimum yield point, 33,000 pounds per square inch; gage as indicated. 2. Galvanized coating: ASTM A 525; minimum G90 zinc coating where indicated. B. Paint: 1. Metal primer: Manufacturer's standard epoxy primer. 2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Steel Sectional Overhead Door Extra Heavy Duty: 1. Wind resistance: a. Load acting inward: 24 pounds per square foot of door surface area. b. Load acting outward: 20 pounds per square foot of door surface area. 2. Insulation: Polyurethane foam. a. Thermal resistance, R-value: 17 3. Interior surface: Painted galvanized steel. 4. Door section material: 16 gage galvanized steel. 5. Galvanized coating: G90, minimum. 6. Door section design: Ribbed profile. 7. Door Finish: Field paint as specified in Section 09900 - Painting. 8. Counterbalancing mechanism: Torsion spring type. 9. Rollers: Case-hardened steel double rollers. 10. Installation: High lift vertical and follow roof slope tracks. 11. Electric operator: Hoist type with worm and gear reduction primary drive. a. Provide auxiliary manual chain hoist. b. Installation: Side -mounted. C. Electric motor: Totally enclosed nonventilated type. 1) Horsepower rating: 3/4 horsepower minimum, or as required to move the door to the fully open position in 13 seconds or less. This requirement will be tested and must conform. 2) Control enclosure: NEMA Type 1. d. Control station: 3-button push-button type. 03878505 STEEL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08364 - 3 ., 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1) Control station enclosure: Also, provide remote control operation for each door. Supply 6 dual frequency remote controls, with each door set to a unique frequency. e. Automatic reversing device: Pneumatic bottom bar switch. 12. Vision panels: Double -strength glass. 13. Accessories: a. Head and jamb weatherstripping. b. Infra -red motion stop sensor on each side of each door. 14. Roll -up drum - heavy duty, high performance. 2.4 COMPONENTS A. LO Ca] 593 03878505 08/05 Tracks: 1. Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel tracks and accessories designed to accommodate door size, weight, and clearances indicated from adjacent construction. 2. Accessories: Provide brackets and reinforcing for rigid support of roller guides, for door type and size. 3. Fabricate vertical track sections with slots for door drop safety device at 2 inches on center. 4. Tilt tracks from vertical to achieve closure at jambs when sectional door is closed. Weld or bolt to track supports. Track Support: 1. Support tracks with manufacturer's standard anchors and brackets for size and weight of door, to provide strength and rigidity, and smooth and continuous operation. 2. Wall support: Provide continuous steel plate and angle anchored to wall and welded to track in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Overhead support: Provide continuous angle welded to inclined tracks and braced laterally to overhead structural members at each end of tracks. Counterbalancing Mechanisms: 1. Torsion spring: a. Tempered steel torsion springs mounted on and secured to a hardened tubular steel shaft, with cable drums attached at each end of shaft. b. Cable drums: Grooved cast aluminum or gray iron castings, wrapped with cable attached to door, heavy duty, high performance. C. Counterbalance supports: One ball -bearing bracket at each end of shaft and at midpoint, for shafts up to 16 feet long. Provide two additional brackets at third points to support shafts over 16 feet long. d. Emergency door stop: Spring -loaded steel or bronze cam secured to bottom door rollers at each track. e. Cushion door stop: Spring bumper attached at end of each horizontal track. Electric Door Operators: 1. Manufacturer's standard electric operator size as indicated, complete with gear reduction mechanism and control devices. 2. Emergency disconnect: Provide mechanism to allow transfer to manual hand chain operation, with safety device to lock out use of motor when chain is in use. 3. Door operator type: a. Hoist type, with worm and gear reduction drive, clutch disconnect and auxiliary chain hoist. 4. Electric motors: STEEL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08364 - 4 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 a. Reversible, constant duty, Class A insulated motor protected against overload; with capacity to move door at rate of 2/3 foot to 1 foot per second. b. Totally enclosed, nonventilated type motor, complying with NEMA MG 1; controller with enclosure of type indicated, complying with N TEMA ICS 6. 5. Control station: a. Provide control stations of type indicated complete with enclosure complying with NEMA ICS 6. 6. Remote Control Station: 2-1020 digital eye receiver with 6-two channel transmitters. E. Automatic Reversing Control: 1. Automatic safety switch: Complying with UL 325, installed within neoprene or rubber astragal located along full width of door bottom. 2. Safety switch type: Pneumatic; where indicated. F. Weather Seals: 1. Continuous rubber, neoprene, or flexible vinyl adjustable weatherstrip gasket at head and jambs of overhead door, for weathertight installation. G. Vision Panels: 1. Provide manufacturer's standard insulated, tinted vision panels of materials indicated, located where shown on the drawings. 2. Metal framed doors: Install vision panels with manufacturer's standard dry glazing gasket. 3. Glazing stops: Removable; made from door section frame material. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Hardware: 1. Extra heavy duty hardware, made from noncorrosive metal and provided with noncorrosive fasteners, as required for door type. 2. Hinges: a. Heavy steel hinges at each end and intermediate stile, of type recommended by manufacturer for size of overhead door. b. Thru-bolt hinges to door sections at stiles and rails using lock washers and nuts, or rivets where access to nuts is not available. C. Provide manufacturer's recommended double hinges for doors exceeding 16 feet in width. 3. Rollers: a. Heavy duty ball -bearing rollers, in steel races. Mount rollers with projections from door surface as required to suit slope of track. b. Double hinges: Install roller shaft through both hinges. C. Roller tires: Type indicated; 3-inch diameter tires for 3-inch track, 2-inch diameter tires for 2-inch track; track size as recommended by door manufacturer for required door size. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Steel Door Sections: -' 1. Fabricate from galvanized steel sheet, maximum 24-inch-high section, nominal 2 inches deep, and in profile indicated on the drawings. 2. Section end closures .and reinforcing: Provide 16 gage galvanized steel channel end closures, and intermediate 16 gage channel reinforcing at 48 inches on center, maximum along interior surface of section. 03878505 STEEL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08364 - 5 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 3. Bottom section reinforcements: Continuous channel or angle matching section profile. 4. Section reinforcing: Continuous horizontal and diagonal steel reinforcing, as necessary to comply with wind loading performance criteria. B. Insulation: 1. Type: Manufacturer's standard polyurethane foam insulation. 2. Conceal insulation with manufacturer's standard interior steel facing sheet. C. Factory Finishing: 1. Steel door sections: a. Pretreatment: Clean zinc -coated steel and apply zinc phosphate conversion coat. b. Factory paint system: Apply prime coats to interior and exterior surfaces of door faces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXA1v1INATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Examine openings to receive sectional overhead doors for conditions that will prohibit proper installation. Correct unacceptable conditions before start of installation. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare surfaces at openings where sectional overhead doors will be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install complete overhead door assembly in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Anchor vertical tracks to rough opening perimeter at minimum 24 inches on center. C. Horizontal Tracks: Support from overhead framing with welded or bolted steel angles or channels, including diagonal bracing as necessary for secure installation. D. Install digital eye receivers at push button control stations. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. After door installation is complete, examine door performance, test operation, and adjust installation to provide smooth and quiet operation. B. Adjust door operators for proper performance in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean all door surfaces, tracks, springs, and operators, before final acceptance. 3.6 PROTECTION A. After installation and until final acceptance, protect door, equipment, and accessories from damage, and maintain in clean condition and operating properly. END OF SECTION 03878505 STEEL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08364 - 6 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 08415 ALLINE[NUM STOREFRONT PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement, Supplementary conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum door frames. 2. Aluminum framing system. B. Related Sections: 1. Joint sealants: Division 7. 2. Glass: Elsewhere in Division 8. 3. Aluminum windows: Elsewhere in Division 8. 1.3 REFERENCES A. AAMA 605.2-92 -- Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 1992. B. AAMA 1503.1-88 -- Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 1988. C. ASCE 7-95 -- Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; American Society of Civil Engineers; 1995. D. ASTM A 123-89a -- Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 1989. E. ASTM B 209-93 -- Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate; 1993. F. ASTM B 221-93 -- Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes; 1993. G. ASTM C 864-93 -- Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers; 1993. H. ASTM E 283-91-- Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; 1991. I. ASTM E 330-90 -- Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 1990. J. ASTM E 331-93 -- Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 1993. L_ 03878505 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT 08415 - 1 08101 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Exterior Assemblies: Design to comply with the performance criteria listed below. B. Thermal Movement: Design to accommodate expansion and contraction resulting from air temperature range of 120 degrees F, solar heat gain, and nighttime re -radiation. C. Structural Performance: Design to withstand all live and dead loads without deformation and without deflection greater than 1/175 of span. 1. Deflection in plane of wall: Not greater than that which would reduce glass edge clearance to 25 percent of design dimension or 1/8 inch, whichever is greater, or that which would reduce glass bite to 75 percent of design dimension. 2. Design system to withstand 150 percent of design wind load with no failure or permanent deformation greater than 0.2 percent of span. D. Wind Loads: Determine in accordance with ANSI/ASCE 7. E. Air Infiltration: 1. Fixed framing: Not more than 0.06 cfm per square foot of fixed area. a. Measure at 6.24 psf. F. Water Penetration: 1. Fixed framing (excluding operable door edges): No penetration at 6.24 psf. G. Thermal Transmittance (U-Value): 1. Fixed framing: Not more than 0.65. 2. Door frames: Not more than 0.93. H. Color: Must match storefront system colors. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's material specifications, drawings of standard components, and installation recommendations. B. Certification by Manufacturer that Aluminum Framing System Complies with Performance Requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Show elevations, field measurements, composite members, reinforcement, anchorages, expansion provisions, hardware mounting, and glazing. D. Samples for Color Selection of Coated Finishes: Coating manufacturer's color selection data. E. Warranty on Fabricated Products. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standard for Wind Load Testing: ASTM E 330. B. Standard for Air Infiltration Testing: ASTM E 283; report result as cubic feet per minute per unit of measurement indicated, at pressure differential indicated. C. Standard for Water Penetration Testing: ASTM E 331; report result at pressure differential indicated. D. Standard for Thermal Transmission Testing: AAMA 1503.1; reportresult as U-value (Btu per hour per square foot per degree F). 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Take field measurements before starting fabrication. 03878505 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT 08415 - 2 08/05 i_ 1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 IR-�VAZAAX�,Mr'� A. Fabricated Products: Submit a written warranty, guaranteeing to correct failures in work which occur within 5 years from date of substantial completion, without reducing or otherwise limiting any other rights to correction which the owner may have under the contract documents. 1. Failures are defined to include faulty workmanship, failure to meet the specified performance requirements, faulty operation, and deterioration other than normal weathering. Correction may include repair or replacement. 2. Warranty to be signed by manufacturer, installer, and contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Packaged Entrances: 1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Arch Amarlite. b. CMI Archtectural Products, Inc. C. Kawneer Company, Inc. d. Tubelite Architectural Systems. e. United States Aluminum Corporation. £ Vistawall Architectural Products Division/Butler Manufacturing Company. g. Besam, Inc. h. Dor-O-Matic Division/Republic Industries, Inc. i. Gyro Tech Inc. j. Horton Automatics/a division of the Overhead Door Corp. k. Keane Monroe Corporation. 1. Stanley Magic Door, Division of The Stanley Works. B. Aluminum Framing Systems: 1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Arch Amarlite. b. CMI Architectural Products, Inc. C. Kawneer Company, Inc. d. Tubelite Architectural Systems. e. United States Aluminum Corporation. f. Vistawall Architectural Products Division/Butler Manufacturing Company. 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Aluminum Framing System: Extruded aluminum. 1. Style: Flush glazed (without projecting stops), with glazing centered in frame members; see drawings for profiles, dimensions, and arrangement of members. 2. Products which have minor differences will be accepted when, in the judgment of the architect, such differences do not detract from design concept or performance. 3. Framing members: Thermal break design with concealed, low thermal conductance material completely separating exterior metal members from interior metal members. Use only a standard construction which has been in use for at least 3 years. 3 03878505 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT 08415 - 3 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 4. Glazing method: Resilient gasket glazed, with provision for replacement of glazing without disassembly of framing. 5. Finish: a. Fluoropolymer finish, 2-coat. 1) Color and sheen: As selected by the Architect from standard products of coating manufacturer. B. Aluminum Door Frames: Extruded tube or channel frames with either mechanical or welded joints. 1. Finish: a. Fluoropolymer finish, 2-coat. 1) Color and sheen: As selected by the Architect from standard products of coating manufacturer. 2.3 MATERIALS - GENERAL A. Aluminum Members: ASTM B 221 for extrusions, ASTM B 209 for sheet/plate; alloy and temper recommended by the manufacturer for the strength required, for corrosion resistance, and for the finish required. B. Fluoropolymer Finish: Multiple coats of thermally cured primer and topcoats, resin minimum 70 percent "Kynar 500" or "Hylar 5000"; comply with AAMA 605.2 and AA-C12C42R1X (inhibited chemical -cleaned; acid chromate -fluoride -phosphate chemical coating; organic coating). 1. Clean with inhibited chemicals and conversion -coat with acid chromate -fluoride -phosphate treatment, in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions. 2. Products: The following products, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. "Fluoroceram'; Morton International. b. "Fluropon"; The Valspar Corporation. C. "Nubelar" or "Nubelar S'; Lilly Industries, Inc. d. "Trinar"; Akzo Coatings, Inc. e. "Duranar"; PPG Industries, Inc. C. Fasteners: Compatible with aluminum; aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other noncorrosive, noncom odible material. 1. Do not use exposed fasteners. D. Concealed Flashing: Fully annealed, soft stainless steel, 26 gage minimum; or extruded aluminum, 0.040 inch minimum. E. Miscellaneous Concealed Metal Members: High -strength aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel; hot -dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 123 may be used for members which are not exposed to weather or abrasion. F. Concrete Inserts: Cast iron, malleable iron, or steel hot -dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123. G. Dissimilar Metal Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic, or other nonconductive, nonabsorptive material. H. Glazing Gaskets: Comply with ASTM C 864; style as recommended by manufacturer. I. Joint Sealers: Provide products specified in Division 7. J. Door Hardware: 1. Refer to Section 08710 for hardware specification and quality requirements. 2. See hardware schedule in 3.4 of this section 03878505 ALUME\TUM STOREFRONT 08415 - 4 U 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 2.4 FABRICATION A. Any dimensions which may vary are indicated on drawings, with amount of dimensional variation allowed. B. Framing System: Pre-cut and perform all finishing in factory or shop. 1. Fit joints tightly with adjacent members in correct relationship. C. Welding: Perform welding before finishing; use methods which do not discolor metal; grind exposed welds flush; match original finish. D. Reinforcing: Provide as required to comply with performance requirements for rigidity and to support hardware; isolate dissimilar metals as specified in "Installation." E. Avoid damage to finishes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Examine structures; report conditions in writing which will adversely affect installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. B. Install plumb and level, square and true, in correct location; support adequately and securely anchor. C. Separate aluminum exposed to weather from dissimilar metals; coat dissimilar metals that are in drainage cavities using one of the materials specified. Aluminum, stainless steel, zinc, cadmium, and small areas of white bronze are not considered dissimilar from each other. D. Coat all metals that come into contact with masonry, concrete, and treated wood, using one of the materials specified. E. Install joint sealers between exterior sill members and the surface below as indicated, to provide weathertight construction. Comply with Division 7 requirements for installation of joint sealers. 3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Clean exterior and interior soon after installation of glass, taking care to avoid damage to finishes. 03878505 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT 08415 - 5 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 ! 3.4 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Aluminum door supplier to provide all hardware for aluminum doors except as noted. SET # 1 Door no. 05 Each door to have: C 1 2 pr. Hinges A8112 NRP. Same finish as door/frame. 1 ea. E0231 x lever. 1 ea. Cylinder as specified in Section - 08710 Hardware. 1 ea. Closer CO2021 Same finish as door/frame. 1 ea. Pull J401,1" round bent bar,15" long and projecting 3-1/4" from door face. Equal to CS45 by Kawneer. 1 ea. Stop L02131. 1 ea. Threshold J36170 L. END OF SECTION l .1 `i ._1 �f iJ 03878505 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT 08415 - 6 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 08520 I:\1111► lQlakil e . PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreements, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Applications: a. Individual window units. b. Projected windows. 2. Other work included: a. Sealants around perimeters of windows. B. Related Sections: 1. Glazing: Elsewhere in Division 8. 2. Sealants: Division 7. 3. Aluminum storefronts: Elsewhere in Division 8. 1.3 REFERENCES A. AA DAF-45 -- Designation System for Aluminum Finishes; Aluminum Association; 1980. B. AAMA 101-93 -- Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum and Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Prime Windows and Glass Doors; 1993. C. AAMA 605.2-92 -- Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 1992. D. AAMA 803.3-92 --Voluntary Specifications and Test Methods for Narrow Joint Seam Sealer; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 1992. E. AAMA 904.1-87 -- Voluntary Specification for Friction Hinges in Window Applications; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 1987. F. ASTM A 123-89a -- Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 1989. G. ASTM B 633-85 -- Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel; 1985. H. ASTM B 766-86 -- Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Cadmium;1986. I. ASTM E 405-89 -- Standard Test Methods for Wear Testing Rotary Operators for Windows; 1989. J. FS L-S-125B -- Screening, Insect, Nonmetallic; 1972 (Notice 1, 1987). �03878505 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 1 08/05 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide window assemblies which will perform as indicated without failure or deterioration. Failure includes the following: 1. Exterior assemblies: a. Excessive deflection. b. Excessive water leakage. C. Excessive air infiltration. d. Failure of perimeter sealant. e. Failure of glazing. B. Performance Requirements: As specified in AAMA 101, for window type, grade, and class l indicated. �^ C. Thermal Performance Required: Thermally broken construction. D. Color must match aluminum windows. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and data on fabrication methods, finishing, �.. hardware, and accessories, and installation and handling recommendations. B. Certification by manufacturer that products comply with requirements of contract documents. C. Shop Drawings: Show information not conveyed by product data, and the following: 1. Elevations. 3 2. Cross -sections of all typical members. 3. Anchors. 4. Hardware. 5. Operators. 6. Accessories. 7. Glazing methods. 8. Sealants. D. Samples for Color Selection of Coated Finishes: Coating manufacturer's color selection data. E. Samples of Hardware Items. F. Warranty. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide windows bearing AAMA Certification labels showing compliance with testing specified. B. Test Methods - General: 1. Test sequence is optional, except that air infiltration test shall precede water resistance test. 2. Concentrated load tests may be performed on separate ventilators/sash of identical size and design as used for air, water, and uniform load tests. 3. Test each size of each type of window. C. Test Units: Fabricated in accordance with requirements of contract documents, fully assembled, and glazed. 1. Minimum size: As specified in AAMA 101. D. Air, Water, and Structural Test Methods: As specified in AAMA 101. E. Component Structural Test Methods: As specified in AAMA 101. �- 03878505 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 2 08/05 I LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements of window openings prior to fabrication. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the contractor, installer, and manufacturer, guaranteeing to correct failures in window units which occur within 5 years after substantial completion, without reducing or otherwise limiting any other rights to correction which owner may have under the contract documents. Failures are defined to include faulty workmanship, failure to perform as specified, and failure and deterioration of materials and finishes in excess of that which would be expected under normal weather and wear. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 WINDOWS - GENERAL A. Windows - General: Frame and ventilator/sash members of extruded aluminum, complete writh all hardware, accessories, sub -frames, mullions, sills, and other components indicated or required; complying with AAMA 101. 1. See drawings for sizes, profiles, and arrangement of members. B. Window Design: 1. Design so water entering from outside is drained to exterior. 2. Where insulating glass or laminated glass is used, provide positive drainage to eliminate water standing in glazing channels. 3. Provide weatherstripping on all operable ventilator/sash in exterior wall. C. Window Components: Designed or selected by manufacturer for strength required and compatibility with other materials. D. Weatherstripping: Continuous weatherstripping at all points where frame of operable ventilator/sash or ventilator contacts frame of window. 1. Use compression gaskets where other types are not indicated. E. Thermally Broken Construction: Provide frame and ventilator/sash members with concealed, structural, load -bearing, low thermal conductance material separating exterior metal members from interior metal members. Use only a standard construction which has been in use at least 3 years. Do not bridge thermal gap with any fasteners or hardware. 2.2 PROJECTED WINDOWS A. Manufacturers: 1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Acorn Window Systems, Inc. b. Alenco Division/Redman Building Products, Inc. C. EFCO Corporation. d. Graham Architectural Products Corporation. e. Modu-Line Windows, Inc. f. TRACO. g. Winco Window Company. h. Windows, Inc. ("DeSCo"). i. Kawneer, Inc. 03878505 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08105 08520 - 3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 B. Projected Windows: 1. Style: As indicated on drawings. a. Top- and bottom -hinged. b. In -swinging and out -swinging. C. Products which have minor differences will be accepted when, in the architect's judgment, such differences do not detract from design concept or intended performance. 2. Glazing method: Channel gasket. 3. Grade: P-HC40. 4. Hardware: a. Operator: Rotary type. 1) Provide at out swinging windows. b. Hinges: Two 4-bar hinges. C. Locks: Lever handle, cam type. 5.. Finish: Fluoropolymer coating. 6. Insect screens. a. Provide at project -in ventilators. b. Provide at project -out ventilators. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper appropriate for the use and finish, providing corrosion resistance, and as required for strength. 1. Minimum wall thickness of any member: 3/16 inch. inch. 2. Fluoropolymer coating: Multiple coats of thermally cured fluoropolymer primer and top coats, resin minimum 70 percent "Kynar 500" or "Hylar 5000"; comply with AAMA 605.2 and AA-C12C42R1X (inhibited chemical -cleaned; acid chromate -fluoride -phosphate chemical conversion coating; organic coating). Provide the number and type of coats as recommended by coating manufacturer for color and sheen required. 3. Colors: Where not indicated, colors are to be selected by the architect from manufacturer's standard range. B. Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners, except for hardware. 1. Hardware fasteners: Match finish of members to which they are fastened. 2. Anchor fasteners: Same as anchors. 3. Other fasteners: Noncorrosive and corrosion -resistant material that is compatible with materials being fastened. C. Concealed Anchors (one of the following): 1. Steel, cadmium plated after fabrication in accordance with ASTM B 766, Class 8. 2. Steel, zinc electroplated after fabrication in accordance with ASTM B 633. 3. Steel, hot -dip zinc coated after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 123. 4. Stainless steel. D. Glass: Provide products specified elsewhere in Division 8. See window elevations for glass types used. E. Sealants: Use only nonhardening, nonshrinking, and nonmigrating materials. 1. For nonworking, metal -to -metal joints within window units: Small joint sealant conforming to 803.3, as described in AAMA 800. 2. For joints between other window components: Suitable for application. 3. For joints between window units and other building components: Provide products specified in Division 7. 03878505 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 4 08/05 g LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 4. For glazing: Provide products specified elsewhere. F. Dissimilar -Metal Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic, or other nonconductive, nonabsorptive coating. 2.4 HARDWARE A. General: Corrosion -resistant material. B. Hinges: 1. For use without operators: Friction type; complying with AAMA 904.1; adjustable friction pivots/slides; nylon or other nonabrasive material. 2. For use with operators: Nonfriction type. 3. 4- and 6-bar hinges: Concealed. C. Rotary Operators: Gear -type; complying with ASTM E 405, after 500 cycles with operating force of 120 pounds -force -inches, and after 7500 cycles with operating moment of 80 pounds -force -inches and closing torque of 60 pounds -force -inches. D. Locks: Complete with strikes and fasteners. 1. Lever handle: Cam -action sweep type. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Insect Screens: Formed or extruded aluminum frames with screen fabric. 1. Design to fit tightly, but be removable, using as few exposed fasteners or latches as possible. 2. Do not use wickets for access to window -operating hardware, unless absolutely necessary; make wickets hinged or sliding, with the same type of frames as screens, and tight -fitting. 3. Frame construction: Minimum wall thickness of 0.040-inch, with joints mitered or coped and fastened with concealed fasteners. 4. Anchor screen fabric with removable plastic or rubber splines. 5. Finish: To match window. 6. Screen fabric: Glass fiber mesh; complying with FS L-S-125. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine openings before installation. Do not install windows if any detrimental conditions exist. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF WINDOWS A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. B. Install windows plumb and level, true and square. C. Support properly and securely anchor. D. Separate aluminum from dissimilar metals and coat dissimilar metals that are in drainage cavities, using one of the materials specified. Stainless steel, zinc, cadmium, and small areas of white bronze are not considered dissimilar metals. E. Coat all metals that come into contact with masonry, concrete, and treated wood, using one of the materials specified. F. Install joint sealers between sill members and the surface below, as indicated. 03878505 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 5 08/05 T� LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 G. Install joint sealers between frame perimeter and adjacent work, as indicated. H. Coordinate with wall -flashing installation. .' I. Comply with requirements specified in Division 7 for installation of joint sealers. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF GLAZING A. Install as specified elsewhere in Division 8. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operable ventilators/sash and hardware to operate smoothly and close tightly. a END OF SECTION 03878505 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 6 08/05 3 i LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 08710 PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1- General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. All finish hardware necessary for completion of project. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames B. Section 08211- Flush Wood Doors C. Section 08360 - Sectional Overhead Doors: Hardware for same. D. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts: Hardware for same except cylinders 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers Qualifications 1. Companies specializing in manufacturing door hardware with minimum three years experience. B. Regulatory Requirements 1. Fire Door Hardware a. Conform to requirements of NFPA 80 and 101 for doors shown, scheduled, or specified to be in a fire rated wall or to receive a UL-label. b. In case of conflict between hardware specified and NFPA requirements, provide type required by NFPA. 1.5 REFERENCES A. ANSI A156.1 Butts and Hinges. B. ANSI A156.2 Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches. C. ANSI A156.3 Exit Devices. D. ANSI A156.4 Door Controls - Closers. E. ANSI A156.5 Auxiliary Locks & Associated Products. F. ANSI A156.6 Architectural Door Trim. G. ANSI A156.7 Template Hinge Dimensions. H. ANSI A156.8 Door Controls - Overhead Holders. I. ANSI A156.16 Auxiliary Hardware. J. ANSI A156.18 Materials and Finishes. K. ANSI A156.21 Thresholds L. BHMA Directory of Certified Locks & Latches. M. BHMA Directory of Certified Door Closers. 03878505 HARDWARE 08710 - 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 N. BHMA Directory of Certified Exit Devices. O. 36CFR Part 1191 - Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA) P. DIiI-02 Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware. Q. DHI-03 Keying Systems and Nomenclature. R. DIU-05 Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. S. DIU Al15 Wood Door Preparation Standards T. NFPA 80 Fire Doors and Windows. U. NFPA 101 Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures. V. NFPA 105 Installation of Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies. W. SDI-107 Hardware on Steel Doors (Reinforcement and Application). 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Provide product data on specified hardware. 2. Submit manufacturer's parts lists, templates, and installation instructions. 3. Submit operation and maintenance data including data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. B. Hardware Schedule 1. Include for each item: quantities; manufacturer's name and catalog numbers; sizes; detail information or catalog cuts; finishes; door and frame size and materials; location and hardware set identification cross-referenced to drawings; lock true material thicknesses; lock trim material evaluation test results; corresponding ANSI or BHMA standard type number or function number from manufacturer's catalog if not covered by ANSI or BHMA; and list of abbreviations. 2. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware. l� 3. Indicate lock side of single cylinder doors. �J 4. Include master cross reference indicating door numbers in numerical sequence and associated hardware set. C. Keying Schedule 1. Develop in accordance with DHI-03 and Owners requirements. 2. Obtain keying system approval before delivering hardware to project. 3. Master key all doors to one key. D. Certificates of Compliance 1. Submit certificates of compliance attesting that hardware items conform to the NFPA, CFR and ANSI or BHMA standards specified. In lieu of certificates, submit statement that proposed hardware items appear in current BHMA directories of certified products. 2. Fire Rated Doors: Submit certificates of compliance, attesting that doors which are indicated, scheduled, or specified to be fire rated are fitted with the required hardware (i.e. active latch bolts, self -closing devices) and operate in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 80 and 101. Identify all such doors on certificates. E. Spare Parts Data 1. Not later than 1 month prior to date of substantial completion, furnish spare parts data for locksets, exit devices, closers, electronic locking devices and electro-magnetic closer holder release devices. 2. Include a complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source of'� supply. 03878505 HARDWARE 08710 - 2 �.....� 08/05 I LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 F. Maintenance Instructions 1. Furnish 6 complete copies of maintenance instructions listing routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and trouble shooting guides. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle hardware to site in accordance with provisions of Section 01600. B. Individually package each article of hardware in manufacturer's standard commercial carton or container, and properly mark or label to be readily identifiable with approved hardware schedule. C. Tag or otherwise identify each change key with door for which its cylinder is intended. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate requirements for hardware to be mounted on metal doors or metal frames between hardware manufacturer and door or frame manufacturer to establish location, reinforcement required, size of holes, and similar details. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Provide five year warranty for door closers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. General 1. Regardless of whether or not the HARDWARE SCHEDULE at the end of this section has every door and every component scheduled for each opening, provide all components required to make every opening functional based on hardware scheduled for similar openings and the referenced codes. B. Hinges 1. Hager Hinge Co. 2. McKinney. 3. Stanley Hardware Division, Stanley Works. C. Lock and Latches 1. Best Lock Corporation. 2. Corbin/Russwin Architectural Hardware Division, Black & Decker Industries. 3. Sargent Division, Emhart Hardware Group. 4. Schlage Lock Company. D. Push/Pulls 1. H.B. Sues, a Harrow Company. 2. Rockwood Manufacturing Company. 3. Trego Industries, Inc. 4. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co. E. Exit Devices 1. Corbin/Russwin Architectural Hardware Division, Black & Decker Industries. 2. Norton Industries, Inc. 3. Sargent Manufacturing Company. 4. Von Duprin, Inc. 03878505 HARDWARE 08710 - 3 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 F. Closers 1. Corbin/Russwin Architectural Hardware Division, Black & Decker Industries. 2. LCN Closers Division, Schlage Lock Co. 3. Norton Door Controls, Scovill Security Products. 4. Sargent Manufacturing Company. G. Overhead Holders 1. Glynn -Johnson. 2. Door Components International. H. Manual Bolts 1. Door Components International. 2. Glynn -Johnson. 3. H.B. Ives, Harrow Co. 4. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co. I. Gasketing/Threshholds 1. Pemko Manufacturing Co. 2. Reese Enterprises, Inc. 3. Zero International, Inc. J. Protection Plates 1. Builders Brass Works (BBW). 2. Trego Industries, Inc. 3. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co. K. Door Stops/Bumpers 1. Builders Brass Works (BBW). 2. Trego Industries, Inc. 3. H.B. Ives, Harrow Co. 4. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co. L. Door Silencers 1. Builders Brass Works (BBW). 2. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co. 3. H.B. Ives, Harrow Co. M. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Hinges 1. General a. Conformance: ANSI A156.1 and ANSI 156.7 on metal doors and frames. b. Size: Except as otherwise specified, conform to hinge manufacturer's printed recommendations. C. Provide non -removable pins on hinges for reverse bevel doors with locks. Make non -removable by means such as a set screw in the barrel, or safety stud, when the door is in closed position. B. Locks and Latches 1. General a. To maximum extent possible, provide loci -sets and latchsets from single manufacturer. b. Furnish wrought strike boxes for wood frames and pairs of wood doors. 03878505 HARDWARE 08710 - 4 08/05 I LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 C. Design: 1) Levers, roses, and escutcheons: 0.050 inch thick if unreinforced; 0.035 inch thick if reinforced; combined thickness 0.070 inch. Provide levers with radiused return to doors. 2) Bored locksets and latchsets: Conform to ANSI A156.5. 3) Lock Cylinders: Removable type, six pin, conforming to ANSI A156.6. d. Provide all locks with core removal not requiring disassembly of knob or lockset. e. Series: 4000, conforming to ANSI A156.2, Grade 1. f. Strikes: conform to ANSI All 5.2. g. Provide adjustable bevel fronts or otherwise conform to door shape for doors 1-3/8 inches thick and over. h. Furnish strike boxes with latch strikes for Grade 1. i. Install cylinders with cams that will freely operate all functions of the locksets specified. j. Fit cylinders to locksets without adapters. C. Push/Pull Plates 1. Combination push-pull plates: Category J300, 1/8 inch minimum stainless steel, beveled four edges, minimum size 4 x 16 inches, with countersunk screw holes. 2. Push and pull bars: Category J500, stainless steel with edges of mounting plates beveled. 3. Push plates: stainless steel, beveled four edges, minimum size 4 x 16 inches. D. Exit Devices and Exit Device Accessories 1. General a. Conform to ANSI A156.3. b. Trim: wrought construction and commercial plain design with straight, beveled, or smoothly rounded sides, comers, and edges. C. Provide adjustable strikes for rim type devices. d_ Provide touch bars in lieu of conventional crossbars and arms. e. Provide escutcheons not less than 7 by 2-1/4 inches and cut escutcheons to suit cylinders and operating trim. 2. Removable Mullions a. Type 22, box type finished with mullion stabilizers of same manufacturer. b. Use only with exit devices for which mullions were manufactured. E. Closers 1. General a. Conform to ANSI A156.4, Grade 1. b. Surface type closers: Size 1 or 2 through size 6. C. Closers for outswinging exterior doors: size one size larger than manufacturer's published recommendations, but not less than size 5. d. Size requirements for other closers: Conform to manufacturer's published recommendations, except as specified otherwise. e. Closers for outswinging exterior doors: Provide parallel arms or top jamb mount closers for outswinging exterior doors. f. Provide narrow projection closers for doors close to a wall so as not to strike wall at 90-degree open position. g. Set closing force on doors accessible to the physically handicapped for a push-pull of 5 pounds applied at knob or handle for interior doors; for exterior doors, set to minimum required to relatch door. 2. Surface Type Closers a. Series CO2000 Full Cover with options PT-4C and PT-4D. 03878505 HARDWARE 08710 - 5 08101 _e F. Overhead Holders 1. Conform to ANSI Al56.8 G. Auxiliary Hardware 1. Conform to ANSI Al56-16 for auxiliary hardware, consisting of flush bolts and door stops. 2. Lever extension flush bolts: Type L04081. 3. Dust -proof strikes: a. Type L04011 for non -fire rated doors. b. Type L04021 for fire rated doors. H. Protection Plates 1. Conformance a. Kick plates: ANSI Al56.6, category 1102, stainless steel. 2. Fabrication: Bevel all edges, with countersunk screw holes. 3. Size a. 2 inches less in width than door width for single doors and 1 inch less for pairs of doors and height as follows: 1) Kick Plates: 10 inches, except where bottom rail is less than 10 inches, extend to within 1/2-inch of panel mold or glass bead. 4. Automatic Door Bottoms a. Surface type with aluminum housing cover, anodized clear finish. b. Provide with rubber, vinyl, or neoprene seal. C. Fabricate for actuation by opening and closing of door. 5. Metal Thresholds a. Conformance: ANSI A156.21 b. Exterior doors: Extruded aluminum type as scheduled. C. Where required, modify thresholds to receive projecting bolts of flush bolt exit devices. d. Thresholds for doors accessible to handicapped: Raised thresholds, corrugated, beveled with slopes not exceeding 1:2, and with height not exceeding 1/2-inch. Bevel not required where height is less than 1/2-inch. 6. Rain Drips a. Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.07 inch thick, clear anodized. b. Door sill rain drips: 1-1/2 inches to 1-3/4 inches high by 5/8-inch projection. C. Overhead rain drips: approximately 1-1/2 inches high by 2-1/2 inches projection; extend 2 inches on door opening width. 7. Aluminum Housed Type Weatherseals a. Extruded aluminum retainers not less than 0.07 inch wall thickness with vinyl, neoprene, silicone rubber, polyurethane or vinyl brush inserts. b. Finish: Clear anodized. 8. Smoke Gasketing a. Compression -type seal, silicon based, self-adhesive product for use on steel door frames with wood or steel doors for 20-minute label. b. Color: Bronze 1. Accessories 1. Special Tools: Provide special tools such as spanner and socket wrenches and dogging keys, required to adjust hardware items. J. Fastenings 1. Provide proper type, size, quantity, and finish with each article of hardware. 2. Concrete or Masonry: Provide machine screws and expansion shields. 3. Fastenings exposed to weather and in finished work: brass, bronze, or stainless steel. 03878505 08/05 HARDWARE 08710 - 6 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 K. Fire Door Hardware 1. Conform to requirements of NFPA 80 and NFPA 101. L. Finishes 1. Painting of primed surfaces: Specified in Section 09900 - Painting. 2. Conform to ANSI Al56.18 as follows: a. Hinges: BHMA 626 or 630 b. Lock and door trim: BHMA 626 or 630. C. Door closers: BHMA 630 or BHMA 689 painted. d. Miscellaneous hardware: BHMA 630 e. Aluminum housed weatherstripping: BHMA 673 f. Thresholds: 673 3. Door Protection Plates: BHMA 630. M. Keying 1. Provide a master keying system. 2. Key locks in sets or subsets. 3. Send keys directly from lock manufacturer to Owner by registered mail or other approved means. 4. Supply keys in following quantities: a. 3 keys for each lock b. 2 master keys C. 2 control keys and 5 extra cylinder cores 5. Furnish keys to Owner arranged in sets or subsets as scheduled. 6. Provide a key cabinet conforming to BMHA. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Locate in accordance with DM 04 and DIE 05 recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames and DHI Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Custom Steel Doors andFrames. 2. Install in accordance with DI-02. 3. When approved, slight variations in locations or dimensions will be permitted. 4. Attach door control devices for exterior doors such as closers and holders to doors with thru bolts such as sex bolts and nuts. 5. Conform to 36CFR Part 1191 for positioning requirements for handicapped. B. Door -Closing Device 1. Install and adjust in accordance with templates and printed instructions supplied by manufacturer. 2. Insofar as practicable, mount closer on room side of door for doors opening to or from halls and corridors. C. Key Control Storage System 1. Install where directed by Architect. 03878505 HARDWARE 08710 - 7 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 3.3 D. Kick Plates 1. Install kick plates on push side of single -acting doors. E. Auxiliary Hardware 1. Install lever extension flush bolts at top and bottom of inactive leaf of pairs of doors. 2. Install dust -proof floor strike or threshold, cut-out for bottom bolt F. Thresholds 1. Install in a bed of sealant with stainless steel screws and expansion shields. 2. Provide proper clearance and an effective seal with specified weather stripping. 3. Minimum screw size: #10, length dependent on job conditions. G. Weatherseals 1. Locate as indicated, snug to door face and fastened in place with color matched metal screws after door and frames have been finish painted. 2. Install to exclude light and air flow when door is in closed position. 3. Provide astragal seals at pairs of doors. 4. Screw spacing: as recommended by manufacturer. H. Gasketing 1. Install at inside edge of hinge, head and latch side of door frame. I. Hardware for Labeled Fire Doors 1. Install in accordance with requirements of NFPA 80 AND NFPA 105. HARDWARE SCHEDULE SET # 1 All hardware to be provided by Aluminum Door Supplier except as noted below. Door no. 05 Each door to have: 1 ea. Cylinder E09211 Balance of hardware by door supplier. Door no. 06 Each door to have: 1 1/2 pr. Hinges A8112 1 ea. Pull J401 1 ea. Push Bar J501 1 ea. Stop L02101 1 ea. Kickplate 3 ea. Silencers 1 ea. Closer CO2021 03878505 08/05 SET #2 SET #3 HARDWARE 08710 - 8 .......... ..... .........__........................................ LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 Door no's. 02, 7A, and 22 Each door to have: 1 1/2 pr. Hinges A8111 1 ea. Panic Device Type 01, Function 08 with lever, (lock cylinder not required). 1 ea. Closer CO2021 1 ea. Stop L02101 1 ea. Kickplate 1 set Smokeseals 1 ea. Automatic Door Bottom 3 ea. Silencers SET #4 Door no. 09 Each door to have: 1 1/2 pr. Hinges A8112 1 ea. Closer CO2021 at door No .07, CO2011 at door no. 17. 1 ea. Lockset F86 1 ea. Stop L02251 1 ea. Kickplate Plate 3 ea. Silencers SET #5 Door no's. 14, 17, 04, and 08 1 1/2 pr. Hines A8112 1 ea. Passage Set F75 (Lockset F86 o@ 04 only) 1 ea. Closer CO2011; CO2021 at door no. 08 1 ea. Stop L02251 1 ea. Kickplate Plate 3 ea. Silencers SET #6 Door no. 11 Pair to have: 3 pr. Hinges A8111 NRP 1 ea. Lockset F86 1 pr. Flushbolts L04081 2 ea. Overhead Holders C08511 2 ea. Kickplates 2 ea. Stops L02131 03978505 HARDWARE 08/05 08710 - 9 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1 ea. Head and Sill Raindrip 1 ea. Threshold J32100 1 set Weatherstrip SET #7 Door no. 12 Pair to have: 3 pr. Hinges A8112 1 ea. Lockset F86 1 ea. Flushbolts 2 ea. Holders 2 ea. Armor Plates, mount on inside 2 ea. Kickplates, mount on outside 2 ea. Automatic Door Bottoms 2 ea. Silencers 1 set Weatherstripping SET #8 Door no's. 0 1 B and 07B Each door to have: 1 1/2 pr. Hinges A8111 NR.P 1 ea. Lockset F81 1 ea. Closer CO2021 1 ea. Kickplate 1 ea. Head and Sill Raindrip 1 ea. Stop L02131 1 ea. Threshold J36190 with Vinyl Bubble 1 set Weatherstrip - Door no's. 20 and 07 Each door to have: 1 1/2 pr. Hinges A8111 1 ea. Push Plate 1 ea. Pull J401 and plate 1 ea. Closer CO2021 1 ea. Kickplate 3 ea. Silencers 1 ea. Stop L02101 03878505 08/05 SET #9 HARDWARE 08710 - 10 i LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SET #11 Door no's. 01 and 0 1A -Overhead Doors All hardware by door supplier. SET #12 Door no's. 30 - This includes a total of 30 doors. Each door to have: 1 1/2 pr. Hinges Ag 111 1 ea. Deadbolt F 18 3 ea. Silencers END OF SECTION L [ji J, 03878505 HARDWARE 08710-11 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.8 SECTION 08800 GLAZING PART 1- GEN\TERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Monolithic glass. 2. Insulating glass. 3. Mirror glass. 4. Glazing accessories. B. Types of work in this section include work for: 1. Exterior windows. 2. Interior windows. 3. Exterior storefront. 4. Aluminum entrances. 5. Exterior doors. 6. Mirrors. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Exterior Glazing: Provide glazing assemblies which will withstandnormal conditions without failure, loss of weathertightness, or deterioration. 1. Design to withstand wind loading as specified by applicable code for parts/portions of buildings. a. Statistical probability of breakage: 8 per 1000, maximum, at 60-second wind load. B. Deterioration includes: 1. For insulating glass: a. Moisture or dirt between panes. b. Development of condensation between panes. C. Damage to internal coating, if any. d. Development of other visible indication of seal failure. 2. For coated glass: Development of visible defects in coating. C. All glass shall conform to the International Energy Code, 2000. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data. B. Samples of Glass. 03878505 GLAZING 08800 - 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.8 C. Certification by contractor, installer, glass fabricator, or manufacturer that glass thiclmess and heat treatment have been selected to provide the strength required to meet specified structural performance requirements. D. Insulating Unit Warranty. E. Weathertight Warranty. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Warranty on Insulating Glass: Fabricator's standard warranty for 5 years. 1. Weathertight warranty: 5 years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 N IANUFACTURERS Where product names are indicated, comparable products of the manufacturers listed will be considered for substitution. A. Manufacturers: 1. Insulating glass units: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. AFG Industries, Inc. b. Cardinal IG Company. n C. Falconer -Lewistown, Inc. d. Guardian Industries Corporation. e. HGP Industries, Inc. f. Inde-Pane, Inc. g. Spectrum Glass Products, Inc. h. Tempglass Division/Indal Ltd. - i. Viracon, Inc. 2. Miscellaneous glass: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Cardinal IG Company. - b. Ford Glass Division/Ford Motor Company. C. Guardian Industries Corporation. d. HGP Industries, Inc. e. Libbey-Owens-Ford Company. f. Saint Gobain. g. Spectrum Glass Products, Inc. h. Tempglass Division/Indal Ltd. i. Viracon, Inc. �. 3. Spandrel glass, ceramic coated: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered - acceptable: a. Guardian - Jamestown. b. HGP Industries, Inc. C. Tempglass Division/Indal Ltd. d. Viracon, Inc. r 03878505 GLAZING 08800 - 2 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATIOINT NO.8 4. Laminated glass: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Falconer -Lewistown, Inc. b. Globe Amerada Glass Company. C. Guardian Industries Corporation. d. Tempglass Division/Indal Ltd. e. Viracon, Inc. 2.2 GLASS TYPES A. Glass Types - General: Provide glass types fabricated of the glass products indicated. 1. Exterior glass thickness: 6 mm (1/4 inch nominal), minimum. 2. Interior glass thickness: 6 mm (1/4 inch nominal), unless otherwise indicated. 3. Heat treatment for exterior glass: As recommended by glass manufacturer to provide strength necessary to resist specified loads. a. Exception: Safety glazing requirements supersede this strength requirement. 4. Cut tempered glass to size and shape and drill holes prior to tempering. 5. Cut or drill holes in laminated units. 6. Grind exposed edges smooth, using methods recommended by manufacturer. B. Glass Type I - 1 : Sealed insulating units. 1. Product: Opaque Insulating Spandrel Glass. 2. Total thickness: 1 inch, nominal. 3. Exterior pane: Opaque tempered glass a. Fully tempered glass b. Color: Solar gray 1) Fret and opacifier on 2nd surface. 4. Interior pane: Opaque tempered glass. a. Fully tempered. b. Color: Solar gray. C. Fret on 3rd surface. 5. Winter U-value: 0.10, maximum. 6. Summer U-value:.10, maximum. C. Glass Type I - 2: Sealed insulating units. 1. Total thickness: 1 inch, nominal. 2. Exterior pane: Low -emissivity coated glass. a. Fully tempered float glass. b. Color: Solar gray. 3. Interior pane: Low -emissivity coated glass. a. Fully tempered float glass. b. Color: Solar gray. 4. Light transmittance: 60 Percent daylight, 75 percent solar. 5. Shading coefficient: 0.65. 6. Reflectance: 33 percent daylight, 28 percent solar. 7. Winter U-value: 0.19 maximum. 8. Summer U-value: 0.10 maximum. D. Glass Type I-3: Sealed insulating, non -tempered units (same as Type I-2, except not tempered). E. Glass Type S - 1 : Wired glass. 1. Fire -resistance rated. 2. Product: Pattem-diamond. 03878505 GLAZING 08800 - 3 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.8 F. Glass Type M - 1 : Mirror glass. 1. Two-ply laminated glass with 0.030-inch-thick interlayer. a. Silvered on second surface. 2. Thickness: 5/16 inch. 3. Color: Clear. 4. Edge treatment: Ground. G. Glass Type L-1: Clear laminated. 1. Two or three ply laminated glass with 0.030-inch thick interlayer. 2. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 3. �'.olor: Clear. H. Glass Type A-1: Overhead Door 1. Acrylic Insulated. 2. Color: Tinted gray. 3. Thickness: 5/8 inch minimum. 4. Per overhead door manufacturer's standard. 2.3 BASIC GLASS PRODUCTS A. Sealed Insulating Units: Factory -assembled multiple panes separated by and sealed to spacers forming air -tight, dehydrated air space(s). 1. ASTM E 774, Class A. 2. Spacer seals: Manufacturer's standard. B. Float Glass: Quality q3, unless otherwise indicated. 1. For mirrors: Quality ql or q2. 2. Annealed: ASTM C 1036, Type I. 3. Heat -strengthened: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS, Type I. 4. Fully tempered: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Type I. a. Tong marks are permitted if they will be concealed in glazing channel. C. Laminated Units: Multiple plies laminated together with interlayer, using heat and pressure, without air pockets or contaminants between plies. 1. Interlayer for all -glass units: Polyvinyl butyral sheet, specifically designed for lamination and with demonstrated long-term ability to maintain physical and visual properties under installed conditions. D. Reflective Glass: Float glass, coated as indicated. E. Wired Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type 11, Class 1, Quality q8. 1. Fire -resistance rated where indicated. F. Mirror Glass: Float glass, with minimum 4-layer coating consisting of silver, copper, and 2 heat -cured protective coats; tested in accordance with FS DD-M-411. 1. Fabrication: Always use gloves when handling mirror glass. a. Fabricate in the shop; avoid mechanical and chemical damage to backing. b. Seal edges immediately after fabrication with coating recommended by backing coating manufacturer. C. Wash fronts, backs, and edges with clean water immediately after fabrication. 2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Installation Materials - General: Select products which have appropriate performance characteristics as recommended by glass and glazing materials manufacturers and which are compatible with all materials with which they will come into contact. 03878505 GLAZING 08800 - 4 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATIONT NO.8 B. Heel and Toe Bead Sealant: Noncuring, nonskinning, minimum 75 percent solids, butyl or polyisobutylene rubber, complying with 802.3, Type Il ductile back bedding compound, as described in AAMA 800. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Comply with recommendations for installation contained in the FGMA "Glazing Manual" and "Sealant Manual" except when specifically not recommended or prohibited by the glass or glazing material manufacturer; comply with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Protect glazing from edge damage during handling and installation. C. Do not install glass that has edge damage or defects that reduce glass strength or performance or diminish appearance. 3.2 GLAZING IN FRAMES A. Use the following glazing methods in the locations indicated in other specification sections: 1. Compression gaskets, both sides. B. Use continuous heel or toe bead at all exterior glazing. C. Do not block weep holes. D. Compression Gaskets: Secure gaskets so they will not work out under normal movement. 1. Install so they fit tightly at comers, allowing for stretch during installation. 3.3 MIRROR INSTALLATION A. Install mirrors in accordance with the recommendations of the mirror manufacturer and with FGMA "Glazing Manual." 1. Do not install mirrors having any damage to backing coating. 2. Do not install until all other work in the area is complete. 3. Do not install until permanent HVAC systems are in operation. 4. Do not install in areas where airbome solvents or heavy duty cleaners are being used; ventilate areas thoroughly after use before installing mirrors. 5. Do not install over recently installed plaster, masonry, concrete, or paint. 6. Install with at least 3/16-inch space between back surface of mirror and substrate. 7. Mount plumb; provide shims or spacers if required. 8. Mount adjacent pieces in the same plane. END OF SECTION t. 03878505 GLAZING 08800 - 5 08/05 m z 0 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 09220 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal furring and lathing. B. Portland cement plaster system. C. Smooth surface finish. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing: Structural metal studding and framing behind plaster base. B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. C. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Systems: Metal Studding and Framing. D. Section 09900 - Painting: Applied surface finish. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM B 221 - Aluminum and Aluminum - Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wires, Shapes and Tubes. B. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement. C. ASTM C206 - Finishing Hydrated Lime. D. ASTM C847 - Metal Lath. E. ASTM C897 - Aggregate for Job -Mixed Portland Cement -Based Plasters. F. ASTM C926 - Application of Portland Cement -Based Plaster. G. ASTM C954 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.33 inches to 0.112 inches in thickness. H. ASTM C1002 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases. I. ASTM C1063 - Installation of Lathing and Furring for Portland Cement -Based Plaster. J. PCA (Portland Cement Association) - Plaster (Stucco) Manual. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Fabricate vertical elements to limit finish surface to 1/240 deflection under lateral point load of 100 lbs. B. Fabricate horizontal elements to limit finish surface to 1/360 deflection under superimposed dead load and wind uplift loads. 03878505 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data 1. Provide product data on furring, lathing components, structural characteristics, plaster materials, characteristics and limitations of products specified. 2. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Certificates 1. Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements. D. Samples 1. Submit two samples, 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating finish color and texture. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lather 1. Company specializing in metal furring and lathing work with 3 years documented experience. 2. Perform work in accordance with ASTM C1063. B. Plasterer 1. Company specializing in cement plaster work with 3 years documented experience. 2. Apply cement plaster in accordance with ASTM C926. C. Mock-up 1. Construct mock-up, 2 feet long by 2 feet wide, which includes furring, lathing, plaster finish, color, substrate, incidental flashings, sealants, and other components. Coordinate with installation of associated work of Sections 05400 and 09260. 2. Locate where directed. 3. Accepted sample shall be kept at project site until completion of all work of this section. 4. Mockup may not remain as part of the Work. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply plaster when substrate or ambient air temperature is less than 50 degrees F nor more than 80 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of plaster and until cured. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Finish Stucco 1. El Rey Stucco Co., Inc.; Albuquerque, N IM. 2. La Habra Products, Inc.; Anaheim, CA. 3. United States Gypsum; Chicago, IL. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 03878505 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 2 08/05 R1, LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 2.2 MATERIALS A. Studs, and Tracks: As specified in Section 05400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing and 09260 - Gypsum Board Systems. B. Furring Channels: ASTM C 1063, hot or cold rolled steel; rust inhibitive paint finish, 3/8 inch deep x 3/4 inch high; length as required. C. Lateral Bracing: Formed steel, rust inhibitive paint finish; minimum 16 gage thick; size and length as required. D. Metal Lath: ASTM C847; Rust inhibitive primer, self furring mesh 2.51b/sq yd backed with treated paper at horizontal surfaces only. E. Wire Mesh Reinforcement: 2 x 2 inch galvanized steel 24 gage wire, woven mesh, self-fiu-ring type. F. Casing Bead: Formed sheet steel zinc coated, minimum 26 gage; depth governed by plaster thickness; maximum possible lengths; expanded metal flanges, with square edges. G. Comer Bead: Formed zinc, minimum 26 gage thick; depth governed by plaster thickness; maximum possible lengths; expanded metal flanges, with radiused edge. H. Base Screed: Formed zinc; minimum 26 gage thick; depth governed by plaster thickness; maximum possible lengths; expanded metal flanges, with beveled edge. I. Comer Mesh: Formed zinc, minimum 26 gage thick; expanded flanges shaped to permit complete embedding in plaster; minimum 2 inches wide. J. Control Joint: Formed zinc, minimum 26 gage thick; accordion profile, 2 inch expanded metal flanges each side; zinc finish. K. Reveal Molding: Formed zinc„ minimum 26 gage thick; of profile indicated on drawings, expanded flanges shaped to permit complete embedding in plaster; minimum 2 inches wide; galvanized finish. L. Vent Screed: Formed zinc, minimum 26 gage thick, solid keying flanges, depth governed by plaster thickness; maximum possible lengths; with integral vent slots; acceptable Product: Delta Star Inc. model #SVV. M. Anchorage Methods: Nails, staples, or other approved metal supports, of type and size to suit application, galvanized to rigidly secure lath and associated metal accessories in place. N. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I Portland. O. Lime: ASTM C206, Type S. P. Aggregate: In accordance with ASTM C897. Q. Color Pigment: Mineral oxide type. R. Water: Clean, fresh, potable and free of mineral or organic matter which can affect plaster. 2.3 PLASTER MIXES A. Mix and proportion base -coat cement plaster in accordance with ASTM C926, Type P, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Finish Coat 1. Premix in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Add color pigments to finish coat in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Ensure uniformity of mix and coloration. C. Mix only as much plaster as can be used prior to initial set. D. Mix materials dry, to uniform color and consistency, before adding water. E. Protect mixtures from freezing, frost, contamination, and evaporation. F. Do not retemper finish coat mixes after initial set has occurred. 03878505 08/05 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify surfaces and site conditions. B. Masonry: Verify joints are out flush and surface is ready to receive work of this Section. Verify no bituminous or water repellent coatings exist on masonry surface. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Dampen masonry surfaces to reduce excessive suction. B. Clean concrete surfaces of foreign matter. Clean surfaces using acid solutions, solvents, or detergents. Wash surfaces with clean water. C. Roughen smooth concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Install lathing and furring for Portland cement plaster work in accordance with ASTM C1063 and the following: B. Wall and Furred Space Framing 1. Specified in Sections 05400 and 09260. 2. Erect wall furring by directly attaching to concrete masonry. 3. Establish control joints with specified joint device. C. Ceiling and Soffit Framing 1. Install furring to height indicated after above ceiling work is complete. 2. Install ceiling furring independent of walls, columns, and above ceiling work. 3. Place furring channels perpendicular to carrying studs, not more than 2 inches from perimeter walls, and rigidly secure. 4. Reinforce openings in suspension system which interrupt main carrying channels or furring channels with lateral channel bracing. Extend bracing minimum 24 inches past each opening. 5. Laterally brace suspension system. 6. Establish contraction and control joints with specified joint device. 7. Splice laps in main and furring in conformance with ASTM C1063. D. Lathing 1. Apply metal lath taut, with long dimension perpendicular to supports. 2. Lap ends minimum 1 inch. Secure end laps with tie wire where they occur between supports. 3. Lap sides of diamond mesh lath minimum 1-1/2 inches. 4. Attach metal lath to metal soffit framing in accordance with ASTM C1063. Space attachments at maximum 6 inches on center. 5. Attach metal lath to metal studs with Type S, corrosion resistant, pancake head screws complying with ASTM C954. Space screws at maximum 8 inches on center. E. Accessories 1. Continuously reinforce internal angles with comer mesh, return metal lath 3 inches from comer to form the angle reinforcement; fasten at perimeter edges only. 2. Place comer bead at external wall comers; fasten at outer edges of lath only. 3. Place strip mesh diagonally at comers of lathed openings. Secure rigidly in place. 03878505 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 4 08/05 if LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 4. Place 4 inch wide strips of metal lath centered over junctions of dissimilar backing materials. Secure rigidly in place. 5. Place casing beads at terminations of plaster finish. Butt and align ends. Secure rigidly in place. F. Control Joints 1. Locate exterior control joints as indicated on reflected ceiling plan and elevations. 2. Establish control joints with specified joint device. 3. Coordinate joint placement with other related work. 3.4 PLASTERING A. Apply plaster in accordance with ASTM C926 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply scratch coat to a nominal thickness of 3/8 inch, brown coat to a nominal thickness of 3/8 inch, and a finish coat to a nominal thickness of 1/8 inch over metal lathed surfaces. C. Moist cure brown coats. Apply brown coat immediately following initial set of scratch coat. D. After curing, dampen base coat prior to applying finish coat. E. Apply finish coat and wood float to a smooth and consistent finish. F. Avoid excessive working of surface. Delay troweling as long as possible to avoid drawing excess fines to surface. G. Moist cure finish coat for minimum period of 48 hours. H. Tempering of finish -coat plaster is prohibited. 3.5 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. EN ID OF SECTION 0.3878505 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 5 08/05 W 0 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS PART I -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreements, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. UUITUI A. Section Includes: 1. Metal support systems. 2. Acoustic insulation. 3. Gypsum wallboard. 4. Drywall finishing. 5. Cementitious Backer Units. B. Related Sections: 1. Cold -formed metal framing: Division 5. 2. Painting: Elsewhere in Division 9. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 36-93 -- Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard; 1993. B. ASTM C 475-93 -- Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board; 1993. C. ASTM C 645-94 -- Standard Specification for Non -Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board; 1994. D. ASTM C 754-88 -- Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw -Attached Gypsum; 1988. E. ASTM C 840-94 -- Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 1994. F. ASTM C 919-84(88) -- Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications;1984 (Reapproved 1988). G. ASTM C 1002-93 -- Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases; 1993. H. ASTM E 119-88 -- Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials; 1988. 1. Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL); 1994. J. GA-214-90 Recommended Specification: Level of Gypsum Board Finish; Gypsum Association; 1990. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for systems required, including installation instructions and data sufficient to show compliance with requirements. 03878505 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09260 - 1 08/05 H LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Provide installation by a company specializing in work similar to that required on this project and with not less than 5 years of documented experience. B. Regulatory Requirements: At locations indicated on drawings, provide fire -rated assemblies tested in accordance with ASTM E 119 and acceptable to authorities for ratings required. Provide assemblies as listed in the following: 1. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.'s (UL) "Fire Resistance Directory." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original and unopened packages, containers, or bundles, with brand names and manufacturer's labels intact and legible. B. Store materials in dry location, fully protected from weather and direct exposure to sunlight. C. Stack gypsum board products flat and level, properly supported to prevent sagging or damage to ends and edges. D. Store comer bead and other metal and plastic accessories to prevent bending, sagging, distortion, or other mechanical damage. 1.7 PROTECT CONDITIONN'S A. Environmental Conditions: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations, whichever are more stringent. For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 deg F (4 deg C). For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 48 hours before application and continuously after until dry. Do not exceed 95 deg F (35 deg C) when using temporary heat sources. Ventilate building spaces as required to dry joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during hot, dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly. B. Ventilation: Provide controlled ventilation during joint finishing operations, to eliminate excessive moisture. Avoid drafts during hot, dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too quickly. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FRAMING MATERIALS A. General: Select size and gage of framing members and establish spacing to comply with requirements of ASTM C 754 unless otherwise specifically indicated. B. Studs and Tracks: ASTM C 645, steel with protective coating. 1. Nominal depths: As indicated on drawings. C. Ceiling Channels: ASTM C 754, cold -rolled or hot -rolled steel, with rust -inhibitive finish. D. Deflection Track: Galvanized sheet steel, 25 gage thick, C shaped with minimum 3 inch legs, offset 5/8 inch at midpoint. Track equal to "Shadow Line" design by Fire Track. E. Grid Suspension System: Manufactured steel direct -hung grid ceiling suspension system with interlocking main beam and cross -furring components, complying with requirements of ASTM C 645. F. Hanger Wire: ASTM A 641, soft, Class 1 galvanized. 1. Furring channel ties: Minimum 0.048 inch diameter (18 gage) wire. 03878505 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09260 - 2 08/05 N LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 G. Hanger Rods and Flats: Mild steel, galvanized or coated with a rust -inhibitive paint. H. Furring Members: ASTM C 645, steel with protective coating. 1. Hat -shaped except as otherwise indicated. 2. C-shaped studs, in locations indicated. I. Furring Fasteners/Connectors: Manufacturer's recommended system for specific application indicated, complying with ASTM C 754. J. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: 1. Dale/Incor. 2. Dietrich Industries, Inc. 3. Gold Bond Building Products, a National Gypsum Division. 4. Marino/Ware 5. Unimast, Inc. (formerly a part of USG). 6. USG Corporation. 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD A. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36; maximum lengths available to minimize end -to -end butt joints in each area receiving finished gypsum board. 1. Regular, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Edges: Tapered. B. Thicknesses: As indicated on drawings for each application. C. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: 1. Centex American Gypsum Company. 2. Domtar Gypsum. 3. Georgia-Pacific Corporation. 4. Gold Bond Building Products, a National Gypsum Division. 5. USG Corporation. 2.3 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, provide trim and accessories by manufacturer of gypsum board materials, made of galvanized steel or zinc alloy and configured for concealment in joint compound. 1. Include comer beads, edge trim, and other trim units necessary for project conditions. Provide accessories as required in order to achieve details indicated, whether or not specific accessories are shown on the drawings. B. Exposed Trim: At locations indicated, provide manufacturer's standard metal trim units designed to be left exposed or semi -exposed. 2.4 JOINT TREATMENT A. General: Provide products by manufacturer of gypsum boards. Comply with ASTM C 475 and with manufacturer's recommendations for specific project conditions. B. Joint Tape: Manufacturer's standard paper reinforcing tape. 03878505 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09260 - 3 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 C. Drying Type Joint Compound: Vinyl -based type for interior use, and as follows: 1. Taping compound: Type specifically formulated for embedding tape and accessories and for prefilling. 2. Topping compound: Type specifically formulated for finishing drywall over taping compound. 2.5 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNITS (GLASS MESH MORTAR UNITS) A. Proprietary backing units with glass fiber mesh reinforcing and water-resistant coating on both faces, complying with the following requirements: 1. Cement -Coated Portland Cement Panels: High -density portland cement surface coating on both faces and lightweight concrete core composed ofportland cement and expanded ceramic aggregate; fabricated in panels 7/16-inch thick by 36 inches wide by 36, 48, 60, 64, or 72 inches long and weighing 3.2 to 3.8 psf. 2. Vinyl -Coated Portland Cement Panels: Core formed in a continuous process from aggregated portland cement slurry and reinforced with vinyl -coated woven glass fiber mesh embedded in both surfaces, with one face smooth and other textured; fabricated in panels 1/2-inch thick and by 36 inches wide by 48, 60, and 72 inches long; and weighing 3 lbs psf. B. Mortar Unit Finishing Materials: Tape and joint compounds as recommended by manufacturer of cementitious backer units. C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, cementitious backer units which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Wonder -Board; Modulars Inc. 2. Durock Tile Backer Board; Durabond Div., USG Industries, Inc. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide miscellaneous materials as produced or recommended by manufacturer of gypsum products. B. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I; unfaced semirigid mineral fiber mat; thickness 2 1/2". C. Screws: ASTM C 1002; self -drilling type; lengths as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. D. Acoustical Sealants: ASTM C 919; nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning type for concealed locations; nonoxidizing, skinning type for exposed locations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Inspection: Verify that project conditions and substrates are appropriate to begin installation of work of this section. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorage devices for suspended ceilings/soffits, verifying that spacing and rated strength are correct for anticipated load conditions. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF METAL FRAMING 03878505 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09260 - 4 08/05 0 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 A. General: Comply with provisions of ASTM C 754 and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation except where exceeded by other requirements. B. Steel Studs: 1. General: Install tracks and studs in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as follows: a. Stud spacing: As indicated on drawings. 2. Door openings. Comply with GA-214; reinforce openings as required for size and weight of doors, using a minimum of two side -by -side studs on each side of opening. a. At openings in fire -rated partitions, comply with requirements of governing authorities for framing. 3. Partition heights: Extend studs above of suspended ceiling. 4. Blocking and bracing: Install blocking and bracing as recommended by manufacturer for adequate support of wall -mounted items installed as work of other sections. C. Deflection Track: Provide deflection track at top of all full height partitions. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216 except where exceeded by other requirements. 1. Wherever possible, install gypsum board to minimize butt end joints. 2. Apply ceiling boards prior to installation of wallboards. Arrange to minimize butt end joints near center of ceiling area. 3. Install wallboards in a manner which will minimize butt end joints in center of wall area. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of walls. 4. Butt all joints loosely, with maximum of l/16 inch between boards. 5. Place wrapped edges adjacent to one another; do not place cut edges or butt ends adjacent to wrapped edges. 6. Support all edges and ends of each board on framing or by solid substrate, except that long edges at right angles to framing members in non -fire -rated construction may be left unsupported. 7. In double -layer ceiling work, apply base layer with long edges perpendicular to framing members, with face layer in opposite direction, and with all joints offset. 8. In double -layer wall applications, apply base layer with long edges parallel to framing members, with face layer in opposite direction, and with all joints offset. B. Isolation Joints: Where gypsum board construction intersects structural components, provide isolation by stopping board a minimum of 1/4 inch from structure, for finishing by means of exposed or semi -exposed trim. C. Installation on Metal Framing and Furring: 1. Single -layer application: Install gypsum board by means of screw attachment. a. On walls and partitions, plan installation so that leading edge or end of gypsum board is attached to open end of stud flange first. 2. Double -layer application: a. Install base layer by means of 1-inch screws, spaced at 24 inches on center. b. Install face layer by means of screws at least 3/8 inch longer than total thickness of gypsum board layers, spaced at 12 inches on center. 3. For fire -rated construction, install gypsum board by means of screws as specified for the tested assembly. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES 03878505 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09260 - 5 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 A. General: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for installation of trim items. Except for items intended by manufacturer to be left exposed or semiexposed, install trim units for concealment in joint finishing compound. Wherever possible, fasten metal trim items to substrate with same fasteners used to install gypsum board products. B. Comer Bead: Install metal comer bead at all external corners unless details clearly indicate its omission at specific locations. C. Edge Trim: Install edge trim at locations indicated and wherever edge of gypsum board otherwise would be exposed. 3.6 FINISHING A. General: Comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216 except where exceeded by other requirements. 1. Do not mix joint compounds except as specifically recommended by manufacturer. B. Finish gypsum board in accordance with the following level of finish per GA-214, except where indicated otherwise on the drawings: 1. Level 3: Embed tape in joint compound at all joints and interior angles. Provide two separate coats of compound at alljoints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Provide smooth surfaces free of tool marks and ridges. C. Joint Treatment: Tape and finish joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for compounds used, using proper hand tools designed for the purpose. 1. Avoid raising nap of face paper when sanding; carefully sponge down any areas roughened by sanding process. D. Penetrations: Fill cutouts and openings around fixtures and penetrations with joint compound. 3.7 CLEANING A. Promptly remove any residual gypsum drywall materials from adjacent or adjoining surfaces, leaving spaces ready for subsequent finishing operations and decorating. END OF SECTION 03878505 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09260 - 6 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 09300 TILE PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Unglazed ceramic mosaic tile. 2. Glazed wall tile. 1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Rated Construction: At locations indicated, provide fire -rated assemblies tested per ASTM E 119 and acceptable to governing authorities for designated fire ratings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data. B. Samples - Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color selection boards of actual tile materials including a complete selection of available tile colors and finishes for each tile type indicated. Include samples of accessory materials requiring color selection. 1.5 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Furnish not less than 2 percent of total product installed maintenance stock for each type, color, pattern, and size of tile product installed. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS - GENERAL A. Ceramic Tile Standard: ANSI A137.1. 1. Tile grade: "Standard Grade," unless noted otherwise. 2. Tile trim and accessories: Match color and finish of adjoining flat tile. 2.2 TILE PRODUCTS A. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile, Factory -Mounted Flat Tile: 1. Tile body: Porcelain. 2. Surface finish: Slip -resistant with abrasive contact. 3. Nominal facial dimensions: 1 inch by 1 inch. 4. Thickness: 1/4 inch nominal. 03878505 TILE 08/05 09300 - 1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 5. Surface configuration: Plain with cushion edge. 6. Colors: Selected by architect, after contract award, from manufacturer's standard colors. 7. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. American Olean Tile Company. b. Dal -Tile Corporation. C. Mannington Ceramic Tile. d. Winburn Tile Manufacturing Company. B. Glazed Wall Tile; Flat Tile: 1. Nominal facial dimensions: 4-1/4 inches by 4-1/4 inches 2. Thickness: 5/16 inch, nominal. 3. Surface configuration: Plain with cushion edges. 4. Mounting: Prefabricated back -mounted. 5. Colors: Selected by architect, after contract award, from manufacturer's standard colors. 6. Trim units: Match color and finish of adjacent flat tile: a. Shapes and sizes: Manufacturer's standard, as indicated; coordinated with indicated size and coursing of adjacent tile, where applicable: 1) Corner bead. 2) Bullnose. 3) Surface bullnose. 4) Cove. 5) Base. 7. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, grill be among those considered acceptable: a. American Olean Tile Company. b. Buchtal Corporation USA. C. Dal -Tile Corporation. d. Florida Tile Industries, Inc. e. International American Ceramics. f. Mannington Ceramic Tile. g. Porcelanosa USA. h. Quamagra Tile, Inc. i. Summitville Tiles, Inc. j. United States Ceramic Tile Company. C. Tile Accessories: Vitreous china accessories in color and finish selected by architect after contract award. 1. Soap holder for each shower. 2.3 STONE THRESHOLDS A. General: Fabricate to size to provide transition between tile floor and adjacent floor surface. B. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503. 1. White, honed marble; Marble Institute of America Group "A." 2.4 SETTING MATERIALS A Portland Cement Mortar Installation Materials: ANSI Al08.IA. 1. Setting bed reinforcing: Galvanized welded wire fabric, 2 inches by 2 inches, ASTM A 185; with W0.3 by W0.3, 0.0625 inch diameter, wire, ASTM A 82 except for minimum wire size. 03878505 TILE 09300 - 2 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 B. Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI Al 18.1. 2.5 WATERPROOFING MATERIALS A. Waterproof Membrane/Adhesive: One -part trowel -applied urethane waterproofing and tile -setting adhesive. 2.6 GROUTING MATERIALS A. Commercial Portland Cement Grout: ANSI Al18.6. 1. Colors: Selected by architect, after contract award, from manufacturer's standards. B. Chemical -Resistant Epoxy Grout: ANSI Al 18.3. 1. Service temperature: Product recommended and certified by manufacturer to resist anticipated ambient temperature range, but not less than 140 F degrees on a continuous basis. 2. Colors: Selected by architect, after contract award, from manufacturer's standards. 2.7 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS A. Compatibility: Provide sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates for project performance conditions. B. Urethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade P; Class 25; Uses T, M, and A. 1. Color: Match tile grout color in adjacent tile joints. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Filler for Tile: Proprietary compound designed for filling unglazed tile to prevent staining. # B. Tile Cleaner: Product specifically acceptable to tile manufacturer and grout manufacturer for application indicated and as recommended by National Tile Promotion Federation or Ceramic Tile Institute. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Tile Installation Standard: ANSI Al08 series, for setting and grouting materials listed. B. Installation Methods: Comply with TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for type of applications indicated. C. Install waterproofing to comply with waterproofing manufacturer's instructions as necessary to result in a watertight installation. D. Stone Thresholds: Install at locations indicated, with same setting material as adjacent field tile. 1. Install with thinset mortar where thick mortar bed would be exposed above adjacent floor finish. 3.2 TILE APPLICATIONS A. Interior Floor, Thick -Bed: 1. Tile: Unglazed ceramic mosaic. 2. Installation method: 03878505 TILE 09300 - 3 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 a. Concrete subfloor: TCA F112. b. Install fluid-applied/adhesive type waterproof membrane in accordance with TCA F121. C. Mortar bed: Portland cement mortar, ANSI A108.1A. d. Install tile with specified grout in accordance with TCA F114. e. Bond coat: Latex portland cement bed ANSI 118.4. 3. Grout: Commercial latex portland cement, ANSI 118.6. B. Interior Masonry Wall, Thin -Bed: 1. Tile: Glazed wall. 2. Installation method: a. Masonry: TCA W202. b. Bond coat: Latex portland cement mortar, ANSI Al 18.4. 3. Grout: Commercial latex portland cement, ANSI Al 18.6. C. Interior Gypsum Board Wall 1. Tile: Glazed wall. 2. Installation Method: a. Water Resistant Gypsum Board Units: TCA W242. b. Bond Coat: Organic Adhesive, ANSI A136.1. 3. Grout: Commercial Latex Portland Cement - ANSI A118.6. D. Shower Ceilings, Thin Bed: 1. Tile: Glazed Wall 2. Installation Method a. Cementitious Backer Units: TCA W244 b. Bond Coat: Latex portland cement mortar, ANSI A 118.4. 3. Grout: Commercial latex portland cement �.. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean tile surfaces after installation is complete. 1. Tile filler: Clean and dry file before applying filler. Apply filler at rate and by method recommended by filler manufacturer to achieve complete coverage and a uniform color over entire tile area. B. Protection: Apply neutral protective cleaner to tile after installation if recommended by tile manufacturer. Overlay completed file installation with kraft paper for protection from .� subsequent construction activities. END OF SECTION 03879505 TILE 09300-4 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 09511 ACOUSTICAL LAY-Vi CEILINGS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exposed suspension system. 2. Acoustical lay -in panels. B. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Metal deck hanger clips. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product data. B. Samples: Submit the following: 1. Selection samples: a. Acoustical units: Minimum 6-inch-square samples of acoustical units meeting the requirements of the specification for each type specified. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. In a timely manner, furnish to affected installers, attachment devices for incorporation into other work. B. Do not begin installation of ceiling system until building's normal operating temperature and humidity levels have been reached and will be maintained. 1.5 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: After ceiling installation has been completed, deliver to the owner replacement materials for materials installed. Furnish products which precisely match installed products. Protect with appropriate packaging and provide clear, legible labels. 1. Acoustical lay -in panels: Furnish full-sized panels in quantities not less than 2 percent of quantity of panels installed. 2. Elements of exposed suspension members: For each distinct type of exposed element, furnish quantities not less than 2 percent of quantity installed. 03878505 ACOUSTICAL LAY -IN CEILINGS 09511- 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS - GENERAL A. Standard for Acoustical Ceiling Units: Provide units conforming to applicable requirements of ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials. B. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: 1. Mineral fiber acoustical units: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Celotex Corporation. C. USG Corporation. 2.2 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS - GENERAL A. Attachment Devices for Suspension System: 1. Anchors and intermediate support members: Provide sizes capable of sustaining 5 times the load -carrying capabilities shown in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung" column. 2. Deck inserts and hanger clips: Fabricate from hot -dip galvanized steel. 3. Hanger wire: Zinc -coated (galvanized) carbon steel wire, ASTM A 641, soft temper, with Class 1 coating, minimum 12 gage (0.106 inch diameter). B. Edge Moldings and Trim: C. Manufacturer: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: 1. Exposed steel suspension system: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation. C. WAVE Worthington Armstrong Venture (formerly National Rolling Mills). d. USG Corporation. 2.3 LAY -IN ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM 1 A. Acoustical Panels: Water felted, rigid mineral fiber boards: 1. Size: 24 by 24 inches. 2. Ceiling attenuation class: 35-39. 3. Noise reduction coefficient: Minimum NRC 0.65 — 0.75. 4. Edge profile: Square. 5. Finish: Manufacturer's standard washable latex paint. 6. Color: White. 7. Face texture/pattern: Random Fissured (ASTM E 1264 Pattern D). 8. Acceptable products: USG Acoustone Medium Texture. B. Exposed Grid: Formed, hot -dip galvanized steel with special corrosion -resistant painted finish. 1. Profile: Single -web tee, 15/16 inch wide. 2. Structural classification (ASTM C 635): Intermediate -Duty System. 3. Color and texture: White color to match ceiling panels; standard smooth texture. t� 03878505 ACOUSTICAL LAY -IN CEILINGS 09511 - 2 08/05 l� ................ 0 1 I LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 2.4 LAY -IN ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM 2 A. Ceiling Panels: Gypsum board with sealed edges, formulated especially for ceiling application in humid environments; 5/8 inch thick. 1. Size: 24 by 24 inches. 2. Finish: Unperforated vinyl film. 3. Color: White. B. Exposed Grid: Same as specified for the preceding lay -in acoustical ceiling system. 2.5 LAY -IN ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM 3 A. Acoustical Panels: Water felted, rigid mineral fiber boards: 1. Size: 24 by 24 inches. 2. Ceiling sound transmission class: Minimum CSTC 40. 3. Noise reduction coefficient: Minimum NRC 0.55. 4. Finish: Perforated vinyl film. 5. Color: White. 6. Acceptable product: USG Orion. B. Exposed Grid: Formed, hot -dip galvanized steel for concealed portion of grid; painted, formed aluminum for exposed portion. 1. Profile: Single -web tee, 15/16 inch wide. 2. Structural classification (ASTM C 635): Intermediate -Duty System. 3. Color and texture: White color to match ceiling panels; standard smooth texture. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that products furnished as work of this section, but not installed under this section, have been properly installed by the entity performing the installation. 3.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Conform to the requirements of ASTM C 636, manufacturer's installation instructions, and governing regulations. 2. Install hangers plumb and supported solely by building structure or carrying channels. Do not allow hangers to contact any objects or materials in ceiling plenum which are not actual components of ceiling system. a. Do not attach hangers to piping, conduit, or duct. Provide carrying channel trapeze support where obstruction cannot be avoided by splaying hanger 45 degrees from vertical or less. 3. Level ceiling suspension system to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet, with cumulative tolerance not to exceed 1/4 inch. Bending or kinking of hangers is not allowed. 3.3 TRIM INSTALLATION A. Install edge moldings and trim units at acoustical ceiling borders, at locations indicated, and where required to cover acoustical unit edges. 1. Face -riveting of trim and moldings is not allowed. 03878505 ACOUSTICAL LAY -IN CEILINGS 09511 3 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 3.4 LAY -IN PANEL INSTALLATION A. Panel Installation: Install acoustical panels for accurate fit with suspension system and trir members. Scribe and cut panels at ceiling perimeter and at obstructions to provide neat, precis fit. 1. Square -edge panel installation: Provide installation with panel edges which are hidde. from view, by suspension members or trim. 3.5 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide two full cartons extra quantity of each type of acoustic units installed to the Owner' Representative at location designated END OF SECTION 03979505 ACOUSTICAL LAY -IN CEILINGS 09511 - 4 08105 1 ................. LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient tile flooring. 2. Resilient sheet flooring. 3. Resilient base. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit technical data from each manufacturer of resilient products required. B. Verification Samples: Submit samples of each type, color, and pattern of resilient product required, as follows: 1. Actual tiles. 2. Cut sections of sheet flooring, not less than six inches square. 3. Cut sections of resilient flooring accessories, not less than six inches in length. 4. Other materials requested by architect. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: At least 48 hours prior to beginning work, move resilient flooring materials to areas of installation and maintain at minimum 70 degrees F until 48 hours after completing installation and at minimum 55 degrees F thereafter. B. Sequencing: Do not begin installation of resilient flooring products until painting has been completed for each area. C. Existing Conditions: Do not install resilient flooring on concrete substrates until testing has been conducted to assure that moisture levels are acceptable. I�•�u lall"—i L ] A. Extra Materials: At time of completing installation, deliver stock of maintenance materials to the owner. Furnish products matching those actually installed, packaged for storage and clearly labeled. 1. Resilient tile: 2 percent of each variety installed. 2. Resilient sheet: 2 percent of each variety installed, in full roll width. 3. Resilient base: 2 percent of each variety installed. 03878505 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 1 08/05 �a LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TILE FLOORING MATERIALS A. Solid Vinyl Tile: FS SS-T-312B, Type III. 1. Size: 12 inches by 12 inches. 2. Gage: 1/8 inch. 3. Static Load Limit: 125 pounds per square inch. 4. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Amtico Flooring Division/American Biltrite, Inc. b. TOLI B. Vinyl Composition Tile: FS SS-T-312, Type IV; 12 inches by 12 inches. 1. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Amtico Flooring Division/American Biltrite, Inc. b. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. C. Azrock Industries Inc. d. Kentile Floors Inc. e. Tarkett, Inc. 2. Composition 1: Free of asbestos. 3. Gage: 1/8 inch. 2.2 SHEET FLOORING MATERIALS A. Resilient Sheet Flooring : Inlaid vinyl sheet; filled vinyl surface layer with plastic foam backing, and other requirements as follows: 1. Total thickness:.85 inch minimum. 2. Wearlayer thickness: 0.050 inch minimum. 3. Sheet width: 72 inches minimum. 4. Static load limit: 125 pounds per square inch minimum. 5. Durability = Superior 6. Heat welded with welding rod factory cut from flooring material with color and matrix to match flooring. 7. Random Chip Blend. 8. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Lonseal, Inc. b. Tarkett, Inc. C. Armstrong Commercial Flooring (Classic Corlon) 2.3 RESILIENT BASE MATERIALS A. Rubber Wall Base: FS SS-W-40, Type I, and as follows: 1. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Burke Industries, Inc. b. Flexco Company. C. Johnsonite, Inc. a �3 03878505 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 2 08105 t� LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 d. The R. C. Musson Rubber Company. e. Roppe Corporation. 2. Height: 4 inches. 3. Style: Standard toe base. 4. Comers: Preformed or molded units matching base in color and finish. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES A. Resilient Edge Strips: Solid rubber or vinyl edging, in tapered or rounded profile, nominally 1 inch in width and 1/8 inch in thickness. 1. Color: Matching flooring. B. Adhesive: Type recommended by manufacturer of resilient product for specific substrate conditions. 2.5 COLORS AND PATTERNS A. Provide colors and patterns of resilient flooring materials as selected by the architect from manufacturer's standard product line. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with manufacturer's published recommendations for installation in each area, extending resilient flooring into spaces which are partially concealed. Cut and fit tightly to fixtures, pipes, and other obstructions, as well as to walls and partitions. B. Tightly adhere resilient flooring to substrate with no open joints or cracks, and without raised or blistered areas. Spread adhesive evenly, so that final installation will be without telegraphed markings from adhesive or substrate. 3.2 TILE INSTALLATION A. Layout: Establish center of each space and lay tile from center point, so tiles at each edge will be not less than 1/2 the and equal in width. B. Matching: In each space, use tiles from same production run, and lay tiles in same sequence as removed from cartons. Discard broken, chipped, or otherwise damaged tiles. 1. Lay file square to room axis, unless indicated otherwise. 2. Lay file with pattern in adjacent tiles oriented in opposite directions. 3.3 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION A. Layout and Matching: Establish optimum use of material with minimum number of seams in each space. Match patterns carefully at seams, following manufacturer's directions. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF RESILIENT BASE A. Apply resilient base securely in locations indicated, using maximum lengths available. 03878505 RESILIENT FLOORING _ 09650 - 3 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 3.5 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES A. Resilient Edge Strips: At locations shown on drawings, or where otherwise required to protect edge of resilient flooring, install resilient edge strips securely with recommended adhesive, to achieve tightly butted joint. 3.6 CLEANING A. Initial Cleaning: Remove excess and waste materials promptly, and sweep or vacuum clean resilient flooring as soon as installation has been completed in each area. After adhesive has had adequate time to set, mop each area with damp mop and mild detergent. B. Final Cleaning: Remove scuff marks, excess adhesive, and other foreign substances, using only cleaning products and techniques recommended by manufacturer of resilient products. 1. Polish: Apply protective polish to clean resilient flooring surfaces, unless manufacturer of resilient product recommends otherwise. 3.7 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide one box of each color of tile installed and 50 lineal feet of base installed to the Owner's Representative at location designated. EN ID OF SECTION 03878505 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 4 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 09680 CARPET PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit technical data for each distinct type of carpeting material and accessory indicated. B. Initial Selection Samples: For each carpet type indicated, submit manufacturer's standard samples showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. 1.2 PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS A. Fire Performance: Provide carpet materials capable of meeting the following requirements when tested in accordance with methods indicated, by UL (Underwriters Laboratories Inc.) or other independent testing agency acceptable to governing authorities. 1. Methenamine pill test (ASTM D 2859): Passes. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Take measures as required to ensure materials are not damaged or deformed. Store products in flat position in properly ventilated, dry space. Use suitable means to prevent materials from lying in direct contact with the ground. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Extra Materials: After carpet installation has been completed, deliver to the owner replacement carpeting in quantities not less than 2 percent for each distinct carpet color, pattern, and type installed. Extra materials furnished must precisely match materials installed, must be wrapped in suitable packaging, and must be clearly labeled. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Tufted Carpet: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: 1. The Blacknall Company. 2. Collins & Aikman Corporation. 3. The Harbinger Company. 4. J & J Industries, Inc. 5. Interface Flooring Systems, Inc. 6. Lees Commercial Carpets Division/Burlington Industries, Inc. 7. Milliken Contract Carpets. 8. Mohawk Carpet Corporation. 9. Stevens Carpet a. 03878505 CARPET 09680 -1 08/05 _f LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 2.2 MATERIALS A. Carpet: 1. Location: Per Room Finish Schedule and Floor Plan. 2. Color/texture/pattern: To be selected from full range of samples. 3. Carpet construction: Tufted broadloom. 4. Pile fiber: Nylon. 5. Style: Level loop. 6. Pile face weight: Minimum 32 ounces per square yard. 7. Installation method: Direct glue -down. 8. Edge guard: Vinyl or rubber. 9. Performance characteristics: a. Fire hazard classification (ASTM E 84/UL 723/NFPA 255): 1) Class B: Flame spread 26-75, smoke developed 0-450. b. Average critical radiant flux (ASTM E 648/NFPA 253): Minimum 0.22 wattper square centimeter. C. Smoke density with flame (ASTM E 662): Less than 450. d. Smoke density without flame (ASTM E 662): Less than 450. e. Static electricity generation (AATCC 134): 3.5 kilovolts when tested at 20 percent relative humidity and 70 degrees F. f. Colorfastness to light (AATCC 16): Slight fade from 5 to 4 on Gray Scale after 60 hours exposure. g. Density: 5,000 minimum. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Provide accessories recommended by carpet manufacturer. B. Rubber Edge Guard: Minimum width of anchorage flange 2 inches, size and shape indicated, colors selected by the architect from manufacturer's standards. C. Rubber Threshold: Edge strip type threshold at carpet termination at doors. Color as selected- D. Carpet Installation Adhesive: Manufacturer's recommended water-resistant adhesive manufactured for use with type of carpet and substrates indicated, and complying with fire performance requirements indicated for carpet. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Perform installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where project conditions require extra precautions or provisions to ensure satisfactory performance of the work. 1. Maximize consistency of carpet appearance, particularly in terms of lay of pile and its direction. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for placement of seams. 2. Continue carpet into recessed spaces such as closets, and underneath obstacles with open bases. B. At door openings, orient carpet seam perpendicular to traffic direction; doorway seam must be located directly underneath door in closed position. 3.2 INSTALLATION - GLUE -DOWN CARPET 03878505 CARPET 09680 - 2 08/05 ......... ............. ........... ........ LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 A. Before applying adhesive to substrate, prefit carpet in areas where it is to be installed. Where cutting is necessary, provide properly prepared, straight, and unfrayed edges. B. Install prefitted carpet; butt edges snugly at seams and against vertical obstructions. 1. Stretch carpet tightly over substrate, so that it lies flat, is uniformly smooth, and free of bulges. C. Install edge guards at exposed carpet edges unless indicated otherwise; provide secure attachment to substrate. D. Immediately remove adhesive from surface of carpet by method which will not damage carpet. 3.3 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide 120 square feet of each type of carpeting installed to Owner's Representative at location designated. 03878505 08/05 END OF SECTION CARPET 09680 - 3 LU13BOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1- General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Surface preparation. B. Surface finish schedule. C. Color selection schedule. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 09910 - Graffiti Resistant Coating. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM D16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products. B. ASTM D2016 - Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood. C. SSPC - SP1- Solvent Cleaning. D. SSPC - SP2 - Hand Tool Cleaning. 1.5 DEFINITIONS A. Conform to ANSI/ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing quality paint and finish products with five years experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with five years documented experience. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1. Provide product data on all finishing products. 2. Submit manufacturer's standard printed application instructions. B. Samples 1. Submit two samples 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating range of colors and textures available for each surface finishing product scheduled, for selection. 03878505 PAINTING 09900 - 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 C. Certificates 1. Submit paint manufacturer's certificate(s) stating the following: a. Paints for interior use contain no mercurial mildewcide. b. Paints for interior use contain no insecticide. C. Paints for interior use contain no more than 0.06 percent lead. d. Paints proposed for use meet the VOC regulations of the local Air pollution District having jurisdiction over the geographical area in which the project is located. D. Field Samples 1. Provide field sample panel, 48 inches long by 48 inches wide, illustrating special coating color, and finish. 2. Locate where directed. 3. Accepted sample may remain as part of the Work. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptance. C. Container labeling to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. D. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F. and a maximum of 90 degrees F., in well ventilated area, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion. 1.9 ENr'VIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient temperatures above 45 degrees F. for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after application of finishes, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is above 50 percent, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F. for interiors; 50 degrees F. for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. D. Minimum Application Temperature for Vanish and Synthetic Finishes: 65 degrees F. for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Provide lighting level of 80 ftcandles measured mid -height at substrate surface. 1.10 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide a one gallon container of each color to Owner at location designated. B. Label each container with color and room locations, in addition to the manufacturer's label. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Glidden Coatings and Resins Co., Cleveland, OH. B. Kelly -Moore Paint Co., Inc., San Carlos, CA. C. PPG Industries, Inc., Pittsburgh, PA. 03878505 PAINTING 09900 - 2 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 D. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Coatings 1. Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Process pigments to a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating. 2. Good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 3. Compatible with existing coatings in renovation areas. B. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve finishes specified, of commercial quality. 2.3 FINISHES A. Refer to schedule at end of Section for surface finish schedule. B. The schedule is based on the products of Glidden Coatings and Resins Co. follows: No. Product Name (ICI Paint) Type 1. 1030 PVA Primer/ Sealer Latex 2. 1310 Ultra -Hide Prime-n-Finish Alkyd 3. 1370 Spraymaster DTG Alkyd -Flat 4. 1416 Ultra -Hide Enamel Latex -Semi Gloss 5. 1516 Ultra -Hide Wall & Trim Enamel Alkyd, Semi -Gloss 6. 1582 Spray Master Dryfall Alkyd -Eggshell 7. 1600 Woodpride Stain Alkyd - Oil 8. 1802 Woodpride Interior Varnish Aquacrylic-Satin 9. 2000 Decra-Shield exterior primer Acrylic -Latex 10. 2406 Decra-Shield Acrylic -Semi -Gloss 11. 2516 Ultra -Hide Durus Exterior Enamel Alkyd -Semi -Gloss 3010 Ultra -Hide Block Filler Vinyl Acrylic 12. 4000 Bloxfil Block Filler Acrylic 13. 4160 Devguard Tank & Structural Primer Alkyd 14. 4206 Devflex Acrylic Waterborne Acrylic, Semi -Gloss 15. 63245 Traffic Paint Acrylic No. Product Name (Kelly -Moore) Type 1. 70 Kel-Guard Synthetic Rubber C. Dry mill film thickness (DMFT) indicated is minimum acceptable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. 03878505 PAINTING 09900 - 3 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 C. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below following maximums: 1. Plaster: 12 percent. 2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent. 3. Interior Located Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. 4. Exterior Located Wood: 12 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. B. Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this Section. C. Shellac and seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes. D. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. E. Asphalt, Creosote, or Bituminous Surfaces Scheduled for Paint Finish: Remove foreign particles to permit adhesion of finishing materials. Apply latex based compatible sealer or primer. F. Insulated Coverings: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton. G. Concrete Floors: Remove contamination, acid etch, and rinse floors with clear water. Verify required acid -alkali balance is achieved. Allow to dry. H. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. I. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry. J. Plaster Surfaces: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces. K. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease, scale, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after repairs. L. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. M. Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Finish: Wipe off dust and gritprior to priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. N. Wood and Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting: Seal top and bottom edges with primer. 0. Previously Painted Surfaces 1. Thoroughly clean of all grease, dirt, dust or other foreign matter. 2. Remove blistering, cracking, flaking, peeling or other deteriorated coating. 3. Roughen slick/glossy surfaces. 4. Repair damaged areas such as but not limited to nail holes, cracks, chips and spalls with suitable materials to match adjacent areas. 5. Feather edges of chipped paint and sand smooth. 03978505 PAINTING 09900 - 4 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 Prepare surfaces using methods SP 1 or SP 2. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. B. Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this Section. C. Furnish drop cloths, shields, and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings from disfiguring other surfaces. D. Remove empty paint containers from site. 3.4 APPLICATION A. Paint, Stain and Varnish 1. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. 3. Apply each coat to uniform finish. 4. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved. 5. Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish. 6. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied. 7. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface. 8. Prime back surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork with primer paint. 9. Prime back surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits. 3.5 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Paint shop primed equipment. B. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. C. In finished spaces, prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, except where items are prefinished. D. Pre -finished Grilles and Registers: Where directed paint pre -finished grilles and registers to match wall surface in which they occur. E. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted accidentally. F. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint, to limit of sight line. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers and grilles to match face panels. G. Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas, whether or not pre - finished. H. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before installing equipment. I. Color code equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed ductwork in accordance with requirements indicated. Color band and identify with flow arrows names and numbering. J. Replace electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings removed prior to finishing. 3.6 CLEANING A. As Work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered. 03878505 PAINTING 09900 - 5 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 B. During progress of Work maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials, and debris. C. Collect cotton waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers and remove daily from site. 3.7 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide one gallon container of each color installed to the Owner's Representative at location designated. 3.8 SCHEDULE A. Exterior Surfaces Surface 1 st Coat (DMFT) 2nd Coat (DMFT) 3rd Coat (DMF) Traffic Striping 63245 (5.0) Metal Protection Dissimilar 61744 (2.5) 61774 (2.5) Metals; Metal to Concrete/Mortar Ferrous Metals 4160 (2.0) 2516 2516 Bollards, Exposed Lintels, Misc. Metal Doors, Frames 4160 (2.0) 2516 (2.0) 2516 (2.0) and Equipment Galvanized Metals 4160 (2.0) 2516 (2.0) 2516 (2.0) Louvers & Ducts Misc. Wood 2000 (2.1) 2406 (1.4) 2406 (1.4) B. Interior Surfaces Surface 1 st Coat (DMFT) 2nd Coat (DMFT) 3rd Coat (DMF) Concrete Concrete Floors 70 (1.0) 70 (1.0) Concrete Masonry (CMU) 3010 Varies 1416 (1.4) 1416 (1.4) Room No's 12, 18 and 29 4000 4206 (2.5) 4206 (2.5) Plaster 03878505 PAINTING 09900 - 6 08/05 b LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.8 Metal Decking Primed 1582 1582 Ferrous Metals Bar Joists 4160 (2.0) 1582 1582 &Beams (Exposed) Doors and Frames, 4160(2.0) 1516 (2.0) 1516 (2.0) Railings, Equipment Galvanized Metal Ducts, 1370 1516(2.0) 1516(2.0) [ Louvers, **or** Piping, 4160 (2.0) Vents Gypsum Drywall All spaces. 1030 (1.1) 1416 (1.5) 1416 (l.5) s Wood Drawer 1802 (1.0) 1802 (1.0) & Cabinet Thin 50% Thin 25% Interiors Transp. Finish. Trim, Transp. 1600 Varies 1802 (1.0) 1802 (1.0) i Finish (Stained) Thin 50% Thin 25% Cabinets, Ext. 1600 Varies 1802 (1.0) 1802 (1.0) & Interiors Thin 50% Thin 25% Transp. Finish (Stained) Cabinets, Ext. 1310 (1.5) 1516 (1.4) 1516 (1.4) & Interiors Opaque Finish. Surface 1 st Coat (DMFT) 2nd Coat (DMFT) 3rd Coat (PUT) Wood Doors Stained & Transp. Finish 1600 Varies 1802 (1.0) 1802(1.0) Thin 50% Thin 50% END OF SECTION 03878505 PAINTING 09900 - 7 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 09910 GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement, Supplemental Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Graffiti resistant coatings. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Section Includes: Surface Preparation, Barrier or Primer Coat, and 2-Part GSS-10 Polymer Based Finish Coat to all exterior masonry vertical surfaces outside the fence line, and doors/frames unless specifically indicated otherwise. B. Applicator must contact the manufacturer directly for instructions regarding the specific combination of GSS products appropriate for the substrate. C. Refer to surface finish schedule in this section or on the drawings. D. Coordinate with Section 07180. Follow each manufacturer's recommendations. Notify architect of any potential conflicts. E. Related Work Described Elsewhere. 1. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry 2. Section 07180 - Water Repellents 3. Section 09900 - Painting 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's written technical information, including performance data, and installation recommendations, which demonstrate that comply with contract documents. B. Sample 1. Submit full size sample of the actual brick and CMU with product applied to two-thirds of the surface area. Provide a "flat" and a "semi -gloss" area over one-third of the surface for each type with the remaining third uncoated. Identify the 3 different areas. Obtain approval from architect before proceeding. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards 1. Current City of Los Angeles Approval. Must submit research report number. 2. American Society for Testing Materials. 03878505 GRAFFITI RESISTANTT COATING 09910 - 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 B. The manufacturer will designate one person who has been specifically trained and certified to oversee all phases of the project's application. The person will direct the application of the coatings and all work outlined in this section. C. Applicator will provide the specifier verification from the manufacturer that the project has been certified. D. Unless otherwise instructed, conform exactly to he manufacturer's written recommendations regarding the product's preparation, mixing, application and finish. E. All field coating is subject to verification or millimeter thickness. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTI S A. Conform to local or state Code or Regulations. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Warrant the application to perform as intended for a period of 10 years. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Freight Class is 55, Flammable UNI1263. B. Deliver products to the site in sealed and labeled containers. Inspect products before accepting. C. Container labels must include the manufacturer's name and type of coating as well as directions for surface preparation, application and cleanup. D. Store at a minimum of 40 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F in a well ventilated area. Prevent Barrier Coat from freezing. E. Take precautions to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not apply products during rain or when the relative humidity is such that condensation forms on the surface during application. B. Do not leave the GSS-10 containers in direct sunlight. Avoid applying coating in direct sunlight or when the temperature remains above 90 degrees F for more than four hours. C. Do not apply products outside when wind is over 10 mph. D. During application, the surface must be kept dry until coating is also completely dry. E. Mix materials in well ventilated areas. Remove all empty containers, waste and contaminated rags from the premises at the end of each working day. PART2-PRODUCTS MM 0 13" "'IN LIJ14%I Ua" A. Approved manufacturer is American Polymer Corporation. B. Approved product is The Graffiti Solution System consisting of the GSS Barrier Coat, the GSS-10 Graffiti Finish (Coating — Parts A and B) and the Erasol Spray Remover. C. For product information and application certification, contact the manufacturer: American Polymer Corporation at (801) 255-9505. (Refer to section 1.01, A-1 of this document). D. Bids will not be accepted from applicators who have not contacted the manufacturer for bidding, application and certification procedures. } i 03878505 GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATING 09910 - 2 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 E. For each submitted bid, the applicator must attach a letter of qualification issued by the manufacturer stating that the applicator is in compliance with this specification. F. Substitutions must be essentially identical products in order to be approved, and submitted for approval prior to the bid opening. All substitutions submitted after the bid opening will be rejected without consideration. 2.2 GENERAL A. Only use the product as produced by the manufacturer. B. For succeeding coats, use primers produced by the manufacturer. C. No thinning, reducing or changing of the product is permitted unless specifically authorized by the manufacturer. D. Provide and use Methyl Ethyl Ketone (MEK) for frequent cleaning of equipment. 2.3 FINISHES A. Finishes will be either flat, semi -gloss or one of the natural color spectrum. Finish schedule should be determined before any work begins. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that surfaces are ready for application as instructed by the manufacturer. B. Report any condition that may jeopardize a proper application. Do not start work until any and all concems are resolved. C. Start of application means the contractor has accepted the existing substrate conditions. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Surfaces should be completely dry and clean with no dust, dirt, oil, grease and other contaminants to prevent the coating from adhering to the surface. B. New concrete should be thoroughly cured before application. C. Glossy, glazed or slick troweled surfaces should be lightly etched or abraded before applying the coatings. D. Before work begins, painted surfaces must be approved for application by the manufacturer or its representative. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Do not allow the products to come in contact with building occupants, pedestrians, surrounding property, other surfaces or vehicles. B. Avoid applying the products during winds over 10 mph which may cause the materials to drift. C. While applying the products to occupied buildings, all windows, exterior air intakes and air conditioning vents must be covered. D. Air Handling equipment must be covered and shut down during the application until surfaces are visibly dry or the odor has dissipated. 3.4 APPLICATION 03878505 GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATING 09910 - 3 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 A. Applicator must follow the manufacturer's instructions for application of the recommended products and comply with the specification. B. Apply over water repellant specified in Section 07180. C. Apply to north wall of apparatus bay to a height of 8'-0" above finish grade at bottom of wall. 3.5 CLEANING AND TOUCH UP A. Clean application equipment with MEK immediately after each use. B. If the coating has begun to set and cannot be cleaned with MEK, use the GSS Erasol for cleaning. C. Clean all drips, runs and over spray while still wet. D. If the surface is clipped or damaged after the application is complete, a touch up coating of the GSS-10 should be applied immediately. 3.6 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide on full case of anti -graffiti resistant coating installed to Owner's Representative at location designated. END OF SECTION 03878505 GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATING 08/05 09910 - 4 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 09916 FINISH SCHEDULE PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Finish Schedule. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04200 — Unit Masonry. B. Section 09220 — Portland Cement Plaster. C. Section 09260 — Gypsum Board Systems. D. Section 09300 — Tile. E. Section 09511— Acoustical Lay -in Ceilings. F. Section 09650 — Resilient Flooring. G. Section 09680 — Carpet. H. Section 09900 — Painting. 1.4 GENERAL A. This section covers only the finishes of interior surfaces of floors, base, walls and ceilings as they relate to this project. Requirements for quality control and method of installation are covered in other appropriate sections of the specifications or in the drawings. Refer to the drawings for locations required. B. Color selections are indicated in other appropriate sections of the specifications or on the drawings. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FINISH SCHEDULE A. Walls 1. The Finish Schedule lists finishes for floors, base, walls, ceilings, ceiling heights and other remarks. B. Ceilings 1. System types noted in schedule are located in the appropriate section of the specifications. 03878505 FINISH SCHEDULE 09916 - 1 `, 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 2.2 FINISH SCHEDULE Room Walls Ceilings Miscellaneous Colors No Description Floor Base N E S W Type Ht (ft-in) Remarks Door Frame Millwork 101 APPARATUS BAY F3 - W3 W3 W3 W3 CI VARIES 1, 2 102 MULIT-PURPOSE F1/F2 B1 W4 W1 - W4 C3-3 9-0 103 KITCHEN F2 B1 - W1 W4 W4 0-3 9-0 104 OFFICE F2 B 1 W 1 W 1 W4 W 1 0-1 9-0 105 VESTIBULE F5 B1 W1 W4 W4 W1 0-1 9-0 106 HALL F2 B I WI W l W 1 WI 0-1 9-0 107 DORMITORY F2 B I WI WI W4/WI WI 0-1 9-0 108 WATER HEATER F3 - W4 W4 WI/W4 W1 0-1 9-0 109 WOMENS F2 132 W6 W6 W7/W8 W8 0-2 9-0 110 SHOWER F4 132 - W7 W7 W7 C2 7-4 3 III YARDSTORAGE F3 - W4 W4 W4 W4 C1 2 112 HOSE STOR/MUD RM F3 - I W4 W4 W4 W4 C 1 9-8 113 RINSE F3 - W4 W4 W4 W4 C1 114 RISER F3 - W4 W4 W4 W4 C1 2 115 LINEN 1`2 Bi W4 - W1 W1 0-1 9-0 116 HOSE DRYER F3 - W3 W3 W3 W3 0-1 9-4 117 ELECTRICAL F3 - W4 W4 W4 W4 C3-1 9-0 3 118 SHOWER F4 B2 W7 W7 W7 - C2 7-4 3 119 SHOWER F4 B2 W7 W7 W7 W7 C2 7-4 120 MENS F2 B2 W6/W8 W6 W8/W6 W8 0-2 9-0 121 OFFICERS QUARTERS F2 B 1 WI W 1 W 1 WI C3-1 9-0 122 EXERCISE F1 B1 W4 W1 W1 WI 0-1 9-0 123 HALL F2 B1 W4/WI W4/ Wl W4 W1/ W4 0-1 9-0 03878505 FINISH SCHEDULE 09916 - 2 08/05 m LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1. FLOOR 4. CEILINGS F 1 = CARPET Cl = PAINTED STRUCTURE F2 = RESILENT SHEET FLOORING C2 = CER TILE ON CEMENTITIOUS BACKER BOARD F3 = SEALED CONC W/ HARDENER C3 = ACOUSTICAL LAY -IN; REFER SECTION 09511 IN SPECS F4 = UNGLAZED CERAMIC MOSAIC TILE 1 = SYSTEM 1 F5 = SOLID VINYL TILE 2 = SYSTEM 2 3 = SYSTEM 3 2. BASE B I = 4" RESILIENT 5. REMARKS B2 = CERAMIC TILE (COVED) 1 CLG VARIES FROM 20'-4" TO 25'-8" 2 PNT ALL DUCT WORK, CONDUIT, J-BOXES, UNISTRUT BRACING 3. WALLS & PIPING, UNO W1 = GWB, PNT (LATEX, SG ENAMEL) 3 MARBLE THRESHOLD @ TRANSITION FROM CER TILE TO SHT VINYL W2 = NOT USED W3 = CMU, BLK FILLER, EPDXY PNT (SG) W4 = CMU, BLK FILLER, LATEX SG ENAMEL W5 = NOT USED W6 = CER TILE WAINSCOT TO NOM 4'-8"; CMU W/ BLK FILLER & EPDXY PNT FROM 4'-8" TO CLG W7 = CER TILE ON CMU W8 = CER TILE WAINSCOT ON MOISTURE RESISTANT GWB TO NOM 4'-8'; GWB, PNT, EPDXY FROM 4'-8" TO CLG END OF SECTION 03878505 FINISH SCHEDULE 09916 - 3 08/05 DIVISION 10 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 10170 SOLID COLOR REINFORCED COMPOSITE TOILET PARTITIONS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1- General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Solid color reinforced composite toilet compartments and urinal screens. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06114 — Wood Blocking and Curbing. B. Section 09250 — Gypsum Board Systems. C. Section 10800 - Toilet Accessories. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Austentic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. B. ASTM B221 - Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Shape and Tube. C. 36 CFR 1191 - Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevation views, dimensions, details of wall and floor supports, and door swings. C. Product Data: Submit data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories. D. Samples: Submit one illustrating panel finish, color, and sheen. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Coordinate the Work with placement of support framing and anchors in wall. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's 10 year warranty against breakage, corrosion, delamination and defects in workmanship. 03878505 SOLID COLOR REINFORCED COMPOSITE TOILET PARTITIONS 10170 -1 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Bobrick Washroom Equipment; Sierra Serves. B. Wilsonart; Gibraltar. C. Gerali; Custom Design; Privacy Plus. D. Shower Shapes; Ultimate Corian. E. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Toilet Compartments: Solid color reinforced composite panels, doors, and pilasters, floor - mounted headrail-braced. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturers full range of colors. B. Door and Panel Dimensions: 1. Thickness: 3/4 inch minimum. 2. Door Width: a. Standard Doors: 24 inch b. Handicap Accessible Doors: 36 inch, out -swinging. 3. Height: 58 inch 4. Thickness of Pilasters: 3/4 inch minimum. C. Pilasters 1. Thickness: 3/4 inch minimum. 2. Height: 72 inch. D. Urinal Screens: 1. Type: Wall mounted with continuous panel brackets. 2. Size: 24 inches deep x 48 inches high. 3. Solid color reinforced composite material. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Pilaster Shoe: Formed chromed steel with polished s finish, ASTM A666 Type 304 stainless steel with No. 4 finish, 3 inch high, concealing floor fastenings. Provide adjustment for floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles integral with pilaster. B. Head Rails: Hollow anodized aluminum tube, 1 x 1-5/8 inch size, with anti -grip profiles and cast socket wall brackets. C. Brackets: Polished stainless steel. D. Attachments, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel, tamper proof type. 1. For attaching panels and pilasters to brackets: Through -bolts and nuts; tamper proof. E. Hardware: Polished Stainless steel. 1. Pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning; two per door. 2. Nylon bearings. 3. Sliding door latch, requiring less than 5 lb force to operate. 4. Door strike and keeper with rubber bumper; mounted on pilaster in alignment with door latch. 5. Coat hook with rubber bumper; one per compartment, mounted on door. 6. Provide door pull for outswinging doors. 7. Provide metal heat sink at bottom of doors and partitions. I� ;i 03878505 SOLID COLOR REINFORCED COMPOSITE TOILET PARTITIONS 10170 - 2 ' 08105 j LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. C. Verify correct spacing of and between plumbing fixtures. D. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Maintain 3/8 to 1/2 inch space between wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters. B. Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices. C. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets. Locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines. D. Field touch-up of scratches or damaged finish will not be permitted. Replace damaged or, scratched materials with new materials. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances. B. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch. C. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16 inch. C. Adjust hinges to position doors in partial opening position when unlatched. Return out - swinging doors to closed position. D. Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane. 3.5 SCHEDULES A. Men!s 120: Two toilet stalls of floor mounted, head rail braced type; one urinal screen. END OF SECTION 03878505 SOLID COLOR REINFORCED COMPOSITE TOILET PARTITIONS 10170-3 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 10425 SIGNS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Dimensional letters and numbers. B. Provide signage as indicated on the drawings. C. Related Sections: 1. Temporary project signs: Division 1, 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM B 584-91 -- Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications; 1991. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit for each type of sign specified, including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes. B. Shop drawings: 1. Show fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections of typical members and other components. Show anchors, grounds, layout, reinforcement, accessories, and installation details. 2. Provide message list for each sign required, including large-scale details of wording and lettering layout. 3. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchors to be installed as a unit of Work in other Sections. 4. Templates: Furnish full-size spacing templates for individually mounted dimensional letters and numbers. C. Samples: 1. Submit manufacturer's full range of samples for initial selection of color, pattern, and texture. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication where necessary to ensure proper fitting. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. 03878505 SIGNS 10425 - 1 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign copy that complies with the requirements indicated for size, style, spacing, content, position, material, finishes, and colors of letters, numbers, and other graphic devices. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Coatings: Alloy and temper as recommended by sign manufacturer for type of use indicated and finish specified. B. Metal Fasteners: Use metals that are not corrosive to the sign material or mounting surface. C. Anchors and Inserts: Use nonferrous metal or hot -dipped galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled -in -place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. 2.3 FINISBES A. Colors and Surface Textures: For exposed sign material that requires selection of materials with integral or applied colors, surface textures or other characteristics related to appearance, provide color matches indicated, or if not indicated, as selected by the architect from the manufacturer's standards. 2.4 DIMENSIONAL LETTERS AND NUMBERS A. Cast Letters and Numbers: 1. Form individual letters and numbers by casting. 2. Produce characters with smooth, flat faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles, free from pits, scale, sand holes, or other defects. 3. Cast lugs into the back of characters and tap to receive threaded mounting studs. Comply with requirements indicated for finish, style, and size. 4. Metal: a. Aluminum. B. Finish: 1. Catalized Polyurethane, color as selected. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of the type described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Install signs level, plumb, and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance. 03878505 SIGNS 10425 2 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 B. Dimensional Letters and Numbers: 1. Mount letters and numbers using standard fastening methods recommended by the manufacturer for letter form, type of mounting, wall construction, and condition of exposure indicated. 2. Provide heavy paper template to establish letter spacing and to locate holes for fasteners. 3. Mount letters with back projected from wall surface 1/2". 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to the manufacturer's instructions. 1 Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Owner. END OF SECTION 03878505 SIGNS 10425 - 3 08105 i L LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 10505 METAL LOCKERS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Heavy duty metal lockers. B. Work Not Included: 1. Padlocks: Provided by the owner. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Heavy Duty: This term is used to designate a particular type of locker specified in this section, regardless of individual manufacturer designations. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data and installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts, dimensions, trim, fillers, and accessories. 1. Indicate installation and anchoring methods. 2. Show verified field measurements. 3. Show locker numbering scheme. C. Samples for Color Selection: Locker manufacturer's full range of colors. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Fit lockers neatly to actual construction; take field measurements before fabrication. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver lockers until spaces to receive lockers are clean and dry. B. Protect lockers from damage. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 LOCKER CONFIGURATIONS AND COMPONENTS A. Lockers: 1. Location: Apparatus Bay 2. Fully welded construction. 3. Heavy duty. 4. Single -tier. 5. Height: 72 inches, plus legs. 6. Width: 18 inches 7. Depth: 24 inches 8. Legs: 6 inches high. 03878505 METAL LOCKERS 10505 - 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 9. Doors: Expanded metal mesh. 10. Sides, bottoms and vertical dividers: Expanded metal mesh. 11. Shelves: Expanded metal mesh. 12. Top: Flat. 13. Door handles. 14. Shelf. 15. Two wall hooks. 2.2 HEAVY DUTY LOCKERS A. Provide all heavy duty lockers and accessories by one manufacturer. 1. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. American Locker Security Systems, Inc. b. Art Metal Products Division/Fort Knox Storage. C. List Industries Inc. d. Penco products, Inc. e. Republic Storage Systems Co., Inc. B. Components: 1. Frames: 16 gage steel sheet channels or 13 gage steel angles, minimum. 2. Legs: Extend vertical frame members or attach gusset -type legs of not less than 14 gage steel sheet. 3. Tops: 16 gage steel sheet, minimum. 4. Bottoms: 13 gage, 3/4 inch, flattened diamond steel mesh. 5. Horizontal dividers: 16 gage steel sheet, minimum. 6. Expanded metal sides and vertical dividers: 13 gage, 3/4-inch, flattened diamond steel mesh. 7. Backs: 13 gage, 3/4-inch, flattened diamond steel mesh. 8. Expanded metal doors: 13 gage, 3/4-inch flattened diamond steel mesh. 9. Door handles: Standard type. 10. Latching mechanism: Concealed in door, designed so that door can be closed while locked, with spring -loaded latches engaging beveled strikes on frame. a. Doors over 36 inches high: Three-point latching, minimum. C. Miscellaneous Components and Trim: 18 gage steel sheet, minimum. D. Fabrication: Weld all joints between frame members and weld sheet members to frame; weld latching mechanism and hinges to doors and frames; use no bolts or rivets. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: Cold -rolled, leveled mild steel. B. Expanded Metal Mesh: Steel, with 3/4-inch flattened mesh gages as indicated. C. Fasteners: Zinc-, cadmium-, or nickel -plated steel or stainless steel. 1. Exposed bolt heads: Tamperproof type. 2. For fastening moving components: Use lock washers or self-locking nuts. D. Hinges: 5-knuckle, nonremovable-pin hinges, of loop style with 2 full thicknesses in each leaf; minimum 2 inches high. 1. Minimum of 2 hinges per door. 2. Doors over 42 inches high: Three hinges. E. Standard Door Handles: Die-cast zinc alloy or chrome -plated steel latch lifter and padlock hasp, designed so that door can be closed while locked; pry -resistant. 03878505 METAL LOCKERS 10505 - 2 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 F. Interior Fittings: Cadmium- or zinc -plated steel or cast aluminum, except shelves. G. Number Plates: Aluminum, zinc alloy, or stainless steel; raised or recessed numerals at least 3/8 inch high. 1. Number lockers as directed by the architect. 2. Fasten to doors, centered near the top, using 2 fasteners. 2.4 FABRICATION - ALL LOCKERS A. Factory -fabricate and fully assemble lockers; do not knock down for shipping. B. Make lockers square with rigid joints, without dents or warped surfaces. 1. Exposed metal edges: Smooth off sharp edges and corners. 2. Exposed welds: Grind flush. 3. Door and frame fronts: No exposed bolts or rivet heads. 4. Where exposed holes for built-in locks are not used, cover holes neatly using permanent materials. C. Doors: Fabricate with flanged edges, reinforced if required for stiffness, and designed to open and close without springing. 1. Provide extra stiffeners for doors more than 15 inches wide. D. Legs: Provide means of fastening to curb. E. Expanded Metal Components: Weld edges to steel frames at not less than 6 inches on center; enclose sharp edges with frame. F. Miscellaneous Components: Provide all parts, filler panels, closures, clips, and fasteners required for a complete installation. G. Finishing: Pretreat and finish all surfaces, both exposed and concealed, except stainless steel, chrome, and aluminum. 1. Factory -finish all accessory components to match. 2. Pretreatment: Remove scale, rust, and contaminants; chemically degrease and phosphatize. 3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked -on enamel. 4. Color: As selected by the architect from manufacturer's standard range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean debris from under and behind lockers before installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install lockers plumb and level. B. Anchor lockers securely to substrates in manner recommended by manufacturer. 1. Use reinforcing plates and spacers as required to prevent metal distortion. 2. Provide anchors at not more than 48 inches on center. 3. Conceal fasteners wherever possible. C. Install accessory components with flush, tight joints using concealed fasteners. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors and latches for smooth operation. 03878505 METAL LOCKERS 10505 - 3 _ 08/05 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 3.4 CLEANING ' A. Clean and touch up finishes; if finish cannot be restored to original appearance, replace locker. B. Use only cleaning and touch-up materials recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 03878505 METAL LOCKERS 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 10521 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1- GENTERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Portable fire extinguishers. 2. Fire extinguisher mounting brackets. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL); 1993. B. NFPA 10 -- Standard For Portable Fire Extinguishers; National Fire Protection Association; 1994. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data showing compliance with contract documents. B. Certification: Installer shall submit written certification that the fire extinguishers installed comply with the contract documents and are fully and correctly charged. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide only fire extinguishers which comply with NFPA 10. B. Labels: Provide only fire extinguishers which are listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not deliver or install extinguishers until just before substantial completion. B. Do not use permanent fire extinguishers for construction period fire protection. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: 1. Fire extinguishers: a. Amerex Corporation. b. Ansul Fire Protection/A Grinnell Company. C. American Specialties, Inc. d. J.L. Industries e. Larsen's Mfg. Co. B. Fire Extinguishers: 1. Rating:4A:60B:C 03878505 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10521 - 1 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 2. Type: Multipurpose dry chemical (ammonium phosphate). a. Stored pressure type. 3. Wall mounted. C. Identification of Wall -Mounted Fire Extinguishers: Provide manufacturer's standard vinyl decal on wall above extinguisher. D. Brackets: Provide wall bracket for each wall -mounted extinguisher. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Perform installation in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where project conditions require extra precautions or provisions to ensure satisfactory performance of the work. B. Install extinguishers in locations indicated. C. Install brackets for wall mounted extinguishers at height indicated. 3.2 SCHEDULE Room # Extinguisher 101 Wall mtd. 102 Wall mtd. 107 Wall mtd. END OF SECTION 03878505 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10521 - 2 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 10810 TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Toilet paper dispensers. 2. Grab bars. 3. Robe hooks. 4. Mop and broom holders. 5. Mirrors. 6. Coat hooks. 7. Shower doors. B. Related Sections: 1. Shower Doors: Division 10. 2. Metal anchor reinforcement in walls: Division 6. 3. Wood anchor reinforcement in walls: Division 6. 4. Toilet compartments: Division 10. 5. Rough carpentry: Division 6. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 1036-91 -- Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 1991. B. FS DD-M-411C -- Mirrors, Glass; 1990. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Written technical information for each accessory specified. B. Certificates: Submit certification that work complies with requirements of contract documents. C. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: A company regularly engaged in manufacture of products specified in this section, whose products have been in satisfactory use, under similar service conditions, for not less than 5 years. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Execute product manufacturer's special instructions to prevent damage to products. Store products in manufacturer's original shipping containers. 03979505 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10810 - 1 09105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1.6 COORDINATION A. Use manufacturer's instructions and data to determine anchorage requirements for products specified. In a timely manner, distribute the following to affected installers of related work: 1. Components and anchorage devices provided by toilet accessory manufacturer for incorporation into other work. 2. Coordination data including setting drawings, templates, instructions, etc., for cutouts and installations. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: 1. A & J Washroom Accessories. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4. Bradley Corporation. 5. Franklin Brass Manufacturing Company. 6. McKinney/Parker, Inc., a Subsidiary of Essex Industries, Inc. 7. American Shower Door. 2.2 TOILET ACCESSORIES A. Regardless of whether or not the SCHEDULE at the end of this section has every toilet accessory scheduled for each room or shower, provide all components required to make each toilet or shower room functional based on accessories scheduled for similar spaces and the referenced codes. B. Toilet Paper Dispenser (TPD): 1. Description: a. Type: Double -roll. b. Spindleless unit, tension spring delivery, chrome -plated zinc alloy. C. Tissue roll size: 5 inches diameter. C. Grab Bar (GB): L Description: a. Stainless steel. b. Outside diameter: 1-1/2 inches. C. Wall thickness: Minimum 18 gage (0.050 inch). d. Grasping surface finish: Smooth, satin. e. Mounting: Exposed. f. Clearance between wall and inside of grab bar: 1-1/2 inches. D. Robe Hook (RH): 1. Double -prong type. E. Mop and Broom Holder (MBH): 1. Description: a. 18 gage (0.050-inch) stainless steel ASTM A 167, Type 304, hat -shaped channel. b. Holders: 4 spring -loaded rubber cam holders. C. Length: 36 inches. F. Mirror (MM): 03878505 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10810 - 2 08105 I' LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1. Description: a. Type: Stainless steel -framed mirror. b. Mirror material: Float glass 1/4 inch thick, ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality ql. Apply silvering, copper coating, and suitable protective organic coating to copper backing, and test mirror glass, in accordance with FS DD-M-411 C. C. Frame: Form frame using minimum 18 gage (0.050 inch) angle shapes. Provide welded, precisely -mitered comers. Grind welds smooth. d. Protection for mirror edges: Design frame to accept protective mirror -edging materials such as plastic, wood, etc. e. Backing system: Provide tamperproof backing system capable of preventing moisture buildup and providing rigid support for mirror material. Fabricate from full -mirror sized, minimum 22 gage (0.034 inch) galvanized steel sheet and nonabsorptive filler material. Do not use corrugated cardboard for filler. f. Hanger System: Provide tamperproof hanging system for rigid mirror installation: 1) One-piece spring -action locking device fabricated from galvanized steel and designed to support mirror of size indicated, without use of exposed fasteners. g. Frame finish: Number 4 satin polish. G. Towel Bars: Heavy duty, chrome plated (TB). H. Coat Hooks (CH): 1. Back plate with three hooks, heavy duty. I. Shower Dock (SHD): 1. 1/4 ' tempered glass meeting or exceeding ANSI 297.1 and 16 DFR 1201 category I and II. 2. Aluminum Frame: a. 6063 — T5 alloy. b. Silver color. 3. Hardware shall be aluminum with brite silver finish. J. Bench Pedestal: BP 1. Painted steel bench pedestal. 2. Acceptable Product: Recreonics, Inc.; Item #80-137; Recreonics, Inc., 800-428-3254. A. Mounting Devices and Fasteners: Provide toilet accessory manufacturer's recommended items for substrates and conditions indicated. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Manufacturer's Trademarks and Model Numbers: Neither name nor trademark of manufacturer is acceptable on exposed surfaces of accessories, unless approved by the architect. Permanently affix: manufacturer's name and model number to unexposed surface of accessory. B. Surface Mounted Accessories: Where possible, design accessory to provide concealed anchorage when installed. Precisely -fit seams and joints. Roll exposed edges unless indicated otherwise. Use full-length stainless steel piano -type hinges for access doors and panels. C. Recess Mounted Accessories: Design accessories to provide concealed anchorage when closed. Weld alljoints. Precisely miter comers where indicated. Use full-length stainless steel piano -type hinges for access doors and panels. 03878505 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10810 - 3 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Accessory Locations: Coordinate accessory locations with other work to avoid interference and to ensure proper operation and servicing of accessories. Notify the architect in writing of any conflicts concerning product placement, for resolution. Do not proceed without resolution. B. Correct unsatisfactory substrate conditions before start of accessory installation. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces to receive accessories. Protect surrounding elements from damage during accessory installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Perform installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where project conditions require extra precautions or provisions to ensure satisfactory performance of the work. B. Provide plumb, level accessory installations. C. Securely attach accessories to substrate. D. Accessories Installed for Use by Handicapped Persons: Install as indicated on drawings. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust accessories as required to provide smooth operation and trouble free servicing. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean and polish exposed surfaces of accessories using accessory manufacturer's recommended procedures and cleaning agents. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Provide coverings as required to protect installed accessories. 3.7 SCHEDULE Rm # TPD GB RH MBH MM TB CH SHD BP 109 1 3 1 1 1 112 1 . 118 1 1 1 1 - _.._._,. .. . ...... .................. _ 119 1 1 1 120 2 2 2 1 2 END OF SECTION 03878505 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10810 - 4 08/05 DIVISION 12 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 12511 HORIZONTAL LOWER BLINDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Horizontal louver blinds. 2. The locations of window treatment are indicated on the drawings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications describing features, colors, options, accessories, for each type of unit. 1. Include installation instructions and show how installation methods may differ for different openings and mounting substrates. B. Samples: 1. For color selection: Color charts showing full range of colors and finishes available. C. Certificates: For information only, submit manufacturer's written certification stating compliance with requirements for the following: 1. Physical properties indicated. D. Contract Closeout Submittals: 1. Operation and maintenance data: Include manufacturer's written operation and maintenance instructions. E. Warranty: For information, include specimen of manufacturer's written warranty. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer qualifications: A company manufacturing all components of products specified in this section which have performed in a satisfactory manner for at least 3 years. 2. Installer qualifications: Company specializing in fabrication and installation of specified products, with at least 2 years of experience fabricating and installing similar products. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name and location of installation. B. Store materials in dry area maintained at building's operating temperature and humidity. C. Follow manufacturer's instructions to prevent damage. 1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Do not install window treatment until wet and dirty work is complete. 03878505 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12511 - 1 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 A. Submit manufacturer's standard 2 year warranty, which shall not reduce or otherwise limit any other rights to correction which the owner may have under the contract documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HORIZONTAL LOWER BLINDS A. Head Rail: Formed steel channel section, enclosing tilt and lift mechanisms; minimum 24 gage sheet; long edges returned or rolled; with reinforcing as required for rigidity. 1. Enclose all hardware required for blind operation in headrail. 2. Finish rails the same color as louvers. B. Bottom Rail: Finish to match louvers. 1. Formed steel rail, designed not to twist or sag. 2. Curve top of rail to match louver radius. 3. Cap ends with plastic or metal caps; color to match rail. C. Louvers: Aluminum minimum 0.006 inch thick, curved cross-section with smooth round comers. 1. Width: As indicated; size other parts to fit. a. 1/2 inch (15 mm) nominal. 2. Design and space louvers to minimize light penetration when closed. D. Ladders: Hold louvers at correct spacing and angle in all tilt positions. 1. Braided polyester cord ladder; verticals of 0.04 to 0.07 inch diameter; horizontals ofnot less than 2 threads braided into verticals; spaced to prevent long-term louver sag, but not over 24 inches apart and not over 7 inches from ends of louvers. E. Tilt Mechanism: Hold louvers at any tilt angle despite normal building vibration; worm gear that disengages at limits of tilt with low friction tilter; provide drum at each ladder, linkage rod, and grommets for ladder and operating cords. 1. Tilt wand: Clear plastic, detachable; length as necessary to make operation convenient from floor level. F. Lift Mechanism: Lift cords of nylon or polyester with pulls; cord lock that holds bottom rail securely at any level; cord separators. G. Brackets: Design for easy removal and re -installation of blind. 1. Design to withstand dead weight and operating stresses. 2. Provide brackets at ends and at intervals recommended by manufacturer. 3. Include fasteners appropriate for substrate. H. Accessories: 1. Hold-downs: Provide two brackets at lowest position of bottom rail, engaging hook or pin on bottom rail end caps. I. Finish: All components factory -finished. 1. Steel: Baked -on enamel finish; prepared by galvanizing, and phosphatizing or priming. 2. Aluminum: Baked -on enamel finish; prepared by chemical conversion coating. 3. Concealed components: Corrosion -resistant finish. 4. Pattern/color: Selected by architect, after contract award, from manufacturer's standard patterns/colors. 5. Exposed items other than louvers: Match color of rails. J. Manufacturers: 1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: 03878505 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12511 - 2 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 a. Hunter Douglas, Inc./Window Covering Division. b. Kirsch Company. C. Levelor Corporation. d. Springs Window Fashions (Bali/Graber). 2.2 FABRICATION A. Fabricate to fit actual construction; take field measurements of openings before starting fabrication. B. Use materials that are compatible, will not need to be lubricated, and which will not adversely affect adjacent materials. C. Make blinds fill each opening completely, from jamb to jamb and from head to sill, with a single blind unit, unless multiple units are specifically indicated. D. Horizontal Louver Blinds: 1. Space ladders in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Space louvers to positively overlap when closed. 3. Provide fully tilting louvers, approximately 180 degrees of rotation. 4. Install tilt control on left side when facing interior side of blind. 5. Install lift cords on right side when facing interior side of blind. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates at locations in which window blinds will be installed. Do not begin installation until conditions are correct. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install blinds in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Set units in correct location, plumb, and level; allow clearance for window operating hardware. C. Fasten securely to substrates. D. Separate metal components from concrete and masonry using plastic tape or other suitable material. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust each blind for proper operation. B. Replace defective and damaged units. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed work. 03879505 08/05 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12511 - 3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 12621 MARKER BOARDS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fixed units. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's technical data. 2. Manufacturer's installation and breaking -in instructions. 3. Color charts showing full range of standard colors. 4. Test reports demonstrating compliance with specified requirements. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Provide dimensioned elevations of each configuration of board. 2. Show sections of trim members. Key to elevations. 3. Show anchorage and any necessary grounds. 4. Show layout and installation details. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: 1. Not less than 5 years of experience in manufacturing products of the type specified. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Deliver boards only when interior air and substrates have reached equilibrium moisture and temperature approximating that of normal occupied conditions. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: 1. Fixed units: a. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc. b. Greensteel Division/Information Display Technology, Inc. C. Lemco, Inc. d. Peninsular Slate Company. 03878505 MARKER BOARDS 12621-1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 2.2 MATERIALS A. Porcelain -Enamel Marker Boards: High -pressure -laminated composite construction. 1. Facing sheet: a. Manufacturer's option of enameling processes listed: 1) Steel: Special quality enameling iron or steel, low metalloid and copper content for temperature over 1,400 degrees suitable for coating porcelain on steel for architectural purposes; chemically bathed and rinsed before enameling. Porcelain writing surface: Nickel Cobalt primer 0.002 inches minimum thickness, writing surface 0.0025 inches minimum thickness. Opposite surface: Nickel cobalt ground coat 0.002 inches minimum thickness for silica spray coat for lamination adhesion. Total finish thickness 0.004 inches minimum thickness. Panel edges at butt joints porcelain coated. 2) Proprietary process using Type 1 stretcher -leveled aluminized steel sheet with enamel fired at approximately 1000 degrees F. b. Minimum thickness: 24 gage. C. Marker board cover coat: 1) Manufacturer's standard gloss finish. B. Colors of boards and trim: As selected by the architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Construct units as follows: 1. Fixed unit. 2. Writing surface: Porcelain -enamel marker board. 3. Board size: 4 feet by 6 feet 4. Unit frames: a. Anodized, satin finish aluminum tubing. b. Full-length chalk tray. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ASSEMBLY A. Assemble units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Joints shall be neat and tight -fitting. 3.2 PROTECTION A. Protect boards from damage until substantial completion. END OF SECTION 03978505 MARKER BOARDS 12621-2 08105 tn 0 0.4 ri) L�4 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 15000 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Work covered by this Division shall consist of furnishing all labor, equipment, supplies and materials and in performing all operations necessary for the installation of complete and operating mechanical systems as required by these specifications and/or shown on the drawings, subject to the terms and conditions of the contract. The work shall also include the completion of such mechanical and electrical details not mentioned or shown which are necessary for the successful operation of all systems described on the drawings or required by these specifications; this includes the furnishing all materials for the filling the systems to make them operable, including water, refrigerant, oil and grease. Prove satisfactory operation of all equipment and controls to the Engineer on request. B. Work not included— Certain labor, material and equipment may be furnished and/or installed under other divisions of these specifications. This Contractor shall coordinate with other trades and arrange his work to make the part fit together. The following items are to be accomplished under other divisions of these specifications: 1. Temporary Heat: Refer to paragraph in this Section. 2. Temporary Water and Toilet: Refer to General Conditions. 3. Roof Curbs: Refer to paragraph in this Section. 4. Electrical Equipment and Wiring: Refer to paragraph in this Section. 5. Concrete: Refer to paragraph in this Section. C. Equipment Furnished by Owner — Rough -in services pipes to locations as required by architectural and mechanical drawings and equipment shop drawings. Provide service valves on all pipes except waste and vent pipes. Final Connection to equipment will be made by this Contractor. 1.3 BIDDING A. All mechanical equipment shall be new unless specified otherwise in the specifications or on the drawings. B. All bids must be based only on the equipment and materials as scheduled on the drawings and as specified or on equivalent equipment and materials. Any Contractor who assumes equivalence of products and who bases his proposal on that assumption does so at his own risk- C. A listing of approved alternative manufacturers does not mean that all products of a particular alternative manufacturer are acceptable alternative to the scheduled items. All fixtures and devices must still be submitted according to the prescribed procedures. In addition, some items that have an important visual affect, e.g. electric water coolers, may be required to receive Owner's or Architectural approval also. 03878505 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 - 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1.4 EXISTING UTILITIES A. The drawings indicate the locations, type and sizes of various utilities within the site where known. These utilities are indicated as accurately as possible. If the Contractor encounters any utilities during construction which are not shown on the drawings, they shall ask for written instructions from the Architect. Any relocation or remodeling required will then be directed by a change order. This Contractor shall assume all responsibility for protection of all utilities, shown or not, and for repair required by this construction. B. Contractor shall verify location, size, elevation, pressure and any other pertinent data of the existing utilities. Additional costs incurred due to failure to verify such data and to coordinate associated work with respective utility providers shall not be the Owner's responsibility but shall be home by the Contractor. C. All costs associated with providing utilities including, but not limited to, connection fees, boring under roads, etc., shall be included in the Contractor's proposal price whether such costs are incurred by Contractor or charged by the utility company. D. Submission of a proposal by the Contractor shall be considered an acknowledgment by the contractor of his compliance with this section. 1.5 CODES, PERMITS AND FEES A. Contractor shall comply with all local, state and national codes and shall pay for all applicable costs, fees, permits, licenses and inspections for this division. 1.6 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Temporary heat will be furnished by the General Contractor. Use of the permanent heating system will not be allowed without written authorization from the Engineer, Architect and Owner. In case the permanent heating system is used for temporary heat, the General Contractor shall pay all the costs until acceptance by the Owner. Warranty of equipment shall not start until acceptance by the Owner. 1.7 DRAWINGS A. Contract drawings are diagrammatic only and are not intended to be scaled for dimensions. All dimensions shall be taken from Architectural drawings, certified equipment drawings and from the structure itself before fabricating and work. All space requirements and equipment locations shall be verified, coordinated with other trades, as it is the various Contractor's responsibility to install the systems complete in the space provided without extra charges to the Owner. B. It is intended that anything, whether labor and materials, which is usually furnished as part of any equipment specified and which is necessary for operation shall be famished as part of the Contract without additional cost, whether or not shown or described. C. All piping in finished areas of the building shall be concealed except where otherwise noted on the drawings. D. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, unless approval is given in writing by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer for deviation. 03878505 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 - 2 08/05 i t LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1.8 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. The mechanical work shall be performed in strict accordance with the local and state codes, ordinances, and regulations governing the particular work involved. Furnish, without extra charge, any additional material and labor when and where required to comply with these Rules and Regulations, though the work is not mentioned in the Specifications or shown on the Drawings. When the Specifications or Drawings call for or describe materials or construction of a better quality or larger sizes than required by the above mentioned Rules and Regulations, the provisions of these Specifications and accompanying Drawings shall take precedence. 1.9 QUALIFICATIONS A. All mechanics shall be capable journeymen, skilled in the work assigned to them with licensing required by the inspecting authority. All welders must have been certified within the past three years to perform the work, which they are doing. 1.10 WARRANTY A. All materials and equipment shall be new unless otherwise specified. B. Guarantee all workmanship, material and equipment and replace any found defective without cost to the Owner, for ONE year after final acceptance, as defined in General Conditions. C. Each warranty for longer than one year as described above (that comes with equipment used on the job) shall be passed into the Owner in the Operation and Maintenance Manual, along with the dates of start and end of warranty. D. Refer to General Conditions for additional information regarding specific warranty requirements. 1.11 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Before final payment, provide the Architect with one clean set of drawings and specifications corrected up-to-date as job progress. These documents shall reflect the As -Built conditions. Refer to General Conditions for additional information. 1.12 SUBMITTALS A. The intent of this section is to give general submittal information, refer to specific submittal information in the subsequent mechanical sections. B. Within 10 days after award of the contract, and before orders are placed, Contractor shall submit specific information on list of equipment and principal materials specified. Contractor shall indicate and/or provide names of manufacturers, catalog and model numbers, cut sheets, and such other supplementary information as necessary for evaluation. Minimum of six (6) copies, or as directed by the Engineer, of each shall be submitted and shall include all items mentioned by model number and/or manufacturer's name in the specifications or in schedules on the drawings. C. Requirements for each submittal: 1. Provide all submittals in 3-ring or comb binder. 2. Submittals must bear a dated stamp or specific written indication that the Contractor has reviewed and approved all submittal prior to submission to Engineer. 3. Submittals must have all information deleted by Contractor that pertains to the means and methods of construction or to fabrication, assembly, installation, or erection �., 03878505 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 - 3 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8~t' (approval by Engineer shall not extend to these areas unless specifically noted by Engineer). 4. SUBMITTALS MUST BE CLEARLY AND SPECIFICALLY MARKED AS TO WHICH SPECIFIC PIECE OF EQUIPMENT IS BEING SUBMITTED, BYE USE OF A PERMANENT MARKER, STAMP, ETC., SO AS TO DISTINGUISH IT FROM OTHER PIECES OF EQUIPMENT THAT MAY OCCUR ON THE SAME PAGE, 5. SUBMITTALS MUST BE CLEARLY MARKED AS TO WHICH AVAILABLE OPTIONS ARE BEING SUBMITTED THAT ARE ASSOCIATED WITH A PIECE OF EQUIPMENT, AND 6. Submittals must be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specific performance, materials and similar data to enable the Engineer to review the proposed equipment. OMISSION BY CONTRACTOR OF ANY OF THE ABOVE REQUIREMENTS OR SUBMITTALS WILL SUBJECT SUBMITTAL TO AUTOMATIC REJECTION WITHOUT REVIEW. Any submittals received by Engineer that were not requested shall be returned without review of any kind. D. Installation Instructions - For certain products or systems as identified in subsequent specifications sections or on the drawings, the Contractor shall be required to provide copies of manufacturer's installation instructions with the submittal. When required as such, the installation instructions are considered part of the submittal and their omission may result in automatic rejection of the submittal. Where more than one identical device are scheduled, only one set of installation instructions needs to be submitted, e.g. if seven five -ton split systems air conditions are scheduled, only one five -ton unit installation instruction needs to be submitted. Similarly, if one set of installation instructions is identified by the manufacturer and on the instructions to be applicable to more than one type or size of devices, e.g. if one set of air conditioner instructions is good for three, four, five -ton units, then only one instruction set is required for these devices. 1.13 SUBSTITUTED PRODUCTS A. Material or equipment specified by Manufacturer's name is being used as a basis of standard, unless otherwise noted. The Engineer will be the sole judge on the equivalence of substituted equipment and materials. B. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to verify that submitted substitute equipment will fit in space available. The contractor's submittal for acceptance of the substitute shall include a written statement of whether or not such acceptance would require any subsequent or associated changes to the drawings or specifications. Any such changes shall be described in writing, briefly but complete. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for the costs of any such modifications due to substitution of materials or equipment for that which was specified or scheduled. The cost shall be complete, that is, it shall include the cost affect of any and all other trades. D. The Engineer may request detailed shop drawing or plan layouts of mechanical rooms or systems of the substituted equipment. I 03878505 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 - 4 08/05 I LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1.14 SAFETY A. General — Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the work, and Contractor shall comply with all laws governing safety, specifically the "Occupational Safety and Health Standards" and the "Safety and Health Regulations for Construction", state and federal. B. According to OSHA, a hazardous chemical is any chemical, which is a physical hazard or a health hazard. This may include items such as paints, solvents, adhesives, sealants, cleaners, etc. If a contractor produces, uses, or stores hazardous chemicals at the workplace, them contractor shall develop, implement, and maintain a hazard communication program in compliance with the latest OSHA requirements. In projects with multiple tenants in which the building is partially occupied during all or part of the project, Contractor shall inform the building manager or Owner, according to OSHA guidelines, of any hazardous chemicals being produced, stored, or used in the building so that other tenants may be notified. Contractor shall employ required methods of training, information, handling, ventilation, labeling, storing, disposal, and removal of hazardous chemicals. 1.15 LABELING A. Each device for which an independent testing authority has established a standard shall have affixed a label indicating its compliance and listing. Refer to General Conditions for list of such independent testing authorities. 1.16 SITE VISIT REPORTS A. During the course of the job, the Engineer will make site visits to observe work in progress and will subsequently prepare a written site visit report, which will be sent to the Contractor and to whomever else the Engineer desires. The Contractor shall prepare a written and typed response within seven (7) calendar days of his receiving the site visit report. The General Contractor shall include in his response the following information. 1. Date of site visit by the Engineer, Z. Date of receipt of the site visit report, 3. Name and title of the preparer of the response, 4. An item number referenced to the site report, 5. A brief three or four word description of the item, 6. The Contractor or Subcontractor affected, 7. The proposed course of action, and 8. An expected time of completion of the action. 1.17 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. No joists, beams, girders, columns, slabs, or other structural elements shall be cut, drilled, or altered in any way by the Contractor without first obtaining written permission and instructions from the Engineer and Architect. B. Where it is necessary to cut through any non-structural elements of walls, floors, or ceilings to permit the installation of any work under this contract, or to repair any defects that may appear up to the expiration of the guarantee, such cutting shall be done by Contractor with as little damage as reasonably possible to the element being cut or to adjacent elements. 03878505 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 - 5 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1 C. After the necessary work has been completed, the damage shall be repaired by the respective Contractor, who shall pay all costs of such cutting, repairs and patching. All patching or sealing of cuts, penetrations, etc., including final appearance of same, shall be done to the approval of the Engineer and Architect. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. All materials shall be new and of specified quality, unless specifically noted otherwise. Materials shall be free from defects. Where manufacturer names are mentioned in the specifications or on the drawings, it has been done in order to establish a standard of quality and construction. B. Contractor will be responsible for transportation of his material to and from the job site, and will be responsible for the storage and protection of his materials and work until the final acceptance of the job. At the end of each day of work, each Contractor is responsible for covering or protecting his work and/or materials that may be susceptible to damage even if such damage is the result of unforeseen causes, e.g. an overnight thunderstorm. Failure to do so will be sufficient cause for rejection of any item in question, and any such item shall be replaced by Contractor at no cost to the Owner. C. Contractor shall verify that all pieces of equipment will fit through available openings in the building and that all equipment can be installed without modification of building structure. 2.2 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE A. All equipment major items are specified in the equipment schedules on the drawings and shall be new and furnished complete with all accessories normally supplied with the catalog item listed and all other accessories necessary for a complete and satisfactory installation. B. Equipment items so noted will require start-up by factory trained personnel. Equipment items so noted will require factory approved service personnel who shall provide all service, including all parts and all labor, as requested by the Owner, during the full period of equipment warranty. 2.3 EQUIPMENT RATINGS A. Equipment capacities as scheduled on the drawings are at project site altitude. Capacities of submitted equipment must be corrected for project site altitude unless otherwise noted. 2.4 WORKMANSHIP A. The workmanship shall, in all respects, be of the highest grade, and all construction shall be done according to the best practices of the trade. Piping, ducting and conduit shall be concealed unless otherwise noted, and installed square to the building lines. Any work not meeting this requirement shall be replaced or rebuilt without extra expense to the Owner. 2.5 V-BELT DRIVES A. V-belt drives shall be of fabric and rubber construction of approved manufacture. Multiple belts shall be matched and all belts shall be adjusted to drive the apparatus properly and to prevent slippage and undue wear in starting motor nameplate rating. 03878505 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 - 6 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 Manufacturer's installation recommendations vary depending on roof types, but the Contractor is responsible for verifying the roof type and adhering strictly to the appropriate set of manufacturer's installation instructions. 2.9 ROOF PENETRATIONS A. Piping 1. Penetration shall be accomplished with factory -made assemblies designed specifically for the purpose. The use of pitch pans or pitch pockets is not allowed. Contractor shall refer to architecturals for directions or provide a factory -made penetration assembly as follows: a. For pipes, conduits, etc. up to 3-inches in diameter that can or are intended to be turned to horizontal after passing through the roof (e.g. small electrical conduit, gas piping, refrigerant lines, water pipes, etc.) the device shall consist of a curb assembly with a welded 18 gauge galvanized steel shell and base, 1-1/2 inches thick 3 pcf rigid insulation, 0.50 inch aluminum or 20 gauge galvanized cap with minimum 3 inch over hang and 1-inch rigid insulation, and 2" x 6" wood nailer. Product shall be Custom Curb Model CPC, ThyCurb Model RP-2 with TC-1, 2, or 3 curb, or approved equivalent. This method not suitable for metal roofing systems. b. EPDM pipe boots for watertight flashing of metal roof & wall systems. EPDM boots shall be designed in a multitude of sizes to accommodate penetrations from 1/8" to 26" round and work in conjunction with any configuration of metal roofing or siding panel. The EPDM pipe boot shall be engineered with an aluminum flanged base that can be bent by hand to conform to the roof profile, irregularities, or slopes. The aluminum flange shall be bonded to the flexible boot during the molding process and is completely isolated from the underside of the boot to prevent any potential galvanic corrosion such as happens with solid metal flashings. Install with manufacturer approved sealant on the underside and stainless fasteners. Provide adapter rings as required to further extend the capabilities of the EPDM pipe boot to seal unusual shapes such as angle irons and square tubes. B. Ductwork without Equipment 1. Penetration shall be accomplished with a factory -made insulated roof curb. Curb shall be made of welded 18 gauge galvanized steel shell and base plate, shall be lined with 1-1/2 inch 3 pcf rigid insulation, shall have minimum 2" x 2" wood nailer, and shall be reinforced with 1" x 1" x 1' 8" steel angle on sides 24 inches and larger. Product(s) shall be manufactured by Custom Curb, Inc., ThyCurb, Roof Products and Systems, Pate, or approved equivalent. C. Ductwork with Equipment 1. Each piece of roof mounted equipment such as exhaust or supply fans, relief or intake hoods, packaged rooftop air conditioners, air handlers, etc., shall be provided and installed with an insulated roof curb designed to mate with the equipment and provide a weatherproof enclosure. In the event that a preinsulated curb is not available, an uninsulated curb is acceptable if the Contractor provides and installs field insulation per the manufacturer's instructions. Contractor shall provide the roof curb(s) to the Roofing Contractor for installation. 03878505 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 - 8 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 2.6 BELTGUARDS A. The Contractor shall provide for each V-belt drive a painted steel belt guard, which shall be constructed around an angle iron frame, securely bolted to the floor or apparatus. The guard shall completely enclose drives and pulleys and be constructed to comply with all safety requirements. Hinged access doors not less than 6" x 6" shall be provided for access to motors and fan shaft for test purposes. 2.7 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT A. All disconnects, motor starters, relays, wiring, etc. shall comply with all requirements of 16000 Sections of the electrical specifications. B. The Mechanical Contractor must refer to the electrical control equipment and wiring shown on the Electrical Drawings. Any changes or additions required by specified or substituted equipment fiunished shall be the complete responsibility of the Contractor furnishing the equipment. C. All electrical equipment characteristics (voltage, etc.) must be VERIFIED by the Mechanical Contractor prior to ordering. It is imperative that voltage and phase characteristics are checked with the electrical drawings. D. All motors shall be built in accordance with the current applicable IEEE, ASA and NEMA standards. All general-purpose motors shall be open drip -proof machines for installation indoors and/or in protected locations. Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) motors shall be used in all areas of exposure to weather or other environmental contamination. Motors shall be rated explosion -proof when located in hazardous atmospheres. Type II weather -protected motors may be used in lieu of TEFC motors on roof fan units and similar equipment. Motors mounted in direct sun shall be provided with a shield to forbid direct radiation from the sun when the sun is 45 degrees or greater above the horizon. E. Unless indicated otherwise, motors shall be NEMA design B with a service factor of 1.15 with 40°C rise and total temperature rise of 65°C ambient and when powered from the system voltage feeding the motor. TEFC motors shall have a service factor of 1.00 with total temperature rise of 65°C. in the above conditions. Single-phase motors shall be NEMA Type N split phase induction motors with built-in thermal protectors. Single-phase motors connected on loads requiring high starting torque shall be capacitor -start induction motors. F. All motors shall be all copper wound, high power factor, high efficiency motors. Electric motors shall be an energy efficient type as defined in the latest edition ofNEMA document no. MG 1. Motor efficiency shall be made available to the Engineer as required. 2.8 EQUIPMENT AND PIPING SUPPORTS A. All supporting systems for piping, equipment, and materials supported by the building structure shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to purchase and installation. B. Roof Supports I. Contractor shall provide and install roof supports for all uninsulated piping routed on the roof. a. For single pipes through 4-inches in size, such as gas pipes, etc., the roof support shall be a MIRO Model 4-RAH which consists of a one piece combination roof deck base, adjustable height pipe supports, roller housing of polycarbonate resin and a self-lubricating roller. 03878505 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 - 7 08/05 I LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 D. General 1. All roof flashing assemblies androof curbs shallbe closely coordinated with other work through the Roofing Contractor to insure that the flashing, canting, insulation type and location, etc., is correct and appropriate for the particular roof construction type. 2. Each roof curb shall be selected and provided so that the top of the curb shall be level after installation. The curb shall provide a minimum clearance of 10 inches between the top of the finished roof surface and the top of the wood nailer, continuous around the curb perimeter. 3. Each roof penetration location shown on the drawing is approximate. Refer to the Architectural and Structural drawing for the structural openings. Refer to CUTTING AND PATCHING section of this specification for more information. 4. Provide each roof curb with other options as scheduled on the drawings. 2.10 ACCESSIBILITY A. Access Panels 1. Access panels shall be provided wherever necessary for possible future replacement, adjustment, or maintenance of operating devices such as machinery, valves, dampers, switches, relays, etc., or to other critical non -operating devices such as pull boxes, inspection parts, gauges, etc. Such access panels shall be provided and install by Contractor, whether or not shown on the drawings, and shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer for approval of type, color, etc. Where access is provided in rated members, the access panels shall be of a type that maintains the integrity of the member penetrated. B. Access to Equipment 1. All pipes, tubing, conduit, etc. including, but not limited to, draining piping of any type, electrical conduit, wiring not in conduit, and pneumatic control tubing shall be installed in such a way so as not to prevent and/or not to make necessary difficult the removal, operation, use, or maintenance of equipment, access panels or doors, pathways (especially in attics or crawlspaces), observation ports, measurement or balancing devices, junction boxes. 2. If access for these purposes is prevented or made unreasonably difficult in the opinion of the Engineer, then the Contractor shall make modifications or repairs at no cost to anyone except the Contractor. Such modifications or repairs shall be considered neither complete nor adequate until the Engineer is satisfied that access for the above purpose is achieved. 2.11 PROTECTION OF PENETRATION A. All penetrations of fire or smoke barriers shall be sealed, sleeves (if any), insulation (if any), and vibration isolation (if any) that maintain the fire or smoke resistance of the barrier in accordance with the latest edition of NFPA 101 Life Safety Code. B. Contractor shall verify locations and type of all partitions penetrations from the drawings. Sealing material and methods shall be per UL recommendations. 2.12 BEDDING COURSE @ A. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed -3 stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. 03878505 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 - 9 09105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 STORAGE A. Provide for proper storage of all materials and equipment and assume responsibility for losses due to any cause. All storage shall be within the contract limits of the building site or in a bonded warehouse. All equipment and materials must be covered and stored out of the elements; any item, which has become rusted, will not be permitted to be used. B. Each Contractor shall provide temporary storage facilities suitable for equipment stored at the job site. Storage facilities shall be rainproof and lockable as required. Materials or equipment stored on site but not in a lockable rainproof storage facility shall be stored above ground or above slab. Contractor shall take necessary precautions to prevent entry of and/or damage from dirt, trash, water, or vermin. Equipment not properly stored and protected shall be, at the discretion of the Engineer, replaces at no cost to the Owner. Roofs are not acceptable storage areas unless specifically allowed in writing by the Engineer. 3.2 INSTALLATION AND ARRANGEMENT A. Install all work to permit removal (without damage to other parts) of coils, heat exchanger bundles, boiler tubes, fan shafts and wheels, filters, belt guards, sheaves and drives and all other parts which might require periodic replacement or maintenance. Arrange pipes, ducts and equipment to permit ready access to valves, traps, starters, motors, control components and to clear opens of doors and of access panels. B. Offsets, transitions and changes in direction in pipes and ducts shall be made as required to maintain proper head room and pitch of sloping pipes whether or not indicated on the drawings. Furnish and install all traps, air vents, sanitary vents, etc., as required to effect these offsets, transitions and changes in direction. 3.3 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY A. Where there are existing facilities, be responsible for protection thereof, whether or not such facility is to be removed or relocated or remain as installed. Moving or removing any facility must be done so as not to cause interruption the work or Owner's Operation. B. All pipe and duct openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation. All fixtures shall be covered and protected against injury. At final completion, all work shall be cleaned and delivered in an unblemished condition, or refinished and repainted at the discretion of the Architect. 3.4 CONCEALED AND EXPOSED WORK A. "Concealed" is intended to mean within such spaces as pipe chases, pipe trenches, above plaster ceilings, in walls and buried pipe is inaccessible when building is completed. "Exposed" is intended to be within equipment rooms, unfinished spaces, above "pushup" ceilings, accessible pipe tunnels, etc., where pipe is accessible. 3.5 CONCRETE A. Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate all requirements for concrete. All concrete shall be furnished under the Architectural Divisions of these specifications. 03878505 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 - 10 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 3.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. The Contractor shall verify the dimensions and conditions governing work at the project site. He shall examine adjoining work on which his work is dependent, for perfect efficiency, and shall report any work, which must be corrected. 3.7 LUBRICATION A. The Contractor shall provide all oil and grease for the operating of all equipment until acceptance. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage to bearings while the equipment is being operated by him up to the date of acceptance of the equipment. The Contractor shall protect all bearings and shafts during installation and shall thoroughly grease the steel shafts to prevent corrosion. 3.8 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTION A. The Contractor shall install all equipment in strict accordance with all directions and recommendations furnished by the manufacturer. Where such directions are in conflict with the plans and specifications, the Contractor shall report such conflicts to the Engineer who shall make changes deemed necessary and desirable. 3.9 FLUSHING, CLEANING & STERILIZING A. Before final connections are made in the piping systems, all piping shall be blown out with air and then completely washed out with cleaning compounds. The systems shall be flushed for complete removal of all foreign materials. Furnish all temporary connections, valves, etc., required for this purpose. B. After flushing, sterilize the domestic water systems with an approved chlorinating agent to provide a dosage on not less than 50 ppm. After minimum contact period of eight (8) hours, the system shall be flushed with clean water until the residual chlorine is no greater than the city water. 3.10 TESTS A. Test all new storm drain, vent and waste lines with standing water test of 12 feet of head. Test to be held for a minimum of two (2) hours. B. Test all new heating water and chilled water piping before connecting to the units at 150 psig hydrostatic pressure. Test to be held for a minimum of two (2) hours. C. Test all new domestic cold, hot and recirculating hot water service lines at 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding the pressure rating of the piping materials. Test to be held for a minimum of two (2) hours. D. Test fire protection at 200 psig. Test to be held for a minimum of two (2) hours. E. Test all new gas lines under 60 psig air pressure. Test to be held for a minimum of two (2) hours. F. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. G. All tests shall be witnessed and approved by the Engineer and the local authority having jurisdiction before covering or insulating. The satisfactory operation of blowers, pumps and other equipment with moving parts shall be demonstrated to the Engineer. Equipment without 03878505 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 - 11 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 movable parts shall have pressure or other tests performed by the Contractor to demonstrate satisfactory operation. H. Furnish all instruments, pumps, blowers and equipment required for the testing. I. Provide written copies of these test reports for inclusion on the Operations and Maintenance Manuals and submit one copy to Mechanical Engineer. 3.11 PAINTING A. Surfaces of all equipment and material not provided with a factory finish coat shall be thoroughly cleaned, primed (if not factory primed) and finish coated with a high quality alkyd industrial enamel of a color chosen by the Owner. 3.12 SPECIAL OPENINGS A. The contractor shall attempt to schedule delivery of all large equipment requiring special openings for installation prior to enclosing of area. Where this is not possible written notice of required openings which must be provided shall be listed by size and location and submitted to the General Contractor prior to enclosing of areas involved. Work required to construct openings and the associated cost of enclosing them shall be done at no additional cost to the 1 Owner. 3.13 PLACING IN OPERATION A. All ducts, pipes, equipment, controls, etc., shall be cleaned of plaster and other foreign debris B. Before final acceptance, all strainers shall be thoroughly cleaned or replaced, all bearings shall be oiled or greased and all drains shall be cleaned out and primed. All permanent filters shall be cleaned; throwaway type filters shall be replaced with new filters. C. The systems shall be placed in operation. D. The contractor shall verify that all controls are set to meet operating conditions specified. 1. Example: Boiler operating control set at 180°F. Limit control set at 2007. E. The Contractor shall verify that all pieces of equipment are operable and that all sequence of controls are being met. F. Contractor to adjust seating through the first (1') year as required by Engineer. 3.14 BALANCING, TESTING AND ADJUSTING THE MECHANICAL SYSTEMS A. Balancing the mechanical systems shall be part of this contract, refer to subsequent mechanical specification section for details. This Contractor is to include in their proposal the cost of balancing, testing and adjusting. 3.15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Contractor shall prepare and provide four (4) copies of operating and maintenance manuals. Contractor shall deliver four bound sets to the Engineer for approval. Each manual shall be in a ring binder and shall be indexed with dividers for each section. Delivery of required documents is a condition of final acceptance. B. Each manual shall contain, but not limited to, the following general sections: 1. Certificates of acceptance from the inspecting authorities, 2. Waiver of all liens, f� 03878505 GENTERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 - 12 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 3. Warranties with starting dates and end dates for each pieces of equipment and/or for each system (warranties shall begin on date of substantial completion and acceptance by the Owner), 4. Names, telephone and fax numbers and addresses of all subcontractors, vendors, manufacturer's representatives, and warranties providers, 5. Certification letters from each Contractor that each system furnished and installed by that contractor and/or subcontractors is started -up, balanced, adjusted and checked for proper operation in accordance with the intent of the contract documents, 6. Spare parts lists for each piece of equipment, 7. Lubrication charts showing type of lubrication and application methods and frequencies, 8. Filter cleaning or replacement schedule (On Contractor's letterhead stationary), 9. Preventative maintenance schedule for checking all items such as belt drives, safety controls, oil and refrigerant charges, and seasonal changer over recommendations. Cleaning of all strainers, traps, coils, tower pans, tubes, sprays, etc. (on Contractor's letterhead stationary), 10. Water treatment recommendations and instructions for boiler, towers, etc., 11. Normal operating instructions including a sequence of operations (on Contractor's letterhead stationary), 12. Instructions as to procedures to be followed for emergency situations, such as alarms or safety items being tripped. (on Contractor's letterhead stationary), 13. Instruction on who to call for service during guarantee period, (on Contractor's letterhead stationary), 14. Approved copy of the Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Reports, 15. Copies of As -Built drawings on reproducible vellum as produced by a Xerox or photographic process and, 16. Copies of all approved shop drawing submittals including nameplate date, design parameters, name, telephone and fax numbers, address of vendor, manufacturer's representative and warrantee provider. C. Approval will not be given for final payment until the tests, balancing and operating instruction portions have been completed. 3.16 INSTRUCTIONS TO THE OWNER A. Contractor shall instruct the Owner's operating personnel in the operations and maintenance of all mechanical systems and equipment. There shall be a minimum of four (4) hours of training. Contractor shall furnish any special senicing tools required for maintenance. B. Contractor shall conduct a demonstration of `the installation upon completion and final acceptance of the work. There shall be a minimum four (4) hour demonstration. Prior to this all work shall have been completed, tested, balanced and placed in operation. Qualified personnel must be present at the demonstration to operate all the systems and prove the performance of the equipment. The schedule for this demonstration shall be coordinated with the Engineer. 3.17 EXCAVATION FOR PIPE AND CONDUIT A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations. B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12" higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated. l__ L 03878505 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 -13 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, andbodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade. Level bottom of all trenches and cover all PVC pipe with processed chat. 1. For pipes and conduit less than 6" in nominal diameter and flat-bottomed, multiple -duct conduit units, hand excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade. 2. For pipes and conduit 6" or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill. 3. Excavate trenches 4" deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course. D. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8" in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4" in loose depth for material compacted by hand -operated tampers. E. All piping and conduit trenches across pavement shall be backfilled with two -sack concrete to within 12" of finished grade. F. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698: 1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12" of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent. 2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6" below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 92 percent. 3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6" below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 85 percent. G. Install detectable warning tape above conduits and pipe, 12" below finished grade, except 6" below subgrade under pavements and slabs. H. Protection 1. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. 2. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. a. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and recompact. 3. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfillKith additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. a. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible. I. Disposal of Surplus and Waste Materials 1. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property unless otherwise directed by Owner. 2. Repair: Any damage to shrubs, grass or structures shall be repaired to previous condition by Contractor at no additional expense to Owner. i 03878505 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 - 14 ` 08/05 i L_ LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 J. Bracing and Sheeting: Open cut trenches shall be sheeted and braced as required by OSHA and the requirements of the State of Texas as necessary for the safety of worlonen or the protection of property. END OF SECTION 15000 NTH 03878505 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 - 15 08", I LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and the Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following basic mechanical materials and methods to complement other Division 15 Sections. 1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Concrete equipment base construction requirements. 3. Equipment nameplate data requirements. 4. Labeling and identifying mechanical systems and equipment is specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification." 5. Nonshrink grout for equipment installations. 6. Installation requirements common to equipment specification Sections. 7. Cutting and patching. 8. Touchup painting and finishing. B. Pipe and pipe fitting materials are specified in piping system Sections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Pipe, pipe fittings, and piping include tube, tube fittings, and tubing. B. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below the roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces, and tunnels. C. Exposed Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. D. Exposed Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors, or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. E. Concealed Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts. F. Concealed Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants, but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for following piping specialties: 1. Mechanical sleeve seals. 03878505 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 1 01105 :J LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 C. Samples of color, lettering style, and other graphic representation required for each identification material and device. D. Coordination drawings for access panel and door locations. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualify welding processes and operators for piping according to ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code," Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 1. Comply with provisions of ASME B31 Series "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for the welding processes involved and that certification is current. B. ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices. C. Equipment Selection: Equipment of greater or larger power, dimensions, capacities, and ratings may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting mechanical and electrical services, circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases, and equipment spaces are increased. No additional costs will be approved for these increases, if larger equipment is approved. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies of the equipment are specified, the equipment must meet the design requirements and commissioning requirements. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory -applied end -caps. Maintain end -caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe -end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. B. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. When stored inside, do not exceed structural capacity of the floor. C. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt. D. Protect stored plastic pipes from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other building components. B. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction to allow for mechanical installations. C. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured -in -place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. D. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building. E. Coordinate connection of electrical services. F. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. G. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors where mechanical items requiring access are concealed behind finished surfaces. H. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting where devices are applied to surfaces. Install identifying devices prior to installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. 03878505 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 08105 15050 - 2 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A. Refer to individual piping system specification Sections for pipe and fitting materials and joining methods. B. Pipe Threads: ASME B 1.20.1 for factory -threaded pipe and pipe fittings. 2.2 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to individual piping system specification Sections in Division 15 for special joining materials not listed below. B. Pipe Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for the chemical and thermal conditions of the piping system contents. 1. ASME B 16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos -free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness, except where thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full -Face Type: For flat -face, Class 125 cast-iron and cast -bronze flanges. b. Narrow -Face Type: For raised -face, Class 250 cast-iron and steel flanges. 2. ASME B 16.20 for grooved, ring joint, steel flanges. 3. AWWA C110, rubber, flax face, 1/8 inch thick, except where other thickness is indicated; and full -face or ring type, except where type is indicated. C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B 18.2.1, carbon steel, except where other material is indicated. D. Plastic Pipe Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, except where other type or material is indicated. E. Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B 32. 1. Alloy Sn95 or Alloy Sn94: Tin (approximately 95 percent) and silver (approximately 5 percent), having 0.10 percent lead content. F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8. 1. BCuP Series: Copper -phosphorus alloys. 2. BAgl: Silver alloy. G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D 10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. H. Flanged, Ductile -Iron Pipe Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: AWWA C110, rubber gasket, carbon steel bolts and nuts. I. Couplings: Iron body sleeve assembly, fabricated to match outside diameters of plain -end pressure pipes. 1. Sleeve: ASTM A 126, Class B, gray iron. 2. Followers: ASTM A 47 (ASTM A 47M), Grade 32510 or ASTM A 536 ductile iron. 3. Gaskets: Rubber. 4. Bolts and Nuts: AWWA C111. 5. Finish: Enamel paint. 2.3 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Escutcheons: Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates; deep -pattern type where required to conceal protruding fittings and sleeves. 1. Inside Diameter: Closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation. 2. Outside Diameter: Completely cover opening. 3. Cast Brass: One-piece, with setscrew. a. Finish: Rough brass. 03878505 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 3 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 b. Finish: Polished chrome plate. 4. Cast Brass: Split casting, with concealed hinge and setscrew. a. Finish: Rough brass. b. Finish: Polished chrome plate. 5. Stamped Steel: One-piece, with setscrew and chrome -plated finish. 6. Stamped Steel: One-piece, with spring clips and chrome -plated finish. 7. Stamped Steel: Split plate, with concealed hinge, setscrew, and chrome -plated finish. 8. Stamped Steel: Split plate, with concealed hinge, spring clips, and chrome -plated finish. 9. Cast -Iron Floor Plate: One-piece casting. B. Dielectric Fittings: Assembly or fitting having insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion. 1. Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain, and weld neck end types and matching piping system materials. 2. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. 3. Dielectric Unions: Factory -fabricated, union assembly for 250-psig minimum working pressure at a 180°F temperature. 4. Dielectic Flanges: Factory -fabricated, companion -flange assembly for 150- or 300-psig minimum pressure to suit system pressures. 5. Dielectric -Flange Insulation Kits: Field -assembled, companion -flange assembly, full - face or ring type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers. a. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure to suit system pressures. 6. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized -steel coupling, having inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining, with threaded ends and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 F temperature. 7. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple, having inert and noncorrosive t thermoplastic lining, with combination of plain, threaded, or grooved end types and 300-psig working pressure at 225 F temperature. C. Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Modular, watertight mechanical type. Components include interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. Connecting bolts and pressure plates cause rubber -sealing elements to expand when tightened D. Sleeves: The following materials are for wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations: 1. Steel Sheet Metal: 24-gage or heavier galvanized sheet metal, round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. 2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. 3. Cast -Iron: Cast or fabricated wall pipe equivalent to ductile -iron pressure pipe, having ► plain ends and integral water stop, except where other features are specified. i 4. Wall Penetration Systems: Wall sleeve assembly, consisting of housing, gaskets, and pipe sleeve, with 1 mechanical joint end conforming to AWWA C110 and 1 plain pipe - sleeve end. a. Penetrating Pipe Deflection: 5 percent without leakage. b. Housing: Ductile -iron casting having waterstop and anchor ring, with ductile - iron gland, steel studs and nuts, and rubber gasket conforming to AWWA C 111, of housing and gasket size as required to fit penetrating pipe. C. Pipe Sleeve: AWWA C151, ductile -iron pipe. d. Housing -to -Sleeve Gasket: Rubber or neoprene push -on type of manufacturer's design. 03878505 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 4 08/05 1 l 11 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 5. Cast -Iron Sleeve Fittings: Commercially made sleeve having an integral clamping flange, with clamping ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing. a. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews. 2.4 GROUT A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B. 1. Characteristics: Post -hardening, volume -adjusting, dry, hydraulic -cement grout, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory -packaged. 2.5 ACCESS DOORS A. Flush mounted steel access doors with 16 Ga. frame and 14 Ga. Panel. Prime coat finish. Concealed spring hinges, screwdriver cam -lock. Doors in fire rated surfaces shall be U.L. listed and labeled for application. Doors to be Milcor or approved equivalent. PART 3 - EXECTION 3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS --COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. General: Install piping as described below, except where system Sections specify otherwise. Individual piping system specification Sections in Division 15 specify piping installation requirements unique to the piping system. B. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated, except where deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings. C. Install piping at indicated slope. D. Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. E. Install piping in concealed interior and exterior locations, except in equipment rooms and service areas. F. Install piping free of sags and bends. Route piping with as few elbows as possible and clean all cut pipes (inside and out) of burrs. G. Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited, except where indicated. H. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building elements. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel removal. I. Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 1-inch clearance around insulation. J. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing. K. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. L. Install couplings according to manufacturer's printed instructions. M. Install pipe escutcheons for pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls, wall board partitions, and suspended ceilings according to the following: 1. Chrome -Plated Piping: Cast -brass, one-piece, with setscrew, and polished chrome - plated finish. Use split -casting escutcheons, where required, for existing piping. 2. Uninsulated Piping Wall Escutcheons: Cast -brass or stamped -steel, with setscrew. 03878505 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 5 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 3. Uninsulated Piping Floor Plates in Utility Areas: Cast-iron floor plates. 4. Insulated Piping: Cast -brass or stamped -steel, with concealed hinge, spring clips, and chrome -plated finish. 5. Piping in Utility Areas: Cast -brass or stamped -steel, with setscrew or spring clips. N. Sleeves are required for core drilled holes. O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, concrete floor and roof slabs, and where indicated. P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum -board partitions, concrete floor and roof slabs, and where indicated. 1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 4 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring where specified. 2. Build sleeves into new walls and slabs as work progresses. 3. Install large enough sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials: a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than 6 inches. b. Steel Sheet -Metal Sleeves: For pipes 6 inches and larger that penetrate gypsum - board partitions. C. Cast -Iron Sleeve Fittings: For floors having membrane waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 4 inches above finished floor level. Flashing is specified in Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal." 1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. 4. Except for below -grade wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using elastomeric joint sealants specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." Q. Above Grade, Exterior Wall, and Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installation of mechanical seals. 1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches. 2. Assemble and install mechanical seals according to manufacturer's printed instructions. R. Below Grade, Exterior Wall, and Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron wall pipes for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for.l-inch annular.clear space between pipe and sleeve for installation of mechanical seals. 1. Below Grade, Exterior Wall, and Pipe Penetrations: Install ductile -iron wall penetration system sleeves according to manufacturer's printed installation instructions. S. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestopping sealant material. Firestopping materials are specified in Division 7 Section "Firestopping." T. Verify final equipment locations for roughing in. U. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections for roughing -in requirements. V. Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically required in individual piping system Sections. 1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. 3. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to AWS "Soldering Manual," Chapter 22 "The Soldering of Pipe and Tube." i 03878505 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 6 08105 l LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 4. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS 'Brazing Manual` in the "Pipe and Tube" chapter. 5. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B 1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: a. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint. b. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads (except where dry seal threading is specified). C. Align threads at point of assembly. d. Tighten joint with wrench. Apply wrench to valve end into which pipe is being threaded. e. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings having threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. 6. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12 "Recommended Practices and Procedures for Welding Low Carbon Steel Pipe" using qualified processes and welding operators according to the "Quality Assurance" Article. 7. Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly using torque wrench. W. Piping Connections: Except as otherwise indicated, make piping connections as specified below. 1. Install unions in piping 2 inches and smaller adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment having a 2-inch or smaller threaded pipe connection. 2. Install flanges in piping 2-1/2 inches and larger adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment having flanged pipe connection. 3. Wet Piping Systems (Water): Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION --COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom where mounting heights are not indicated. B. Install equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Refer conflicts to the Architect. C. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, except where otherwise indicated. D. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location. E. Install equipment giving right-of-way to piping systems installed at a required slope. 3.3 ACCESS DOORS A. Furnish access doors in all non -removable ceiling and in partitions and walls where necessary access to plumbing cleanouts, shock absorbers, fire dampers, manual dampers, valves and 03878505 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 7 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 other mechanical devices requiring access. Size as required for access with minimum size of 12" x 12". B. Any access doors furnished for installation in fire rated surfaces or assembly shall carry an approved fire rating for that use. C. Any access doors furnished for installation in glued on acoustical surfaces or assembly shall have recessed door to allow installation of tiles. D. Provide all access doors to the General Contractor for them to construct into the building. 3.4 PAINTING AND FINISHING A. Refer to Division 9 Section "Painting" for field painting requirements. B. Damage and Touch Up: Repair marred and damaged factory -painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish. 3.5 CONCRETE BASES A. Construct concrete equipment bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger than supported unit in both directions. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's setting templates for anchor bolt and tie locations. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." 3.6 ERECTION' OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Dl.l "Structural Welding Code --Steel." 3.7 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorage to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members. C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads. 3.8 DEMOLITION' A. Disconnect, demolish, and remove work specified under Division 15 and as indicated. B. Where pipe, ductwork, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged or disturbed, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal capacity and quality. C. Accessible Work: Remove indicated exposed pipe and ductwork in its entirety. D. Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried pipe abandoned in place, 2 inches beyond the face of adjacent construction. Cap and patch surface to match existing finish. E. Removal: Remove indicated equipment from the Project site. F. Temporary Disconnection: Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational equipment indicated for relocation. =a 03878505 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 8 08/05 {{i LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary for mechanical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of the trades involved. B. Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces. 3.10 GROUTING A. Install nonmetallic nonshrink grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. Mix grout according to manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. C. Provide forms for placement of grout, as required. D. Avoid air entrapment when placing grout. E. Place grout to completely fill equipment bases. F. Place grout on concrete bases to provide a smooth bearing surface for equipment. G. Place grout around anchors. H. Cure placed grout according to manufacturer's printed instructions. END OF SECTION 03878505 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 08/05 15050 - 9 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 15170 MOTORS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Common requirements for electric motors furnished on equipment specified in other Sections, including single phase and three phase electric motors. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements: Requirements for references and standards. B. AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. C. AFBMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings. D. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators. E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. F. UL 674 - UL Standard for Safety Electric Motors and Generators for Use in Division 1 Hazardous (Classified) Locations. G. UL 1836 - UL Standard for Safety for Electric Motors for Use in Class I, Division 2 and Class 11, Division 2 Hazardous (Classified) Locations. 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to UL Component Recognition for appropriate sizes. B. Conform to NFPA 70 and local energy code. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Transport, handle, store, and protect products. B. Protect motors stored on site from weather and moisture by maintaining factory covers and suitable weather-proof covering. For extended outdoor storage, remove motors from equipment and store separately. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout and 15000 General Mechanical Requirements B. Provide three year manufacturer warranty for motors larger than 1 horsepower. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. General Electric B. Baldor C. Magnetek D. Reliance 03878505 MOTORS 15170 - 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 2.2 E. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment and Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AND REQUIREMENTS A. Motors Less Than 250 Watts, for Intermittent Service: Equipment manufacturer's standard and need not conform to these specifications. B. Single Phase Motors: PSC where available. C. Electrical Service: 1. Refer to Section 16180 for required electrical characteristics. D. Open drip -proof type except where specifically noted otherwise. E. Design for continuous operation in 40 degrees C environment. F. Design for temperature rise in accordance with NEMA MG 1 limits for insulation class, service factor, and motor enclosure type. G. Explosion -Proof Motors: UL approved for hazard classification. H. Visible Nameplate: Indicating manufacturer's name and model number, motor horsepower, RPM, frame size, voltage, phase, cycles, full load amps, insulation system class, service factor, maximum ambient temperature, temperature rise at rated horsepower, minimum efficiency. I. Wiring Terminations: 1. Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70, threaded for conduit. 2. For fractional horsepower motors where connection is made directly, provide threaded conduit connection in end frame. 2.3 SINGLE PHASE POWER - SPLIT PHASE MOTORS A. Starting Torque: Less than 150 percent of fiill load torque. B. Starting Current: Up to seven times full load current. C. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 200 percent of full load torque. D. Drip -proof Enclosure: Class A (50°C temperature rise) insulation, NEMA Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings. E. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50°C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated ball bearings. 2.4 SINGLE PHASE POWER - PERMANENT -SPLIT CAPACITOR MOTORS A. Starting Torque: Exceeding one fourth of full load torque. B. Starting Current: Up to six times full load current. C. Multiple Speed: Through tapped windings. D. Open Drip -proof or Enclosed Air Over Enclosure: Class A (50°C temperature rise) insulation, minimum 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings, automatic reset overload protector. 2.5 SINGLE PHASE POWER - CAPACITOR START MOTORS A. Starting Torque: Three times fiill load torque. B. Starting Current: Less than five times full load current. C. Pull-up Torque: Up to 350 percent of full load torque. D. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 250 percent of full load torque. 03878505 MOTORS 15170 - 2 08/05 €i LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 E. Motors: Capacitor in series with starting winding; provide capacitor-start/capacitor-run motors with two capacitors in parallel with run capacitor remaining in circuit at operating speeds. F. Drip -proof Enclosure: Class A (50°C temperature rise) insulation, NEMA Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings. G. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50°C temperature rise) insulation,1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated ball bearings. 2.6 THREE PHASE POWER - SQUIRREL -CAGE MOTORS A. Starting Torque: Between 1 and 1-1/2 times full load torque. B. Starting Current: Six times full load current. C. Power Output, Locked Rotor Torque, Breakdown or Pull Out Torque: NEMA Design B characteristics. D. Design, Construction, Testing, and Performance: Conform to NEMA MG 1 for Design B energy efficient motors. E. Insulation System: NEMA Class B or better. F. Motor Frames: NEMA Standard T-Frames of steel, aluminum, or cast iron with end brackets of cast iron or aluminum with steel inserts. G. Thermistor System (Motor Frame Sizes 254T and Larger): Three PTC thermistors embedded in motor windings and epoxy encapsulated solid state control relay with wiring to terminal box. H. Bearings: Grease lubricated anti -friction ball bearings with housings equipped with plugged provision for relubrication, rated for minimum AFBMA 9, L-10 life of 200,000 hours. Calculate bearing load with NEMA minimum V-belt pulley with belt center line at end of NEMA standard shaft extension. Stamp bearing sizes on nameplate. I. Sound Power Levels: To NEMA MG 1. J. Nominal Efficiency: To NEMA MG 1, energy efficient for motor sizes 1 HP and larger. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Manufacturer's instructions. B. Install securely on firm foundation. Mount ball bearing motors with shaft in any position. C. Check line voltage and phase and ensure agreement with nameplate. END OF SECTION 03878505 MOTORS 15170 - 3 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 15190 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nameplates. B. Tags. C. Pipe Markers. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 15000 — General Mechanical Requirements for submittals. B. Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification. C. Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number. D. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements: Procedures for submittals. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and installation. 1.5 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements: Procedures for submittals. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves; include valve tag numbers. C. Valve Tag Chart. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to NFPA 99 requirements for labeling and identification of medical gas piping systems and accessories. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Sections 15000 General Mechanical Requirements. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 NAMEPLATES 03878505 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15190 - 1 08i05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 A. Manufacturer: 1. Seaton. 2. Brady USA. 3. Panduit 4. Almetek. 5. Substitutions: Refer to Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements. B. Description: Laminated three -layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. 22 TAGS A. Plastic Tags: 1. Manufacturer: a. Seaton. b. Brady USA. C. Panduit d. Almetek. e. Substitutions: Refer to Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements. 2. Laminated three -layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter. B. Metal Tags: 1. Manufacturer: a. Seaton. b. Brady USA. C. Panduit d. Almetek. e. Substitutions: Refer to Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements. 2. Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter with smooth edges. C. Information Tags: 1. Manufacturer: a. Seaton. b. Brady USA. C. Panduit d. Almetek. e. Substitutions: Refer to Section Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements. 2. Clear plastic with printed "Danger", "Caution", or "Warning" and message; size 3-1/4 x 5-5/8 inches with grommet and self-locking nylon ties. D. Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list in plastic laminated cover. 2.3 PIPE MARKERS A. Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.1. B. Plastic Pipe Markers: 1. Manufacturer: a. Seaton. b. Brady USA. C. Panduit d. Almetek. e. Substitutions: Refer to Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements. 03878505 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15190 - 2 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 2.4 2.5 2. Factory fabricated, flexible, semi -rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering. Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener. . ........ --- ........ C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: 1. Manufacturer: a. Seaton. b. Brady USA. C. Panduit d. Almetek. e. Substitutions: Refer to Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements. 2. Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings. D. Plastic Underground Pipe Markers: 1. Manufacturer: a. Seaton. b. Brady USA. C. Panduit d. Almetek. e. Substitutions: Refer to Section Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements. 2. Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6 inches aide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service. 3. Coordinate requirements with Section 2300 Earthwork requirements. CEILING TACKS A. Manufacturer: 1. Seaton. 2. Brady USA. 3. Panduit 4. Almetek. 5. Substitutions: Refer to Section Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements. B. Description: Steel with 3/4 inch diameter color coded head. C. Color code as follows: 1. HVAC equipment: Yellow. 2. Fire dampers/smoke dampers: Red. 3. Plumbing valves: Green. 4. Heating/cooling valves: Blue. LABELS A. Manufacturer. 1. Seaton. 2. Brady USA. 3. Panduit 4. Almetek. 5. Substitutions: Refer to Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements. B. Description: Laminated mylar, size 1.9 x 0.75 inches, adhesive backed with printed identification. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION 03878505 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15190 - 3 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Manufacturers recommendations for stencil painting. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting. B. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive -resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. C. Install labels with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. For unfinished canvas covering, apply paint primer before applying labels. D. Install tags using corrosion resistant chain. Number tags consecutively by location. E. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above buried pipe. F. Identify air handling units, pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, and water treatment devices with plastic nameplates. Small devices, such as in -line pumps, may be identified with tags. G. Identify control panels and maj or control components outside panels with plastic nameplates. H. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags. I. Identify air terminal units and radiator valves with numbered tags. J. Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control schematic. K. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers or plastic tape pipe markers. Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. L. Identify ductwork with plastic nameplates. Identify with air handling unit identification number and area served. Locate identification at air handling unit, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. M. Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate in comer of panel closest to equipment. END OF SECTION 03878505 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15190 - 4 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 15260 PIPING INSULATION PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Piping insulation. B. Jackets and accessories. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM Al67 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. B. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate C. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady -State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus. D. ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement. E. ASTM C240 - Standard Test Methods of Testing Cellular Glass Insulation Block. F. ASTM C449/C449M - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic -Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement. G. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady -State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. H. ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation. I. ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel, J. ASTM C921 - Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation. K. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. L. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. M. NAIMA National Insulation Standards. N. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. O. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Refer to Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements. B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acceptable workmanship and installation standards will be achieved. 03878505 PIPING INSULATION 15260 -1 08/05 I LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 t 1 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience and approved by manufacturer. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to maximum flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 25, and UL 723. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Transport, handle, store, and protect products. B. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and thickness. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Environmental conditions affecting products on site. B. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product. C. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS FIBER A. Manufacturer: 1. Owen Corning. 2. Certainteed. 3. Knuaf. 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements. B. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; rigid molded, noncombustible. 1. 'K'value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75° F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 850' F. 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. j C. Insulation: ASTM C795; semi -rigid, noncombustible, end grain adhered to jacket. L 1. `K' (`Ksi') value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees. 2. Maximum service temperature: 650 degrees F. 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. l D. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 1. ASTM C921, White Kraft paper with glass fiber yam, bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm -inches. E. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers. F. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: 1. Manufacturers: - a. Owen Corning. b. Certainteed. C. Knuaf. 03878505 PIPING INSULATION 15260 - 2 08/05 11 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment and Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements. 2. Compatible with insulation. G. Insulating Cement/Mastic: 1. Manufacturers: a. Owen Corning. b. Certainteed. C. Knuaf. d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment and Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements. 2. ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool. H. Fibrous Glass Fabric: 1. Manufacturers: a. Owen Corning. b. Certainteed. C. Knuaf. d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment and Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements. 2. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq. yd weight. 3. Blanket: 1.0 lb./cu ft density. 4. Weave:lOx10. I. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish: 1. Manufacturers: a. Owen Corning. b. Certainteed. C. Knuaf. d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment and Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements. 2. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq. yd weight. 3. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, white color. J. Outdoor Vapor Barrier Mastic: 1. Manufacturers: a. Owen Corning. b. Certainteed. C. Knuaf. d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment and Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements. 2. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color. K. Outdoor Breather Mastic: 1. Manufacturers: a. Owen Corning. b. Certainteed. C. Knuaf. d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment and Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements. 2. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color. L. Insulating Cement: 1. Manufacturers: a. Owen Corning. b. Certainteed. 03878505 PIPING INSULATION 15260 -3 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 C. Knuaf. d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment and Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements. 2. ASTM C449/C449M. 2.2 JACKETS [I A. PVC Plastic. 1. Manufacturers: a. Owen Corning. b. Certainteed. C. Knuaf. d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment and Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements. 2. Jacket: ASTM D1784, One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off- white color. a. Minimum service temperature: 0° F. f b. Maximum service temperature: 150' F. C. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.002 perm -inches. d. Thickness: 15 mil. e. Connections: Pressure sensitive color matching vinyl tape. 3. Covering Adhesive Mastic: a. Manufacturers: 1) Owen Corning. 2) Certainteed. ti 3) Knuaf. 4) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment and Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements. b. Compatible with insulation. B. ABS Plastic: 1. Manufacturers: a. Owen Corning. b. Certainteed. C. Knuaf. d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment and Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements. 2. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color. a. Minimum service temperature: -40' F. L b. Maximum service temperature of 180° F. C. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.012 perm -inches. d. Thickness: 30 mil. e. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive. C. Canvas Jacket: UL listed. 1. Fabric: ASTM C921, 6 oz/sq. yd, plain weave cotton treated with dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive. 2. Lagging Adhesive: 3. Manufacturers: a. Owen Corning. b. Certainteed- C. Knuaf. LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment and Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements. e. Compatible with insulation. D. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209. 1. Thickness: 0.016 inch sheet. 2. Finish: Smooth. 3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps. 4. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner. 5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.010 inch thick stainless steel. 6. Jacket shall be primed to allow painting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings: Verification of existing conditions before starling work. B. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials. C. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards. C. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. D. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints. E. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: 1. Provide vapor barrierjackets, factory -applied or field -applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers. F. For hot piping conveying fluids 140' F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation. G. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature: 1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory -applied or field -applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers. H. Inserts and Shields: 1. Application: Piping 1 inches diameter or larger. 2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. 3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket. 4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated. 03878505 PIPING INSULATION 15260 - 5 08105 i } LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 5. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range. I. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Section 07270. J. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms, Apparatus Bay, or Finished Spaces: Finish with aluminum jacket. Paint to color selected by Architect. K. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor barrier cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal piping. L. Buried Piping: Provide factory fabricated assembly with inner all-purpose service jacket with self-sealing lap, and asphalt impregnated open mesh glass fabric, with one mil thick aluminum foil sandwiched between three layers of bituminous compound; outer surface faced with a polyester film. 3.3 SCHEDULES A. Plumbing Systems: 1. Domestic Cold Water Supply: a. Glass Fiber Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: All sizes. 2) Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Domestic Hot Water and Recirculation: a. Glass Fiber Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: All sizes. 2) Thickness: 1 inch. 3. Condensate Drain Lines: a. Glass Fiber Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: All sizes. 2) Thickness: V2 inch. 4. Fire Protection Piping: a. As per NFPA and manufacturer recommendations. END OF SECTION 03878505 PIPING INSULATION 15260 - 6 08/05 f, i I LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 15290 DUCTWORK INSULATION PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Ductwork insulation. B. Insulation jackets. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Section 01400 - Quality Control and 15000 General Mechanical Requirements: Requirements for references and standards. B. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate C. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady -State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. D. ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications. E. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. F. ASTM C921 - Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation. G. ASTM C1071 - Standard Specification for Thermal and Acoustical Insulation (Glass Fiber, Duct Lining Material). H. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. I. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. J. ASTM E162 - Standard Test Method for Surface Flammability of Materials Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. K. ASTM G21- Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi. L. NAIMA National Insulation Standards. M. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. N. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. O. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures, which ensure acceptable workmanship and installation standards will be achieved. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 03878505 DUCTWORK INSULATION 15290 - 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience and approved by manufacturer. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, and UL 723. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Transport, handle, store, and protect products. B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness. C. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Environmental conditions affecting products on site. B. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements. C. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE A. Manufacturer: 1. Owen Corning 2. Certainteed. 3. Knua£ 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment and Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements. B. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombusitble blanket. 1. W (`Ksi') value: ASTM C518, 0.31 at 75' F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 250° F. 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.20 percent by volume. 4. Minimum "R" value: 6.0 (h . ftz)Btu. 5. Density:1.016/cu.ft. 6. Thickness: 2 inches, minimum. C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film 0.0032 inch vinyl. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm. 3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape. D. Vapor Barrier Tape: 1. Manufacturer: 03878505 DUCTWORK INSULATION 15290 - 2 08/05 !f LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 a. Owen Coming b. Certainteed. C. Knua£ d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment and Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements. 2. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yam and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive. 3. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color. E. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage. 2.2 GLASS FIBER, RIGID A. Manufacturer: 1. Owen Coming. 2. Certainteed. 3. Knauf. 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 — Material and Equipment and Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements. B. Insulation: ASTM C612; rigid, noncombustible blanket. 1. 1. 'K (`Ksi') value: ASTM C518, 0.24 at 75° F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 250' F. 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.20 percent by volume. 4. Minimum "R' value: 6.0 (h 9 ft2)Btu. 5. Density: 3.0 lb./cu ft. 6. Thickness: 2 inches, minimum. C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film 0.0032 inch vinyl. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.04 perm. 3. Secure with two coats of vapor barrier mastic and glass tape. D. Vapor Barrier Tape: 1. Manufacturer: a. Owen Coming. b. Certainteed. C. Knauf. d. Substitution: Refer to Section 01600 — Material and Equipment and Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements. 2. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yam and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive. E. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish: 1. Manufacturers: a. Owen Coming b. Certainteed. C. Knauf. d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 — Material and Equipment and Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements. 2. Cloth: Untreated; 9pz/sq.yd weight, glass fabric. 3. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, white color. 03878505 DUCTWORK INSULATION 15290 - 3 08/05 LU13BOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings: Verification of existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that ductwork has been tested before applying insulation materials. C. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in accordance ,%dth NAIMA National Insulation Standards. C. Insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature: 1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets. 2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket. 3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations. 4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections, and expansion joints. D. Insulated ductwork conveying air above ambient temperature: 1. Provide with or without standard vapor barrier jacket. 2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of insulation. 3.3 SCHEDULES A. Supply Fresh Air Duct: 1. Flexible Glass Fiber Ductwork Insulation: 2 inches thick. B. Exhaust Ducts: 1. None END OF SECTION 03878505 DUCTWORK INSULATION 15290 - 4 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 15310 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, fittings, valves, and connections for sprinkler systems. B. This section is to install new fire sprinkler system. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASME B 16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250, and 800. B. ANSI/ASME B 16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Class 150 and 300. C. ANSI/ASME B 16.4 - Cast Iron Threaded Fittings, Class 125 and 250. D. ANSI/ASME B 16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. E. ANSI/ASME B 16.9 - Factory -made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings. F. ANSI/ASME B 16.11 - Forged Steel Fittings, Socket -welding and Threaded. G. ANSI/ASME B 16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder -Joint Pressure Fittings. H. ANSI/ASME B 16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. I. ANSI/ASME B 16.25 - Buttwelding Ends. J. ANSI/ASME B36.10 - Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe. K. ANSI/ASME Sec 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications. L. ANSI/ASTM A135 - Electric -Resistance -Welded Steel Pipe. M. ANSI/ASTM A47 - Malleable Iron Castings. N. ANSI/ASTM B32 - Solder Metal. 0. ANSI/AW S A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal. P. ANSI/AWWA C110 - Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings. Q. ANSI/AWWA C151- Ductile Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast. R. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -coated Welded and Seamless. S. ASTM A120 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless, for Ordinary Uses. T. ASTM A234 - Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures. U. ASTM A795 - Black and Hot -Dipped Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use. V. ASTM B75 - Seamless Copper Tube. W. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube. X. ASTM B251- General Requirements for Wrought Seamless Copper and Copper -Alloy Tube. Y. AWS D 10.9 - Specifications for Qualification of Welding Procedures and Welders for Piping and Tubing. Z. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 03878505 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING 15310 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 15000. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, floor, and wall penetration seals. Indicate installation, layout, weights, mounting and support details, piping sizes, and piping connections. C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data and ratings. D. Manufacturer's Field Report: Submit under provisions of Section 01400 and 15000. E. Manufacturer's Field Report: Indicate time of start-up of treatment systems and include analysis of system water after cleaning and treatment. 1.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 15000. B. Maintenance Instructions: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, procedures, and treatment programs. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sprinkler Systems: Perform work to NFPA 13. B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Perform to ASME Code. C. Valves: Bear UL and FM label or marking. Provide manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. D. Maintain one copy of each relevant document on site. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 15000. B. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers, with labeling in place. C. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. D. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SPRINKLER PIPING, BURIED A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53; Schedule 40 black; ANSVASi�ffi C105 polyethylene jacket, or double layer, half -lapped 10 mil polyethylene tape. 1. Steel Fittings: ANSI/ASME B 16.9, wrought steel, buttwelded; or ANSUASME B 16.25, buttweld ends; with double layer, half -lapped 10 mil polyethylene tape. 2. Cast Iron Fittings: ANTSI/ASME B16.1, flanges and fittings. 3. Joints: ANSI/AWS D1.1, welded. B. Cast Iron Pipe: ANSUAWVVA C151. 1. Fittings: ANSUAWWA C110, standard thickness. 2. Joints: ANSUAWWA C111, rubber gasket. 3. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, "C" shaped composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for galvanized pipe. 2.2 SPRINKLER PIPING, ABOVE GROUND 03878505 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING 15310 - 2 08105 i ? t N LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53; Schedule 40 black. 1. Steel Fittings: ANSI/ASME B 16.9, wrought steel, buttwelded; ANSI/ASME B 16.25, buttweld ends; ASTM A234, wrought carbon steel and alloy steel; ANSI/ASME B 16.5, steel flanges and fittings; ANSFASME B16.11, forged steel socket welded and threaded. 2. Cast Iron Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.1, flanges and fittings; AI SI/ASME B16.4, screwed fittings. 3. Malleable Iron Fittings: ANSI/ASME B 16.3. 2.3 GATE VALVES A. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, single wedge or disc, solder or threaded ends. B. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, double wedge, flanged ends. 2.4 GLOBE OR ANGLE VALVES A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem and handwheel, inside screw, renewable composition disc, solder or screwed ends, with backseating capacity repackable under pressure. B. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, plug -type disc, flanged ends, renewable seat and disc. 2.5 BALL VALVES A. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze one piece body, stainless steel ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle, and balancing stops, solder or threaded ends with union. B. Over 2 Inches: Cast steel body, chrome plated steel ball, teflon seat and stuffing box seals, lever handle, flanged. 2.6 BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Bronze body, stainless steel disc, resilient replaceable seat, threaded ends, extended neck, handwheel and gear drive and integral indicating device, and built-in tamper proof switch rated 10 amp at 115 volt AC. B. Cast or ductile iron body, chrome plated ductile iron disc, resilient replaceable EPDM seat, wafer or lug ends, extended neck, handwheel and gear drive and integral indicating device, and built-in tamper proof switch rated 10 amp at 115 volt AC. 2.7 CHECK VALVES A. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze swing disc, solder or screwed ends. B. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends. C. Over 4 inch: Iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel spring, renewable composition disc, screwed, wafer or flanged ends. 2.8 DRAINVALVES a ' 03878505 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING 15310 - 3 09105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 A. Bronze compression stop with hose thread nipple and cap. B. Brass ball valve with cap and chain, 3/4 inch hose thread. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install piping in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain gradient. C. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space and other work. D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. F. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe level. G. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. H. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated. I. Provide sleeves when penetrating footings, floors and walls. Seal pipe and sleeve penetrations to achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required. Refer to Section 15140. J. Die cut screw joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads with red lead and linseed oil or other non -toxic joint compound applied to male threads only. K. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Remove protective coatings after installation. L. Provide gate, ball, or butterfly valves for shut-off or isolating service. M. Provide drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping and apparatus. END OF SECTION 03878505 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING 15310 - 4 08/05 11 N LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 15325 SPRIl\TK ER SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wet -pipe sprinkler system. B. System design, installation, and certification. C. Fire department connections. 1.2 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 15310 - Fire Protection Piping: Piping and valves. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION' A. System to provide coverage for entire building. B. Provide system to NFPA 13 Installation of Sprinkler Systems requirements as determined by Fire Protection Contractor and Code Enforcement authorities. C. Determine volume and pressure of incoming water supply with a water flow test. The fire protection contractor shall verify the information with the Local Water Utility. Contractor shall provide this data to Engineer with the submittals. D. Interface system with building fire and smoke alarm system. E. Provide fire department connections as indicated. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 15000. B. Preliminary Shop Drawings: Prior to detailed submission, submit preliminary layout of finished ceiling areas indicating only head locations coordinated with ceiling installation. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate hydraulic calculations, detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, components and accessories. Indicate system controls. D. Product Data: Provide data on sprinkler heads, valves, and specialties, including manufacturers catalogue information. Submit performance ratings rough -in details, weights, support requirements, and piping connections. E. Submit shop drawings, product data, hydraulic calculations to authority having jurisdiction for approval. Submit proof of approval to Architect/Engineer. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that system has been tested and meets or exceeds code requirements. 03878505 SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15325 - 1 08/05 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 15000. B. Record actual locations of sprinkler heads and deviations of piping from drawings. Indicate drain and test locations. 1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 15000. B. Maintenance Data: Include components of system, servicing requirements, Record Drawings, inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and location and numbers of service depot. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Equipment and Components: Bear UL and FM label or marking. C. Maintain one copy of document on site. 1.9 QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this Section with minimum three documented years experience. B. Design sprinkler system under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Texas. 1.10 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Hydraulic Calculations, Product Data, and Shop Drawings: Bear stamp of approval of authority having jurisdiction. 1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and protect products to site under provisions of Section 15000. B. Store products in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation. 1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Section 15000. B. Provide extra sprinkler head under provisions of NFPA 13. C. Provide suitable wrenches for each head type. D. Provide metal storage cabinet in location designated. 03878505 SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15325 - 2 08/05 E_; LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Viking B. Grinnell C. Central Sprinkler D. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 15000. 2.2 SPRINKLER HEADS A. Suspended Ceiling: 1. Type: Standard pendant type with matching push on or clamp on escutcheon plate. 2. Head Finish: Chrome plated. 3. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Enamel, color as selected by architect. 4. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard. B. Exposed Area Type: 1. Type: Standard upright type with guard. 2. Head Finish: Brass. 3. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type or Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard. C. Sidewall Type: 1. Type: Recessed horizontal sidewall type with matching push on escutcheon plate. 2. Head Finish: Chrome plated. 3. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Enamel, color as selected by architect. 4. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard. D. Guards: Finish to match sprinkler head. 2.3 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Wet Pipe Sprinkler Alarm Valve: Check type valve with divided seat ring, rubber faced clapper to automatically actuate electrically or hydraulically operated alarms, with pressure retard chamber and variable pressure trim. B. Water Motor Alarm: Hydraulically operated impeller type alarm with aluminum alloy silver enameled gong and motor housing, nylon bearings, and inlet strainer. C. Water Flow Switch: Vane type switch for mounting horizontal or vertical, with two contacts rated 10 amp at 115 volt AC. D. Fire Department Connection: 1. Type: Flush mounted wall type with chrome finish. 2. Outlets: Two-way with thread size to suit fire department hardware; threaded dust cap and chain of matching material and finish. 3. Drain: 3/4 inch automatic drip, outside. 4. Label: "Sprinkler - Fire Department Connection". 03878505 SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15325 - 3 08105 i� LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 2.4 BACKFLOW PREVENTER VALVES A. Double Check Value Assemblies 1. Manufacturers: a. Willdns/Zum. b. Watts. C. Febco. d. Beeco. e. Ames Model 2000. f. Refer to Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements: For Product options and substitutions. 2. AWWA C506; Bronze body with corrosion resistant internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating check valves with intermediate atmospheric vent. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Coordinate work of this Section with other affected work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturers instructions. B. Install buried shut-off valves in valve box. Provide post indicator. C. Provide sprinkler system water source connection downstream of the buildings back -flow preventer assembly. D. Locate fire department connection with sufficient clearance from walls, obstructions, or adjacent siamese connectors to allow full swing of fire department wrench handle. E. Locate outside alarm gong on building wall as indicated. F. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work. G. Place piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings. H. Center heads in two directions in ceiling tile and provide piping offsets as required. I. Apply masking tape or paper cover to ensure concealed sprinkler head cover plates do not receive field paint finish. J. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter. K. Hydrostatically test entire system. L. Require test be witnessed by authority having jurisdiction. Notify Architect/Engineer prior to testing. 3.3 SPRINKLER HEAD TYPES A. The sprinkler head shall conform to the following initial type classifications: Location Sprinkler Head Type Apparatus Bay, Yard/Stor Exposed Pendent Rest of Building Concealed Pendent 3.4 SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. The locations shall conform to the following initial hazard classifications: 03878505 SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15325 - 4 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 Location System Type/Hazard Apparatus Bay, Yard/Stor. Ordinary Hazard, Group 1 Rest of Building Light Hazard END OF SECTION 03878505 SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15325 - 5 08105 l�e I LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 15410 PLUMBING PIPING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe and pipe fittings. B. Valves. C. Sanitary sewer piping system. D. Domestic water piping system. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI B31.9 - Building Service Piping. B. ASME Sec. 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications. C. ASME B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Class 25,125, 250 and 800. D. ASME B 16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. E. ASME B 16.4 - Cast Iron Threaded Fittings Class 125 and 250. F. ASME B 16.18 - Cast Bronze Solder -Joint Pressure Fittings. G. ASME B 16.22 - Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder -Joint Pressure Fittings H. ASME B16.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder -Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV. I. ASME B 16.26 - Cast Bronze Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes. J. ASME B16.29 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV. K. ASME B 16.32 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder -Joint Fittings for Solvent Drainage Systems. L. ASTM A47 - Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. M. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless. N. ASTM A74 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. O. ASTM A120 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped Zinc Coated (Galvanized), Welded and Seamless, for Ordinary Uses. P. ASTM A234 - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures. Q. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal. R. ASTM B42 - Seamless Copper Pipe. S. ASTM B43 - Seamless Red Brass Pipe. T. ASTM B75 - Seamless Copper Tube. U. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube. V. ASTM B251- Wrought Seamless Copper and Copper -Alloy Tube. W. ASTM B302 - Threadless Copper Pipe (TP). X. ASTM B306 - Copper Drainage Tube (DWV). Y. ASTM C564 - Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. Z. AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal. AA. CISPI 310 - Joints for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems. 03878505 PLUMBING PIPING 15410 - 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 2.7 NATURAL GAS PIPING, BURIED WITHIINT 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or A120, Schedule 40 black. 1. Fittings: ASTM A234, forged steel welding type, with AWWA C105 polyethylene jacket or double layer, half- lapped 10 mil polyethylene tape. 2. Joints: ANSI B31.1, ANSI B31.2, ANSI B31.9, ASME Sec 1, welded. 2.8 NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or A120, Schedule 40 black. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234, forged steel welding type. 2. Joints: NFPA 54, threaded or welded to ANSI B31.1, ANSI B31.2, ANSI B31.9, ASME Sec 2.9 NATURAL GAS PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or A120, Schedule 40 black. 1. Fittings: ASTM A234, forged steel welding type, with AWWA C105 polyethylene jacket or double layer, half- lapped 10 mil polyethylene tape. 2. Joints: ANSI B31.1, ANSI B31.2, ANSI B31.9, ASME Sec 1, welded. B. Polyethylene Pipe: Type 111, Grade 3, ASTM D2513, SDR 11.5. 1. Fittings: ASTM D2683 or ASTM D2513 socket type. 2. Joints: Fusion welded. 2.10 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS A. Pipe Size 2 Inches and Under: 1. Ferrous pipe: 150 psig malleable iron threaded unions. 2. Copper tube and pipe: 150 psig bronze unions with soldered joints. B. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. 2.11 GATE VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Grinnel. 2. Milwaukee. 3. Nibco. B. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, non -rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, double wedge or disc, solder or threaded ends. C. Over 2 Inches: iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, double wedge, flanged ends. 2.12 GLOBE VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Grinnel. 2. Milwaukee. 3. Nibco. 03878505 PLUMBING PIPING 15410 - 4 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 B. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, renewable composition disc, solder or screwed ends, with back seating capacity (repackable under pressure). C. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, plug -type disc, flanged ends, renewable seat and disc. 2.13 BALL VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Grinnel. 2. Milwaukee. 3. Nibco. B. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze two piece body, stainless steel ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle and balancing stops, solder or threaded ends with union. C. Over 2 Inches: Cast steel body, chrome plated steel ball, teflon seat and stuffing box seals, lever handle flanged. 2.14 SWING CHECK VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Grinnel. 2. Milwaukee. 3. Nibco. B. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze swing disc, solder or screwed ends. C. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends. 2.15 SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Grinnel. 2. Milwaukee. 3. Nibco. B. Iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel spring, renewable composition disc, screwed, wafer, or flanged ends. 2.16 STRAINERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Grinnel. 2. Milwaukee. 3. Nibco. B. Size 2 inch and Under: Screwed brass or iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen. C. Size 2-1/2 inch to 4 inch: Flanged iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y pattern with 3/64 inch stainless steel perforated screen. D. Size 5 inch and Larger: Flanged iron body for 175 psig working pressure, basket pattern with 1/8 inch stainless steel perforated screen. 2.17 PIPING ROOF SUPPORTS 03878505 PLUMBING PIPING 15410 - 5 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 A. Piping shall be supported by factory fabricated roof supports, MIRO Pillow Block Model 24-R or approved equivalent PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify excavations under provisions of Section 0 103 9. B. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over -excavated. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide non -conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. D. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space. E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. G. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. H. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of access doors with Section 15050. I. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. J. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories not prefinished, ready for finish painting. Refer to Section 09900. K. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream. L. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. M. Provide one plug valve wrench for every ten plug valves sized 2 inches and smaller, minimum of one. Provide each plug valve sized 2-1/2 inches and larger with a wrench with set screw. N. Pipe vents from gas pressure reducing valves to outdoors and terminate in weather proof hood. O. Piping shall be supported at 6 feet on center with factory fabricated roof supports. Flash supports into roof per roofing manufacturer recommendations. 3.4 SITE UTILITIES A. Before beginning excavation the Contractor shall: 1. Uncover and determine the elevation at beginning and end terminals of each line. 2. Compute and verify depth of all lines and grade of sewer lines and submit figures in writing. 3. Stake route of each line. 4. Arrange utility connections with proper authorities. 5. Locate and identify any conflicting underground structures and adjust grade or routing to accommodate installation of the lines. 03878505 PLUMBING PIPING 15410 - 6 08105 j LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 B. Lay pipe to the lines and profiles required by conditions at the site and the drawings. Keep pipe trenches free of water and dry during the bedding, laying and jointing operations. Install fittings and valves at the required locations, with joints centered and with valve stems vertical. Handle pipe carefully to avoid damage to dimensioned ends. Remove pipe with damaged ends which cannot be suitably repaired. Keep interior of piping and accessories clean. C. Proximity of Water and Sewer Lines: Unless otherwise required by drawings, lay parallel water lines and sewer lines in separate trenches at least 10 feet apart. Insofar as possible place water line at a higher elevation than the sewer. Where water lines and sewer lines cross each other, the water line shall be at least 3 feet above the sewer, or if this is not possible, amount of clearance between the lines may be reduced to 12" out to out clearance provided the sewer line is cast iron for at least 10 feet on each side of the water line. D. The Contractor shall perform any excavations of every description and of whatever substances encountered, to the depths indicated on the drawings and/or required for the installation ofhis work. E. Piling of Excavated Materials: All excavated material shall be pile in a manner that will not endanger the work and that will avoid obstructing sidewalks and driveways. Hydrants under pressure, valve pit covers, valve boxes, curb boxes, fire and police call boxes, or other utility controls shall be left unobstructed and accessible until the work is completed. Gutters shall be kept clear or other satisfactory provisions made for street drainage, and natural water courses shall not be obstructed. Segregate topsoil for replacement. Unused material shall be removed from the site. F. Trenching Methods: Trench digging machinery may be used to make trench excavations except where operation of same would cause damage to existing structures, or plants either above or below ground; in such instances hand method shall be employed. G. Barricades and Safety Provisions: To protect persons from injury and to avoid property damage, adequate barricades, construction signs, warning lights and guards as required shall be placed and maintained during progress of the construction work. All material, piles, equipment, pipe and open trenches that may serve as hazards to vehicular or pedestrian traffic shall be protected by barricades or fences and warning lights. H. Protection of Property and Structures: Temporary support, adequate protection, and maintenance of all underground and surface structures, drains, sewers, and other obstructions encountered in the progress of the work shall be furnished by the Contractor at his expense and under the direction of the Architect. Any structures that have been disturbed shall be restored upon completion of the work. I. The trenches shall not be backfilled until all required tests are performed and until the utilities systems as installed conform to the requirements specified hereinafter. The trenches shall be carefully backfilled with the excavation materials approved for backfilling, consisting of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand and gravel, soft shale, or other approved materials free from large clods of earth or stones deposited in thoroughly and carefully rammed 6" layers, until the pipe has a cover of not less than one foot for water mains and two feet where possible for other lines. J. The remainder of the back -fill material shall then be thrown into the trench, moistened and tamped in one foot layers. Blasted rock, broken concrete or pavement, and large boulders shall not be used as backfill material. Settling the backfill with water will be permissible and will be a requirement when so directed. Any trenches improperly backfilled or where settlement occurs, shall be reopened to the depth required for proper compaction, then refilled and mounded over, and smoothed off. K. Open trenches across roadways or other areas to be paved shall be backfilled as specified above, except that the entire depth of the trench shall be backfilled in 6" layers, each layer moistened and compacted to a density at least equal to that of the surrounding earth in such manner as to permit the rolling and compaction of the filled trench together with the adjoining "3 03878505 PLUMBING PIPING 15410 - 7 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 earth to provide the required bearing value, so that paving of the area can proceed immediately after backfilling is completed. Along all other portions of the tenches, the ground shall be graded to a reasonable uniformity and the mounding over the trenches left in a uniform and neat condition. L. Contractor shall label all new underground utility lines as follows: 1. Non-metallic: a. Non-metallic pipe installed below ground shall have installed in the same trench a detectable plastic tape that conforms in to the APWA color coding as follows: 1) Blue — Water 2) Green — Sewer and Sanitary Systems 3) Yellow — Gas Such tape shall consist of one layer of aluminum foil laminated between two layers of inert plastic film. Tape shall be approved 21/8" wide. The tape shall be imprinted and continuously traceable. The tape shall be durable for a minimum of eight years after direct burial. Product shall be Terra Tape Detectable or approved equal. Tape shall be installed per manufacturer's instructions, but no less than 12" above the buried line. 2. Metallic: a. Below ground metallic piping shall have identifying tape similar to that specified for below ground non-metallic except that the aluminum foil for location is not required. M. Water Service: The Contractor shall secure water service from the city main as indicated on the drawings. The Contractor shall make arrangements with the city for domestic water service, including the tap, meter and meter box, and pay all charges levied by the city. Beginning at the termination of the city work, the contractor shall provide and install all water piping, fittings, valves, valve boxes, etc. shown on the drawings. Meter box shall conform to municipal requirements. N. Sanitary Sewer: The contractor shall arrange with the city for sewer service at the point shown on the drawings. Pay any charges levied by the city for this connection. O. Gas: Arrange with the gas utility company for natural gas service as shown on the drawings. From the location of the new meter, extend service to the building. Provide service valves at each service point. P. Fire Protection Water Service: The Contractor shall secure service from the city main at the point shown. Arrange for the tap with the city and pay all charges levied by the city for the service. Q. Testing of Sewer Pipe: Prior to testing for leakage the trench shall be backfilled up to at least the lower half of the pipe. If required, sufficient additional backfill shall be placed to prevent pipe movement during testing, leaving the j oints uncovered to permit inspection. Visible leaks encountered shall be corrected. Test shall be made by filling the line to be tested with water so that a head of at least 10 feet is provided above the top of the pipe at the upper end of the pipe line to be tested. The filled line shall be allowed to stand not less than 4 hours. R. For Testing of Water Lines: Test under hydrostatic pressure of 150 PSIG for 4 hours with no leaks and no pressure drop. S. For Testing of Gas: Before back -filling, test under air pressure at 15 PSIG for 24 hours. There shall be no pressure drop, except for correction for temperature variation. If any pressure drop occurs, soap test every joint, correct leaks and retest. 3.5 APPLICATION 03878505 PLUMBING PIPING 15410 - 8 08105 i_r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 A. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations. B. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. C. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder adapters to pipe. D. Install gate, ball or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. E. Install globe, ball or butterfly valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services. 3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/4 inch per one foot. Maintain gradients. B. Slope water piping and arrange to drain at low points. C. Slope condensate drain lines at 1/8 inch per one foot. Maintain gradients. 3.7 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Refer to Section 15000 for additional information. B. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean. Provide verification of disinfection to Architect. C. Ensure pH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric). D. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual. E. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets. F. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. G. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment. H. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L. I. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651. 3.8 SERVICE CONNECTIONS A. Provide new reduced pressure principle back -flow preventer with by-pass valves pressure reducing valve, and floor sink. END OF SECTION 15410 03878505 PLUMBING PIPING 15410 - 9 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 15430 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cleanouts. B. Water hammer arrestors. C. Backflow preventer. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASME A112.21.1- Floor Drains. B. ASME Al 12.26.1- Water Hammer Arrestors. C. PDI WH-201 - Water Hammer Arrestors. D. ASSE 1013 - Backflow Preventers, Reduced Pressure Principle. 1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 15000: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough -in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Section 15000: Procedures for submittals. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate assembly and support requirements. 1.5 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements: Procedures for submittals. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment, cleanouts, and water hammer arrestors. C. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Transport, handle, store, and protect products. B. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage. 1.8 MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS 03878505 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 1 01105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 A. Sections 15000 General Mechanical requirements. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements: Procedures for submittals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CLEANOUTS — REFER TO PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE ON PLANS 2.2 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS — REFER TO PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE ON PLANE'S 2.3 BACKFLOW PREVENTER A. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventer 1. Manufacturers: a. Wilkins/Zurn Model 975XL. b. Watts Model 909. C. Febco Model825. d. Beeco Model 12. e. Refer to Sections 15000 General Mechanical Requirements: For Product options and substitutions. 2. Under 2 Inches: ANSI/ASSE 1013, and AWWA C506; bronze body with bronze internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential pressure relief valve located between check valves; third check valve that opens under back pressure in case of diaphragm failure; non -threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate valves, strainer, and four test cocks. 3. Over 2 Inches: ANSI/ASSE 1013, and AWWA C506, Cast iron body with bronze internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential pressure relief valve located between check valves; third check valve that opens under back pressure in case of diaphragm failure; non -threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate valves, strainer, and four test cocks. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system. C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade. D. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor. E. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on hot and cold water supply piping to each fixture or group of fixtures. ( j END OF SECTION 15430 03878505 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 2 08/OS LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water closets. B. Lavatories. C. Sinks. D. Urinal. E. Floor drains. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ARI 1010 - Drinking Fountains and Self -Contained Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking Water Coolers. B. ASME Al 12.6.1 - Supports for Off -the -Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use. C. ASME Al 12.18.1 - Finished and Rough Brass Plumbing Fixture Fittings. D. ASME Al 12.19.1 - Enameled Cast Iron Plumbing Fixtures. E. ASME Al 12.19.2 - Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures. F. ASME Al 12.19.3 - Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures (Designed for Residential Use). G. ASME Al 12.19.4 - Porcelain Enameled Formed Steel Plumbing Fixtures. H. ASME Al12.19.5 - Trim for Water -Closet Bowls, Tanks, and Urinals. I. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough -in dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and finishes. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements: Procedures for submittals. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation methods and procedures. 1.5 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements: Procedures for submittals. B. Maintenance Data: Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists. C. Warranty: Submit manufacturers warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 03878505 PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 - 1 08i05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified Underwriters Laboratories q g Y Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage. B. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to protect fixtures and prevent use. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for electric water cooler. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements. B. Supply two sets of faucet washers, flush valve service kits, lavatory supply fittings and toilet seats of each respective type of fixture. l PART 2 - PRODUCTS — Refer to Plumbing Fixture Schedule for Fixtures PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures. B. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics. C. Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter top lavatories and sinks. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Rough -in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture i rough -in schedule for particular fixtures. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. ' 1i B. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with screwdriver stops, reducers, `. and escutcheons. C. Install components level and plumb. D. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall carriers and bolts. l E. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in Section 07900, color to match fixture. 03878505 PLUMBING FIXTURES 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 F. Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended hold fixture in place. G. Install floor drains where shown and coordinate slope of floor to drain. 3.4 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough -in and installation. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Adjusting installed work. B. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow. 3.6 CLEANING A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Cleaning installed work. B. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. 3.7 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Protecting installed work. B. Do not permit use of fixtures. 3.8 SCHEDULES A. Fixture Heights: Install fixtures to heights above finished floor as indicated on architectural drawings and plumbing fixture schedule, to be in compliance with AD A requirements. B. Fixture Rough -In, refer to plumbing schedule on drawings for sizes. 03878505 08/05 END OF SECTION 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 - 3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 15625 LOW -INTENSITY INFRARED UNIT HEATERS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Low -intensity infrared unit heaters. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASHRAE 103 - Heating Seasonal Efficiency of Central Furnaces and Boilers, Methods of Testing. B. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators. C. NFPA 54 (AGA Z223.1) - National Fuel Gas Code. D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. E. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. F. NFPA 90B - Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems. G. NFPA 211 - Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents, and Solid Fuel Burning Appliances. 1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's literature and data indicating rated capacities, weights, accessories, electrical nameplate data, and wiring diagrams. C. Shop Drawings: D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate rigging, assembly, and installation instructions. 1.4 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements: Procedures for submittals. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing. C. Warranty: Submit manufacturers warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in Owners name and registered with manufacturer. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 03979505 LOW -INTENSITY INFRARED UNIT HEATERS 09105 15625 - 1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1.7 WARRANTY A. Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements. B. Provide ten year manufacturers warranty for all tubes and five year warranty on the burner. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Section 15000 General Mechanical requirements. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 LOW -INTENSITY INFRARED UNIT HEATERS A. Units: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled, pre -wired unit consisting of cabinet, tube, tube shield, heat exchanger, burner, controls, and accessories: 1. Heating: Natural gas fired. B. Gas Burner: 1. Atmospheric type with adjustable combustion air supply, 2. Gas valve, two stage provides 100 percent safety gas shut-off; 24 volt combining pressure regulation, safety pilot, manual set (On -Off), pilot filtration, automatic electric valve. 3. Electronic pilot ignition, with electric spark igniter. 4. Automatic vent damper with synchronous spring return damper motor. 5. Non -corrosive combustion air blower with permanently lubricated motor. C. Gas Burner Safety Controls: 1. Thermocouple sensor: Prevents opening of gas valve until pilot flame is proven and stops gas flow on ignition failure. 2. Flame rollout switch: Installed on burner box and prevents operation. 3. Vent safety shutoff sensor: Temperature sensor installed on draft hood and prevents operation, manual reset. 4. Limit Control: Fixed stop at maximum permissible setting, de -energizes burner on excessive bonnet temperature, automatic resets. D. Operating Controls 1. Room Thermostat: Manufacturer supplied thermostat, cycles burner to maintain room temperature setting. 2. On/Off Switch: Manufacturer supplied On/Off switch. E. Performance: 1. Ratings: Energy Efficiency Rating (EER) not less than requirements of ASHRAE 90A; seasonal efficiency to ASHRAE 103. 2. Refer to Low -Intensity Infrared Unit Heater Schedule on drawings. Gas heating capacities are not derated for altitude. 2.2 TYPE B DOUBLE WALL GAS VENTS A. Fabrication: Inner pipe of sheet aluminum, and outer pipe of galvanized sheet steel, tested in compliance with UL 441. B, Mechanically Actuated Vent Dampers: Same size as draft hood collar, constructed of stainless steel or galvanized steel, with corrosion -resistant components, in compliance with ANSI Z21.66. 03878505 LOW -INTENSITY INFRARED UNIT HEATERS 15625 - 2 08/05 , IJ LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings: Verification of existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that space is ready for installation of units and openings are as indicated on shop drawings. C. Verify that proper power supply is available. D. Verify that proper fuel supply is available for connection. Connections shall be made the flexible braided stainless steel connection with 6" dirt leg and shutoff valve. E. Contractor shall coordinate location with over -head door tracks and vehicle exhaust system, to avoid all conflicts. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. B. Provide vent connections to NFPA 211. C. Install gas -fired units in accordance with NFPA 54. D. Provide operating controls. E. Provide connection to electrical power systems. F. Install radiant heating from the structure as shown on the drawings, coordinate installation with structural members. END OF SECTION 03878505 LOW -INTENSITY INFRARED UNIT HEATERS 15625 - 3 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 15781 PACKAGED ROOF TOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Packaged roof top unit with energy recycler. B. Unit controls. Fil C. Roof mounting curb and base. D. Maintenance service. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ARI 210 - Unitary Air -Conditioning Equipment. B. ARI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment. C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. D. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements: Procedures for submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate capacity and dimensions of manufactured products and assemblies required for this project. Indicate electrical service with electrical characteristics and connection requirements, and duct connections. C. Product Data: Provide capacity and dimensions of manufactured products and assemblies required for this project. Indicate electrical service with electrical characteristics and connection requirements, and duct connections. D. Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements: Submittals for information. E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate assembly, support details, connection requirements, and include start-up instructions. F. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout, 01730 - Operation and Maintenance Data and 15000 General Mechanical Requirements: Submittals for project closeout. G. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 03878505 PACKAGED ROOF TOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15781 - 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 i 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Transport, handle, store, and protect products. B. Protect units from physical damage by storing off site until roof mounting curbs are in place, ready for immediate installation of units. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements. B. Provide a five-year warranty to include coverage for refrigeration compressors and gas -fired heat exchangers. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements. B. Furnish service and maintenance of packaged roof top units for one year from Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide maintenance service with a two -month interval as maximum time period between calls. Provide 24-hour emergency service on breakdowns and malfunctions. D. Include maintenance items as outlined in manufacturer's operating and maintenance data, including minimum of six filter replacements, minimum of one fan belt replacement, and controls check-out, adjustments, and recalibration. E. Submit copy of service call work order or report, and include description of work performed. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements. B. Provide two complete set of each type of filters. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Carrier. B. Lennox. C. York. D. Refer to Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements: For Product options and substitutions E. Note: Packaged Rooftop Air Conditioning Units, energy recycler, and system controls must be from the same manufacturer. No exceptions allowed. 2.2 AIR CONDITIONING UNITS A. General: Roof mounted units having gas burner and electric refrigeration. j B. Description: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled and prewired, consisting of cabinet and frame, supply fan, heat exchanger and burner, controls, air filters, refrigerant cooling coil and compressor, condenser coil and condenser fan. 03878505 PACKAGED ROOF TOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15781 - 2 08/05 L _, LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 C. Electrical Characteristics: Refer to schedules on drawings for information. 1. Refer to Division 16000. D. DISCONNECT SWITCH: IS TO BE SUPPLIED AND INSTALLED BY DIVISION 16 CONTRACTOR MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR IS TO COORDINATE ALL UNIT REQUIREMENTS WITH ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR 2.3 FABRICATION A. Cabinet: Galvanized steel with baked enamel finish, access doors or removable access panels with quick fasteners screwdriver operated flush cam type. Structural members shall be minimum 18 gage, with access doors or removable panels of minimum 20 gage. B. Insulation: One inch thick neoprene coated glass fiber with edges protected from erosion. C. Heat Exchangers: Stainless steel, of welded construction. D. Supply Fan: Forward curved centrifugal type, resiliently mounted with V-belt drive, adjustable variable pitch motor pulley, and rubber isolated hinge mounted high efficiency motor or direct drive as indicated. Isolate complete fan assembly. E. Air Filters: Refer to schedules on drawings for information. F. Roof Mounting Curb: 14 inches high galvanized steel, channel frame with gaskets, nailer strips. 2.4 BURNER A. Gas Burner: Atmospheric, induced draft, or forced draft type burner with adjustable combustion air supply, pressure regulator, gas valves, manual shut-off, intermittent spark or glow coil ignition, flame sensing device, and automatic 100 percent shut-off pilot. B. Gas Burner Safety Controls: Energize ignition, limit time for establishment of flame, prevent opening of gas valve until pilot flame is proven, stop gas flow on ignition failure, energize blower motor, and after air flow proven and slight delay, allow gas valve to open. C. High Limit Control: Temperature sensor with fixed stop at maximum permissible setting, de -energize burner on excessive bonnet temperature and energize burner when temperature drops to lower safe value. D. Supply Fan Control: Temperature sensor sensing bonnet temperatures and independent of burner controls, with provisions for continuous fan operation. 2.5 EVAPORATOR COIL A. Provide copper tube aluminum fin coil assembly with galvanized drain pan and connection. B. Provide capillary tubes or thermostatic expansion valves for units of 6 tons capacity and less, and thermostatic expansion valves and alternate row circuiting for units 7.5 tons cooling capacity and larger. 2.6 COMPRESSOR A. Provide hermetic or semi -hermetic compressors, 3600 rpm maximum, resiliently mounted with positive lubrication, crankcase heater, high and low pressure safety controls, motor overload protection, suction and discharge service valves and gage ports, and filter drier. B. Five-minute timed off circuit to delay compressor start. 03878505' PACKAGED ROOF TOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15781 - 3 081115 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 C. Outdoor thermostat to energize compressor above 57 degrees F ambient. D. Provide step capacity control by hot gas by-pass, cycling compressors, cylinder unloading or cycling multi -speed compressors. 2.7 CONDENSER COIL A. Provide copper tube aluminum fin coil assembly with subcooling rows and coil guard. B. Provide direct drive propeller fans, resiliently mounted with fan guard, motor overload protection, wired to operate with compressor. Provide high efficiency fan motors. C. Provide refrigerant pressure switches to cycle condenser fans. D. Unit shall have metal hail guard. Guard shall be PVC coated steel wire coil with a maximum 3/8" spacing grid. 2.8 MIXED AIR CASING A. Dampers: Provide manual outside and return air dampers for fixed outside air quantity. B. Gaskets: Provide tight fitting dampers with edge gaskets maximum leakage 5 percent at 2 inches pressure differential. C. Damper Operator: 24 volt with gear train sealed in oil with spring return on units 7.5 ton cooling capacity and larger. D. Mixed Air Controls: Maintain selected supply air temperature and return dampers to minimum position on call for heating and when ambient air enthalpy exceeds return air enthalpy. 2.9 ENERGY RECYCLER A. Factory assembled and factory mounted single piece heating and cooling accessory for use with RTU-1 and RTU-2. Contained within the unit enclosure shall be all factory wiring, piping, controls, and refrigerant charge (R-22). B. Unit shall be mounted on extension rails from the rooftop unit. C. Provide all standard features with unit. Energy Recycler shall be controlled by RTU thermostat. 2.10 OPERATING CONTROL A. Provide low voltage, programmable room thermostat to control burner operation, compressor and condenser fan, economize cycle and supply fan to maintain temperature setting. 1. Include system selector switch (off -heat -auto -cool) and fan control switch (auto -on). 2. Provide double acting thermostat with minimum 1 stage heating and 1 stage cooling. 3. Locate thermostat in room as shown. B. Provide low limit thermostat in supply air to close outside air damper and stop supply fan. C. Thermostat and controls to be provided by roof top unit manufacturer. No exceptions. 2.11 PERFORMANCE A. Gas Heating: Refer to schedules on drawings for information. B. Cooling Capacity: Refer to schedules on drawings for information. C. Supply Air: Refer to schedules on drawings for information. D. Scheduled Performance: Refer to schedules on drawings for information. E. Supply and return air: Corrected to 3250 feet altitude. 03878505 PACKAGED ROOF TOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15781 - 4 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings: Verification of existing conditions prior to beginning work. B. Verify that roof is ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. C. Verify that proper power supply is available. D. Verify that outside air intake is minimum 10'-0" from all exhaust and/or plumbing vents. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in accordance with NFPA 90A. C. Mount units on factory built roof mounting curb providing watertight enclosure to protect ductwork and utility services. Install roof mounting curb and rooftop unit level. D. Connect thermostat to rooftop unit. 3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Prepare and start systems under provisions of Section 15000. B. Provide initial start-up and shut -down during first year of operation, including routine servicing and check-out. 3.4 SCHEDULES: REFER TO SCHEDULES ON DRAWINGS FOR INFORMATION. END OF SECTION 15781 03878505 PACKAGED ROOF TOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15781 - 5 08/05 �a ' LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 15870 POWER VENTILATORS AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS i PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Roof mounted exhausters. B. Ceiling mounted exhausters. C. Vehicle exhaust system. 1 1.2 REFERENCES A. Section 01400 - Quality Control and 15000 General Mechanical Requirements: Requirements for references and standards. B. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook. ' C. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes. D. AMCA 261 - Directory of Products Licensed to Bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal. E. AMCA 300 - Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices. F. AMCA 301 - Method of Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving Devices. G. NEMA MGl - Motors and Generators. I H. UL 705 - Power Ventilators. 1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide data on fans and accessories including fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION -= A. Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements: Procedures for submittals. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions. 1.5 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements: Procedures for submittals. B. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare parts list, and wiring diagrams. C. Warranty: Submit manufacturers warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 03878505 POWER VENTILATORS AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS 15870 - 1 �J 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements. B. Supply two sets of belts for each fan. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ROOF MOUNTED EXHAUSTERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Greenheck 2. Loren Cook 3. Penn Vantilator 4. Substitutions: Acme Engineering and Manufacturing Corporation fans are not acceptable for this application. B. Product Requirements: 1. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the AMCA Certified Rating Seal. 2. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300, and bear AMCA Certified Sound Rating Seal. 3. Fabrication: Conform to AMA 99. 4. UL Compliance: UL listed and labeled, designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with UL 705. C. Construction: 1. Fan Unit: V-belt or direct driven as indicated, with spun aluminum housing; resilient mounted motor, % inch mesh, 0.62 inch thick aluminum wire bird screen; square base to suit roof curb with continuous curb gaskets. 2. Sheaves: Cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed; variable and adjustable pitch motor sheave selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid -position; fan shaft with self -aligning pre -lubricated ball bearings. D. Accessories: 1. Roof curb: 12 inch high, self -flashing aluminum with continuously welded seams, built-in cant strips, one inch insulation and curb bottom, and factory installed nailer strip. 2. Disconnect Switch: Factory -wired and mounted, non -fusible, in housing for thermal overload protected motor. 3. Back -draft Damper: Gravity actuated, aluminum multiple blade construction, felt edged with offset hinge pin, nylon bearings, blades linked. E. Electrical characteristics and components: 1. Refer to Division 16 Specifications and Schedules. 03878505 POWER VENTILATORS AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS 15870 - 2 08/05 1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 2.2 CEILING EXHAUST FAN A. Manufacturers: 1. Loren Cook. 2. Greenheck. 3. Penn Ventilator. 4. Substitutions: Acme Manufacturing is not permitted as an alternate. B. Construction 1. Centrifugal Fan Unit: V-belt or direct driven with galvanized steel housing, resilient mounted motor, gravity back -draft damper in discharge. 2. Disconnect Switch: Cord and plug in housing for thermal overload protected motor and wall mounted multiple speed switch and solid state speed controller. 3. Grille: Molded white plastic. 4. Sheaves: Cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed; variable and adjustable pitch motor sheaves selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid -position; fan shaft with self -aligning pre -lubricated ball bearings. C. Electrical characteristics and components. Refer to Division 16 Specifications and Schedules. 2.3 VEHICLE EXHAUST SYSTEM: A. System to provide vehicle exhaust for two fire trucks. As per requested by owner, vehicle exhaust manufacturer shall be Plymovent Vehicle Exhaust Ventilation Systems. B. Manufacturer/Contractor to determine exhaust requirements for owner supplied fire trucks. Contractor shall verify the information with the owner. Contractor shall provide this data to Engineer with the submittals for the entire vehicle exhaust system. C. Scope of System Operation: The vehicle exhaust removal system shall source capture 100% of the exhaust emissions directly at the tail pipe of the vehicle and exhaust those emissions to a specified area safely outside the building. When the vehicle returns to the station, simply sleeve the nozzle over the tail pipe, pull up on the hose handle, and connect the electromagnet assembly to the anchor plate mounted to the vehicle. The nozzle remains in place over the tail pipe by spring tension created between the dimensional relationship from the tail pipe to the anchor plate. Upon vehicle exit, the electromagnet and anchor plate connection serves as the lead pulling component for the hose and nozzle which moves with the vehicle in either direction of travel, forward or reverse. As the tail pipe passes the exit threshold, the electromagnet is automatically de -energized by a limit switch that contacts a disconnection plats allowing the nozzle and hose to smoothly separate from the vehicle. After release, the balancer safely retracts the hose assembly in a stored position ready to receive the vehicle for connection to the exhaust extraction system upon reentry. No positive locking device nor moving parts shall be permitted to be connected to the tail pipe. Bending over to connect the exhaust system and expose the operator to harmful exhaust fumes is not permitted. Upon disconnection, the hose assembly shall not be permitted to swing wide. Possibly endangering personnel and the hose shall remain at the door ready for connection. 03878505 POWER VENTILATORS AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS 15870 - 3 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 D. Fan Auto -Start: As the emergency apparatus approaches the facility, the Fan Auto -Start system automatically starts the exhaust fan, thus the fan is at full rpm prior to entry or connection. This is accomplished by an FCC approved radio transmitter mounted in the vehicle sending a signal to a receiver to start the fan. This permits the operator to connect the exhaust system to the vehicle without being exposed to noxious exhaust fumes. The fan remains in the "on" position for the duration that the vehicle is running. The fan does not shut down until after the vehicle has been tamed off and can be preset from 45 seconds — 10 minutes with an adjustable timer. Upon emergency dispatch of the vehicle, the exhaust fan shall automatically start prior to the engine being energized. The fan will automatically shut down after the apparatus has left the building and the timer engages. The control console shall be a NEMA-1 enclosure with a dual safety lock cover. Internal components are UL approved; manufactured by General Electric. E. Optional Fan Activation: The exhaust fan shall be operated in conjunction with an automatic off delay timer, 0-10 minute variable setting, wired to the open relay of the door opener or a central tone system. This allows for automatic operation of the exhaust fan when opening the vehicle exit or entry door. Alternatively, the fan shall also have the capability to be operated from a 0-20 minute manual override timer to be located in the vehicle bay area at a convenient access location. F. Guide Track: The horizontal guide track supports and stores the overhead hose and is mounted overhead and to the side of the vehicle. Mounted to the horizontal guide track is a 6: diameter flexible hose with individual inner trolleys which ride inside the guide track and permit the flexible hose to expand and contract while the vehicle is moving. The horizontal guide track shall be made of 12 gauge low carbon strip steel, cold formed into a channel measuring 1.5625" square, with one side having a continuous open slot measuring 0.4375" wide, giving an overall throat depth of 1.5". Guide tracks shall be provided such that no incremental length shall be greater than 20 feet without a 4 bolt flange -to -flange connection arrangement for field assembly to the length as shown or indicated on the drawings. Guide tracks shall have a non -toxic alkyd enamel rust preventive finish. Guide tracks shall be supported by structural vertical supports, i.e. schedule 170 unistrut and/or 114" angle iron, connected to the ceiling/wall of the facility. G. Guide Track Clamping Brackets: Each horizontal guide track shall be provided with an adjustable self aligning clamping bracket to support and connect the guide track to the installation brackets. Clamping brackets shall be of 0.1875" electro-plated galvanized steel bar and formed in configuration which wraps tightly around and is bolted to the guide track. Clamping brackets shall be 1.625" wide x 4.125" high, and assembled to the guide track at a distance no greater than 9'6" on center. H. Horizontal Extraction Hose: The horizontal extraction hose is suspended from the horizontal guide track which stores the hose up and out of the way to ensure a safer approach to the apparatus during a run. The horizontal extraction hose shall be 6" in diameter and of suitable flexibility and length to prevent premature wear on the hose material from being fully stretched on a regular basis. Therefore, the hose must be able to withstand 100,000 runs without tearing, perforating or collapsing (under normal use with proper installation and care). The material for the hose shall be Trevira bavric covered with HYPALON (CSM, Chloro-sulfonated polythylene). The hose shall be fire resistant according to DIN 4102 B1. The hose shall be capable of withstanding temperatures of 340 degrees Fahrenheit continuously, and up to 370 degrees Fahrenheit on an intermittent usage basis. The helix shall be external and made of galvanized steel or aluminum. The helix shall have high flexibility and be able to withstand oil, chemical, ozone, and weather resistance. The hose compression ratio shall not be less than 6:1. The helix shall be 03878505 POWER VENTILATORS AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS 15870 - 4 08/05 E ! t LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 arranged to have eyelets clamped and pressed approximately every 12". The eyelets are to be used for suspending the hose from individual nylon trolleys, maintenance free, which will be inserted in the horizontal guide track upon assembly at the job site. Hose trolleys shall have an overall diameter and width to allow a tolerance of no greater than 0.046" clearance between cylinder ends and inner wall of the guide tack. Once installed in the guide track, the clearance between the top of the horizontal hose and the bottom of the guide track shall less than or equal to 2" at any given point, whether the hose is extended or compressed. This concept shall prevent any continuous hanging or drooping loops of hose which could obstruct or hinder movement of people or vehicles in the work place. At the end of the flexible hose shall be a minimum 6-1/4" diameter round galvanized steel connector as a coupler for flexible to solid ductwork. The connector shall be arranged to fasten to the end of the guide track and be adjustable upon assembly for alignment to solid duct work. I. Upper Vertical Extraction Hose: The upper vertical extraction hose shall be 6: in diameter, and of suitable flexibility to have a compression ratio of 6:1. The hose material shall Trevira fabric covered with HYPALYON (CSM, Chloro-sulfonated polythylene). The hose shall be fire resistant according to DIN 4102 B1. The hose shall be capable of withstanding temperatures of 340 degrees Fahrenheit continuously and up to 370 degreed Fahrenheit on an intermittent usage basis. The external helix shall be made of galvanized steel or aluminum, not exposed to the internal air stream, to maintain a smooth bore interior hose for minimum static pressure losses and maximum efficiency. The helix shall have high flexibility and be able to withstand oil, chemical, ozone and weather resistance. J. Balancer: The balancer shall be provided to add or release tension to the vertical hose and nozzle assembly away from the vehicle as it leaves the building, when the electromagnet disengages. The balancer also permits the vertical hose and nozzle assembly to be suspended safely off the floor in the storage position when not in use. The balancer shall be of a cone shape drum design with centrifugal brake and reverse spring characteristics, mounted on a 12 gauge steel formed bracket. The balancer is to be equipped with 27 feet of cord which shall feed from the balancer cone, penetrate a steel elbow (which joins the horizontal and vertical hoses) and is fastened internally at the electromagnet coupler, so the cord is internal to the upper vertical extraction hose. The centrifugal brake shall ensure that the cord is would onto the drum at a low speed. The reverse spring characteristic shall have the full spring power to the balancer when the cord is wound onto the drum. The spring power shall be gradually and continually reduced the farther the cord is pulled (unwound) off the balancer cone. At 26.4'of cord extension, lifting power shall be 27 ft. lbs. Of torque. The withdrawal shall be 50% greater than the lifting power. The cone shaped drum and cord assembly shall be exposed for ease of adjustment to tension if required. Mounted to the Balancer formed bracket shall be 6: x 90 degrees, 1.5 radius, 24 gauge coated steel elbow which is to join the horizontal extraction hose to the vertical extraction hose with 6: to 5: reducer hose clamps and covers as provided. Attached to the backside of the balancer formed bracket is an all steel trolley which inserts into the horizontal guide track upon field assembly. The trolley framework shall be welded and be constructed of 25: hardened steel and fitted with no less than six steel ball bearing rollers which freely roll in the guide track. K. Microswitch: Mounted to the balancer formed bracket shall be a 24V microswitch which, acting as a limit switch, is factory pre -wired to energize and de -energize the electromagnet upon contact with a disconnection plate positioned on the horizontal guide track. 03878505 POWER VENTILATORS AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS 15870 - 5 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 L. Diconnected Plate: Affixed to the end of the guide track nearest the exit door, shall be a galvanized steel disconnection plate. The disconnection plate shall serve as the contact point for the microswitch which, upon contact with the disconnection plate, shall de - energize the electromagnet to separate the hose assemble from the vehicle The separation of the entire hose assembly from the vehicle is one step process whereby no stress or strain is transferred from the vehicle to the exhaust equipment. Numerous mechanical functions to achieve nozzle separation such as valve activation, pneumatic deflation, and pulling forces to remove the nozzle from the tail pipe are not permitted. The disconnection plate shall be an adjustable bolted attachment and shall be positioned upon installation to create a nozzle release point between l' to 2' inside the door threshold as the vehicle exits the building. M. End Stop: The guide track shall be equipped with an end stop which is designed to stop the travel of the entire hose assembly. The stopping action itself must be spring cushioned to prevent the hose and nozzle assembly from coming to an abrupt and immediate halt. A coiled spring end stop is inserted internally at the end of the guide track nearest to the exit door. The spring must be safety bolted in place at the opposite end of the contact point of the balancer trolley. N. Electromagnet Assembly: An electromagnet assembly shall be used as the means of keeping the nozzle and hose assembly attached to the vehicle, whether at rest or as it moves to the point of exit. The electromagnet disc, a manual override switch, and an anchor plate. The electromagnet disc assembly shall consist of a 2.75" diameter by 1.5625" wide cup which is externally mounted to the side of a 6: diameter galvanized steel sleeve. The steel sleeve shall serve as both the mounting point of the electromagnet as well as the coupler of the upper vertical hose and lower hose assembly with nozzle. The steel sleeve shall be 5: in diameter, 24 gauge galvanized steel and have a rolled bead at each end to secure the hoses via hose clamps. The electromagnet disc assembly shall be slightly recessed within a hard resilient plastic cup, measuring 2.75" in diameter by 1.5625" deep by 0.0625" thick. The plastic cup also serves as a guide for ease of connection to the anchor plate mounted on the vehicle. The disc consists of an outer 0.125" thick metal ring encased in bakalyte which in turn surrounds a 1.25" diameter solid metal disc. These metal components shall serve as the energized contact points to the anchor plate on the vehicle. The entire width of the cup assembly shall be protected by a 0.0625" thick molded rubber collar, formed to be of a diameter greater than 3.25", creating an anti -scratching cover. The formed collar shall also be of a smooth and rounded configuration to prevent hooking or catching on external devices of the vehicle. O. Manual Override Switch: A manual override switch shall be easily accessible to disconnect the hose assembly while washing the vehicle or accessing storage compartments. The manual override switch shall be mounted externally, located 90 degrees to the right side of the electromagnet disc assembly and facing the operator. The purpose of the switch shall be to manually de -energize the electromagnet, allowing the hose and nozzle assembly to come away unrestrained from the vehicle when in the parked position within the building. The switch shall be a normally closed, single pole, single throw (NC-SPST), spring loaded, momentary ON with a black matte rocking actuator. The switch shall be UL Recognized, CSA Approved and rated for 6A, 250VAC. The switch shall be surrounded an mounted in a closed cell neoprene jacket, 1.25" wide. The jacket is epoxy coated to the outside of the collar and wraps 90 degrees to the electromagnet, but protrudes no greater than 0.875" externally off the side wall. Power is fed to the switches as an integral function of the vertical base, which in turn feeds the electromagnet. 03878505 POWER VENTILATORS AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS 15870 - 6 08/05 1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 P. Anchor Plate: The anchor plate shall be mounted on the vehicle to allow the operator, in an upright position, to connect the electromagnet. The anchor plate shall have an outer circular holder made of hard resilient plastic, which measures 4.365" in diameter and has an outer rim thickness of 0.625". The inside diameter of the rim shall be 3.3125" which allows adequate clearance for operator ease of connection to the electromagnet. Recessed in the center of the holder shall be a finished steel disc measuring 2.4375: in diameter and 0.21875" thick, and held in place with a set screw. The backside of the circular holder shall be flat, smooth, and with no prot usions. There shall also be two pass through hoes on the backside for field installation of the anchor plate to the vehicle. The backside of the metal plate shall have two tapped holes for receiving two machine screws upon field assembly to the vehicle. The anchor plate shall be positioned on the vehicle in relation to the vertical and horizontal centerlines of the tail pipe outlet. The horizontal distance shall be f 3" beyond the vertical centerline toward the front of the vehicle. The vertical range shall be 24: (+4" — 1 ") from the horizontal centerline. Deviations to the location of the anchor plate beyond the dimensional parameters previously described are to be approved solely by an authorized representative of the manufacturer of the exhaust removal system. Q. Lower Vertical Hose: The lower vertical hose shall be 6" in diameter and be formed to easily connect the nozzle to the tail pipe. The hose diameter shall exceed the tail pipe diameter to ensure source capture of 100% of all exhaust fume volume emissions. The typical engine and truck pipe diameter is 5". A 4" diameter hose, which is smaller than the exhaust discharge point, shall not be permitted as it does not have the volume capacity to handle all fumes emitted. The hose material shall be Trevira fabric covered with GYPALON(CSM, Chloro-sulfonated polyethylene). The hose shall be fire resistant according to DIN 4102 B I. The hose shall be capable of withstanding temperatures of 340 degrees Fahrenheit continuously, and up to 370 degrees Fahrenheit on an intermittent usage basis. The entire hose assembly shall be capable of handling pump/load tests as required on a daily basis. The nozzle permits an ambient air stream to immediately reduce exhaust emission temperatures by at least 50% at the point of capture. The reduced air stream temperatures prolong component life by not permitting thermal breakdown of materials. The galvanized steel helix shall be completely rubber encapsulated. R. Nozzle: The flexibility between the electromagnet collar assembly and the nozzle shall be such that the operator never has to touch the nozzle for connection, but can maneuver the nozzle to the tail pipe while the operator grips the hose handle. As the operator simultaneously positions the electromagnet to the anchor plate, tension will a automatically applied to the nozzle face, created by an internal leaf spring assembly, which will hold the nozzle face firmly in place over the tail pipe. The positioning of the electromagnet on the vehicle, combined with the tension created at the nozzle, shall not allow the nozzle to come away from the tail pipe until the electromagnet is either automatically or manually de - energized. Manually detaching the electromagnet from the anchor plate, while still energized, shall not be allowed. The nozzle shall be constructed of both metal and rubber, with no internal movable parts related to the connection of the nozzle to the tail pipe. The inlet diameter at the nozzle is oversized to allow maximum airflow capacity for large engines and/or pump tests. The nozzle permits ambient air into the heated air stream when the vehicle is running and immediately reduces the exhaust temperature and eliminates thermal breakdown of materials. The inlet boot of the nozzle is to be made of EPDM rubber, and bonded to a sturdy 24 gauge steel conical reducer. When at rest and away form the vehicle, the nozzle and the lower hose shall constantly maintain a form which causes the inlet plane of the nozzle to be facing upward from the floor, on an approximate 30 degree angle. The purpose of this configuration shall be to allow the operator a clear visual .......:.. 03878505 POWER VENTILATORS AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS 15870 - 7 09105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 perspective of the nozzle inlet as it is being mounted the tail pipe upon vehicle connection. This upward configuration of the nozzle shall be accomplished by means of an intemally fixed specially formed leaf spring affixed to the conical reducer. The design of the nozzle shall allow for maximum flexibility to accept a variety of tailpipe configurations. Tail pipe extensions may be required to bring the pipe to the side of the chassis. Tail pipe adapters or mechanical pipe modifications are not permitted. For the nozzle assembly, no positive locking devices or a concept of a positive locking device, pneumatics, internal or external air hoses, wires, airbags, valves or precautionary devices for pneumatic bursting pressure shall be permitted or allowed. S. Installation: The exhaust removal system shall be installed as indicated and recommended by the manufacturer. Welding and brazing shall conform to ASME-17. Slip joints shall be sealed. Riser duct shall be supported to the structure as indicated on the drawings. Main duct shall be attached to building structural members. T. Exhaust System Suspension: Installation height of guide track shall be between 10' to 16' range or as otherwise indicated on the drawings. The guide track shall be installed approximately 14" form the side of the vehicle and > 12" away from the side edge of the exit door. The guide track for the exhaust system shall include corrosion resistant brackets for ease of mounting to structural channel, trusses, or angle iron. Brackets shall be a minimum of 0.125" thickness. Mounting bolts to be no less than 0.375" diameter (structural grade 8) for connection to steel frame. Bolts required for masonry installation shall be 0.5" x 3.5" expansion bolts, or 0.375" x 4: sleeve anchors for wall mount masonry connection. U. Testing: Each exhaust system and inlet shall be balanced to produce the indicated air quantities within 10 percent at the conditions shown. Control devices shall be set to control at the points indicated or directed. Any fans with bearing shall be lubricated, and the speed, direction and rotation of each fan shall be checked and verified as running correctly. The running current of each motor shall be checked and verified as correct. Upon completion and prior acceptance of the installation, the exhaust system shall be test at the operating conditions to demonstrate satisfactory functional and operating efficiency. Operating tests shall cover a period of not less than 2 hours for each system, and all tests will, if requested, be conducted in the presence of the owner. If tests do not demonstrate satisfactory operation of the exhaust system, deficiencies shall be corrected and tested. All instruments, facilities, and labor required to properly conduct the tests shall be provided by the Contractor. V. Training: The Contractor, or authorized personnel, shall provide training to the Owner (or appointed representatives of the Owner) in the daily use of and maintenance of the vehicle exhaust removal system installed and specified herein. The Owner shall be notified at least 7 days prior to the date scheduled for the training course. W. Vehicle Exhaust System Manufacturer: Plymovent Exhaust System. Example Exhaust System: 1. Fan model: M3613T 2. Fan Electrical Data: 208v/36 3. Fan HP: 5.0 4. Fan SP: 7.7" 5. Fan CFM: 1000 (total), 500 per drop 6. Rail length:30'-0" Install system as per manufacturer's directions. 03878505 POWER.VENTILATORS AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS 15870 -8 08105 H �J LUBBOCK FIRE STATIONT NO. 8 u� I PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements: Manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not operate fans until ductwork is clean, any filters are in place, and bearings are lubricated. END OF SECTION t:J 3 03878505 POVATER VENTILATORS AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS 15870 - 9 08/05 [11, LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 15890 DUCTWORK PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal ductwork. B. Duct cleaning. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 36 - Structural Steel. B. ASTM A 90 - Weight of Coating on Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles. C. ASTM A 167 - Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. D. ASTM A 366 - Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold Rolled, Commercial Quality. E. ASTM A 480 - General Requirements for Flat -Rolled Stainless and Heat -Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. F. ASTM A 525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. G. ASTM A 527 - Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by Hot -Dip Process, Lock Forming Quality. H. ASTM A 568 - Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High -Strength, Low -Alloy, Hot -Rolled and Cold -Rolled. I. ASTM A 569 - Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent), Hot -Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality. J. AWS D9.1 - Welding of Sheet Metal. K. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. L. NFPA 90B - Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems. M. SMACNA - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. N. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. O. UL 181 - Factory -Made Air Ducts and Connectors. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 15000. B. Product Data: Provide data for duct materials. 03878505 DUCTWORK 15890 - 1 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 �.i 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Sections 15000. B. Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record changes in fitting location and type. Show additional fittings used. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. B. Maintain one copy of document on site. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B standards. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturers. B. Maintain temperatures during and after installation of duct sealants. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A525 and ASTM A527 galvanized steel sheet, lock -forming quality, having G90 zinc coating of in conformance with ASTM A90. B. Steel Ducts: ASTM A366. C. Insulated Flexible Ducts: 1. Two ply vinyl film supported by helically wound spring steel wire; fiberglass insulation; aluminized vapor barrier film. 2. Pressure Rating: 10 inches W.G. positive and 1.0 inches W.G. negative. 3. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm. 4. Temperature Range: -10' F to 160' F. 5. Maximum length of flex runouts: Y-0". D. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws. E. Sealant: 1. Non -hardening, water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials; liquid used alone or with tape, or heavy mastic. F. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded. 03878505 DUCTWORK 15890 - 2 08105 ( I LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 2.2 DUCTWORK FABRICATION A. Fabricate and support in accordance with the latest edition of SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. B. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide [air foil] turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation. C. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream. D. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than duct gages indicated in SMACNA Standard. Joints shall be minimum 4 inch cemented slip joint, brazed or electric welded. Prime coat welded joints. E. Provide standard 45 degree lateral wye takeoffs unless otherwise indicated where 90 degree conical tee connections may be used. PART3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install and seal ducts in accordance with SMACN'A HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. C. Duct Sizes are inside clear dimensions. No lined supply air are permitted. D. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring. E. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. F. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inch and smaller with crimp in direction of air flow. G. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. H. Connect terminal units to supply ducts with one foot maximum length of flexible duct. Do not use flexible duct to change direction. I. Connect diffusers to low pressure ducts with Y-0" maximum length of flexible duct held in place with strap or clamp. J. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands. K. During construction, provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. 3.2 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 15000. B. Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust. To obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning. 03878505 DUCTWORK 15890 = 3 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 C. Clean duct systems with high power vacuum machines. Protect equipment, which may be harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. Provide adequate access into ductwork for cleaning purposes. 3.3 SCHEDULES A. DUCTWORK MATERIAL SCHEDULE { AIR SYSTEM MATERIAL Low Pressure Supply (System with Coolie Coil) Steel General Exhaust Steel Return and Relief Steel B. DUCTWORK PRESSURE CLASS SCHEDULE AIR SYSTEM PRESSURE CLASS Supply and Return (System with Cooling Coils) 1 inch General Exhaust 1 inch Return and Relief 1-inch END OF SECTION 03878505 DUCTWORK 15890 - 4 08/05 ( ) LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 15910 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Air turning devices/extractors. B. Backdraft dampers. C. Duct access doors. D. Duct test holes. E. Flexible duct connections. F. Volume control dampers. G. Diffusers. H. Registers/grilles. I. Goosenecks. 1.2 REFERENCES A. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. B. NFPA 92A - Smoke Control Systems. C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. D. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. E. UL 33 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire -Protection Service. F. UL 555 - Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers. G. UL 5 5 5 S - Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems. H. ARI 650 — Air Outlets and Inlets. I. ASHRAE 70 — Method of Testing for Rating the Airflow Performance of Outlets and Inlets. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 15000. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers, duct access doors and duct test holes. C. Product Data: Provide for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers, duct access doors, and hardware used. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate for fire dampers. 1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Sections 15000. B. Record actual locations of access doors. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 03878505 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 15910 - 1 07/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Sections 01600 and 15000. B. Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Sections 01700 and 15000. B. Provide two of each size and type of fusible link. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 AIR TURNING DEVICES/EXTRACTORS A. Multi -blade device with radius blades attached to pivoting frame and bracket, steel or aluminum construction, with push-pull operator strap, ceiling mounted rotary operator knob or worm drive mechanism with 18 inch long removable key operator. 2.2 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS. A. Gravity Backdraft Dampers, Size 18 x 18 inches or Smaller, Furnished with Air Moving Equipment: Air moving equipment manufacturers standard construction. B. Multi -Blade, Parallel Action Gravity Balanced Backdraft Dampers: 16 gage thick galvanized steel, or extruded aluminum, with center pivoted blades of maximum 6 inch width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked together in rattle -free manner with 90 degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin; adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure. 2.3 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. B. Fabrication: Rigid and close -fitting of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking devices. For insulated ductwork, install minimum one inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover. 1. Less Than 12 Inches Square: Secure with sash locks. 2. Up to 18 Inches Square: Provide two hinges and two sash locks. 3. Larger Sizes: Provide an additional hinge. 4. Sash Lock: 5. Compression Latch: 6. Hinge: C. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable. 03878505 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 15910 - 2 07/05 1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 2.4 DUCT TEST HOLES A. Temporary Test Holes: Cut or drill in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist -on metal caps. B. Permanent Test Holes: Factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap. Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation. 2.5 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. B. Connector: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip. 1. Fabric: UL listed fire -retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum density 30 oz per sq. yd. 2. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 3 inches wide. 3. Metal: 3 inch wide, 24 gage thick galvanized steel. 2.6 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS. A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. B. Splitter Dampers: 1. Material: Same gage as duct to 24 inches size in either direction, and two gages heavier for sizes over 24 inch. 2. Blade: Fabricate of double thickness sheet metal to streamline shape, secured with continuous hinge or rod. 3. Operator: Minimum 1/4 inch diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint action, flanged bushing with set screw. C. Multi -Blade Damper: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8 x 72 inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware. D. End Bearings: Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade dampers, provide oil -impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings. E. Quadrants: 1. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi -blade dampers. 2. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on standoff mounting brackets, bases, or adapters. 3. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches, provide regulator at both ends. 2.7 GOOSENECKS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, of minimum 18 gage galvanized steel. Provide birdscreen over intake/relief. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics. 03878505 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 15910 - 3 1- 67/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Refer to Section 15890 for duct construction and pressure class. B. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated. C. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide minimum 12 x 12 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access, and as indicated. Review locations prior to fabrication. D. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes. E. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment. F. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. G. Use splitter dampers only where indicated. H. Provide balancing dampers on high velocity systems where indicated. I. Check location of outlets and inlets, make necessary adjustments in position to conforin with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. J. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection. K. Provide balancing dampers on duct take -off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, despite whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly. L. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. ENID OF SECTION 03878505 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 15910 - 4 07/05 f LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems. B. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems. 1.2 REFERENCES A. AABC - National Standards for Total System Balance. B. ADC - Test Code for Grilles, Registers, and Diffusers. C. ASHRAE 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems. D. NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems. E. SMACNA - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 15000. B. Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency for approval within 30 days after award of Contract. C. Field Reports: Submit under provisions of Section 15000. D. Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance. E. Prior to commencing work, submit report forms or outlines indicating adjusting, balancing, and equipment data required. F. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final copies for Architect/Engineer and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals. G. Provide reports in soft cover, letter size, 3-ring binder manuals, complete with index page and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations. H. Test Reports: Indicate data on AABC National Standards for Total System Balance forms. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform total system balance in accordance with AABC National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance. B. Maintain one copy of document on site. 03878505 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15990 - 1 08/05 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Agency: Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience certified by AABC or NEBB. B. Perform Work under supervision of AABC Certified Test and Balance Engineer. 1.6 SEQUENCING A. Sequence work under the provisions of Section 15000. B. Sequence work to commence after completion of systems and schedule completion of work before Substantial Completion of Project. PART2-PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following conditions: 1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition. 2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. 3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final filters. 5. Duct systems are clean of debris. 6. Fans are rotating correctly. 7. Volume dampers are in place and open. 8. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed. 9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. 10. Air outlets are installed and connected. 11. Duct system leakage is minimised. B. Submit field reports. Report defects -and deficiencies noted during performance of services, which prevent system balance. C. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instruments available to Architect/Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing. B. Provide additional balancing devices as required. 3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supply systems and plus or minus 10 percent of design for return and exhaust systems. 1 03878505 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15990 - 2 08/05 I I LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of design to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions. B. Permanently mark settings of dampers and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. C. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified. D. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings. E. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by the Owner. F. Check and adjust systems approximately six months after final acceptance and submit report. 3.5 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities at site altitude. B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct. C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets. D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise. E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extend that adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers and splitters. F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation. G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet. H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters. I. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions. J. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check leakage. K. Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air systems to provide required relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05 inches positive static pressure near the building entries. 3.6 SCHEDULES L A. Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 1. All Fans 2. Air Filters 3. Air Inlets and Outlets 4. Packaged Rooftop A/C Units 5. Pumps 03878505 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15990 3 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 ' 6. Low Intensity Infrared Heaters (IRH) B. Report Forms 1. Title Page: a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency C. Telephone and fax numbers of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency d. Project name e. Project location f Project Architect g. Project Engineer h. Project Contractor i. Project altitude j. Report date 2. Summary Comments: a. Design versus final performance b. Notable characteristics of system C. Description of systems operation sequence d. Summary of outdoor and exhaust flows to indicate amount of building pressurization e. Nomenclature used throughout report f. Test conditions 3. Instrument List: a. Instrument b. Manufacturer C. Model number d. Serial number e. Range f. Calibration date 4. Electric Motors: a. Manufacturer b. Nameplate Data C. Model/Frame d. HP/BHP e. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load f. RPM g. Service factor h. Starter size, rating, heater elements i. Sheave Make/Size/Bore 5. V-Belt Drive: a. Identification/location b. Required driven RPM [ i' C. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM ' d. Belt, size and quantity e. Motor sheave diameter and RPM f. Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual_ 6. Air Cooled Condenser: a. Identification/number b. Location C. Manufacturer d. Nameplate Data f 03878505 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 08105 15990 - 4 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 e. Model number f. Serial number g. Entering DB air temperature, design and actual h. Leaving DB air temperature, design and actual i. Number of compressors 7. Air Moving Equipment: a. Location b. Manufacturer C. Nameplate data d. Model number e. Serial number f. Arrangement/Class/Discharge g. Air flow, specified and actual h. Return air flow, specified and actual i. Outside air flow, specified and actual j. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual k. Inlet pressure 1. Discharge pressure M. Sheave Make/Size/Bore n. Number of Belts/Make/Size o. Fan RPM 8. Return Air/Outside Air Data: a. Identification/location b. Design air flow C. Actual air flow d. Design return air flow e. Actual return air flow f. Design outside air flow g. Actual outside air flow h. Return air temperature i. Outside air temperature j. Required mixed air temperature k. Actual mixed air temperature 1. Design outside/return air ratio M. Actual outside/return air ratio 9. Exhaust Fan Data: a. Location b. Manufacturer C. Nameplate data d. Model number e. Serial number f. Air flow, specified and actual g. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual h. Inlet pressure i. Discharge pressure j. Sheave Make/Size/Bore k. Number of Belts/Make/Size 1. Fan RPM 10. Duct Traverse: a. System zone/branch 03878505 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15990 - 5 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 b. Duct size C. Area d. Design velocity e. Design air flow f. Test velocity g. Test air flow h. Duct static pressure i. Air temperature j. Air correction factor 11. Duct Leak Test: a. Description of ductwork under test b. Duct design operating pressure C. Duct design test static pressure d. Duct capacity, air flow e. Maximum allowable leakage duct capacity times leak factor f. Test apparatus 1) Blower 2) Orifice, tube size 3) Orifice size 4) Calibrated g. Test static pressure h. Test orifice differential pressure i. Leakage 12. Air Distribution Test Sheet: a. Air terminal number b. Room number/location C. Terminal type d. Terminal size e. Area factor f. Design velocity g. Design air flow h. Test (final) velocity i. Test (final) air flow j. Percent of design air flow END OF SECTION 15990 03878505 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15990 - 6 08/05 DIVISION 16 E .,.a LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 16000 BASIC ELECTRICAL UPGRADES PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1- General Requirements apply to work in this section. 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES AND STANDARDS A. Regulatory Agencies: Installation, materials, equipment and workmanship shall conform to the applicable provisions of the following: B. National Electrical Code (NEC) C. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) D. Terms and conditions of the electrical utility and other authorities having lawful jurisdiction pertaining to the work required. E. All control wiring and associated conduit and boxes that are not specifically indicated in Division 15 shall be provided under Division 16 sections of the specifications. F. The work covered by Division 16 of the Specifications includes the furnishing of all materials, labor, transportation, tools, permits, and fees for the complete installation of all electrical work required in the Contract Drawings. G. In the event that additional or special construction is required, the Contractor is responsible for providing all material and equipment which are usually furnished with such construction in order to complete the installation, whether indicated or not. H. The contractor shall familiarize himself with the existing conditions of the site and advise the Engineer of any discrepancy or conflict prior to bidding. I. The contractor shall be responsible for all permits, fees, and licenses required for the project. All costs of such permits or fees shall be included in the bid. J. All equipment and material shall be installed in accordance with the applicable manufacturer's recommendations and standards. K. Install sleeves, sealant pans, and roof penetrations as required for the installation of the electrical work. All such work is subject to the approval of the Engineer. L. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the utility service provider to verify all locations, routing, equipment and labor that will be furnished as a part of this contract. All fees associated with the utility service provider's work shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. All submittals shall comply with the requirements as specified in other sections. 03878505 BASIC ELECTRICAL UPGRADES 16000 - 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS A. The electrical requirements for equipment specified or indicated on the drawings are based on information available at the time of design. If equipment furnished for installation has electrical requirements other than indicated on the electrical drawings, the Contractor shall make any required changes to wire and conduit size, controls, overcurrent protection and installation as required to accommodate the equipment supplied, without additional charge to the Owner. The complete responsibility and costs for such adjustments shall be assigned to the respective section of this specification under which the equipment is furnished. 2.2 MATERIALS A. All similar materials and equipment shall be the product of the same manufacturer unless specified otherwise. B. Materials and equipment shall be the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such material and shall be the manufacturer's current and standard design. C. Altitude: Equipment affected by altitude shall perform satisfactorily for the function intended at the altitude of the project site. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Fabrication, erection and installation of the complete electrical system shall be done in accordance with accepted good practice by qualified personnel experienced in such work and shall proceed in an orderly manner so as not to impede the progress of the project. The Electrical Contractor shall check all areas and surfaces where electrical equipment material is to be installed, removed or relocated and report any unsatisfactory conditions before starting work. Commencement of work signifies this Contractor's acceptance of existing conditions. In the acceptance or rejection of the finished installation, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of workmen. Surfaces requiring coatings will be completed prior to installation of any electrical work on these surfaces. B. The electrical drawings are diagrammatic. The installation requirements shall be carefully coordinated with structural, architectural and mechanical conditions and shall be adjusted to avoid conflict. C. All work shall be concealed in walls, ceilings, chases unless specifically noted to be exposed or otherwise approved. D. The locations of electrical equipment is approximate and are not intended to convey the exact details and mounting of location of outlets, equipment and other items. Exact locations are to be field determined by actual measurements. E. Disposal of Surplus and Waste Materials 1. Disposal: Remove surplus waste material, including trash and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property unless otherwise directed by Owner. 2. Repair: Any damage to structures shall be repaired to previous condition by Contractor at no additional expense to Owner. 3.2 PERFORMANCE TESTS [" 1 03878505 BASIC ELECTRICAL UPGRADES 16000 - 2 08/05 i 1.1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATIONT NO. 8 A. Thoroughly test all control circuits, fixtures, services and all circuits for proper operating condition and freedom from grounds and short circuits before acceptance is requested. All equipment, appliances and devices shall be operated under load conditions. B. After the interior wiring system installation is complete conduct operating tests for approval. When requested, test all the wire, cable, devices and equipment after installation, to assure that all material continues to possess all the original characteristics as required by governing codes and standards listed in these specifications. C. After motor operation has been verified make voltage readings at all panelboards and starters. Based on these readings, make final adjustments of primary taps on all transformers in the building as directed, or coordinate with the utility proper building voltage. D. Perform such other tests as required by other sections of these specifications or as requested to prove acceptability. E. Furnish all instruments and labor for testing. F. All material installed shall be listed, inspected, and approved by a nationally accepted testing laboratory such as UL and/or ETL. All material shall bear the UL or ETL label where available. 3.3 SUBMITTAL AND APPROVAL OF MATERIALS A. All requirements for submittals shall comply with the applicable provisions included in other specification sections. B. Unless identified as a sole source item, the listing of product manufacturers, catalog numbers, etc., on the drawings is intended to establish a standard of quality of the product. It is the responsibility of the contractor to review all items he intends to submit. Refer to other sections for substitutions. END OF SECTION 16000 .3 03878505 BASIC ELECTRICAL UPGRADES 16000 - 3 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 16111 CONDUIT PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal conduit. B. Flexible metal conduit. C. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. D. Electrical metallic tubing. E. Two piece surface raceway. F. Fittings and conduit bodies. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07270 - Fire Stopping. B. Section 16130 - Boxes. C. Section 16170 - Grounding and Bonding. D. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices. E. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated. B. ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated. C. ANSI/NEMA FB 1- Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. D. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. E. NECA "Standard of Installation." F. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing. 1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Conduit Size: ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Minimum Conduit Size: 3/4" unless otherwise indicated. C. Install all cables in conduit to include: 1. Power Cables 2. Fire Alarm Cables 3. Communication Cables 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Provide for metallic conduit, flexible metal conduit, liquidtight flexible metal conduit, nonmetallic conduit, fittings and conduit bodies. 03878505 CONDUIT 16111 - 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700. B. Accurately record actual routing of conduits. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSLNFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle Products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage. C. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering. D. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings. B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough -in. C. Conduit routing is shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned Route as required to complete wiring system. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Size: %" unless otherwise specified. B. Wet and Damp Locations above grade: Use rigid steel or liquid tight flexible conduit. C. Dry Locations: Use electrical metallic tubing for concealed and exposed locations. D. Below Slab: Non metallic PVC conduit is acceptable within limitations specified. E. Below Grade: Use only PVC coated rigid galvanized steel, wrapped rigid steel, or non metallic PVC conduit within limitations specified. 2.2 METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied 2. Wheatland 3. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. C. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel. D. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSUNEMA FB 1; all steel fittings. 2.3 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: I 03878505 CONDUIT 16111 e 2 08/05 l_ LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1. Greenfield 2. Electri-Flex 3. Allied Tube 4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. B. Description: Interlocked steel construction. Aluminum is not permitted. C. Fittings: ANSLNEMA FB 1 with fittings approved for steel flex. D. Applications: Use for final connections to motorized equipment, connections to recessed lighting fixtures located in accessible ceilings. Utilization of 3/8" in lieu of the minimum'/z" is acceptable under the limitations of the National Electrical Code. 2.4 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Ultatite 2. Electri-flex 3. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. B. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket. C. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1. D. Applications: Use for final connections to motorized equipment in exterior locations. 2.5 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied 2. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. B. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing. C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSLNEMA FB 1; all steel, compression or set screw type with insulated throats. D. Applications: Do not use below grade or in exterior locations. Use only in interior locations. 2.6 PVC COATED METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Levy 2. Robroy Industries 3. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. B. Description: NEMA RN-1, rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating, 20 mil thick. C. General: Protective layer may be factory applied or galvanized rigid steel conduit may be applied with two layers of corrosion resistant tape. D. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; steel fittings with external PVC coatings to match conduit. 2.7 NON-METALLIC CONDUIT A. Carlon or equal B. Description: NEMA TC2 and TC3 and rated for direct burial, sunlight resistant schedule to 03878505 CONDUIT 16111 - 3 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." B. Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. D. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay -in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers. E. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel. F. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section 16190. G. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports H. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires. I. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. J. Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls. K. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls. L. Fasten two-piece surface raceway with anchors as required by manufacturer. M. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping. N. Maintain 12-inch (300-mm) clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F (40 degrees C). O. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter, de -burr cut ends. P. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. Q. Use conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet locations and to cast boxes. R. Install no more than equivalent of three 90-degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than 2-inch size. S. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. T. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses, control and expansion joints. U. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples. V. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. W. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 16170. X. Identify conduit under provisions of Section 16195. Y. Ducts shall be cleaned with a flexible mandrel assembly. Z. All conduits passing vertically through slabs on grade shall be rigid steel or IMC. Rigid steel and IMC conduits shall be applied with protective coatings as indicated herein. AA. Underground branch circuit extensions to parking lot lighting fixtures may be direct buried PVC conduit. All other PVC conduit applications for service entrance shall be concrete encased in accordance with the drawings. BB. All feeder and service entrance conduits shall be fitted with bushings provided with grounding lugs. 3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods under the provisions of Section 07270. is 03878505 CONDUIT 16111- 4 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 Ifl Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation. END OF SECTION 03878505 CONDUIT 16111 - 5 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 16123 PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Building wire and cable. B. Wiring connectors and connections. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS: A. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification. 1.3 REFERENCES: A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Requirements for references and standards. B. NECA Standard of Installation (National Electrical Contractors Association). C. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems (International Electrical Testing Association). D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW: A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide for each cable assembly type. 1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION: A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Test Reports: Indicate procedures and values obtained. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations ofuse stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. 1.6 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT: A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Procedures for submittals. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and circuits. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS: A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience. L 03879505 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16123 - 1 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: A. Conform to NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.9 FIELD SAMPLES: A. Provide under provisions of Section 01400. 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings. B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. C. Conductor sizes are based on copper. D. Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned. 1.11 COORDINATION: A. Coordinate Work under provisions of Section 01039. B. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing and lengths required. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 BUILDING WIRE A. Manufacturers: 1. S outhwire. 2. American Cable. 3. Houston Wire and Cable. 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment. B. Description: Single conductor insulated wire. C. Conductor: Copper. D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts. E. Insulation: NFPA 70, Type THW, THHN/THWN and XIRiW. 2.2 WIRING CONNECTORS A. Split Bolt Connectors: 1. IIsco. 2. Buchanan. 3. Burndy. 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment. B. Solderless Pressure Connectors: 1. IIsco. 2. Buchanan. 3. Burndy. 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment. C. Spring Wire Connectors: 03878505 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16123 -2 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1. Ideal. 2. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment. D. Compression Connectors: 1. Ilsco. 2. Buchanan. 3. Burndy. 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings: Verification of existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather. C. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed. D. Verify that raceway installation is complete and supported. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire. 3.3 WIRING METHODS A. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THVi' or THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway. B. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type TRW or THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway. C. Above Accessible Ceilings: Use only building wire, Type THW or THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway. D. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THW or THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway. E. Exterior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THW, THHN/THWN or XHHW insulation, in raceway. F. Use wiring methods indicated. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Manufacturer's instructions. B. Route wire and cable as required to meet Project Conditions. C. Install cable in accordance with the NECA "Standard of Installation." D. Use solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. E. Use stranded conductors for control circuits. F. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits. G. Use conductor not smaller than 14 AWG for control circuits. H. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere,120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet. I. Install all conductors in conduit. J. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time. K Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger. L. Protect exposed cable from damage. 03878505 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16123 - 3 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 M. Support cables above accessible ceiling, using spring metal clips or plastic cable ties to support cables from structure. Do not rest cable on ceiling panels. N. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors. 0. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. P. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. Q. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise. R. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor. S. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps, 8 AWG and smaller. T. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10 AWG and smaller. U. Identify and color code wire and cable under provisions of Section 16195. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated. V. The number of conductors in each conduit run shall be limited to the requirements as indicated on the drawings and indicated in Article 310 of the 2002 National Electrical Code. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Field inspection, testing and adjusting. B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1. END OF SECTION' 03878505 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16123 - 4 08/05 i i LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 16130 BOXES PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes. B. Pull and junction boxes. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07270 - Firestopping. B. Section 16140 - Wiring Devices: Wall plates in finished areas. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NECA - Standard of Installation. B. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. C. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet -steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT A. Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes on project record documents. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NTFPA 70. B. Provide Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OUTLET BOXES A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. B. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; include half -inch (13 mm) male fixture studs where required. C. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, cast feralloy. Provide gasketed cover by box manufacturer. D. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 16140. 03878505 BOXES 16130 — 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 2.2 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. B. Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4; flat -flanged, surface mounted junction box: C. Cast Box Material: Galvanized cast iron. D. Cast Box Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify locations of outlets in all locations prior to rough -in. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install boxes in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." B. Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements. C. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights specified in section for outlet device. D. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Adjust box location up to 10 feet if required to accommodate intended purpose. E. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 16140. F. Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance. G. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only. H. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire. I. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07270. J. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes with Architectural drawings and other trades. K. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan. L. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices. M. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. N. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit comer only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening. O. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches separation. Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls. P. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. Q. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. R. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness. S. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. T. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires. U. Support boxes independently of conduit. V. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box. W. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets. 03878505 BOXES 16130 — 2 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 3.3 3.4 3.5 X. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and interior wet locations. Y. Large Pull Boxes: Use hinged enclosure in interior dry locations, surface -mounted cast metal box in other locations. Z. Coordinate with other trades for box rough in, such that control devices are grouped (i.e., thermostats, wall switches, volume controls, etc.). AA. Refer to Section 16195 for identification requirements. ADJUSTING A. Adjust flush -mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material. B. Install knockout closures in unused box openings. CLEANING A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material. B. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish. REPAIR A. Repair any areas or surfaces damaged during conduit installation. B. Paint (resurface) to original condition. END OF SECTION 16130 03878505 BOXES 16130 — 3 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 16140 WIItING DEVICES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall switches. B. Receptacles. C. Device plates. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 16130 - Boxes. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NECA - Standard of Installation. B. NEMA WD 1- General Requirements for Wiring Devices. C. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Requirements. D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL SWITCHES A. Manufacturers 1. Arrow -Hart 2. Hubbell B. Description: NEMA WD 1, Specification Grade, AC only general -use snap switch. C. Body and Handle: Ivory plastic with toggle handle. D. Ratings: 1. Voltage: 120-277 volts, AC. 2. Current: 20 amperes. E. 3-way switches to match the above as a quality standard as manufactured by the companies specified. 03878505 WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 1 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 2.2 RECEPTACLES A. Manufacturers: 1. Arrow -Hart 2. Hubbell B. Description: NEMA WD 1, Specification Grade general use receptacle. C. Device Body: Ivory plastic. D. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, type as specified and indicated. E. Convenience Receptacle: Type 5-20. F. GFCI Receptacle: Specification grade convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit interrupter to meet regulatory requirements. 2.3 WALL PLATES A. GENERAL: Provide plates for each switch and receptacle device. Stainless steel plates. Do not use sectional gang plates. Provide multi gang outlet plates for multi gang boxes. B. EXPOSED: Plates for exposed screw jointed fittings shall match the fittings arith edges of plates flush with edges of fittings. Stainless steel plates. Plates for cast type boxes shall be of the cast, vapor tight type. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper height. B. Verify that wall openings if required are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. C. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean debris from outlet boxes. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." B. Install devices plumb and level. C. Install switches with OFF position down. D. Install receptacles with grounding pole on bottom. E. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. F. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas. G. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal. H. Verify location of telephone jacks prior to installation for rough -in only. Telephones shall be installed under separate contract. 3.4 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 16130 to obtain mounting heights specified and indicated on drawings. 03878505 WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 2 08/05 l LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 3.5 3.6 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each wiring device for defects. B. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation. C. Verify that each receptacle device is energized. D. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity. E. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation. F. Verify that each telephone jack is properly connected and circuit is operational. 13161 a111uti A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish. END OF SECTION 16140 03878505 WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 3 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 16170 GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1- GENERAL: 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Grounding electrodes and conductors. B. Equipment grounding conductors. C. Bonding. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS: A. Section 16670 - Transient Voltage Surge Suppression. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSLNFPA 70 -National Electrical Code. B. NPFA 99 - Health Care Facilities. 1.4 GROUNDING FOR ELECTRODE SYSTEM A. Metal underground water pipe. B. Rod electrode. C. Performance Requirements Maximum: Grounding System Resistance: 5 ohms. D. Submittals: Manufacturer's Instructions: Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation and installation of exothermic connectors. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of General Conditions. Accurately record actual locations of grounding electrodes. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 03878505 GROUNDING AND BONDING 16170 - 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ROD ELECTRODE A. Rod electrode shall be constructed of Copper or Copper -clad steel. The diameter shall be 3/4 inch. The length shall be 10 feet. 2.2 BELOW GRADE CONNECTIONS AND RELATED MATERIAL A. All material shall be copper and below grade connections shall be exothermic or compression type equal to Bumdy HyGround (12 ton minimum). 2.3 W= A. Material: Stranded copper. B. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes. B. Refer to the contract drawings for additional requirements. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install rod electrodes at locations indicated. Install additional rod electrodes as required to achieve specified resistance to ground. Provide grounding electrode conductor and connect to reinforcing steel in foundation footing. Bond steel together. Utilize exothermic connections to electrodes, building steel, underground water pipe and foundation electrode. Provide bonding to meet Regulatory Requirements. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation. B. Perform three- (3) point fall -of -potential test per IEEE No. 81, Section 9.03 to determine the ground resistance between the grounding system and all major electrical equipment frames, system neutral and/or derived neutral points. Utilize test equipment designed for this purpose in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 16170 f. 03878505 GROUNDING AND BONDING 16170 - 2 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 16180 EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical connections to equipment specified under other sections. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 16000 - Basic Electrical Methods. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NEMA WD 1- General Purpose Wiring Devices. B. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device Configurations. C. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Provide wiring device manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, configurations, and construction. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. B. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections. C. Determine connection locations and requirements. D. Sequence rough -in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation schedule for equipment. E. Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up schedule for equipment. 03878505 EQUIPMENT )ATIRING SYSTEMS 16180 - 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CORDS AND CAPS A. Attachment Plug Construction: Conform to NTEMA WD 1. B. Configuration: NEMA WI) 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet provided for equipment. C. Cord Construction: ANSI/NFPA 70, multiconductor flexible cord with identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations. D. Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch circuit overcurrent protection. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAAMINATION A. Verify conditions under provisions of Section 0 103 9. B. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization. 3.2 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions. B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations. C. Make wiring connections using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered in heat producing equipment. D. Provide receptacle outlet where connection with attachment plug is indicated. Pro -tide cord and cap where field -supplied attachment plug is indicated. E. Provide suitable strain -relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes. F. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices as indicated. G. Modify equipment control wiring with terminal block jumpers as indicated- H. Provide interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment where indicated. I. It shall be the responsibility of the Division 16 Contractor to coordinate with other trades to determine the extent of the electrical requirements for specific equipment. J. Provide a disconnect and overcurrent protection for all equipment. K. Verify receptacle configurations and rough -in requirements for all kitchen equipment. L. Provide for interconnecting conduit, boxes and devices for equipment as required. END OF SECTION 16180 03878505 EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS 16180 - 2 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1- General Requirements apply to work in this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Conduit and equipment supports. B. Anchors and fasteners. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association. B. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. Materials and Finishes: Provide adequate corrosion resistance. B. Provide materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to carry the loads of equipment and conduit. Consider weight of wire in conduit when selecting products. C. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Concrete Structural Elements: Use expansion anchors, powder actuated anchors and preset inserts. 2. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps, spring steel clips and steel ram et fasteners. 3. Concrete Surfaces: Use self -drilling anchors and expansion anchors. 4. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. 5. Wood Elements: Use wood screws. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 03878505 SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190 - 1 08/05 l LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 B. Provide anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation". C. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, and conduit. D. Obtain permission from Engineer before drilling or cutting structural members. E. Fabricate supports from structural steel as indicated on drawings. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use lock washers under all nuts. F. Install surface -mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. G. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards one inch off wall. H. Install conduit supports a maximum spacing specified in the NEC. END OF SECTION 16190 03878505 SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190 - 2 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work in this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. - Nameplates and labels. B. Wire and cable markers. 1.3 REFERENCES i A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS A. Nameplates and Labels: Engraved three -layer laminated plastic, white letters on black background. B. Locations: 1. Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure. 2. Communication cabinets, and computer cabinets. 3. Field disconnects, start stop stations, control panels. C. Letter Size: 1. Use 1/4 inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads. 2. Use 1 /4 inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads. 3. Use 3/8 inch letters for identifying Main Disconnect equipment. 2.2 WIRE AND CONDUIT MARKERS A. Description: Brady B-321 Heat -Shrink Polyolefin markers. Typed label to identify each termination end point of the conductor. DC conductors shall identify polarity. B . Locations: At each pull box and junction box provide permanent labeling of the cover of each. All fire alarm junction boxes shall be painted red. C. Legend: 1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated on drawings. 01878505 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195 - 1 08/05 s LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 i 2.2 ENCLOSED SWITCHES A. Fusible or Non -fusible as indicated. B. Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, Type HD load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. C. Fuse Clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU1, class R fuses. D. Enclosures: NEMA KS 1. E. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1. F. Exterior Locations: Type 3R or 4. G. NEMA ratings of enclosures as specified on drawings take precedence over location specification. H. Current rating of switch to be equal to or greater than that of the circuit it is interrupting. 2.3 DOUBLE THROW SWITCHES A. Non- fusible switch assemblies in compliance with the description above the enclosed switches. 2.4 FUSES A. Manufacturers: 1. Bussman 2. Littlefuse 3. Gould Shawmut B. Dimensions and Performance: NEMA FU 1, Class as specified or indicated. C. Voltage: Provide fuses with suitable voltage ratings for phase to phase voltages. D. Service Entrance: Class L, Bussman Low -peak or equivalent. E. General Purpose Loads: Class RKl, Bussman Low -peak or equivalent. F. Motor Loads: Class RK5, Bussman Fusetron or equivalent. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation B. Install fuses in all fusible disconnects. C. Apply adhesive tag on the inside door of all disconnects indicating the NTEMA class fuse and size installed. D. Provide a disconnect switch for all equipment where indicated or required by the National Electrical Code. Coordinate with other disciplines to determine where disconnects are furnished with equipment. END OF SECTION 16441 i 03860201 ENCLOSED SWITCHES 16441-2 08/05 F, LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO, 8 SECTION 16470 PANELBOARDS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections 1. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices. 2. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification: Engraved nameplates. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Branch circuit panelboards. B. References 1. NECA (National Electrical Contractors Association) "Standard of Installation." 2. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers. 3. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies. 4. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches. 5. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards. 6. NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. 7. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of General Conditions, Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product. 1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of General Conditions. Record actual locations of Products; indicate actual branch circuit arrangement. 1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of General Conditions. Maintenance Data: Include spare parts data listing; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. 03878505 08/05 PANELBOARDS 16470 - 1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years experience. 1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. Furnish products listed and classified by UL as suitable for purpose specified and indicated. 1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. 1.10 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide maintenance materials under provisions of General Conditions. Provide two of each panelboard key if required. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: 1. General Electric 2. Square-D 3. Westinghouse B. Description: NEMA PB-1, circuit breaker type C. Panelboard Bus: Copper with rating as indicated. Provide a copper ground bus in each panelboard. D. Minimum integrated short circuit rating: Fully rated devices with minimum levels as indicated. Series rated systems will be allowed. Minimum calculated values are labeled on each panelboard and are indicated as "AIC: E. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, bolt on, circuit breakers with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Provide circuit breaker UL listed as type RACR for air conditioning equipment loads and type SWD for switching applications. Breakers over 225 amps shall be provided adjustable instantaneous magnetic and thermal trips. F. Enclosed: NEMA PB —1, Type 1. G. Cabinet Front: Surface or recessed type as indicated on the drawings, fastened with concealed trim clamps, hinged door with flush lock, metal directory frame, and finished in manufacturer's standard gray enamel. i., 03878505 PANELBOARDS 16470 - 2 08105 fz LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1. Install panelboards plumb. Provide supports in accordance with drawings and Section 16190. Height: 6 ft maximum to top of panelboard. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads. Spare slots shall be labeled as such in erasable pencil on directory. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 16195. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and test for grounds on each circuit after installation is completed. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in the panelboard to balance the phase loads to within 20 percent of each other. Maintain proper phasing for multi -wire branch circuits. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Inspect for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding. Check proper installation and tightness of connections for circuit breakers, fusible switches, and fuses. END OF SECTION 03878505 PANELBOARDS 16470 - 3 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work in this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. - Nameplates and labels. B. Wire and cable markers. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS A. Nameplates and Labels: Engraved three -layer laminated plastic, white letters on black background. B. Locations: 1. Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure. 2. Communication cabinets, and computer cabinets. 3. Field disconnects, start stop stations, control panels. C. Letter Size: 1. Use 1/4 inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads. 2. Use 1/4 inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads. 3. Use 3/8 inch letters for identifying Main Disconnect equipment. 2.2 WIRE AND CONDUIT MARKERS A. Description: Brady B-321 Heat -Shrink Polyolefin markers. Typed label to identify each termination end point of the conductor. DC conductors shall identify polarity. B. Locations: At each pull box and junction box provide permanent labeling of the cover of each. All fire alarm junction boxes shall be painted red. C. Legend: 1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated on drawings. 03878505 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195 - 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Install nameplate and label parallel to equipment lines. B. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws or rivets. C. Identify underground conduits using underground warning tape. Install one tape per trench at 3 inches below finished grade. Identify all conduit at exposed locations into all boxes, cabinets, etc. D. Identify all conductors at every termination indicating endpoints of termination and tag identification as required. END OF SECTION 16195 03878505 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195 - 2 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 ` SECTION 16421 ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE i PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Service racks. B. Metering transformer cabinets. C. Meter bases. �R 1.2 REFERENCES A. NECA Standard of Installation (National Electrical Contractors Association). B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. System Characteristics: As indicated on drawings. B. Service Entrance: As indicated on drawings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Electric Meter Cabinet, if required. 1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Submit prepared drawings for transformer installation. a 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with Utility Company written requirements. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.8 PRE-INISTALLATION MEETING A. Convene prior to commencing work of this section. Review service entrance requirements and details with Utility Company representative. 1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Utility Company drawings. ' t 03878505 ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE 16421- 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METERING AND METER BASE A. Manufacturers: As specified by Utility. B. Coordinate with the Utility Co. for all requirements and include all fees by the Power Co. in the project. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Arrange with Utility Company to obtain permanent electric service to the Project. END OF SECTION 03878505 ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE 16421- 2 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 16441 ENCLOSED SWITCHES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fusible switches. B. Non -fusible switches. C. Fuses. 1.2 REFERENCES A. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches. B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. C. UL 198C - High -Interrupting Capacity Fuses; Current Limiting Type. D. UL 198E - Class R Fuses. E. NEMA AB 1 — Molded Case Circuit Breakers F. NECA — Standard of Installation 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide switch ratings and enclosure dimensions. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by UL as suitable for purpose specified and shown. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Square D B. General Electric C. Eaton D. Siemens 03860201 ENCLOSED SWITCHES 16441-1 08i05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 2.2 ENCLOSED SWITCHES A. Fusible or Non -fusible as indicated. B. Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, Type HD load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. C. Fuse Clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU1, class R fuses. D. Enclosures: NEMA KS 1. E. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1. F. Exterior Locations: Type 3R or 4. G. NEMA ratings of enclosures as specified on drawings take precedence over location specification. H. Current rating of switch to be equal to or greater than that of the circuit it is interrupting. 2.3 DOUBLE THROW SWITCHES A. Non- fusible switch assemblies in compliance with the description above the enclosed switches. 2.4 FUSES A. Manufacturers: 1. Bussman 2. Littlefuse 3. Gould Shawmut B. Dimensions and Performance: NEMA FU 1, Class as specified or indicated. C. Voltage: Provide fuses with suitable voltage ratings for phase to phase voltages. D. Service Entrance: Class L, Bussman Low -peak or equivalent. E. General Purpose Loads: Class RKl, Bussman Low -peak or equivalent. F. Motor Loads: Class RK5, Bussman Fusetron or equivalent. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation B. Install fuses in all fusible disconnects. C. Apply adhesive tag on the inside door of all disconnects indicating the NEMA class fuse and size installed. D. Provide a disconnect switch for all equipment where indicated or required by the National Electrical Code. Coordinate with other disciplines to determine where disconnects are furnished with equipment. END OF SECTION 16441 03860201 ENCLOSED SWITCHES 16441-2 08/05 1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 16470 PANELBOARDS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections 1. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices. 2. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification: Engraved nameplates. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Branch circuit panelboards. B. References 1. NECA (National Electrical Contractors Association) "Standard of Installation." 2. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers. 3. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies. 4. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches. 5. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards. 6. NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. 7. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of General Conditions. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product. 1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of General Conditions. Record actual locations of Products; indicate actual branch circuit arrangement. 1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA LJ A. Submit under provisions of General Conditions. Maintenance Data: Include spare parts data listing; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. 03878505 PANELBOARDS 16470 - 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years experience. 1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. Furnish products listed and classified by UL as suitable for purpose specified and indicated. 1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. I 1.10 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS J A. Provide maintenance materials under provisions of General Conditions. Provide two of each panelboard key if required. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: 1. General Electric 2. Square-D 3. Westinghouse B. Description: NEMA PB-1, circuit breaker type C. Panelboard Bus: Copper with rating as indicated. Provide a copper ground bus in each panelboard. D. Minimum integrated short circuit rating: Fully rated devices with minimum levels as indicated. Series rated systems will be allowed. Minimum calculated values are labeled on each panelboard and are indicated as "AIC: E. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, bolt on, circuit breakers with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Provide circuit breaker UL listed as type HACR for air conditioning equipment loads and type SWD for switching applications. Breakers over 225 amps shall be provided adjustable instantaneous magnetic and thermal trips. F. Enclosed: NEMA PB —1, Type 1. G. Cabinet Front: Surface or recessed type as indicated on the drawings, fastened with concealed trim clamps, hinged door with flush lock, metal directory frame, and finished in manufacturer's standard gray enamel. �I 03878505 PANTELBOARDS 16470 - 2 08/05 i LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1. Install panelboards plumb. Provide supports in accordance with drawings and Section 16190. Height: 6 ft maximum to top of panelboard. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads. Spare slots shall be labeled as such in erasable pencil on directory. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 16195. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and test for grounds on each circuit after installation is completed. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in the panelboard to balance the phase loads to within 20 percent of each other. Maintain proper phasing for multi -wire branch circuits. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Inspect for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding. Check proper installation and tightness of connections for circuit breakers, fusible switches, and fuses. a 03878505 08105 END OF SECTION PANELBOARDS 16470 - 3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 16481 ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manual motor starters. B. Magnetic motor starters. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices. B. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification: Engraved nameplates. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. B. UL 198C - High -Interrupting Capacity Fuses; Current Limiting Type. C. UL 198E - Class R Fuses. D. NECA "Standard of Installation," published by National Electrical Contractors Association. E. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers. F. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies. G. NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems. H. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches, 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Provide catalog sheets showing voltage, controller size, ratings and size of switching and overcurrent protective devices, short circuit ratings, dimensions, and enclosure details. C. Test Reports: Indicate field test and inspection procedures and test results. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 03878505 ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS 16481 - 1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and indicated. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Westinghouse. B. Square - D. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MANUAL CONTROLLERS A. Manual Motor Controller: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A manually operated, full -voltage controller with overload element, red pilot light and push button operator. B. Fractional Horsepower Manual Controller: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A manually operated, full -voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, with thermal overload unit, red pilot light and toggle operator. C. Motor Starting Switch: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A manually operated, full -voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, without thermal overload unit, with red pilot light and toggle operator. D. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6; Type as indicated. 2.3 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLERS A. Magnetic Motor Controllers: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A magnetic controller for induction motors rated in horsepower. B. Coil operating voltage: As indicated. C. Overload Relay: Solid State type. D. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type as indicated. 2.4 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND FEATURES A. Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, 2 each normally open contacts in addition to seal -in contact. B. Cover Mounted Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 2, standard duty type. C. Pilot Device Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, Form Z, rated A150. D. Pushbuttons: Unguarded type. E. Indicating Lights: Incandescent type. F. Selector Switches: Rotary type. G. Relays: NEMA ICS 2. H. Control Power Transformers: 120 volt secondary. Provide fused primary and secondary, and bond unfased leg of secondary to enclosure. 03878505 ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS 16481 - 2 08105 t! LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 I,' 2.5 DISCONNECTS A. Nonfusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install enclosed controllers where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install enclosed controllers plumb. Provide supports in accordance with Section 16190. C. Height: 5 ft to operating handle. D. Select and install overload heater elements in motor controllers to match installed motor characteristics. E. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 16195. F. Provide neatly typed label inside each motor controller door identifying motor served, nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, and voltage/phase rating. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. B. Inspect and test each enclosed controller to NEMA ICS 2. END OF SECTION 16481 L 03878505 ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS 1648 1-3 _, 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 16510 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Interior luminaires and accessories. B. Exit signs. C. Ballasts. D. Fluorescent lamp emergency power supply. E. Lamps. F. Luminaire accessories. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI C82.1 - Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps - Specifications. B. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices -Dimensional Requirements. C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. D. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard product of the manufacturer. B. Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT A. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions for each product. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 101. C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.7 EXTRA PRODUCTS A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. 03878505 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES 16510 —1 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMINAIRES A. Furnish Products as scheduled. 2.2 EXIT SIGNS A. Furnish products as scheduled. 2.3 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Advance. 2. Motorola. 3. Magnatek. B. Description: ANSI C82.1, high power factor type electronic ballast, suitable for lamps specified. C. Voltage: Match luminaire voltage. D. Source Quality Control: Certify fluorescent ballast design and construction by Certified Ballast Manufacturers, Inc. E. All ballasts shall be UL listed, Class P, with a sound rating of Class A and shall contain no PCBs. F. Ballasts shall comply with 47 CFR 18 for electromagnetic interference and shall not interfere with the operation of other electrical equipment. G. Unless otherwise indicated (i.e. dual switches) the minimum number of ballasts per fixture shall be used. H. Light output regulation shall be +/- 10%. 1. Power factor shall not be less than 0.95. J. A 60 Hz filter shall be provided. 2.4 LAMPS A. Fluorescent Lamp Manufacturers: 1. Sylvania. 2. General Electric. 3. Philips. B. Lamp Types: As specified for luminaire. Provide 3500 degrees Kelvin lamps for all fluorescent fixtures. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install suspended luminaries using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Provide pendant length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height. B. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan. •? C. Install surface mounted luminaires and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement. r 03878505 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES 16510 — 2 08/05 11 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 D. Exposed Grid Ceilings: Support surface mounted luminaires on grid ceiling directly from building structure. E. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below. F. Install recessed luminaires using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating in locations where fire rated ceilings are present. G. Install clips to secure recessed grid -supported luminaires in place. H. Install wall mounted luminaires, emergency lighting units and exit signs at height as indicated on Drawings or as scheduled. I. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. J. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within luminaire. K. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment -grounding conductor. L. Install specified lamps in each emergency lighting unit, exit sign, and luminaire. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Aim and adjust luminaires as directed. B. Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated. D A CLEANING A. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials. B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures. C. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Clean finishes and touch up damage. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Relamp luminaires that have failed lamps at Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 16510 03978505 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES 16510 — 3 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6 SECTION 16670 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEMS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide dimensions and materials of each component, and include indication of listing in accordance with UL 96. C. Shop Drawings: Submit for review complete Manufacturer's Shop Drawings. Indicate layout of air terminals, grounding electroctrodes, and bonding connections to structure and other metal objects. Include terminal, electrode, and conductor sizes, and connection and termination details. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Submit for review Manufacturer's Certification. Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. Include copy of manufacturer's certified drawings in project record documents. Submit certificate of compliance from Underwriter's Laboratories indicating approval of lightning protection systems. 1.3 SCOPE A. Description: The work shall the design and installation of a complete Master Labeled Lightning Protection System. Work includes layout, design, securing approval of all authorities having jurisdiction, and the furnishing and installation of all components. The installation shall be in strict compliance arith the applicable requirements of NFPA 780. Materials shall be listed by UL and labeled for the duty required. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances. B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on the Drawings. B. Verify exact placement of equipment and coordinate with architectural elements to determine the location of system components. 03878505 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEMS 16670 - 1 08/05 _v LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6 s 1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. General: Submit according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. As -built Drawings: Accurately record actual locations of air terminals, grounding electrodes, bonding connections, and routing of system conductors in project record documents 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Perform Work in accordance with NFPA-780 Perform Work in accordance with UL 96A and provide Master Label. 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer: Authorized installer of manufacturer with minimum three years documented experience and certified by the Lightning Protection Institute 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with all disciplines to determine what building materials, roofing structure etc. that will be included in the design. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. General: Lightning protection equipment shall be as manufactured by Robins Lightning Protection, Thompson Lightning Protection or approved equivalent. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Air Terminals: Air terminals shall be made from a solid copper rod drawn to a sharp point, threaded to fit the base and tipped with a bright nickel plating. Rods shall be'/z " in diameter and 24" long. Bases shall be suitable for flat surface adhesive mounting and shall be constructed of heavy cast bronze of aluminum. B. Grounding Rods: 3/4" round by 10' long copperclad steel. C. Main Conductors: Main roof cable and down conductor cable shall consist of a minimum of 32 strands of 17 gage bare copper wire in a smooth or basket weave configuration having a diameter of 7/16 inch, 65,500 circular mil cross section, and a weight of 204 pounds per 1000 feet. D. Secondary Conductor: Secondary bonding cable shall consist of a minimum of 14 strands of 17 gage bare copper wire in a smooth weave configuration, having a diameter of/< inch, 28,600 circular mil cross section, and a weight of 90 pounds per 1000 feet. E. Connectors and Splicers: Fasteners for roof cable shall be installed not more than 36" apart and shall be adhesive cable holders. Provide and install clamps and connectors as required for complete installation. All such devices shall be copper. F. Ground Rods: around rods shall by 3/4" x 10', Copperclad steel and shall adhere to the requirements of Section 16170. t ...i 03878505 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEMS 16670 - 2 08/05 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Examination: Examine surfaces conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the lightning protection system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. General: Install lightning protection system as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Install in accordance with NFPA 780 and UL 96A. C. Connections: Connect conductors using exothermic welding process. Protect adjacent construction elements and finishes from damage. D. Bonding: Bond exterior metal bodies on building to lightning protection system. E. Wiring: All wiring and down conductors shall be concealed within the building construction. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. UL Label: The installation shall be strict accordance with the latest requirements of the Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Installation Requirements for Master Labeled Lightning Protection Systems. Obtain the services of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. to provide inspection and labeling of the lightning protection system in accordance with UL 96A END OF SECTION 16670 03878505 LIGHTNIING PROTECTION SYSTEMS 16670 - 3 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 SECTION 16721 y FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manual fire alarm stations. B. Automatic detectors. C. Fire alarm -signaling appliances. D. Auxiliary fire alarm equipment. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. 16111— Conduit B. 16123 - Building Wire and Cable 1.3 REFERENCES A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. B. NFPA 72 — National Fire Alarm Code. C. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. D. State of Texas Accessibility Standards E. Federal American's with Disability's Act. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Fire Alarm System: System is comprised of a new manual and automatic local fire alarm system with connections for off site reporting. 1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Product Data: Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Provide a system layout and wiring diagram showing each device and the wiring connections that are required. C. Test Reports: Provide testing reports for certification that the system has been tested and inspected. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate the application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by the Product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of products. E. Battery calculations. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and NFPA 101. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 03878505 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721-1 08/05 !E1( i LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience, and certified by State of Texas as fire alarm installer. D. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. testing firm acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Provide service and maintenance of fire alarm equipment for one year from Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Notifier. B. Firelite. C. Pyrotronics. D. Silent Knight 2.2 FIRE ALARM/VOICE EVACUATION CONTROL PANEL A. Control Panel: The control panel shall be a four -zone, non -coded, Silent Knight 5204 or approved equal. The system shall be microprocessor controlled and shall communicate with intelligent detectors, addressable modules, annunciators and other system controlled devices. F B. The system shall include alarm and trouble relays. C. The control panel shall feature a full operator interface control and annunciation panel. All programming shall be achieved without special equipment and without interrupting the alarm monitoring functions of the Control panel. D. The following minimum features shall be included in the Control Panel: 1. Drift compensation to extend detector accuracy over life. 2. Sensitivity Test compliant with NFPA 72. 3. System status reports for display. 4. Programmable from the on -board touch pad. 5. Periodic detector tests conducted automatically by system software. 6. March time and temporal coding options. 7. Walk test option. 8. Alarm signals shall not be lost following a power outage until the signal is processed. 9. Real time clock for logging events. E. The system display shall provide all system control and indication of the system parameters. The display shall include operator functions for SIGNAL SILENCE, RESET, DRILL, AND ACKNOWLEDGE. F. Provide necessary converter to operate four Class A initiating circuits. G. The control panel shall be housed in a UL listed cabinet suitable for flush mounting. The door shall be key locked and shall include a glass or other transparent opening for viewing of all indicators. H. All alarm circuits shall be configured for Class A. I. The system power supply and battery charger shall operate on 120 volts, 60 Hz. and shall provide for all of the power needs of the system. 03878505 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721 — 2 08105 i LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 J. Any proposed control panel substitutions shall also comply with all other system features that are included with the system specified by manufacturer name and number indicated as a part of this specification. K. Provide for any necessary interface devices as required to operate SLC and NAC circuits to accommodate the required distances. L. Annunciators shall be provided with controls functions for acknowledge, silence reset and test control. 2.3 INITIATING DEVICES A. Manual Station: Semi -Flush mounted, addressable type, double action manual station with key operated test -reset lock, and shall be so designed so they cannot be restored to normal position except by the use of a key. Station shall have the word "FIRE" on the front of the unit in raised letters. Stations shall be red in color. Provide manufacturer's standard backbox. B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: The detectors shall use the photoelectric (light -scattering) principal to measure smoke density and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog level of smoke density. Detectors shall include a twist -lock base with a tamper proof feature. The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and report that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated by the detector itself (by activating a magnetic switch). C. Thermal Detectors: Provide, fixed temperature 135 degrees F detectors where indicated. At locations where high temperature detectors are shown, provide 194 degrees F units. D. Modules: Monitor and control modules shall be provided for the system as required for the operations as indicated. Control modules for Notification Appliance Circuits shall supervise the circuits and shall be wired as Style Z in accordance with NFPA. 2.4 SIGNALING APPLIANCES A. Audible/Visual Devices: The devices shall be combination speaker/light units. The audible portion of the device shall have a sound output level of at least 85 dBA measured at 10 feet from the device. This visual portion of the devices shall meet the requirements of the American's with Disability's Act and the Texas Accessibility Standards. Minimum candela level for the strobe light intensity shall be 75 and the flash rate shall be a minimum of 1 Hz and a maximum of 3 Hz. The maximum flash duration shall be two -tenths of one second. All visual devices shall be synchronized. B. All Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall be installed in accordance with N rFPA 72, Class A, style Z wiring. 2.5 AUXILIARY DEVICES A. Connection to shut down all mechanical equipment provided with duct -mounted smoke detectors and all mechanical equipment that has associated smoke dampers upon initiation of general alarm. B. Provide 120V power, control transformers and control wiring as required for connection to any equipment associated with the shut down and control of mechanical equipment. C. Provide for all control wiring and connections for interface with tamper and flow switches associated with the suppression system. Coordinate with fire protection suppression contractor for all locations. 03878505 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721 —3 08105 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 D. Carbon monoxide detectors shall be 120 V, UL Listed devices and shall be provided with alarm Contacts that shall be monitored by the control panel. Provide a dedicated 120V source for all carbon monoxide detectors. 2.6 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE A. Fire Alarm Power Branch Circuits: Building wire as specified in Section 16123. B. Fire alarm circuit conductors have insulation color or coded as follows: C. Power Branch Circuit Conductors: Black, red; and white. D. Initiating Device Circuit: Black, red. E. Signal Device Circuit: Blue (positive), white (negative). F. All fire alarm wiring shall be installed in conduit. G. All fire alarm wiring shall be UL listed for use as a fire protective signaling system. H. All wiring shall comply with the recommendations by the fire alarm equipment manufacturer PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide for the service of a competent, factory -trained engineer or technician authorized by the manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment to technically supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the system. All software modifications shall be supervised by this technician. All testing shall comply with NFPA. B. Before energizing the wiring, check for correct connections and tests for shorts and grounds. C. Install manual station with operating handle 42" inches above floor. Install audible and visual signal devices at 80" above floor. D. Automatic Detector Installation: Conform to NFPA E. At a minimum provide the following systems tests: 1. Open and short signal line circuits and verify that a trouble signal actuates and alarm receipt is present. 2. Open and short notification appliance circuits and verify that trouble signal actuates and alarm receipt is present. 3. Ground all circuits and verify response of trouble signals and alarm receipt is present. 4. Check presence and audibility of tone at all notification devices. 5. Check the installation, supervision and operation of all initiating devices. 6. Check proper operation of door release, damper operation and mechanical unit shutdown. 7. All alarm inputs and optional features shall be verified. F. All smoke detectors shall be firmly supported to the ceiling. On lay -in ceiling, secure detectors with suitable ceiling grid bridges that fasten securely to two grid runners. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test in accordance with NFPA 72 and local fire department requirements. 3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Include services of certified technician to supervise installation, adjustments, final connections, and system testing. 03878505 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721— 4 08/05 I, F'11 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 8 3.4 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Demonstrate normal and abnormal modes of operation, and required responses to each. END OF SECTION 16721 03878505 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721 —5 08/05